D780RM (En)

DIGITAL CAMERA
Reference Manual
• Read this manual thoroughly before using the camera.

• To ensure proper use of the camera, be sure to read
“For Your Safety” (page xxxviii).
• After reading this manual, keep it in a readily accessible En
place for future reference.
Package Contents
Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera.
❏ Camera ❏ EN-EL15b rechargeable
Li-ion battery with terminal
cover
❏ MH-25a battery charger
(comes with either an AC
wall adapter or power
cable of a type and shape
that varies with the country
❏ BF-1B body cap or region of sale)
❏ DK-5 eyepiece cap
❏ UC-E24 USB cable
❏ DK-31 rubber eyecup ❏ AN-DC21 strap
(comes attached to
❏ Warranty
camera)
❏ User’s Manual
• Memory cards are sold separately.

• Purchasers of the lens kit option should confirm that the
package also includes a lens (manuals for the lens may also be
provided).
D780 Model Name: N1722
ii
D The Nikon Download Center
Visit the Nikon download center to download firmware
updates, ViewNX-i and other Nikon software, and manuals
for Nikon products including cameras, NIKKOR lenses, and
flash units.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
iii
About This Manual
❚❚ Symbols
The following symbols and conventions are employed in this
manual. Use them to help locate the information you need.
This icon marks notes, information that should be read before
D using this product.
This icon marks tips, additional information you may find helpful
A when using this product.
0 This icon marks references to other sections in this manual.
❚❚ Conventions
• This camera uses SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards, referred
to throughout this manual as “memory cards”.
• Throughout this manual, battery chargers are referred to as
“battery chargers” or “chargers”.
• Throughout this manual, smartphones and tablets are referred
to as “smart devices”.
• Throughout this manual, the term “default settings” is used to
refer to the settings in effect at shipment. The explanations in
this manual assume that default settings are used.
A For Your Safety

“For Your Safety” contains important safety instructions. Be sure to read
them before using the camera. For more information, see “For Your
Safety” (0 xxxviii).
iv
Table of Contents
Package Contents ................................................................................... ii
About This Manual................................................................................. iv
Menu List.............................................................................................. xxxii
For Your Safety............................................................................... xxxviii
Notices .................................................................................................... xliv
Getting to Know the Camera 1
Parts of the Camera ................................................................................ 1
Camera Body...................................................................... 1
The Power Switch............................................................. 7
The Control Panel............................................................. 8
The Viewfinder .................................................................. 9
The Live View Displays (Photos/Movies)................ 12
Touch Controls ................................................................ 14
First Steps 21
Readying the Camera .......................................................................... 21
Attaching the Strap ....................................................... 21
Charging the Battery..................................................... 22
Inserting the Battery...................................................... 24
Attaching a Lens ............................................................. 25
Inserting Memory Cards............................................... 27
Camera Setup .................................................................. 30
v
The Battery Level and Number of Exposures Remaining ....... 33
Battery Level..................................................................... 33
Memory Card Indicators and
Number of Exposures Remaining ........................ 34
Basic Photography and Playback 36
Taking Photographs (b Mode)........................................................ 36
Framing Photographs in the Viewfinder
(Viewfinder Photography) ...................................... 36
Framing Photographs in the Monitor
(Live View) .................................................................... 40
Recording Movies (b Mode)............................................................. 45
Taking Photos During Filming................................... 50
Playback.................................................................................................... 51
Viewing Movies............................................................... 53
Deleting Unwanted Pictures ...................................... 56
Camera Controls 57
The G Button ..................................................................................... 57
Using the Menus............................................................. 58
The i Button (the i Menu) ................................................................ 63
The Still Photography i Menu................................... 65
The Movie i Menu ......................................................... 66
The Playback i Menu.................................................... 67
vi
The R Button......................................................................................... 68
Viewfinder Photography............................................. 68
Live View Photography................................................ 69
The Mode Dial........................................................................................ 71
Using the Mode Dial ..................................................... 72
The Release Mode Dial........................................................................ 73
Choosing a Release Mode........................................... 73
The Focus-Mode Selector .................................................................. 75
The AF-Mode Button ........................................................................... 76
Choosing an AF Mode.................................................. 77
Choosing an AF-Area Mode ....................................... 78
The AF-ON Button ................................................................................ 82
The A Button ......................................................................................... 82
Exposure (AE) Lock........................................................ 83
Focus Lock........................................................................ 83
Locking Focus and Exposure ..................................... 83
The Q/g (U) Button ....................................................................... 86
Adjusting White Balance............................................. 86
The S (Q) Button............................................................................ 91
Adjusting ISO Sensitivity ............................................. 91
Enabling Auto ISO Sensitivity Control.................... 93
vii
The E Button .......................................................................................... 94
Adjusting Exposure Compensation......................... 94
The X (T) Button ........................................................................... 95
Adjusting Image Quality.............................................. 95
Choosing an Image Size............................................... 97
The W (Y) Button ............................................................................... 99
Choosing a Metering Option ..................................... 99
The N (Y) Button .............................................................................. 101
Choosing a Flash Mode............................................. 101
Adjusting Flash Compensation.............................. 103
The BKT Button ................................................................................... 104
The Pv Button ...................................................................................... 105
The Fn Button ...................................................................................... 106
Shooting Settings 107
Choosing a Shooting Mode............................................................ 107
Shooting in Modes P, S, A, and M .......................... 109
User Settings: U1 and U2 Modes ........................... 115
Using Special Effects Modes.................................... 119
Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality,
and Size)............................................................................................ 129
Adjusting Image Area Settings............................... 129
Adjusting Image Quality........................................... 134
Choosing an Image Size............................................ 137
viii
Choosing How the Camera Focuses (Focus) ............................ 139
Choosing a Focus Mode ............................................ 139
Autofocus Mode........................................................... 140
AF-Area Mode ............................................................... 145
Focus Point Selection ................................................. 159
Manual Focus ................................................................ 162
Exposure-Related Settings (Metering and
Exposure Compensation)............................................................ 166
Choosing How the Camera Sets Exposure ......... 166
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only).................. 170
Autoexposure Lock ..................................................... 173
Exposure Compensation........................................... 175
Choosing the Operation Performed When the Shutter Is
Released (Release Mode)............................................................. 178
Choosing a Release Mode Such as Single-Frame,
Continuous, or Quiet Shutter-Release............. 178
Self-Timer Mode (E) ................................................... 183
Mirror up Mode (Mup) ............................................... 185
Adjusting the Camera’s Sensitivity to Light
(ISO Sensitivity) ............................................................................... 187
ISO Sensitivity................................................................ 187
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control..................................... 190
ix
Achieving Natural Colors with Different Light Sources
(White Balance)............................................................................... 195
White Balance............................................................... 195
Fine-Tuning White Balance...................................... 200
Choosing a Color Temperature.............................. 204
Preset Manual ............................................................... 209
Varying Exposure or White Balance over a Series of
Photographs (Bracketing)........................................................... 224
Bracketing ...................................................................... 225
Exposure and Flash Bracketing .............................. 226
White Balance Bracketing ........................................ 232
ADL Bracketing............................................................. 238
Image Processing (Picture Controls) ........................................... 243
Selecting a Picture Control ...................................... 243
Modifying Picture Controls...................................... 245
Creating Custom Picture Controls ........................ 250
Preserving Detail in Highlights and Shadows
(Active D-Lighting and HDR) ..................................................... 254
Active D-Lighting ........................................................ 254
High Dynamic Range (HDR)..................................... 256
x
Options for Movie Recording and Editing 262
Image Area: Choosing a Movie Crop ........................................... 262
Frame Size/Frame Rate and Movie Quality ............................... 264
Slow-Motion Movies.......................................................................... 266
Points to Note When Recording Movies .................................... 268
Editing Movies ..................................................................................... 271
Trimming Movies ......................................................... 272
Saving Selected Frames............................................. 277
Adding Indices to Movies ......................................... 278
Other Shooting Options 279
Using Two Memory Cards................................................................ 279
Deleting Copies ............................................................ 281
Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings......................... 282
Settings Accessible from the Photo Shooting
Menu............................................................................ 282
Settings Accessible from the Movie Shooting
Menu............................................................................ 284
Other Settings ............................................................... 285
xi
Combining Multiple Exposures in a Single Photo
(Multiple Exposure)....................................................................... 287
Multiple Exposure Options ...................................... 287
Creating a Multiple Exposure.................................. 290
Using the i Button...................................................... 296
Ending Multiple Exposures ...................................... 297
Taking Photos at a Set Interval (Interval Timer Shooting)... 298
Interval Timer Shooting Options ........................... 298
Interval-Timer Photography.................................... 303
Pausing Interval-Timer Photography................... 312
Resuming Interval-Timer Photography............... 313
Ending Interval-Timer Photography..................... 314
Creating a Movie from Photos (Time-Lapse Movie) .............. 315
Time-Lapse Movie Options...................................... 315
Recording Time-Lapse Movies ............................... 318
Varying Focus over a Series of Photos (Focus Shift
Shooting) .......................................................................................... 328
Focus Shift Shooting Options ................................. 329
Focus-Shift Photography.......................................... 331
The Electronic Shutter (Silent Live View Photography) ....... 340
Photographing Film Negatives (Negative Digitizer) ............. 343
Customizing the i Menu: Customize i Menu ....................... 347
xii
Using Non-CPU Lenses (Non-CPU Lens Data) .......................... 349
Entering Lens Data ...................................................... 351
Recalling Non-CPU Lens Data ................................. 352
Playback 353
Viewing Pictures.................................................................................. 353
Full-Frame Playback.................................................... 353
Thumbnail Playback ................................................... 354
Calendar Playback ....................................................... 355
Playback Controls ........................................................ 356
Using the Touch Screen............................................. 358
The i Button.................................................................. 361
Photo Information.............................................................................. 366
File Information ............................................................ 367
Exposure Data............................................................... 368
Highlights ....................................................................... 368
RGB Histogram.............................................................. 369
Shooting Data ............................................................... 371
Location Data ................................................................ 373
Overview Data .............................................................. 374
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom......................................... 376
Playback Zoom ............................................................. 376
Protecting Photographs from Deletion...................................... 378
Rating Pictures..................................................................................... 380
xiii
Selecting Pictures for Upload ........................................................ 381
Deleting Pictures ................................................................................ 383
During Playback........................................................... 383
The Playback Menu..................................................... 385
Connecting to Computers and TVs 389
Connecting to Computers .............................................................. 389
Connecting via USB .................................................... 389
Wireless Networks (Wi-Fi)......................................... 394
Connecting to HDMI Devices......................................................... 396
Connecting to HDMI TVs .......................................... 397
Connecting to HDMI Recorders ............................. 397
Network Connections 402
Camera and Network System Chart ............................................ 402
Connecting to Smart Devices ........................................................ 403
The SnapBridge App .................................................. 403
What SnapBridge Can Do for You ......................... 404
Wireless Connections................................................. 405
Connecting via Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi Mode) ....................... 406
Connecting via Bluetooth ........................................ 415
xiv
Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi............................................. 430
What Wi-Fi Can Do for You....................................... 430
The Wireless Transmitter Utility.............................. 430
Infrastructure and Access-Point Modes............... 431
Connecting in Access-Point Mode ........................ 433
Connecting in Infrastructure Mode....................... 439
Uploading Pictures...................................................... 447
Disconnecting and Reconnecting ......................... 451
Connecting to Networks Using the WT-7 .................................. 453
The WT-7 ......................................................................... 453
What the WT-7 Can Do for You............................... 454
Connecting Using the WT-7..................................... 456
Troubleshooting Wireless Issues................................................... 457
On-Camera Flash Photography 459
“On-Camera” Versus “Remote” ...................................................... 459
Camera-Mounted Flash Units.................................. 459
Remote Flash Photography ..................................... 459
Using an On-Camera Flash.............................................................. 460
Flash Control Mode............................................................................ 463
Flash Modes.......................................................................................... 465
Choosing a Flash Mode ............................................. 468
xv
Flash Compensation ......................................................................... 469
Adjusting Flash Compensation.............................. 470
FV Lock................................................................................................... 471
Flash Info for On-Camera Units..................................................... 474
Flash Control Mode Displays................................... 474
Remote Flash Photography 477
What Is Remote Flash Photography? .......................................... 477
Using Remote Flash Units ........................................ 478
Radio AWL............................................................................................. 479
Establishing a Wireless Connection...................... 479
Adjusting Flash Settings ........................................... 484
Adding a Shoe-Mounted Flash Unit ..................... 493
Optical AWL.......................................................................................... 494
Using Optical AWL with the SB-5000 or
SB-500 ......................................................................... 495
Optical/Radio AWL............................................................................. 506
Flash Info for Remote Units ............................................................ 507
Flash Control Mode Displays................................... 507
xvi
Menu Guide 511
Defaults .................................................................................................. 511
Playback Menu Defaults............................................ 511
Photo Shooting Menu Defaults .............................. 512
Movie Shooting Menu Defaults.............................. 516
Custom Settings Menu Defaults............................. 518
Setup Menu Defaults.................................................. 524
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images................................ 529
Delete ...............................................................................................530
Playback Folder.............................................................................530
Playback Display Options..........................................................531
Copy Image(s)................................................................................532
Copying Pictures .......................................................... 533
Image Review ................................................................................538
After Delete ....................................................................................539
Rotate Tall .......................................................................................540
Slide Show ......................................................................................540
Viewing Slide Shows................................................... 541
Rating ...............................................................................................543
xvii
C The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options.................. 544
Reset Photo Shooting Menu.................................................... 545
Storage Folder .............................................................................. 545
Renaming Folders ....................................................... 545
Select Folder by Number.......................................... 546
Select Folder from List............................................... 548
File Naming.................................................................................... 550
Role Played by Card in Slot 2................................................... 551
Image Area..................................................................................... 551
Image Quality................................................................................ 551
Image Size ...................................................................................... 551
NEF (RAW) Recording................................................................. 552
NEF (RAW) Compression........................................... 552
NEF (RAW) Bit Depth .................................................. 552
ISO Sensitivity Settings.............................................................. 553
White Balance ............................................................................... 553
Set Picture Control ...................................................................... 553
Manage Picture Control ............................................................ 554
Color Space.................................................................................... 554
Active D-Lighting......................................................................... 555
xviii
Long Exposure NR........................................................................556
High ISO NR ....................................................................................557
Vignette Control...........................................................................558
Diffraction Compensation ........................................................559
Auto Distortion Control .............................................................560
Flicker Reduction..........................................................................561
Flash Control..................................................................................563
Flash Control Mode..................................................... 564
Wireless Flash Options............................................... 565
Remote Flash Control................................................. 566
Radio Remote Flash Info............................................ 566
Auto Bracketing............................................................................567
Multiple Exposure........................................................................569
HDR (High Dynamic Range) .....................................................569
Interval Timer Shooting .............................................................569
Time-Lapse Movie........................................................................570
Focus Shift Shooting...................................................................570
Silent Live View Photography .................................................570
xix
1 The Movie Shooting Menu: Movie Shooting Options..... 571
Reset Movie Shooting Menu ................................................... 572
File Naming.................................................................................... 572
Destination .................................................................................... 572
Image Area..................................................................................... 573
Auto DX Crop................................................................ 573
Frame Size/Frame Rate.............................................................. 573
Movie Quality................................................................................ 574
Movie File Type ............................................................................ 574
ISO Sensitivity Settings.............................................................. 575
White Balance ............................................................................... 576
Set Picture Control ...................................................................... 577
Manage Picture Control ............................................................ 577
Active D-Lighting......................................................................... 577
High ISO NR ................................................................................... 578
Diffraction Compensation........................................................ 578
Flicker Reduction ......................................................................... 579
Electronic VR.................................................................................. 580
Microphone Sensitivity.............................................................. 581
Attenuator...................................................................................... 582
xx
Frequency Response...................................................................582
Wind Noise Reduction................................................................583
Headphone Volume....................................................................583
Timecode ........................................................................................584
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings................ 586
Reset Custom Settings ...............................................................590
a: Autofocus .................................................................................. 590
a1: AF-C Priority Selection .................................................590
a2: AF-S Priority Selection..................................................591
a3: Focus Tracking with Lock-On....................................592
a4: 3D-Tracking Face-Detection......................................592
a5: Auto-Area AF Face/Eye Detection...........................593
a6: Focus Points Used .........................................................594
a7: Store Points by Orientation .......................................595
a8: AF Activation...................................................................597
a9: Focus Point Wrap-Around..........................................597
a10: Focus Point Options...................................................598
Focus Point Illumination ........................................... 598
Manual Focus Mode.................................................... 598
Dynamic-Area AF Assist............................................. 599
a11: Low-Light AF.................................................................599
a12: Manual Focus Ring in AF Mode..............................600
xxi
b: Metering/Exposure ............................................................... 601
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl....................................... 601
b2: Easy Exposure Compensation.................................. 602
b3: Matrix Metering............................................................. 603
b4: Center-Weighted Area................................................ 603
b5: Fine-Tune Optimal Exposure.................................... 604
c: Timers/AE Lock........................................................................ 605
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L..................................... 605
c2: Standby Timer ................................................................ 605
c3: Self-Timer ......................................................................... 606
c4: Monitor Off Delay.......................................................... 606
d: Shooting/Display ................................................................... 607
d1: CL Mode Shooting Speed .......................................... 607
d2: Max. Continuous Release........................................... 607
d3: Sync. Release Mode Options .................................... 608
d4: Exposure Delay Mode ................................................. 608
d5: Electronic Front-Curtain Shutter............................. 609
d6: Extended Shutter Speeds (M)................................... 610
d7: File Number Sequence ............................................... 611
d8: Save Original (EFFECTS).............................................. 613
d9: Exposure Preview (Lv) ................................................. 614
xxii
d10: Framing Grid Display.................................................615
d11: Peaking Highlights .....................................................615
d12: LCD Illumination .........................................................616
d13: Live View in Continuous Mode..............................616
d14: Optical VR ......................................................................617
e: Bracketing/Flash ..................................................................... 618
e1: Flash Sync Speed ...........................................................618
e2: Flash Shutter Speed......................................................620
e3: Exposure Comp. for Flash...........................................620
e4: Auto c ISO Sensitivity Control ..................................621
e5: Modeling Flash ...............................................................621
e6: Bracketing Order............................................................622
f: Controls....................................................................................... 623
f1: Customize i Menu .......................................................623
View Memory Card Info ............................................. 624
View Release Mode ..................................................... 624
Bluetooth Connection................................................ 625
Wi-Fi Connection ......................................................... 625
f2: Customize i Menu (Lv)...............................................626
f3: Custom Controls .............................................................628
xxiii
f4: OK Button.......................................................................... 635
Viewfinder Photography .......................................... 635
Live View......................................................................... 635
Playback Mode ............................................................. 636
f5: Customize Command Dials ........................................ 637
Reverse Rotation.......................................................... 637
Change Main/Sub ....................................................... 637
Aperture Setting .......................................................... 638
Menus and Playback .................................................. 639
Sub-Dial Frame Advance .......................................... 640
f6: Release Button to Use Dial.......................................... 641
f7: Reverse Indicators.......................................................... 642
f8: D Switch ........................................................................... 642
g: Movie.......................................................................................... 643
g1: Customize i Menu ..................................................... 643
Multi-Selector Power Aperture............................... 644
Multi Selector Exposure Comp............................... 644
g2: Custom Controls ........................................................... 645
g3: AF Speed .......................................................................... 650
g4: AF Tracking Sensitivity................................................ 652
g5: Highlight Display .......................................................... 653
Display Pattern ............................................................. 653
Highlight Display Threshold.................................... 653
xxiv
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup................................................ 654
Format Memory Card .................................................................656
Save User Settings .......................................................................657
Reset User Settings......................................................................657
Language ........................................................................................657
Time Zone and Date....................................................................658
Monitor Brightness......................................................................658
Monitor Color Balance................................................................659
Virtual Horizon ..............................................................................661
Information Display.....................................................................662
AF Fine-Tuning Options.............................................................663
Creating and Saving Fine-Tuning Values............ 665
Choosing a Default Fine-Tuning Value ................ 667
Auto AF Fine-Tuning................................................... 668
Non-CPU Lens Data .....................................................................672
Clean Image Sensor.....................................................................673
Lock Mirror Up for Cleaning .....................................................674
Image Dust Off Ref Photo .........................................................675
Acquiring Image Dust Off Reference Data ......... 675
Pixel Mapping................................................................................679
xxv
Image Comment .......................................................................... 681
Input Comment............................................................ 681
Attach Comment ......................................................... 681
Copyright Information............................................................... 682
Entering the Names of the Photographer and
Copyright Holder .................................................... 682
Attach Copyright Information ................................ 683
Beep Options................................................................................. 684
Beep On/Off................................................................... 684
Volume ............................................................................ 685
Pitch ................................................................................. 685
Touch Controls ............................................................................. 686
Enable/Disable Touch Controls.............................. 686
Full-Frame Playback Flicks ....................................... 686
HDMI ................................................................................................ 686
Location Data................................................................................ 687
Wireless Remote (WR) Options............................................... 688
LED Lamp ....................................................................... 688
Link Mode....................................................................... 689
Assign Remote (WR) Fn Button .............................................. 691
Airplane Mode .............................................................................. 691
xxvi
Connect to Smart Device ..........................................................692
Pairing (Bluetooth) ...................................................... 692
Select to Send (Bluetooth)........................................ 693
Wi-Fi Connection ......................................................... 694
Connect to PC................................................................................696
Wi-Fi Connection ......................................................... 696
Network Settings ......................................................... 696
Options ............................................................................ 698
MAC Address ................................................................. 699
Wireless Transmitter (WT-7) .....................................................700
Wireless Transmitter ................................................... 700
Conformity Marking....................................................................700
Battery Info.....................................................................................701
Slot Empty Release Lock............................................................702
Save/Load Menu Settings .........................................................703
Save Menu Settings..................................................... 707
Load Menu Settings.................................................... 707
Reset All Settings..........................................................................708
Firmware Version .........................................................................708
xxvii
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies.............. 709
Creating Retouched Copies..................................... 710
NEF (RAW) Processing: Creating JPEG Copies of
NEF (RAW) Images Without a Computer ........................ 713
Trim................................................................................................... 719
Resize ............................................................................................... 720
Resizing Multiple Images.......................................... 720
D-Lighting ...................................................................................... 726
Quick Retouch .............................................................................. 727
Red-Eye Correction ..................................................................... 728
Straighten....................................................................................... 729
Distortion Control........................................................................ 730
Perspective Control .................................................................... 732
Monochrome ................................................................................ 733
Image Overlay............................................................................... 734
Add ................................................................................... 734
Lighten and Darken.................................................... 738
Trim Movie ..................................................................................... 743
OMY MENU/mRECENT SETTINGS ............................................... 744
O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu.............. 745
m Recent Settings: Accessing Recently-Used
Settings....................................................................... 750
xxviii
Troubleshooting 751
Before Contacting Customer Support ........................................ 751
Problems and Solutions ................................................................... 753
Battery/Display ............................................................. 753
Shooting.......................................................................... 754
Playback .......................................................................... 762
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks)............ 764
Miscellaneous................................................................ 764
Alerts and Error Messages ............................................................... 765
Alerts ................................................................................ 765
Error Messages.............................................................. 769
Technical Notes 773
Camera Displays.................................................................................. 773
The Viewfinder.............................................................. 773
The Information Display............................................ 776
Live View (Still Photography/Movies) .................. 780
The Control Panel ........................................................ 784
Compatible F Mount Lenses........................................................... 786
CPU Lenses..................................................................... 786
Non-CPU Lenses and Other Accessories ............. 792
The Electronic Rangefinder...................................... 796
xxix
Compatible Flash Units.................................................................... 798
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)......... 798
Other Compatible Accessories...................................................... 808
Attaching a Power Connector and
AC Adapter................................................................ 814
Charging AC Adapters............................................... 816
Software................................................................................................. 819
Caring for the Camera ...................................................................... 821
Storage............................................................................ 821
Cleaning.......................................................................... 822
The Low-Pass Filter ..................................................... 823
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions .......................... 832
Camera Care.................................................................. 832
Battery Care ................................................................... 836
Using the Charger ....................................................... 839
Using the Charging AC Adapter............................. 839
Specifications....................................................................................... 840
Nikon D780 Digital Camera ..................................... 840
Approved Memory Cards ................................................................ 860
Memory Card Capacity..................................................................... 861
[FX (36 × 24)] Selected for Image Area ................ 862
[DX (24 × 16)] Selected for Image Area ............... 864
xxx
Battery Endurance.............................................................................. 867
Trademarks and Licenses................................................................. 870
Kit Lens Manual 874
Kit Lenses............................................................................................... 874
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR
Lens Manual .............................................................. 874
Index 887
xxxi
Menu List
The camera offers the following menus. For a more complete
description of individual menu items, refer to the “Menu Guide”
chapter in the Reference Manual. Some items may not be
displayed depending on camera settings or on the type of lens,
flash unit, or other accessory attached.
PLAYBACK MENU PHOTO SHOOTING MENU
Delete White balance
Playback folder Set Picture Control
Playback display options Manage Picture Control
Copy image(s) Color space
Image review Active D-Lighting
After delete Long exposure NR
Rotate tall High ISO NR
Slide show Vignette control
Rating Diffraction compensation
Auto distortion control
PHOTO SHOOTING MENU
Flicker reduction
Reset photo shooting menu
Flash control
Storage folder
Auto bracketing
File naming
Multiple exposure
Role played by card in Slot 2
HDR (high dynamic range)
Image area
Interval timer shooting
Image quality
Time-lapse movie
Image size
Focus shift shooting
NEF (RAW) recording
Silent live view photography
ISO sensitivity settings
xxxii
MOVIE SHOOTING MENU CUSTOM SETTING MENU
Reset movie shooting menu Reset custom settings
File naming a Autofocus
Destination a1 AF-C priority selection
Image area a2 AF-S priority selection
Frame size/frame rate a3 Focus tracking with lock-on
Movie quality a4 3D-tracking face-detection
Movie file type Auto-area AF face/eye
a5
ISO sensitivity settings detection
White balance a6 Focus points used
Set Picture Control a7 Store points by orientation
Manage Picture Control a8 AF activation
Active D-Lighting a9 Focus point wrap-around
High ISO NR a10 Focus point options
Diffraction compensation a11 Low-light AF
Flicker reduction Manual focus ring in AF
a12
mode
Electronic VR
Microphone sensitivity
Attenuator
Frequency response
Wind noise reduction
Headphone volume
Timecode
xxxiii
CUSTOM SETTING MENU CUSTOM SETTING MENU
b Metering/exposure d Shooting/display
b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl d1 CL mode shooting speed
Easy exposure d2 Max. continuous release
b2
compensation d3 Sync. release mode options
b3 Matrix metering d4 Exposure delay mode
b4 Center-weighted area Electronic front-curtain
d5
Fine-tune optimal shutter
b5
exposure Extended shutter speeds
d6
c Timers/AE lock (M)
Shutter-release button d7 File number sequence
c1
AE-L d8 Save original (EFFECTS)
c2 Standby timer d9 Exposure preview (Lv)
c3 Self-timer d10 Framing grid display
c4 Monitor off delay d11 Peaking highlights
d12 LCD illumination
Live view in continuous
d13
mode
d14 Optical VR
xxxiv
CUSTOM SETTING MENU CUSTOM SETTING MENU
e Bracketing/flash g Movie
e1 Flash sync speed g1 Customize i menu
e2 Flash shutter speed g2 Custom controls
e3 Exposure comp. for flash g3 AF speed
Auto c ISO sensitivity g4 AF tracking sensitivity
e4
control g5 Highlight display
e5 Modeling flash
e6 Bracketing order SETUP MENU
f Controls Format memory card
f1 Customize i menu Save user settings
f2 Customize i menu (Lv) Reset user settings
f3 Custom controls Language
f4 OK button Time zone and date
f5 Customize command dials Monitor brightness
f6 Release button to use dial Monitor color balance
f7 Reverse indicators Virtual horizon
f8 D switch Information display
xxxv
SETUP MENU SETUP MENU
AF fine-tuning options Airplane mode
Non-CPU lens data Connect to smart device
Clean image sensor Connect to PC
Lock mirror up for cleaning Wireless transmitter (WT-7)
Image Dust Off ref photo Conformity marking
Pixel mapping Battery info
Image comment Slot empty release lock
Copyright information Save/load menu settings
Beep options Reset all settings
Touch controls Firmware version
HDMI
Location data
Wireless remote (WR) options
Assign remote (WR) Fn button
xxxvi
RETOUCH MENU MY MENU
NEF (RAW) processing Add items
Trim Remove items
Resize Rank items
D-Lighting Choose tab
Quick retouch
Red-eye correction
Straighten
Distortion control
Perspective control
Monochrome
Image overlay
Trim movie
xxxvii
For Your Safety
To prevent damage to property or injury to yourself or to others, read “For
Your Safety” in its entirety before using this product.
Keep these safety instructions where all those who use this product will
read them.
A DANGER: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon

carries a high risk of death or severe injury.
A WARNING: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon
could result in death or severe injury.
A CAUTION: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon
could result in injury or property damage.
A WARNING
Do not use while walking or operating a vehicle.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents or other
injury.
Do not disassemble or modify this product. Do not touch internal
parts that become exposed as the result of a fall or other accident.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in electric shock or
other injury.
Should you notice any abnormalities such as the product producing
smoke, heat, or unusual odors, immediately disconnect the battery
or power source.
Continued operation could result in fire, burns or other injury.
xxxviii
Keep dry. Do not handle with wet hands. Do not handle the plug
with wet hands.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
Do not let your skin remain in prolonged contact with this product
while it is on or plugged in.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in low-temperature burns.
Do not use this product in the presence of flammable dust or gas
such as propane, gasoline or aerosols.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in explosion or fire.
Do not directly view the sun or other bright light source through the
lens or camera.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in visual impairment.
Do not aim the flash or AF-assist illuminator at the operator of a
motor vehicle
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents.
Keep this product out of reach of children.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product
malfunction. In addition, note that small parts constitute a choking
hazard. Should a child swallow any part of this product, seek immediate
medical attention.
Do not entangle, wrap or twist the straps around your neck.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents.
xxxix
Do not use batteries, chargers, or AC adapters not specifically
designated for use with this product. When using batteries,
chargers, and AC adapters designated for use with this product, do
not:
• Damage, modify, forcibly tug or bend the cords or cables, place
them under heavy objects, or expose them to heat or flame.
• Use travel converters or adapters designed to convert from one
voltage to another or with DC-to-AC inverters.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
Do not handle the plug when charging the product or using the AC
adapter during thunderstorms.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock.
Do not handle with bare hands in locations exposed to extremely
high or low temperatures.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns, or frostbite.
A CAUTION
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light
sources.
Light focused by the lens could cause fire or damage to product’s
internal parts. When shooting backlit subjects, keep the sun well out of
the frame. Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is close to the
frame could cause fire.
Turn this product off when its use is prohibited. Disable wireless
features when the use of wireless equipment is prohibited.
The radio-frequency emissions produced by this product could interfere
with equipment onboard aircraft or in hospitals or other medical
facilities.
xl
Remove the battery and disconnect the AC adapter if this product
will not be used for an extended period.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product
malfunction.
Do not fire the flash in contact with or in close proximity to the skin
or objects.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns or fire.
Do not leave the product where it will be exposed to extremely high
temperatures, for an extended period such as in an enclosed
automobile or in direct sunlight.
malfunction.
Do not look directly at the AF-assist illuminator.
Failure to observe this precaution could have adverse effects on vision.
Do not transport cameras or lenses with tripods or similar
accessories attached.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product
malfunction.
xli
A DANGER (Batteries)
Do not mishandle batteries.
Failure to observe the following precautions could result in the batteries
leaking, overheating, rupturing, or catching fire:
• Use only rechargeable batteries approved for use in this product.
• Do not expose batteries to flame or excessive heat.
• Do not disassemble.
• Do not short-circuit the terminals by touching them to necklaces,
hairpins, or other metal objects.
• Do not expose batteries or the products in which they are inserted to
powerful physical shocks.
• Do not step on batteries, pierce them with nails, or strike them with
hammers.
Charge only as indicated.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in the batteries leaking,
overheating, rupturing, or catching fire.
If battery liquid comes into contact with the eyes, rinse with plenty
of clean water and seek immediate medical attention.
Delaying action could result in eye injuries.
xlii
A WARNING (Batteries)
Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Should a child swallow a battery, seek immediate medical attention.
Keep batteries out of reach of household pets and other animals.
The batteries could leak, overheat, rupture, or catch fire if bitten,
chewed, or otherwise damaged by animals.
Do not immerse batteries in water or expose to rain.
malfunction. Immediately dry the product with a towel or similar object
should it become wet.
Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the
batteries, such as discoloration or deformation. Cease charging
EN-EL15b rechargeable batteries if they do not charge in the
specified period of time.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in the batteries leaking,
overheating, rupturing, or catching fire.
When batteries are no longer needed, insulate the terminals with
tape.
Overheating, rupture, or fire may result should metal objects come into
contact with the terminals.
If battery liquid comes into contact with a person's skin or clothing,
immediately rinse the affected area with plenty of clean water.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in skin irritation.
xliii
Notices
• No part of the manuals included with this product may be reproduced,
transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into
any language in any form, by any means, without Nikon’s prior written
permission.
• Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of
the hardware and software described in these manuals at any time and
without prior notice.
• Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use of
this product.
• While every effort has been made to ensure that the information in
these manuals is accurate and complete, we would appreciate it were
you to bring any errors or omissions to the attention of the Nikon
representative in your area (address provided separately).
xliv
● Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally
copied or reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other
device may be punishable by law.
• Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced
Do not copy or reproduce paper money, coins, securities, government
bonds, or local government bonds, even if such copies or reproductions
are stamped “Sample.”
The copying or reproduction of paper money, coins, or securities which
are circulated in a foreign country is prohibited.
Unless the prior permission of the government has been obtained, the
copying or reproduction of unused postage stamps or post cards issued
by the government is prohibited.
The copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the government and
of certified documents stipulated by law is prohibited.
• Cautions on certain copies and reproductions
The government has issued cautions on copies or reproductions of
securities issued by private companies (shares, bills, checks, gift
certificates, etc.), commuter passes, or coupon tickets, except when a
minimum of necessary copies are to be provided for business use by a
company. Also, do not copy or reproduce passports issued by the
government, licenses issued by public agencies and private groups, ID
cards, and tickets, such as passes and meal coupons.
• Comply with copyright notices
Under copyright law, photographs or recordings of copyrighted works
made with the camera cannot be used without the permission of the
copyright holder. Exceptions apply to personal use, but note that even
personal use may be restricted in the case of photographs or recordings
of exhibits or live performances.
xlv
● Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include
complex electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories
(including lenses, chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories)
certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are
engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety
requirements of this electronic circuitry.
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage
the camera and may void your Nikon warranty. The use of
third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the
Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with
normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating,
igniting, rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local
authorized Nikon dealer.
D Before Taking Important Pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or
before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the
camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for damages
or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.
D Life-Long Learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product
support and education, continually-updated information is available on-
line at the following sites:
• For users in the U.S.A.: https://www.nikonusa.com/
• For users in Europe and Africa:
https://www.europe-nikon.com/support/
• For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East:
https://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information,
tips, answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on
digital imaging and photography. Additional information may be
available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the following
URL for contact information: https://imaging.nikon.com/
xlvi
Getting to Know the Camera
Parts of the Camera
Camera Body
7 8 9
10
11
6 12
5
5
4
3 13
2 14
1 15
1 Accessory shoe (for optional 8 S (Q) button (0 91)
flash unit) 9 Sub-command dial
2 Release mode dial (0 73) Power switch (0 7)
10
3 Release mode dial lock release Shutter-release button (0 36)
11
(0 73)
12 E button (0 94)
4 Mode dial lock release (0 72)
13 E (focal plane mark)
5 Eyelet for camera strap (0 21)
14 Main command dial
6 Mode dial (0 71)
15 Control panel (0 8, 784)
7 Movie-record button (0 45)

1 2
3
4
15
5 16
6 17
14 7 18
13 8 19
12 9
11 10
1 Self-timer lamp 11 Lens mounting mark (0 25)
2 Stereo microphone (0 45) 12 Mirror (0 822)
3 c (Y) button (0 101) 13 Meter coupling lever
4 BKT button (0 104) 14 Power connector cover
5 Audio connector cover (0 814)
Accessory terminal connector 15 Connector for external
6
cover microphones (0 808)
16 Headphone connector
7 Cover for USB and HDMI
connectors 17 Accessory terminal (0 808)
8 Lens release button (0 26) 18 USB connector
9 AF-mode button (0 76) 19 HDMI connector
10 Focus-mode selector (0 75)
2 Getting to Know the Camera

1
10
9
8
7
5 4 3
6
1 CPU contacts 6 Battery-chamber cover
2 Lens mount (0 25) 7 Battery-chamber cover latch
3 Tripod socket 8 Memory card slot cover (0 27)
4 AF coupling 9 Pv button (0 105)
5 Fn button (0 106) 10 Body cap (0 25)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
22
21
20 8
19 9
18 10
17
16 11
15 12
14 13
1 Viewfinder eyepiece (0 11) 12 Memory card access lamp
2 Rubber eyecup (0 27, 36)
3 Diopter adjustment control 13 i button (0 63)
(0 11) 14 Tilting monitor (0 5, 14)
4 Live view selector (0 40, 45) 15 R button (0 68)
5 a button (0 40, 45) 16 W (Y) button (0 99)
6 AF-ON button (0 82) 17 X (T) button (0 95)
7 A button (0 82) 18 Q/g (U) button (0 86)
8 Multi selector (0 58) 19 G button (0 57)
9 J button (0 58) 20 Charge lamp (0 816)
10 Focus selector lock 21 K button (0 51)
11 Speaker 22 O (Q) button (0 56)

D The Connector Covers
Be sure to close the covers when the connectors are not in use. Foreign
matter in the connectors could cause malfunction.
D The Speaker
Close proximity to the speaker could corrupt data stored on magnetic
stripe cards or other such magnetic storage devices. Keep magnetic
storage devices away from the speaker.
D The Monitor
The angle of the monitor can be adjusted as shown.

D The Serial Number
The product serial number is located behind
the monitor.
D Tilting the Monitor

• Rotate the monitor gently within the limits of the hinges. Do not use
force; failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera or
monitor.
• Do not touch the area to the rear of the
monitor. Be particularly careful not to touch
the area shown. Failure to observe this
precaution could cause product malfunction.
• Do not allow liquid to contact the monitor’s
inner surface. Failure to observe this
precaution could cause product malfunction.
• We recommend that you keep the monitor in the storage position when
not using it to frame photographs.
• Do not lift or carry the camera by the monitor. Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the camera.
• When the camera is mounted on a tripod, care should be taken to
ensure that the monitor does not contact the tripod.

The Power Switch
Rotate the power switch to
the “ON” position as shown to
turn the camera on. Returning
the switch to the “OFF”
position turns the camera off.
D The LCD Illuminator

Rotating the power switch to D
activates the control panel
backlight (LCD illuminator). The
backlight will remain lit for a few
seconds after the power switch is
released. The backlight turns off
when the switch is rotated to D a
second time or the shutter is released.

The Control Panel
The following indicators appear in the control panel at default
settings. For a full list of the indicators that may be displayed,
see “Camera Displays” (0 773) in “Technical Notes”.
1 2
3
4
10
5
9 8 7 6
1 Shutter speed 6 Number of exposures
2 Aperture remaining (0 34, 861)
3 Memory card icon (Slot 1; 7 ISO sensitivity (0 91)
0 34) 8 ISO sensitivity indicator (0 91)
4 Memory card icon (Slot 2; Auto ISO sensitivity indicator
0 34) (0 93)
5 “k” (appears when memory 9 Battery indicator (0 33)
remains for over 1000 10 Metering (0 99)
exposures; 0 34)
D Camera Off Display

If the camera is turned off with a battery
inserted, the control panel will display a
memory card icon and the number of
exposures remaining. In rare instances, some
memory cards may not display the memory
card icon and number of exposures remaining when the camera is off,
even if a battery is inserted. This information will be displayed when the
camera is turned on.

The Viewfinder
The following indicators appear in the viewfinder at default
see “Camera Displays” (0 773) in “Technical Notes”.
2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9
1 AF area brackets (0 36） 7 Number of exposures
2 Metering (0 99) remaining (0 34, 861)
Shutter speed 8 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator
3
(0 93)
4 Aperture
9 “k” (appears when memory
5 ISO sensitivity indicator (0 91) remains for over 1000
6 ISO sensitivity (0 91) exposures; 0 34)

D The Viewfinder
When the battery is exhausted or no battery is inserted, the display in the
viewfinder will dim. The display will return to normal when a charged
battery is inserted.
D Temperature Extremes
The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with
temperature, and response times may drop when the temperature is low;
the displays will return to normal at room temperature.
D Cover the Viewfinder

• When taking photos without your eye to the viewfinder, attach the
supplied eyepiece cap to prevent light entering via the viewfinder
appearing in photographs or interfering with exposure.
• Remove the rubber eyecup (q) and insert the supplied eyepiece cap as
shown (w). Hold the camera firmly when removing the rubber eyepiece
cup.

A The Diopter Adjustment Control
With your eye to the viewfinder, rotate the
diopter control until display in the viewfinder is
in sharp focus.
Viewfinder not in focus Viewfinder in focus

The Live View Displays (Photos/Movies)
Press the a button to display the view through the lens in the
monitor. Rotate the live view selector to C to take photographs
or to 1 to record movies.
❚❚ Live View Photography
The following indicators appear in the monitor at default
see “Camera Displays” in “Technical Notes” (0 773).
1 2 34 5 6 7 8
9
10
21
11
12
20
13
19 18 17 16 15 14
1 Shooting mode (0 71) 7 White balance (0 86)
2 AF-area brackets (0 40) 8 Image area
3 Autofocus mode (0 76) 9 Image size (0 97)
4 AF-area mode (0 78) 10 Image quality (0 95)
5 Active D-Lighting 11 i icon (0 63)
6 Set Picture Control 12 Subject tracking AF

13 “k” (appears when memory 17 Aperture
remains for over 1000 18 Shutter speed
exposures; 0 34) Metering (0 99)
19
14 Number of exposures Battery indicator (0 33)
remaining (0 34, 861) 20
15 ISO sensitivity (0 91) 21 Touch shooting (0 14, 65)
16 ISO sensitivity indicator (0 91)
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator
(0 93)
❚❚ Movies
1
2
3
9
8
7
6
5 4
1 Recording indicator (0 45) 5 Subject tracking AF
“No movie” indicator 6 Sound level (0 45)
2 Time remaining (0 45) Microphone sensitivity
7
3 Frame size and rate/image Frequency response
8
quality
9 AF-area brackets (0 45)
4 Release mode (still
photography; 0 73)

Touch Controls
• The touch-sensitive monitor offers a
variety of controls that can be operated
by touching the display with your
fingers.
• Touch controls can be used to:

- Focus and release the shutter (0 14)
- Adjust settings (0 15)
- View pictures (0 16)
- View movies (0 17)
- Access the i menu (0 18)
- Enter text (0 18)
- Navigate the menus (0 19)
❚❚ Focusing and Releasing the Shutter
• Touch the monitor during live view to
focus on the selected point (touch AF).
• During still photography, the shutter
will be released when you lift your
finger from the display (touch shutter).
• Touch AF settings can be adjusted by

tapping the W icon.

❚❚ Adjusting Settings
• Tap highlighted settings in the display.
• You can then choose the desired
option by tapping icons or sliders.
• Tap Z or press J to select the chosen

option and return to the previous
display.

❚❚ Playback
• Flick left or right to view other pictures
during full-frame playback.
• In full-frame playback, touching the

bottom of the display brings up a
frame-advance bar. Slide your finger
left or right over the bar to scroll rapidly
to other pictures.
• To zoom in on a picture displayed in

full-frame playback, use a stretch
gesture or give the display two quick
taps. After zooming in, you can adjust
the zoom ratio using stretch gestures
to zoom in and pinch gestures to zoom
out.

• Use slide gestures to view other parts of the image during
zoom.
• Giving the display two quick taps while zoom is in effect
cancels zoom.
• To “zoom out” to a thumbnail view, use
a pinch gesture in full-frame playback.
Use pinch and stretch to choose the
number of images displayed from 4, 9,
and 72 frames.
• Using a pinch gesture when 72 frames
are displayed selects calendar playback. Use a stretch gesture
to return to the 72-frame display.
❚❚ Viewing Movies
• Movies are indicated by a 1 icon; to
start playback, tap the on-screen guide.
• Tap the display to pause. Tap again to
resume.
• Tap Z to exit to full-frame playback.

❚❚ The i Menu
• Tapping the i icon during live view
displays the i menu (0 63).
• Tap items to view options.
❚❚ Text Entry
• When a keyboard is displayed, you can enter text by tapping
the keys.
1 Text display area
1
2 Keyboard area
3 Keyboard selection
2
• To position the cursor, tap e or f or tap directly in the text

display area.
• To cycle through the upper- and lower-case and symbol
keyboards, tap the keyboard selection button.

❚❚ Navigating the Menus
• After pressing the G button to
display the menus, you can slide up or
down to scroll.
• Tap a menu icon to choose a menu.
• Tap menu items to display options.

You can then choose the desired
option by tapping icons or sliders.
• To exit without changing settings, tap

Z.

D The Touch Screen
• The touch screen responds to static electricity. It may not respond when
touched with fingernails or gloved hands.
• Do not touch the screen with sharp objects.
• Do not use excessive force.
• The screen may not respond when covered with third-party protective
films.
• The screen may not respond when touched simultaneously in multiple
locations.
A Enabling or Disabling Touch Controls

Touch controls can be enabled or disabled using the [Touch controls]
item in the setup menu.

First Steps
Readying the Camera
Attaching the Strap
To attach a strap (whether the supplied strap or one that has
been purchased separately):
First Steps 21
Charging the Battery
Charge the supplied EN-EL15b battery in the supplied MH-25a
battery charger before use. Insert the battery and plug the
charger in (depending on the country or region, the charger
comes with either an AC wall adapter or a power cable).
• AC wall adapter: After inserting the AC wall adapter into the
charger AC inlet (q), slide the AC wall adapter latch as shown
(w) and rotate the adapter 90 ° to fix it in place (e).
• Power cable: After connecting the power cable with the plug
in the orientation shown, insert the battery and plug the cable
in.
• An exhausted battery will fully charge in about two hours and

35 minutes.
Battery charging (flashes) Charging complete (steady)
22 First Steps
D The Battery and Charger
Read and follow the warnings and cautions in “For Your Safety” (0 xxxviii)
and “Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions” (0 832).
D If the CHARGE Lamp Flashes Rapidly

If the CHARGE lamp flashes rapidly (8 times a second):
• A battery charging error has occurred: Unplug the charger and
remove and reinsert the battery.
• The ambient temperature is too hot or too cold: Use the battery
charger at temperatures within the designated temperature range
(0 – 40 °C).
If the problem persists, unplug the charger and end charging. Bring the
battery and charger to a Nikon-authorized service representative.
First Steps 23
Inserting the Battery
• Turn the camera off before inserting or removing the battery.
• Using the battery to keep the orange battery latch pressed to
one side, slide the battery into the battery chamber until the
latch locks it in place.
❚❚ Removing the Battery

Turn the camera off and open the
battery-chamber cover. Press the battery
latch in the direction shown to release
the battery and then remove the battery
by hand.
24 First Steps
Attaching a Lens
• The lens generally used in this manual for illustrative purposes
is an AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR.
• Be careful to prevent dust entering the camera.
• Confirm that the camera is off before attaching the lens.
- Remove the camera body cap (q, w) and rear lens cap (e, r).
- Align the mounting marks on the camera (t) and lens (y).
First Steps 25
- Rotate the lens as shown until it clicks into place (u, i).
• Remove the lens cap before taking pictures.
D CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings

When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring (0 791), lock
aperture at the minimum setting (highest f-number).
❚❚ Detaching Lenses
• After turning the camera off, press and
hold the lens release button (q) while
turning the lens in the direction shown
(w).
• After removing the lens, replace the
lens caps and camera body cap.
26 First Steps
Inserting Memory Cards
• Turn the camera off before inserting or removing memory
cards.
• The camera has two memory card slots:
Slot 1 (q) and Slot 2 (w). If you are
using only one memory card, insert it
into Slot 1.
• Holding the memory card in the orientation shown, slide it

straight into the slot until it clicks into place.
❚❚ Removing Memory Cards

After confirming that the memory card
access lamp is off, turn the camera off
and open the memory card slot cover.
Press the card in to eject it (q); the card
can then be removed by hand (w).
First Steps 27
D Memory Cards
• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when
removing memory cards from the camera.
• Do not perform the following operations during formatting or while
data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer or other
device. Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data
or in damage to the camera or card.
- Do not remove or insert memory cards
- Do not turn the camera off
- Do not remove the battery
- Do not disconnect AC adapters
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.
• Do not use excessive force when handling memory cards. Failure to
observe this precaution could damage the card.
• Do not bend or drop memory cards or subject them to strong physical
shocks.
• Do not expose memory cards to water, heat, or direct sunlight.
• Do not format memory cards in a computer.
D No Memory Card Inserted

If no memory card is inserted, the exposure count displays in the control
panel and viewfinder will show S. If the camera is turned off with a
battery and no memory card inserted, S will be displayed in the
control panel.
28 First Steps
D The Write Protect Switch
• SD memory cards are equipped
B
16G
with a write-protect switch. Sliding
the switch to the “lock” position
write-protects the card, protecting
the data it contains.
• If you attempt to release the shutter while a write-protected card is
inserted, a warning will be displayed and no picture will be recorded.
Unlock the memory card before attempting to take or delete pictures.
First Steps 29
Camera Setup
Choose a language and set the camera clock. Pictures cannot be
taken nor settings adjusted until the clock is set.
1 Turn the camera on.

When the camera is turned on for the
first time after purchase, a language-
selection dialog will be displayed.
The languages available vary with the
country or region in which the
camera was originally purchased.
Use the multi selector and J button

to navigate the menus.
Press 1 and 3 to highlight a language and press J to

select. The language can be changed at any time using the
[Language] item in the setup menu.
30 First Steps
2 Set the camera clock.
Use the multi selector and J button to set the camera clock.
Select time zone Select date format
Select daylight saving time Set time and date (note that the
option camera uses a 24-hour clock)
The clock can be adjusted at any time using the [Time zone
and date] > [Date and time] item in the setup menu.
First Steps 31
D The B (“Clock Not Set”) Icon
Flashing B icon in the control panel indicates that the camera clock
has been reset. The date and time recorded with new photographs will
not be correct; use the [Time zone and date] > [Date and time] item in
the setup menu to set the clock to the correct time and date. The camera
clock is powered by an independent clock battery. The clock battery
charges when the main battery is inserted or the camera is powered by an
optional power connector and AC adapter. It takes about 2 days to
charge. Once charged, it will power the clock for about a month.
A SnapBridge
Use the SnapBridge app to synchronize the camera clock
with the clock on a smartphone or tablet (smart device). See
SnapBridge online help for details.
32 First Steps
The Battery Level and Number of
Exposures Remaining
Before taking photographs, check the battery level and number
of exposures remaining.
Battery Level
Check the battery level before taking photographs. The battery
level is shown in the control panel and viewfinder.
Control panel Viewfinder Description

L — Battery fully charged.
K —
J — Battery partially discharged.
I —
Low battery. Charge battery or ready
H d
spare battery.
Shutter release disabled. Charge or
H (flashes) d (flashes)
exchange battery.
First Steps 33
Memory Card Indicators and Number of
Exposures Remaining
The control panel and viewfinder show the number of
additional photographs that can be taken at current settings
(i.e, the number of exposures remaining).
• The control panel shows the slot or

slots that currently hold a memory
card (the example shows the icons
displayed when cards are inserted in
both slots).
• At default settings, [Overflow] is selected for [Role played by
card in Slot 2] in the photo shooting menu. When two
memory cards are inserted, pictures will first be recorded to
the card in Slot 1, switching to Slot 2 when the card in Slot 1 is
full.
34 First Steps
• If two memory cards are inserted, the camera will show the
number of additional photographs that can be recorded to
the card in Slot 1. When the card in Slot 1 is full, the display will
show the number of exposures remaining on the card in Slot
2.
• Values over 1000 are rounded down to the nearest hundred.
For example, values between 1400 and 1499 are shown as
1.4 k.
• If the memory card is full or locked or a card error has
occurred, the icon for the affected slot will flash.
First Steps 35
Basic Photography and
Playback
Taking Photographs (b Mode)
Select b (auto) mode for simple “point-and-shoot”
photography. Photographs can be framed in the viewfinder
(viewfinder photography) or in the monitor (live view
photography).
Framing Photographs in the Viewfinder

(Viewfinder Photography)
1 Pressing the mode
dial lock release on
top of the camera,
rotate the mode dial
to b.
36 Basic Photography and Playback

2 Ready the camera.
Holding the handgrip in your right hand and cradling the
camera body or lens with your left, bring your elbows in
against the sides of your chest.
3 Frame the photograph.

• Frame a photograph in the
viewfinder.
• Position the main subject in the
AF-area brackets.

4 Press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus.
• The in-focus indicator (I) will

appear in the viewfinder when the
focus operation is complete.
Viewfinder
Description
display
The subject is in focus.

(steady)
The focus point is in front of the subject.

(steady)
The focus point is behind the subject.

(steady)
The camera is unable to focus using autofocus.

(flashes)
• The active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder.

5 Smoothly press the shutter-
release button the rest of the
way down to take the
photograph.
The memory card access lamp will
light while the photograph is being
recorded. Do not eject the memory
card or remove or disconnect the
power source until the lamp has gone
out and recording is complete.
A The Standby Timer (Viewfinder Photography)

The camera uses a standby timer to help reduce the drain on the battery.
The timer starts when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway and
expires if no operations are performed for about 6 seconds. The
viewfinder display and some indicators in the control panel turn off when
the timer expires. To restart the timer and restore the displays, press the
shutter-release button halfway a second time. The length of time before
the standby timer expires can be adjusted using Custom Setting c2
[Standby timer].
Standby timer on Standby timer off

Framing Photographs in the Monitor (Live
View)
1 Pressing the mode
top of the camera,
to b.
2 Rotate the live view selector to

C (live view photography).
3 Press the a button.

The mirror will be raised and live view
will start. The viewfinder will go dark
and the view through the lens will be
displayed in the monitor.

4 Ready the camera.
Hold the handgrip securely in your right hand and cradle the
camera body or lens with your left.
5 Frame the photograph.

• Position the subject near the center
of the frame.
• At default settings, the camera
automatically detects portrait
subjects and positions the focus
point over their faces or eyes.

If the camera is able to focus, the
focus point will be displayed in
green. If the camera is unable to focus, for example because
the subject is too close to the camera, the focus area will
flash red.

button the rest of the way
down to take the photograph.
The monitor turns off during
shooting.
8 Press the a button to exit live

view.

D Shooting in Live View
• Although these effects are not visible in the final pictures, during live
view you may notice that:
- Moving objects in the display appear distorted (individual subjects
such as trains or cars moving at high speed through the frame may be
distorted, or the entire frame may appear distorted when the camera
is panned horizontally)
- Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright spots are present in
the display
- Bright regions or bands may appear in scenes lit by flashing signs and
other intermittent light sources or when the subject is briefly
illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary light source
• Flicker and banding visible in the monitor under fluorescent, mercury
vapor, or sodium lamps can be reduced using the [Flicker reduction]
item in the movie shooting menu, although they may still be visible in
photographs taken at some shutter speeds.
• To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with
photographs or exposure, we recommend that you cover the
viewfinder with the supplied eyepiece cap (0 10).
• When shooting in live view, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or
other bright light sources. Failure to observe this precaution could
result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.
• Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c2 [Standby
timer], the standby timer will not expire during live view.

D The Count Down Display
A count down will appear in the top left corner of the display
approximately 30 s before live view ends automatically.
• If the timer has been triggered by Custom Setting c4 [Monitor off
delay], the count down will be displayed in black starting 30 s before
the timer expires, switching to red when there are only 5 s to go. If [No
limit] is selected for [Monitor off delay] > [Live view], the camera may
nevertheless terminate live view as necessary to protect its internal
circuits from high temperatures and the like.
• A count down will be displayed in red starting 30 s before the camera
shuts down to protect its internal circuits. Depending on shooting
conditions, the timer may appear immediately when live view is
selected.
A Exposure Preview (Lv)

When [On] is selected for Custom Setting d9 [Exposure preview (Lv)],
exposure can be previewed in the monitor during live view photography.
You may find this useful when using exposure compensation or shooting
in mode M.
A Touch Controls
Touch controls can be used in place of the shutter-release button to focus
and take pictures during live view photography (0 14).

Recording Movies (b Mode)
b (auto) mode can also be used for simple “point-and-shoot”
movie recording.
A “Filming” Versus “Recording”

Throughout this manual, the terms “filming” and “recording” are used as
follows: “filming” is used if the live view selector is rotated to 1, while
“recording” refers to the act of shooting footage using the movie-record
button.
1 Pressing the mode

top of the camera,
to b.

1 (movie live view).

• The mirror will be raised and live
view will start. The viewfinder will
go dark and the view through the
lens will be displayed in the
monitor.
• During live view, exposure for movies and photographs
can be previewed in the monitor.
4 Press the movie-record button

to start recording.

• A recording indicator will be displayed in the monitor. The
monitor also shows the time remaining, or in other words
the approximate amount of new footage that can be
recorded to the memory card.
1 Recording indicator
2 Time remaining
• Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone. Do not

cover the microphone during recording.
• Focus can be adjusted by tapping your subject in the
monitor.
5 Press the movie-record button

again to end recording.
6 Press the a button to exit live

view.

D Recording Movies
• When filming movies, you may notice the following in the display. These
phenomena will also be visible in any footage recorded with the
camera.
- Flicker or banding in scenes lit by such sources as fluorescent,
mercury vapor, or sodium lamps
- Distortion associated with motion (individual subjects such as trains
or cars moving at high speed through the frame may be distorted, or
the entire frame may appear distorted when the camera is panned
horizontally)
- Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright spots in the display
- Bright regions or bands in scenes lit by flashing signs and other
intermittent light sources or when the subject is briefly illuminated by
a strobe or other bright, momentary light source
- Flicker occurring while power aperture is in use
• Note that noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) and
unexpected colors may appear if you use the X (T) button to zoom
in on the view through the lens during filming.
• Movie recording will end automatically if:
- The maximum length is reached
- The live view selector is rotated to another setting
- The lens is removed
• When recording movies, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other
strong light sources. Failure to observe this precaution could result in
damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.

• Sounds made by the camera may be audible in footage recorded:
- During autofocus
- When power aperture is used
- During aperture adjustment
- With vibration reduction enabled on vibration reduction (VR) lenses
• If the sound level is displayed in red, the volume is too high. Adjust
microphone sensitivity.
D The Count-Down Display

• A count-down timer will be displayed in the top left corner of the
monitor 30 s before movie recording ends automatically.
• Depending on shooting conditions, the timer may appear immediately
when movie recording begins.
• Note that regardless of the time available (displayed in the top right
corner of the monitor), filming will end automatically when the count-
down timer expires.
D Adjusting Settings During Movie Recording

• Headphone volume cannot be adjusted during recording.
• If an option other than I (microphone off) is currently selected,
microphone sensitivity can be changed while recording is in progress. I
cannot be selected.
A Focusing During Movie Recording

Focus can also be adjusted by pressing the shutter-release button
halfway.

Taking Photos During Filming
Photos can be taken during filming by
pressing the shutter-release button all
the way down. The resulting photo will
have an aspect ratio of 16:9.
• A C icon will flash in the display when
a photo is taken.
• Photos can be taken while recording is
in progress. Taking photos does not
interrupt movie recording.
D Taking Photos During Filming

• Up to 40 photographs can be taken with each movie.
• Note that photos can be taken even when the subject is not in focus.
• Photos are recorded at the dimensions currently selected for movie
frame size.
• Photos are recorded in [JPEG finem] format, regardless of the option
selected for image quality.
• The frame advance rate for continuous release modes varies with the
option selected for [Frame size/frame rate]. While recording is in
progress, only one photo will be taken each time the shutter-release
button is pressed.
• Photographs taken during filming will not be displayed automatically
after shooting even if [On] is selected for [Image review] in the
playback menu.

Playback
Press the K button to view photos and movies recorded with
the camera.
1 Press the K button.

• A picture will be displayed in the
monitor.
• The memory card containing the

picture currently displayed is
shown by an icon.
2 Press 4 or 2 to view
additional pictures.
• Additional pictures can also be
viewed by flicking a finger left or
right over the display (0 14).
• To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the

shutter-release button halfway.

A Image Review
When [On] is selected for [Image review] in the playback menu, pictures
are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting without the
user pressing the K button.

Viewing Movies
Movies are indicated by a 1 icon. Tap the a icon in the display
or press J to start playback (a progress bar shows your
approximate position in the movie).
1 1 icon
2 Length
3 a icon
4 Current position/total length
5 Progress bar
6 Volume
7 Guide

❚❚ Movie Playback Operations
To Description
Pause Press 3 to pause playback.
Press J to resume playback when playback is paused
Resume
or during rewind/advance.
• Press 4 to rewind, 2 to
advance. Speed increases with
each press, from 2× to 4× to 8×
to 16×.
Rewind/
• Keep 4 or 2 pressed to skip respectively to the first
advance
frame or last frame.
• The first frame is indicated by a
h in the top right corner of the
display, the last frame by a i.
Start slow-
Press 3 while the movie is paused to start slow-
motion
motion playback.
playback
• Press 4 or 2 while the movie is paused to rewind or
Jog rewind/ advance one frame at a time.
advance • Keep 4 or 2 pressed for continuous rewind or
advance.
Rotate the main command dial one stop to skip ahead
Skip 10 s
or back 10 s.
Skip to last or If the movie contains no indices, you can skip to the
first frame first or last frame by rotating the sub-command dial.

To Description
If the movie contains indices, rotating the sub-
command dial takes you to the next or previous index.
Skip to index • Indices can be added or removed from the [EDIT
MOVIE] menu, which can be displayed by pausing
playback and pressing the i button.
Press X (T) to increase volume, W (Y) to
Adjust volume
decrease.
To display the [EDIT MOVIE] menu, pause playback
Trim movie
and press the i button.
Exit Press 1 or K to exit to full-frame playback.
Exit to Press the shutter-release button halfway to exit
shooting mode playback and return to shooting mode.
A Indices
Indices can be added when playback is paused
by pressing the i button and selecting [Add
index]. You can quickly jump to indexed
locations during playback and editing. The
presence of indices is indicated by a p icon in
the full-frame playback display.

Deleting Unwanted Pictures
Pictures can be deleted as described below. Note that once
deleted, pictures cannot be recovered.
1 Display the picture.

• Press the K button to start
playback and press 4 or 2 until the
desired picture is displayed.
• The location of the current image

is shown by an icon at the bottom
left corner of the display.
2 Delete the picture

• Press the O (Q) button; a
confirmation dialog will be
displayed. Press the O (Q) button
again to delete the image and
return to playback.
• To exit without deleting the

picture, press K.

Camera Controls
The G Button
Press the G button to view the
menus.
1 1 D PLAYBACK MENU
2 2 C PHOTO SHOOTING MENU
3
4 3 1 MOVIE SHOOTING MENU
5 9 4 A CUSTOM SETTING MENU
6
7 5 B SETUP MENU
8 6 N RETOUCH MENU
7 O MY MENU/
m RECENT SETTINGS *
8 d Help icon
9 Current settings
* You can choose the menu displayed. The default is [MY MENU].
Camera Controls 57
Using the Menus
You can navigate the menus using the multi selector and J
button.
1 Move cursor up
2 Select highlighted item
3 Display sub-menu, select
highlighted item, or move
cursor right
4 Move cursor down
5 Cancel and return to previous
menu, or move cursor left
1 Highlight the icon for the current menu.

Press 4 to highlight the icon for the current menu.
2 Select a menu.
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.
58 Camera Controls
3 Position the cursor in the selected menu.
Press 2 to position the cursor in the selected menu.
4 Highlight a menu item.

Press 1 or 3 to highlight a menu item.
5 Display options.
Press 2 to display options for the selected menu item.
Camera Controls 59
6 Highlight an option.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option.
7 Select the highlighted option.

• Press J.
• To exit without making a selection,
press the G button.
• To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the
60 Camera Controls
D Grayed-Out Items
Some items and menu options may be
unavailable depending on the mode and
camera state. Unavailable items are displayed
in gray and cannot be selected.
D Text Entry
A keyboard is displayed when text entry is required.
1 Text display area
1
2 Keyboard area
3 Keyboard selection
2
3
• Enter characters at the current cursor position by highlighting them
with the multi selector and pressing J.
• To move the cursor left or right in the text display area, rotate the main
command dial.
• To cycle through the upper- and lower-case and symbol keyboards,
highlight the keyboard selection icon and press J. The keyboard
selection icon may not be available in some cases.
• If a character is entered when the text display area is full, the rightmost
character will be deleted.
• To delete the character under the cursor, press the O (Q) button.
• To complete entry, press X (T).
• To exit without completing text entry, press G.
Camera Controls 61
A The d (Help) Icon
• Where available, a description of the currently-selected item can be
viewed by pressing the Q/g (U) button.
• Press 1 or 3 to scroll.
• Press Q/g (U) again to return to the menus.
A Touch Controls
You can also navigate the menus using touch controls (0 14).
62 Camera Controls
The i Button (the i Menu)
For quick access to frequently-used settings, press the i button
or tap the i icon in the live-view display to view the i menu.
• Highlight items using the multi selector and press J to view

options. Highlight the desired option and press J to select
and return to the i menu.
• To cancel and return to the previous display, press the i

button.
• Different menus are displayed during viewfinder
photography, live view, and movie recording.
Camera Controls 63
D Grayed-Out Items
Some items and menu options may be
unavailable depending on the mode and
camera status. Unavailable items are displayed
in gray and cannot be selected.
A The Command Dials

• The main command dial can be used to
choose the setting for the item currently
highlighted in the i menu. Options for the
selected setting, if any, can be selected by
rotating the sub-command dial.
• Some items can be adjusted by rotating
either dial.
• Press J to save changes. You can also save changes by pressing the
shutter-release button halfway or highlighting another item.
64 Camera Controls
The Still Photography i Menu
Pressing the i button during still photography displays the
items listed below. Highlight the desired item using the multi
selector and press J to view options.
1 2 3 4 5 6 13
7 8 9 10 11 12 14
Viewfinder photography Live view photography
1 Set Picture Control 8 Image size

2 Image quality 9 Metering
3 Flash mode 10 Active D-Lighting
4 Wi-Fi connection 11 AF-area mode
5 Autofocus mode 12 Custom controls 1
6 Choose image area 1 13 Negative digitizer 2
7 White balance 14 Exposure preview 2
1 Displayed during viewfinder photography only.
2 Displayed during live view photography only.
A Customize i Menu
Choose the items displayed in the i menus. Use Custom Settings f1
[Customize i menu] and f2 [Customize i menu (Lv)] to choose the
items displayed in viewfinder and live photography, respectively.
Camera Controls 65
The Movie i Menu
Pressing the i button during movie recording displays the
items listed below. Highlight the desired item using the multi
selector and press J to view options.
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
1 Set Picture Control 7 White balance
2 Frame size and rate/Image 8 Microphone sensitivity
quality 9 Metering
3 Wind noise reduction Active D-Lighting
10
4 Wi-Fi connection AF-area mode
11
5 Autofocus mode Electronic VR
12
6 Destination
A Customize i Menu
Use Custom Setting g1 [Customize i menu] to choose the items
displayed in the movie i menu.
66 Camera Controls
The Playback i Menu
Pressing the i button during playback displays a context-
sensitive i menu of frequently-used playback options.
Photo playback
Movie playback Movie playback paused
Camera Controls 67
The R Button
Use the R button to view shooting
information or choose the indicators
displayed.
Viewfinder Photography
During viewfinder photography, you can
press the R button to view an
information display in the monitor. The
display lists such data as shutter speed,
aperture, number of exposures
remaining, and AF-area mode.
68 Camera Controls
Live View Photography
Use the R button to cycle through the following displays:
❚❚ Live View Selector Rotated to C
1 Indicators on
2 Simplified display
3 Histogram *
4 Virtual horizon
* Displayed when [On] is selected for Custom Setting d9 [Exposure

Preview (Lv)] in mode P, S, A, or M. Not displayed if [On] is selected for
[Multiple exposure] > [Overlay shooting] in the photo shooting
menu.
Camera Controls 69
❚❚ Live View Selector Rotated to 1
1 Indicators on
2 Simplified display
3 Histogram
4 Virtual horizon
70 Camera Controls
The Mode Dial
Use the mode dial to choose a shooting mode. Choose whether
to adjust shutter speed and/or aperture manually or leave the
camera in charge.
Camera Controls 71
Using the Mode Dial
Press the mode dial lock release and
rotate the mode dial to choose from the
following modes:
Mode Description
A simple, “point-and-shoot” mode that
b Auto leaves the camera in charge of settings
(0 36, 45).
Programmed The camera sets shutter speed and aperture
P
auto for optimal exposure.
Shutter- You choose the shutter speed; the camera
S
priority auto selects the aperture for best results.
Aperture- You choose the aperture; the camera selects
A
priority auto the shutter speed for best results.
You control both shutter speed and aperture.
M Manual Set shutter speed to “bulb” or “time” for long
time-exposures.
Assign frequently-used settings to these
User settings
U1/U2 positions. The settings can be recalled simply
modes
by rotating the mode dial.
Special effects
EFCT Take pictures with added special effects.
mode
72 Camera Controls
The Release Mode Dial
Rotate the release mode dial to choose the operation
performed when the shutter is released.
Choosing a Release Mode

Press the release mode dial lock release
on top of the camera and rotate the
release mode dial.
Mode Description
The camera takes one photograph each time the
S Single frame
shutter-release button is pressed.
At default settings, the camera takes photos at
up to 3 fps while the shutter-release button is
pressed.
• The frame advance rate can be chosen using
Continuous
CL Custom Setting d1 [CL mode shooting
low speed
speed]. Choose from values of from 1 to 6 fps.
Note, however, that regardless of the option
selected, the maximum frame advance rate
during live view is 3 fps.
Camera Controls 73
Mode Description
The camera takes photos at up to 7 fps while the
• When [On] is selected for [Silent live view
photography] in the photo shooting menu
during live view, the frame advance rate varies
Continuous
CH with the option selected for [NEF (RAW)
high speed
recording] > [NEF (RAW) bit depth] in the
photo shooting menu, increasing to a
maximum of approximately 8 fps when [14-
bit] is selected or approximately 12 fps when
[12-bit] is selected.
Quiet
As for single frame except that camera noise is
Q shutter-
reduced.
release
Quiet
The camera takes pictures at up to 3 fps while
continuous
QC the shutter-release button is pressed; camera
shutter-
noise is reduced.
release
E Self-timer Take pictures with the self-timer.
The mirror is raised before shooting to minimize
MUP Mirror up
blur caused by camera shake.
74 Camera Controls
The Focus-Mode Selector
Choose AF for autofocus, M
for manual focus.
Camera Controls 75
The AF-Mode Button
Choose the AF and AF-area modes. The AF mode determines
how the camera focuses in autofocus mode, the AF-area mode
how the camera selects the focus point for autofocus.
76 Camera Controls
Choosing an AF Mode
Hold the AF-mode button and rotate the main command dial.
The options available vary with camera settings.
Option Description
The camera uses AF-S when photographing
stationary subjects and AF-C when
[AF mode
AF-A photographing subjects that are in motion.
auto-switch]
• This option is available only during still
photography.
Use with stationary subjects. Focus locks while
AF-S [Single AF]
the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
For moving subjects. The camera adjusts focus
[Continuous continuously in response to changes in the
AF-C
AF] distance to the subject while the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway.
The camera adjusts focus continuously in
response to subject movement or changes in
composition. When the shutter-release button is
AF-F [Full-time AF] pressed halfway, the focus point will turn from
red to green and focus will lock.
• This option is available only during movie
recording.
Camera Controls 77
Choosing an AF-Area Mode
Hold the AF-mode button and rotate the sub-command dial.
The options available vary with the AF mode.
❚❚ Viewfinder Photography
Option Description
[Single-point The camera focuses on a point selected by the user.
AF] • Use with stationary subjects.
The camera focuses on a point selected by the user; if
[Dynamic-area the subject briefly leaves the selected point, the
AF (9 points)]/ camera will focus based on information from
[Dynamic-area surrounding focus points. This option is available when
AF (21 points)]/ AF-A or AF-C is selected for AF mode.
[Dynamic-area • Choose for subjects that move unpredictably. The
AF (51 points)] greater the number of focus points, the wider the
area used for focus.
78 Camera Controls
Option Description
The user selects the focus point; while the shutter-
release button is pressed halfway, the camera will track
subjects that leave the selected focus point and select
[3D-tracking] new focus points as required. This option is available
when AF-A or AF-C is selected for AF mode.
• Use for subjects that are moving erratically from side
to side (e.g., tennis players).
The camera focuses using a group of focus points
selected by the user. Priority is given to faces detected
[Group-area by the camera, if any.
AF] • Choose for snapshots, subjects that are in motion,
and other subjects that are difficult to photograph
using [Single-point AF].
The camera automatically
detects the subject and
selects the focus point. If a
[Auto-area AF] face is detected, the camera
will give priority to the
portrait subject.
Camera Controls 79
❚❚ Live View
Option Description
With a focus area smaller than that employed for
[Single-point AF], pinpoint AF is used for pinpoint
focus on a selected spot in the frame.
[Pinpoint • It is recommended for shots involving static
3
AF] subjects, such as buildings, in-studio product
photography, and close-ups.
• This option is available only when AF-S is
selected as the AF mode for still photography.
[Single- The camera focuses on a point selected by the user.
d
point AF] • Use with stationary subjects.
[Wide-area As for [Single-point AF], except the camera
f
AF (S)] focuses on a wider area.
• Choose for snapshots, subjects that are in motion,
[Wide-area and other subjects that are difficult to
g
AF (L)]
photograph using [Single-point AF].
The camera focuses on a point selected by the user.
If the subject briefly leaves the selected point, the
camera will focus based on information from
surrounding focus points.
[Dynamic-
e • Use for photographs of athletes and other active
area AF]
subjects that are hard to frame using
[Single-point AF].
• This option is available only when AF-A or AF-C is
selected as the AF mode for still photography.
80 Camera Controls
Option Description
The camera automatically detects the subject and
selects the focus area.
• Use on occasions when you don’t have time to
select the focus point yourself, for portraits, or for
snapshots and other spur-of-the-moment
[Auto-area photos.
h
AF] • If a portrait subject is detected during live view
photography, an amber border indicating the
focus point will appear around the subject’s face.
If the camera detects the subject’s eyes, the
amber border will instead appear around an eye
(face/eye-detection AF).
❚❚ Manual Focus-Point Selection

When an option other than [Auto-area
AF] is selected for AF-area mode, you can
select the focus point manually. Press
the multi selector up, down, left, or right
(1342) or diagonally to select the
focus point.
A Locking Focus-Point Selection

Focus-point selection can be
locked by rotating the focus
selector lock to the “L” position.
Focus-point selection can be re-
enabled by rotating the lock to I.
Camera Controls 81
The AF-ON Button
The AF-ON button can be used for focus
in autofocus mode.
• You can choose the role assigned to
the AF-ON button. Use Custom
Settings f3 [Custom controls] and g2
[Custom controls] in the Custom
Settings menu to choose the roles played by the button
during photography and movie recording, respectively.
The A Button
Press the A (AE-L/AF-L) button to lock
focus and exposure for photographs
taken using autofocus.
• You can choose the role assigned to
the A button. Use Custom Settings f3
[Custom controls] and g2 [Custom
controls] in the Custom Settings menu to choose the roles
played by the button during photography and movie
recording, respectively.
82 Camera Controls
Exposure (AE) Lock
Exposure lock can be used to recompose shots after metering a
subject that will not be in the selected focus area in the final
composition. Exposure lock is particularly effective when [Spot
metering] or [Center-weighted metering] is selected for
metering.
Focus Lock
Use focus lock to lock focus on the current subject when AF-A
or AF-C is selected for AF mode. When using focus lock, choose
an AF-area mode other than [Auto-area AF].
Locking Focus and Exposure

1 Position the subject in the selected focus point
and press the shutter-release button halfway to
set focus and exposure.
Camera Controls 83
2 With the shutter-release button pressed halfway
(q), press the A button (w).
• Focus and exposure will lock while
the A button is pressed. Exposure
will not change even when the
composition is altered.
• An AE-L icon will be displayed in

the viewfinder or monitor.
3 Keeping the A button pressed,

recompose the photograph.
Do not change the distance between

the camera and the subject. If the
distance to the subject changes,
release the lock and focus again at
the new distance.
84 Camera Controls
A Locking Focus When AF-S Is Selected for AF Mode
Focus will lock while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Focus
will also lock while the A button is pressed.
A Using the Shutter-Release Button for Exposure Lock

If [On (half press)] is selected for Custom Setting c1 [Shutter-release
button AE-L], exposure will lock while the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway.
A Taking Multiple Shots at the Same Focus Distance

• Focus will remain locked if you keep the A button pressed between
shots, allowing several photographs in succession to be taken at the
same focus setting.
• Focus will also remain locked if you keep the shutter-release button
pressed halfway between shots.
Camera Controls 85
The Q/g (U) Button
The Q/g (U) button can be used during shooting to adjust
white balance. White balance delivers natural colors with light
sources of different hues.
D The Q/g (U) Button

The Q/g (U) button may be disabled in some shooting modes or when
certain conditions apply.
Adjusting White Balance

Hold the Q/g (U) button and rotate the main command dial.
86 Camera Controls
Options for the selected setting, if any, can be selected by
holding the Q/g (U) button and rotating the sub-command
dial.
If coordinates are displayed as shown, you can hold the Q/g

(U) button and fine-tune white balance using the multi
selector.
• Press 4 or 2 to fine-tune white
balance on the amber-blue axis and 1
or 3 to fine-tune white balance on the
green-magenta axis.
• When [Choose color temperature] is

selected, you can press 4 or 2 to
highlight a digit. Press 1 or 3 to
change.
• Release the Q/g (U) button to return to shooting mode.
Camera Controls 87
Option Description
White balance is adjusted automatically
4 [Auto] for optimal results with most light
sources.
i [Keep white (reduce Eliminate the warm color cast produced
warm colors)] by incandescent lighting.
j [Keep overall Partially preserve the warm color cast
atmosphere] produced by incandescent lighting.
k [Keep warm lighting Preserve the warm color cast produced
colors] by incandescent lighting.
When used under natural light in place of
D [Natural light auto] 4 ([Auto]), this option produces colors
closer to those seen by the naked eye.
H [Direct sunlight] Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.
G [Cloudy] Use in daylight under overcast skies.
M [Shade] Use in daylight with subjects in shade.
J [Incandescent] Use under incandescent lighting.
88 Camera Controls
Option Description
I [Fluorescent]
[Sodium-vapor lamps]
[Warm-white
fluorescent]
[White fluorescent] Use under fluorescent lighting; choose
the bulb type according to the light
[Cool-white fluorescent] source.
[Day white fluorescent]
[Daylight fluorescent]
[High temp. mercury-
vapor]
Use with studio strobe lighting and other
5 [Flash]
large flash units.
K [Choose color
Choose the color temperature directly.
temperature]
Measure white balance for the subject or
L [Preset manual] light source or copy white balance from
an existing photograph.
Camera Controls 89
A Protecting Pictures from Deletion
During playback, the Q/g (U) button can be
used to protect pictures. Protecting pictures
helps prevent accidental deletion.
A Viewing Help
Where available, a description of the currently-selected item can be
viewed by pressing the Q/g (U) button (0 62).
90 Camera Controls
The S (Q) Button
Use the S (Q) button to adjust the camera’s sensitivity to
light (ISO sensitivity). The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light
needed to make an exposure, allowing faster shutter speeds or
smaller apertures. You also have the option of enabling auto ISO
sensitivity control, which automatically adjusts sensitivity if
optimal exposure cannot be achieved at the setting selected by
the user.
Adjusting ISO Sensitivity

Hold the S (Q) button and rotate the main command dial.
• Choose from values of from ISO 100 to 51200. Settings of from

about 0.3 to 1 EV below ISO 100 and 0.3 to 2 EV above ISO
51200 are also available.
• In addition to settings of from ISO 100
to 51200, b and all EFCT modes other
than j also offer an X ([Auto])
option. When X is selected, the
camera adjusts ISO sensitivity automatically.
Camera Controls 91
D High ISO Sensitivities
The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure,
allowing pictures to be taken when lighting is poor and helping prevent
blur when the subject is in motion. Note, however, that the higher the
sensitivity, the more likely the image is to be affected by “noise” in the
form of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines.
92 Camera Controls
Enabling Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
In P, S, A, and M modes, you can hold the S (Q) button and
rotate the sub-command dial to choose whether the camera
will automatically adjust ISO sensitivity if the desired exposure
cannot be achieved at the value selected by the user.
• When auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled, ISO AUTO
indicators will appear in the control panel and viewfinder.
When these indicators are lit (not flashing), pictures will be
taken at the sensitivity selected for [ISO sensitivity]. When
sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the user, the
ISO AUTO indicators will flash and the altered value will be
shown in the displays.
A Maximum Sensitivity
In modes P, S, A, and M, you can select an upper limit for auto ISO
sensitivity control to prevent ISO sensitivity being raised too high. The
maximum ISO sensitivity can be selected using the [ISO sensitivity
settings] > [Auto ISO sensitivity control] > [Maximum sensitivity] item
in the photo shooting menu.
Camera Controls 93
The E Button
Use the E (exposure compensation) button to alter exposure
from the value suggested by the camera. Exposure
compensation can be used to make pictures brighter or darker.
−1 EV No exposure +1 EV
compensation
D The E Button
The E button may be disabled in some shooting modes or when certain
conditions apply.
Adjusting Exposure Compensation

Hold the E button and rotate the main command dial.
• Higher values make the subject brighter, lower values darker.

• Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure
compensation to ±0.0. Exposure compensation is not reset
when the camera is turned off.
94 Camera Controls
The X (T) Button
The X (T) button is used to adjust image quality and choose
the size of JPEG images.
Adjusting Image Quality

During viewfinder photography, image quality can be adjusted
by holding the X (T) button and rotating the main
command dial.
Camera Controls 95
Option Description
[NEF (RAW) + JPEG finem]
[NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine] Record two copies of each photo: an NEF
[NEF (RAW) + JPEG (RAW) image and a JPEG copy. For the
normalm] JPEG copy, you can choose from options
prioritizing image quality or file size.
[NEF (RAW) + JPEG normal] Options with a star (“m”) prioritize image
[NEF (RAW) + JPEG basicm] quality, those without a star (“m”) file size.
[NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic]
[NEF (RAW)] Record photos in NEF (RAW) format.
[JPEG finem]
[JPEG fine] Record photos in JPEG format. Image
[JPEG normalm] quality increases as quality progress from
basic through normal to fine. Options
[JPEG normal] with a star (“m”) prioritize image quality,
[JPEG basicm] those without a star (“m”) file size.
[JPEG basic]
96 Camera Controls
Choosing an Image Size
During viewfinder photography, image size can be adjusted by
holding the X (T) button and rotating the sub-command
dial.
Choose from [Large], [Medium], and [Small]; the selected

option applies to JPEG photos. The physical dimensions of the
photos in pixels varies with image area.
Image size
Image area
[Large] [Medium] [Small]
[FX (36×24)] 6048×4024 4528×3016 3024×2016
[DX (24×16)] 3936×2624 2944×1968 1968×1312
[1:1 (24×24)] 4016×4016 3008×3008 2000×2000
[16:9 (36×20)] 6048×3400 4528×2544 3024×1696
Camera Controls 97
A Zoom Preview (Live View Photography)
Press the X (T) button to zoom in on the view through the lens in the
monitor.
• The zoom ratio increases each time the X (T) button is pressed; to
zoom out, press W (Y).
• While the view through the lens is zoomed in,
a navigation window will appear in a gray
frame at the bottom right corner of the
display.
• Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the
frame not visible in the monitor.
• During live view photography, image quality
and size can be adjusted using the [Image quality] and [Image size]
items in the photo shooting menu.
98 Camera Controls
The W (Y) Button
Use the W (Y) button to choose how the camera meters light
when setting exposure.
D The W (Y) Button

The W (Y) button may be disabled in some shooting modes or when
Choosing a Metering Option

Hold the W (Y) button and rotate the main command dial.
Camera Controls 99
Option Description
Matrix metering is adapted to a wide range of
L [Matrix metering]
subjects. It produces natural-looking results.
The camera assigns the greatest weight to the
[Center-weighted center of the frame. It can be used with
M
metering] subjects that dominate the composition, for
example.
The camera meters a circle 4 mm (0.16 in.) in
diameter (approximately 1.5% of frame). Use
N [Spot metering] for example to meter a specific area of the
frame when your subject is backlit or features
sharply contrasting areas.
The camera assigns the greatest weight to
[Highlight-
highlights. Use this option to reduce loss of
t weighted
detail in highlights, for example when
metering]
photographing spotlit performers on stage.
100 Camera Controls

The N (Y) Button
Use the N (Y) button to adjust flash mode and compensation
when using optional flash units. Flash mode determines the
effect produced by the flash, flash compensation the flash level.
D The N (Y) Button

The N (Y) button may be disabled in some shooting modes or when
Choosing a Flash Mode

Hold the N (Y) button and rotate the main command dial.
Camera Controls 101

Shooting
Option Description
mode
b, P, S, A,
[Fill flash]
This mode is recommended for M, EFCT
I (front-curtain
most situations. (j and m
sync)
excluded)
[Red-eye b, P, S, A,
The flash fires before the
reduction] M, EFCT
J photograph is taken, reducing “red-
(red-eye (j and m
eye”.
reduction) excluded)
As for “fill flash”, except that slow
[Slow sync] shutter speeds are used to capture
L P, A
(slow sync) background lighting at night or
under low light.
[Slow sync + As for “red-eye reduction”, except
red-eye] (red- that slow shutter speeds are used to
K P, A
eye reduction capture background lighting at
with slow sync) night or under low light.
[Rear-curtain
The flash fires just before the shutter
M sync] (rear- P, S, A, M
closes.
curtain sync)
b, P, S, A,
s [Flash off] The flash does not fire.
M, EFCT
102 Camera Controls

Adjusting Flash Compensation
Hold the N (Y) button and rotate the sub-command dial.
• Choose positive values for brighter lighting, negative values to

ensure that the subject is not too brightly lit.
• Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash
compensation to ±0.0. Flash compensation is not reset when
the camera is turned off.
Camera Controls 103

The BKT Button
Use the BKT button to choose the
bracketing increment and number of
shots in the bracketing program.
Bracketing is used to vary exposure, flash
level, white balance, or Active D-Lighting
(ADL) over a series of shots.
• The role performed by the BKT button can be chosen using
Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls].
D The BKT Button

The BKT button may be disabled in some shooting modes or when
104 Camera Controls

The Pv Button
To stop the lens down to the selected
aperture and preview depth of field
during shooting, press and hold the Pv
button.
• Optional flash units compatible with
the Nikon Creative Lighting System
(CLS) will emit a modeling flash. The modeling flash can be
disabled by selecting [Off] for Custom Setting e5 [Modeling
flash].
• You can choose the role assigned to the Pv button. Use
Custom Settings f3 [Custom controls] and g2 [Custom
played by the button during photography and movie
D The Pv Button
The Pv button may be disabled in some shooting modes or when certain
conditions apply.
Camera Controls 105

The Fn Button
Use the Fn button for quick access to
selected settings.
• The assigned setting can be adjusted
by holding the Fn button and rotating
the command dials. In some cases,
adjustments can be made using both
the main and sub-command dials.
• Use Custom Settings f3 [Custom controls] and g2 [Custom
played by the Fn button during photography and movie
• The default assignment for the Fn button is [Choose image
area].
D The Fn Button
The Fn button may be disabled in some shooting modes or when certain
conditions apply.
106 Camera Controls

Shooting Settings
Choosing a Shooting Mode
Keeping the mode dial lock
release pressed, rotate the
mode dial to choose from the
following modes:
Mode Description
A simple, “point-and-shoot” mode that
b Auto (0 36, 45)
leaves the camera in charge of settings.
Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for
Programmed optimal exposure. Recommended for
P
auto (0 109) snapshots and in other situations in which
there is little time to adjust camera settings.
Shutter- User chooses shutter speed; camera selects
S priority auto aperture for best results. Use to freeze or blur
(0 110) motion.

Mode Description
User chooses aperture; camera selects
Aperture-
shutter speed for best results. Use to blur
A priority auto
background or bring both foreground and
(0 111)
background into focus.
User controls both shutter speed and
Manual
M aperture. Set shutter speed to Bulb or Time
(0 113)
for long time-exposures.
User settings Assign frequently-used settings to these
U1/U2
modes (0 115) positions for quick recall.
Special effects
EFCT Take pictures with added special effects.
mode (0 119)
D Lens Types
• When using a CPU lens of a type other than G or E, lock the aperture ring
at the minimum aperture (highest f-number).
• Mode A will be selected automatically if a non-CPU lens is attached in
mode P or S. “A” will appear in the information display.
108 Shooting Settings

Shooting in Modes P, S, A, and M
❚❚ P (Programmed Auto)
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed
and aperture according to a built-in program to ensure optimal
exposure in most situations. You also have the option of
choosing different combinations of shutter speed and aperture
without altering exposure (“flexible program”).
A Flexible Program
Mode P offers “flexible program”, in which
although the camera chooses the initial shutter
speed and aperture, while the standby timer is
on the main command dial can be rotated to
select different combinations without altering
exposure from the value chosen by the camera.
While flexible program is in effect, a flexible
program indicator (“A”) appears in the viewfinder.
• To restore default shutter speed and aperture settings, rotate the dial
until the flexible program indicator is no longer displayed, choose
another mode, or turn the camera off.

❚❚ S (Shutter-Priority Auto)
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the
shutter speed while the camera
automatically selects the aperture that
will produce the optimal exposure. To
choose a shutter speed, rotate the main
command dial while the exposure
meters are on.
• Shutter speed can be set to “s” or to values between 30 s

(q) and 1/8000 s (o).

❚❚ A (Aperture-Priority Auto)
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the
aperture while the camera automatically
selects the shutter speed that will
produce the optimal exposure. To adjust
aperture, rotate the sub-command dial
while the exposure meters are on.
• Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and

maximum values for the lens.

A Non-CPU Lenses
Use the lens aperture ring to adjust aperture. If the maximum aperture of
the lens has been specified using the [Non-CPU lens data] item in setup
menu when a non-CPU lens is attached, the current f-number will be
displayed in the viewfinder and control panel, rounded to the nearest full
stop.
• Otherwise the aperture displays will show only the number of stops (F,
with maximum aperture displayed as F0) and the f-number must be
read from the lens aperture ring.
A Depth-of-Field Preview
Aperture can be stopped down by pressing
and holding the Pv button. Depth of field (the
range of distances that appears to be in focus)
can then be previewed in the viewfinder.

❚❚ M (Manual)
You control both shutter speed and aperture. Choose this mode
for long time-exposures of such subjects as fireworks or the
night sky (Bulb or Time photography, 0 170). Shutter speed
and aperture can be adjusted with reference to the exposure
indicators by rotating the command dials as follows while the
standby timer is on:
• Rotate the main command dial to choose the shutter speed.
Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/8000 s (o)
and 30 s (q), to A (Bulb) or % (Time), or to s.
• Aperture can be adjusted by rotating the sub-command dial.
• The minimum and maximum values for aperture vary with the
lens.
Shutter speed:
Aperture:

A AF Micro NIKKOR Lenses
Provided that an external exposure meter is used, the exposure ratio need
only be taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set
aperture.
A Extended Shutter Speeds

For shutter speeds as slow as 900 s (15 minutes), select [On] for Custom
Setting d6 [Extended shutter speeds (M)].
A Exposure Indicators
The exposure indicators in the viewfinder and control panel show
whether the photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current
settings. Depending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b1 [EV
steps for exposure cntrl], the amount of under- or overexposure is
shown in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV.
Custom Setting b1 set to 1/3 step
Optimal Underexposed Overexposed by
exposure by 1/3 EV over 3 EV
Control
panel
Viewfinder
• The orientation of the exposure indicators can be reversed using
Custom Setting f7 [Reverse indicators].
A Exposure Warning
If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded, the displays
will flash.

User Settings: U1 and U2 Modes
Assign frequently-used settings to the U1 and U2 positions on
the mode dial.
❚❚ Saving User Settings

Follow the steps below to save settings:
1 Adjust settings.
Make the desired adjustments to camera settings, including:
• photo shooting menu options (some settings excluded),
• movie shooting menu options (some settings excluded),
• Custom Settings, and
• shooting mode, shutter speed (modes S and M), aperture
(modes A and M), flexible program (mode P), exposure and
flash compensation.
2 Select [Save user settings].

Press the G button to display the
menus. Highlight [Save user
settings] in the setup menu and
press 2.

3 Select a position.
Highlight [Save to U1] or [Save to U2] and press 2.
4 Save user settings.

Highlight [Save settings] using 1 and 3 and press J to
assign current settings to the selected user settings mode.
5 Take pictures using

saved settings.
Rotate the mode dial to U1
or U2 to recall the settings
last saved to the selected
position.

A User Settings
The following cannot be saved to U1 or U2.
• Photo shooting menu:
- [Storage folder]
- [Image area]
- [Manage Picture Control]
- [Multiple exposure]
- [Interval timer shooting]
- [Time-lapse movie]
- [Focus shift shooting]
• Movie shooting menu:
- [Image area]
- [Manage Picture Control]

❚❚ Resetting User Settings
To reset settings for U1 or U2 to default values:
1 Select [Reset user settings].

Press the G button to display the
menus. Highlight [Reset user
settings] in the setup menu and
press 2.
2 Select a position.
Highlight [Reset U1] or [Reset U2] and press 2.
3 Reset user settings.

Highlight [Reset] and press J to restore default settings for
the selected position. The camera will function in mode P.

Using Special Effects Modes
❚❚ Choosing an Effect
To choose an effect, rotate the mode dial to EFCT and then
rotate the main command dial to choose the desired option.
❚❚ Special Effects
Option Description
Use under conditions of darkness to record
monochrome images at high ISO sensitivities.
j [Night vision]
• Manual focus can be used if the camera is
unable to focus.
Overall saturation and contrast are increased for
f [Super vivid]
a more vibrant image.
Overall saturation is increased for a more lively
d [Pop]
image.
Sharpen outlines and simplify coloring for a
poster effect.
[Photo • e ([Photo illustration]) effects can be
e
illustration] adjusted in live view (0 122).
• Movies shot in this mode play back like a slide
show made up of a series of stills.

Option Description
Create photos and movies with saturation and
peripheral illumination similar to pictures shot
[Toy camera
k with a toy camera.
effect]
• k ([Toy camera effect]) effects can be
adjusted in live view (0 123).
Create photos that appear to be pictures of
dioramas. Works best when shooting from a
high vantage point.
[Miniature • l ([Miniature effect]) effects can be
l
effect] adjusted in live view (0 124).
• Miniature effect movies play back at high
speed.
• Sound is not recorded with movies.
All colors other than the selected colors are
recorded in black and white.
m [Selective color]
• m ([Selective color]) effects can be adjusted
in live view (0 126).
8 [Silhouette] Silhouette subjects against bright backgrounds.
Use with bright scenes to create bright images
9 [High key]
that seem filled with light.
Use with dark scenes to create dark, low-key
! [Low key]
images with prominent highlights.

A Preventing Blur
Use a tripod to prevent blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter
speeds.
A Special Effects Modes

• Pictures taken in j, f, d, e, k, l, or m mode with [NEF (RAW)]
selected for image quality will be recorded at an image quality of [JPEG
fine m], while in the case of pictures taken at a setting of NEF (RAW) +
JPEG, only the JPEG copy will be recorded.
• If [On] is selected for Custom Setting d8 [Save original (EFFECTS)], the
camera will save two copies of each picture shot in f, d, e, k, l, and
m modes: an unprocessed NEF(RAW) copy and a JPEG copy to which the
effect has been applied. If [Off] is selected, only the JPEG copy will be
saved.
• Effects cannot be adjusted during movie recording.
• The frame advance rates for CL (Continuous low speed) and CH
(Continuous high speed) slow when e or l is selected.
• In e and l modes, the live view display refresh rate will drop.

❚❚ Adjusting e (Photo Illustration) Settings
When e is selected, the effect can be adjusted in live view:

The view through the lens will be
2 Press J.
Photo illustration options will be
displayed.
3 Adjust outline thickness.

Press 4 to thin outlines or 2 to make
them thicker.
4 Press J.
Press J to save changes; the selected effect will be applied
during shooting.

❚❚ Adjusting k (Toy Camera Effect) Settings
When k is selected, the effect can be adjusted in live view:

2 Press J.
Toy camera effect options will be
displayed.
3 Adjust options.
• Press 1 or 3 to highlight the
desired setting.
• [Vividness]: Press 2 for more
saturation, 4 for less.
• [Vignetting]: Press 2 for more
vignetting, 4 for less.
4 Press J.
during shooting.

❚❚ Adjusting l (Miniature Effect) Settings
When l is selected, the effect can be adjusted in live view:

2 Position the focus point.

• Use the multi selector to position
the focus point in the area that you
want to be in focus.
• To check focus, press the shutter-
release button halfway.
• To temporarily clear miniature effect options from the
display and enlarge the view in the monitor for precise
focus, press X (T). Press W (Y) to restore the
miniature effect display.

3 Display options.
Press J to display miniature effect
options.
4 Choose the orientation and

size of the area that will be in
focus.
• Press 4 or 2 to choose the
orientation of the area that will be
in focus.
• Press 1 or 3 to choose the width of the area that will be in
focus.
5 Press J.
during shooting.
A Movies
Miniature effect movies play back at high speed. For example,
approximately 15 minutes of footage shot with 1920 × 1080/30p selected
for [Frame size/frame rate] in the movie shooting menu will play back in
about a minute.

❚❚ Adjusting m (Selective Color) Settings
When m is selected, the effect can be adjusted in live view:

2 Press J.
Selective color options will be
displayed.

3 Select colors.
• Frame an object of the desired color in the white square at
the center of the display.
• To zoom in for more precise color selection, press X
(T). Press W (Y) to zoom out.
• Press 1 to choose the color of the
object in the white square as one
that will be recorded in color when
photographs are taken; the
selected color will appear in the
first of the numbered color boxes.
• All colors other than those selected in the color boxes will
appear in black and white.
4 Choose the color range.

Press 1 or 3 to increase or decrease
the range of similar hues that will be
included in photographs; choose
from values between [1] and [7]. The
higher the value, the wider the range
of colors that will be included; the
lower the value, the lower the range
of colors that will be included.

5 Select additional colors.
• To select additional colors, rotate
the main command dial to highlight
another of the numbered color
boxes and repeat Steps 3 and 4.
• Up to 3 colors can be selected.

• To deselect the highlighted color,
press O (Q).
• To remove all colors, press and hold
O (Q). A confirmation dialog will
be displayed; select [Yes].
6 Press J.
during shooting.
D Note: Selective Color

• The camera may have difficulty detecting some colors. Saturated colors
are recommended.
• Higher values for color range may include hues from other colors.

Image Recording Options (Image Area,
Quality, and Size)
Adjusting Image Area Settings
Image area settings can be displayed by
selecting [Image area] in the photo
shooting menu.

❚❚ Choose Image Area
Choose the image area. The following options are available:
Option Description
Images are recorded in FX format with an angle of
c [FX (36×24)] view equivalent to a NIKKOR lens on a 35 mm
format camera.
Images are recorded in DX format. To calculate the
a [DX (24×16)] approximate focal length of the lens in 35 mm
format, multiply by 1.5.
m [1:1 (24×24)] Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 1 : 1.
Z [16:9 (36×20)] Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 16 : 9.
1 FX (36×24) 4 16 : 9 (36×20)
2 DX (24×16) 5 DX format (24×16) image
3 1 : 1 (24×24) circle
6 FX format (36×24) image circle

D DX Lenses
DX lenses are designed for use with DX format cameras and have a
smaller angle of view than lenses for 35 mm format cameras. If [Auto DX
crop] is off and an option other than [DX (24 × 16)] (DX format) is
selected for [Choose image area] when a DX lens is attached, the edges
of the image may be eclipsed. This may not be apparent in the viewfinder,
but when the images are played back you may notice a drop in resolution
or that the edges of the picture are blacked out.

A Choosing the Image Area via Buttons and Command Dials
If [Choose image area] has been assigned to a button using Custom
Setting f3 [Custom controls], the image area can be selected by pressing
the button and rotating a command dial.
• The selected crop is displayed in the viewfinder (0 130).
• The option currently selected for image area
can be displayed in the control panel and
viewfinder by pressing the button to which
[Choose image area] is assigned.
Image area Display

[FX (36×24)]
[DX (24×16)]
[1 : 1 (24×24)]
[16 : 9 (36×20)]
• Camera controls cannot be used to select image area when a DX lens is
attached and [Auto DX crop] is on.
A Image Size
Image size varies with the option selected for image area.

❚❚ [Auto DX Crop]
Choose whether the camera automatically selects the [DX
(24×16)] (DX format) image area when a DX lens is attached.
Option Description
The camera automatically selects the [DX (24×16)]
[On]
(DX format) image area when a DX lens is attached.
[Off] Automatic image-area selection disabled.
❚❚ The Viewfinder Mask Display

If [On] is selected, the area outside crop ([FX (36×24)] excepted)
will be shown in gray in the viewfinder.

Adjusting Image Quality
Choose the image quality option used when photographs are
recorded.
Option Description
Record two copies of each photo: an
[NEF (RAW) + JPEG finem]
NEF (RAW) image and a JPEG copy.
• For the JPEG copy, you can choose
[NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine] from options prioritizing image
quality or file size. Options with a star
[NEF (RAW) + JPEG normalm] (“m”) prioritize image quality, those
without a star (“m”) file size.
• Only the JPEG copy is displayed
[NEF (RAW) + JPEG normal] during playback. The NEF (RAW)
image can only be viewed using a
[NEF (RAW) + JPEG basicm] computer.
• Deleting the JPEG copy from the
camera also deletes the NEF (RAW)
[NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic]
image.
[NEF (RAW)] Record photos in NEF (RAW) format.
[JPEG finem] Record photos in JPEG format. ”Fine”
produces higher quality pictures than
[JPEG fine]
”normal” and ”normal” higher quality
[JPEG normalm] pictures than “basic”.
[JPEG normal] • Choose options with m to maximize
quality, options without m to ensure
[JPEG basicm]
that all images have more or less the
[JPEG basic] same file size.

A NEF (RAW)
• NEF (RAW) image files (extension “*.nef”) contain the raw data output
from the image sensor.
• Using Nikon’s ViewNX-i or Capture NX-D software, you can adjust and
re-adjust settings such as exposure compensation and white balance as
often as you please without degrading image quality, making this
format ideal for photos that will be processed in multiple different ways.
ViewNX-i and Capture NX-D are available free-of-charge from the Nikon
Download Center.
• The process of converting NEF (RAW) images to other formats such as
JPEG is referred to as “NEF (RAW) processing”. You can save NEF (RAW)
images in other formats using the ViewNX-i and Capture NX-D
computer applications or the [NEF (RAW) processing] option in the
camera retouch menu.

❚❚ Choosing an Image Quality Option
During viewfinder photography, you can choose an image
quality option by holding the X (T) button and rotating the
main command dial.
A The Photo Shooting Menu [Image Quality] Option

Image quality can also be adjusted using the [Image quality] item in the
photo shooting menu. Use the [Image quality] item in the photo
shooting menu to adjust image quality during live view.
A Recording Pictures to Two Memory Cards

If [RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2] is selected for [Role played by card in Slot
2] when photographs are taken at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) +
JPEG, the NEF (RAW) copy will be saved to the card in Slot 1 and the JPEG
copy to the card in Slot 2.

Choosing an Image Size
Choose a size for new JPEG pictures. The size for JPEG pictures
can be selected from [Large], [Medium], and [Small]. The
number of pixels in the image varies with the option selected
for image area (0 129).
Image area Option Size (pixels) Print size (cm/in.) *
Large 6048 × 4024 51.2 × 34.1/20.2 × 13.4
[FX (36×24)]
Medium 4528 × 3016 38.3 × 25.5/15.1 × 10.1
(FX format)
Small 3024 × 2016 25.6 × 17.1/10.1 × 6.7
Large 3936 × 2624 33.3 × 22.2/13.1 × 8.7
[DX (24×16)]
Medium 2944 × 1968 24.9 × 16.7/9.8 × 6.6
(DX format)
Small 1968 × 1312 16.7 × 11.1/6.6 × 4.4
Large 4016 × 4016 34.0 × 34.0/13.4 × 13.4
[1 : 1
Medium 3008 × 3008 25.5 × 25.5/10.0 × 10.0
(24×24)]
Small 2000 × 2000 16.9 × 16.9/6.7 × 6.7
Large 6048 × 3400 51.2 × 28.8/20.2 × 11.3
[16 : 9
Medium 4528 × 2544 38.3 × 21.5/15.1 × 8.5
(36×20)]
Small 3024 × 1696 25.6 × 14.4/10.1 × 5.7
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals
image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi;
1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm).

❚❚ Choosing an Image Size
During viewfinder photography, you can choose the image size
by holding the X (T) button and rotating the sub-command
dial.
A The Photo Shooting Menu [Image Size] Option

Image size for JPEG images can also be adjusted using the [Image size]
item in the photo shooting menu. Use the [Image size] item in the photo
shooting menu to adjust image size during live view.

Choosing How the Camera Focuses
(Focus)
Choosing a Focus Mode
Rotate the focus-mode
selector to AF to select
autofocus or to M to select
manual focus.
During viewfinder photography, the

camera focuses using 51 focus points.

Autofocus Mode
Choose how the camera focuses in autofocus mode.
Option Description
The camera uses AF-S when photographing
[AF mode
AF-A stationary subjects and AF-C when
auto-switch]
photographing subjects that are in motion.
For stationary subjects. Focus locks when
shutter-release button is pressed halfway. At
AF-S [Single AF] default settings, shutter can only be released
when in-focus indicator (I) is displayed (focus
priority).
For moving subjects. Camera focuses
continuously while shutter-release button is
pressed halfway; if subject moves, camera will
[Continuous engage predictive focus tracking to predict final
AF-C
AF] distance to subject and adjust focus as
necessary. At default settings, shutter can be
released whether or not subject is in focus
(release priority).

A Predictive Focus Tracking
If AF-C is selected for AF mode, or if AF-A is selected and the camera is
shooting using AF-C, the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if
the subject moves toward or away from the camera while the shutter-
release button is pressed halfway or the AF-ON button is pressed. This
allows the camera to track focus while attempting to predict where the
subject will be when the shutter is released.

Option Description
The camera automatically selects AF-S when
the subject is stationary and AF-C when the
[AF mode
AF-A subject is in motion.
auto-switch]
• This option is available only during still
photography.
For stationary subjects. Press the shutter-
release button halfway to focus. If the camera
is able to focus, the focus point will turn from
red to green; focus will lock while the shutter-
release button is pressed halfway. If the
AF-S [Single AF]
camera fails to focus, the focus point will flash
red.
• At default settings, the shutter can only be
released if the camera is able to focus (focus
priority).
For moving subjects. The camera focuses
continuously while the shutter-release button
is pressed halfway; if the subject moves, the
[Continuous camera will predict the final distance to the
AF-C
AF] subject and adjust focus as necessary.
• At default settings, the shutter can be
released whether or not the subject is in
focus (release priority).

Option Description
The camera adjusts focus continuously in
response to subject movement or changes in
composition. When the shutter-release button
AF-F [Full-time AF]
is pressed halfway, the focus point will turn
from red to green and focus will lock.
• This option is available only during filming.

❚❚ Choosing an Autofocus Mode
To choose the autofocus mode, hold the AF-mode button and
rotate the main command dial.
• During viewfinder photography, the selected AF mode is

displayed in the control panel and viewfinder.
• During live view photography and

filming, the selected AF mode is

AF-Area Mode
Choose how the camera selects the focus point for autofocus.
Option Description
Select the focus point (0 159); the camera will focus
[Single-point
on the subject in the selected focus point only. Use
AF]
with stationary subjects.
Select the focus point. In AF-A and AF-C focus modes,
the camera will focus based on information from
surrounding focus points if the subject briefly leaves
the selected point. The number of focus points varies
with the mode selected:
[Dynamic-area • [Dynamic-area AF (9 points)]: Choose when there is
AF (9 points)]/
time to compose the photograph or when
[Dynamic-area
photographing subjects that are moving predictably
AF (21 points)]/
(e.g., runners or race cars on a track).
[Dynamic-area
• [Dynamic-area AF (21 points)]: Choose when
AF (51 points)]
photographing subjects that are moving
unpredictably (e.g., players at a football game).
• [Dynamic-area AF (51 points)]: Choose when
photographing subjects that are moving quickly and
cannot be easily framed in the viewfinder (e.g., birds).

Option Description
Select the focus point. While the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway in AF-A and AF-C focus
modes, the camera will use all 51 focus points to track
subjects that leave the selected point and choose new
points as required.
• Use to quickly compose pictures with subjects that
[3D-tracking]
are moving erratically from side to side (e.g., tennis
players).
• If the subject leaves viewfinder, remove your finger
from the shutter-release button and recompose the
photograph with the subject in the selected focus
point.
The camera focuses using a group of focus points
selected by the user, reducing the risk of the camera
focusing on the background instead of on the main
[Group-area subject.
AF] • Use for snapshots or photos of moving subjects that
are hard to frame using the [Single-point AF] option.
• Face detection is enabled. The camera gives priority
to any faces detected.

Option Description
The camera automatically
detects the subject and
selects the focus point.
• If a face is detected, the
camera will give priority to
the portrait subject (face-
detection AF). This lets
you concentrate on composition and facial
[Auto-area AF] expressions even if your subject is in motion (0 155).
• Use on occasions when you don’t have time to select
the focus point yourself, for portraits, or snapshots
and other spur-of-the-moment photos.
• When AF-S is selected for autofocus mode, the active
focus points are briefly highlighted after the camera
focuses. When AF-C is selected, or when AF-A is
selected and photographs are taken using AF-C, only
the main focus point is displayed.

D AF-Area Mode
AF-area mode is shown in the control panel and viewfinder.
Viewfinder focus-
Control
AF-area mode Viewfinder point display
panel
(during selection)
[Single-point AF]
[Dynamic-area AF
(9 points)] *
[Dynamic-area AF
(21 points)] *
[Dynamic-area AF
(51 points)] *
[3D-tracking]
[Group-area AF]
[Auto-area AF]
* Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder. Remaining focus

points provide information to assist focus operation.

A 3D-Tracking
When [3D-tracking] is selected for AF-area mode, the camera stores the
colors in the area surrounding the focus point at the moment the shutter-
release button is pressed halfway. Consequently 3D-tracking may not
produce the desired results with subjects that are similar in color to the
background or that occupy a very small area of the frame.
A Quick Focus-Point Selection

For quicker focus-point selection, choose [Every other point] for Custom
Setting a6 [Focus points used] to use only a quarter of the available focus
points.
A AF-S/AF-I Teleconverters
If [3D-tracking] or [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode when an
AF-S/AF-I teleconverter is used, [Single-point AF] will automatically be
selected at combined apertures slower than f/5.6.

Option Description
Recommended for shots involving static subjects,
such as buildings, in-studio product photography,
or close-ups. Use for pinpoint focus on a selected
[Pinpoint spot in the frame smaller than the focus point for
3
AF] [Single-point AF]. This option is available only
when AF-S is chosen for AF mode during still
photography. Focusing may be slower than with
[Single-point AF].
[Single- The camera focuses on a point selected by the user.
d
point AF] Use with stationary subjects.
As for [Single-point AF], except the camera
[Wide-area focuses on a wider area, the focus areas for [Wide-
f area AF (L)] being larger than those for [Wide-area
AF (S)]
AF (S)]. Use for snapshots or photos of moving
subjects that are hard to frame using [Single-point
AF], or during movie recording for smooth focus
when making panning or tilting shots or filming
[Wide-area moving subjects. If the selected focus area contains
g
AF (L)] subjects at different distances from the camera, the
camera will assign priority to the closest subject.

Option Description
The camera focuses on a point selected by the user.
If the subject briefly leaves the selected point, the
camera will focus based on information from
surrounding focus points.
[Dynamic- • Use for photographs of athletes and other active
e
area AF] subjects that are hard to frame using [Single-
point AF].
• This option is available only when AF-A or AF-C is
selected for autofocus mode during still
photography.
The camera automatically detects the subject and
selects the focus area.
• Use on occasions when you don’t have time to
select the focus point yourself, for portraits, or for
snapshots and other spur-of-the-moment
photos.
• If a portrait subject is detected during live view
photography, an amber border indicating the
[Auto-area
h focus point will appear around the subject’s face.
AF]
If the camera detects the subject’s eyes, the
amber border will instead appear around an eye
(face/eye-detection AF). This frees you to
concentrate on composition and your subject’s
expression when photographing active portrait
subjects (0 155).
• Subject tracking (0 158) can be activated by
pressing the J button.

D Using Autofocus in Live View
• The camera may be unable to focus if:
- The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame
- The subject lacks contrast
- The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting
brightness
- The focus point includes night-time spot lighting or a neon sign or
other light source that changes in brightness
- Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor,
sodium-vapor, or similar lighting
- A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used
- The subject appears smaller than the focus point
- The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds
or a row of windows in a skyscraper)
- The subject is moving
• The monitor may brighten or darken while the camera focuses.
• The focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera
is unable to focus.
• Use an AF-S or AF-P lens. The desired results may not be achieved with
other lenses or teleconverters.

A s: The Center Focus Point
In all AF-area modes except [Auto-area AF], a dot appears in the focus
point when it is in the center of the frame.
A Quick Focus-Point Selection

For quicker focus-point selection, choose [Every other point] for Custom
Setting a6 [Focus points used] to use only a quarter of the available focus
points (the number of points available for [Pinpoint AF] and [Wide-area
AF (L)] does not change).

❚❚ Choosing an AF-Area Mode
To choose the AF-area mode, hold the AF-mode button and
rotate the sub-command dial.
• During viewfinder photography, the selected AF-area mode is

displayed in the control panel and viewfinder.
• During live view photography and

filming, the selected AF-area mode is

❚❚ Face/Eye-Detection AF
When [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-
area mode, you have the option of
enabling face-detection AF, allowing the
camera to detect the faces of human
portrait subjects. Face/eye detection AF,
in which the camera detects both faces
and eyes, is available during live view photography. Face- and
eye-detection AF can be configured using Custom Setting a5
[Auto-area AF face/eye detection].
• If [Face and eye detection on] or
[Face detection on] is selected, the
camera will assign focus priority to the
faces of any portrait subjects it detects.
• If the subject looks away after their
face is detected, the focus point will
move to track their motion.
• During playback, you can zoom in on the face used for focus
by pressing the J button.

Live View Photography
• If [Face and eye detection on] is
selected and a portrait subject is
detected, an amber border indicating
the focus point will appear around the
subject’s face. If the camera detects the
subject’s eyes during live view
photography, the border will instead be displayed around one
or the other of their eyes.
• Faces detected when [Face detection on] is selected are
similarly indicated by an amber border.
• If AF-S is selected for AF mode, or if AF-A is selected and the
camera is shooting using AF-S, the focus point will turn green
when the camera focuses.
• If more than one portrait subject or more than one eye is
detected, e and f icons will appear on the focus point, and
you will be able to position the focus point over a different
face or eye by pressing 4 or 2.
• If the subject looks away after their face is detected, the focus
point will move to track their motion.
• During playback, you can zoom in on the face or eye used for
focus by pressing J.

D Face/Eye-Detection AF
• Eye detection is not available during movie recording.
• Eye and face detection may not perform as expected if:
- the subject’s face occupies a very large or very small proportion of the
frame,
- the subject’s face is lit too brightly or too poorly,
- the subject is wearing glasses or sunglasses,
- the subject’s face or eyes are obscured by hair or other objects, or
- the subject moves excessively during shooting.

❚❚ Subject Tracking AF
If [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area
mode during live view, you can press J
to enable focus tracking. The focus point
will change to a targeting reticle;
position the reticle over the target and
press the AF-ON button or press J again
to start tracking. The focus point will track the selected subject
as it moves through the frame (in the case of portrait subjects,
focus will track the subject’s face). To end tracking, press J a
third time. To exit subject-tracking mode, press the W (Y)
button.
D Subject Tracking
The camera may be unable to track subjects if they move quickly, leave
the frame or are obscured by other objects, change visibly in size, color, or
brightness, or are too small, too large, too bright, too dark, or similar in
color or brightness to the background.

Focus Point Selection
Except when [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode, the
focus point can be selected manually, allowing photographs to
be composed with the subject positioned almost anywhere in
the frame.
1 Undo the focus

selector lock.
Rotate the focus selector
lock to I.
2 Use the multi selector to select the focus point

while the standby timer is on.
• During viewfinder photography,
you can choose from 51 focus
points.
• During live view, the focus point

can be positioned anywhere in the
frame.

• The center focus point can be selected by pressing J.
• The focus selector lock
can be rotated to the
locked (L) position
following selection to
prevent the selected
focus point from
changing when the multi selector is pressed.
A Focus Lock
If your subject will not be in the selected focus point in the final
composition, or if the camera is unable to focus on the selected subject,
press the A button to lock focus at the desired distance before
recomposing the shot (0 83).

A Getting Good Results with Autofocus
The camera may be unable to focus under the conditions listed below, in
which case the shutter release may be disabled or pictures may be out of
focus, the latter a result of the camera either displaying the in-focus
indicator (I)—or, in live view, displaying the focus point in green—when
the subject is not in focus. Focus manually or use focus lock to focus on
another subject at the same distance.
• There is little contrast between the subject and the background, as may
be the case if the subject is photographed against a featureless wall or
the background is the same color as the subject.
• The focus point contains objects at different distances from the camera,
as may be the case if the subject is inside a cage.
• The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns such as the
rows of windows in a skyscraper.
• The focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness, as may
be the case if the subject is half in the shade.
• Background objects appear larger than the main subject, as may be the
case if a building is in the frame behind the subject.
• The subject contains many fine details, as may be the case when the
subject is a field of flowers.

Manual Focus
Manual focus is available for lenses that do not support
autofocus (non-AF NIKKOR lenses) or when the autofocus does
not produce the desired results.
• AF lenses: Set the lens focus
mode switch (if present) and
camera focus-mode selector
to M.
• Manual focus lenses: Focus manually.

To focus manually, adjust the lens focus
ring until the image displayed on the
clear matte field in the viewfinder is in
focus.
D AF Lenses
Do not use AF lenses with the lens focus-mode switch set to M and the
camera focus-mode selector set to AF. Failure to observe this precaution
could damage the camera or lens. This does not apply to AF-S and AF-P
lenses, which can be used in M mode without setting the camera focus-
mode selector to M.

❚❚ The Electronic Rangefinder
The focus indicators (I) in the
viewfinder and monitor can be used to
confirm whether the subject in the
selected focus point is in focus.
• In-focus indicators (I) are displayed
when the subject is in focus.
Focus indicator Status
The subject is in focus.

(steady)
The focus point is in front of the subject.

(steady)
The focus point is behind the subject.

(steady)
The camera is unable to focus.

(steady)
• Note that with the subjects listed in “Getting Good Results
with Autofocus” (0 161), the in-focus indicator (I) may
sometimes be displayed when the subject is not in focus.
Confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting. During live
view, you can check focus by zooming in on the view through
the lens.
• A tripod is recommended if you experience trouble focusing.

A AF-P Lenses
When an AF-P lens is used in manual focus mode, the in-focus indicator
will flash in the viewfinder (or in live view, the focus point will flash in the
monitor) to warn that continuing to rotate the focus ring in the current
direction will not bring the subject into focus.
A The Focal Plane Mark and Flange-Back Distance

Focus distance is measured from the focal
plane mark (E) on the camera body,
which shows the position of the focal
plane inside the camera (q). Use this mark
when measuring the distance to your
subject for manual focus or macro
photography. The distance between the
focal plane and the lens mounting flange
is known as the “flange-back distance” (w). On this camera, the flange-
back distance is 46.5 mm (1.83 in.).
A Focus Peaking
If focus peaking is enabled using Custom
Setting d11 [Peaking highlights], objects that
are in focus will be indicated by colored
outlines that appear when focus is adjusted
manually during live view. Note that peaking
highlights may not be displayed if the camera
is unable to detect outlines, in which case focus
can be checked by zooming in on the view through the lens in the display.

Exposure-Related Settings (Metering
and Exposure Compensation)
Choosing How the Camera Sets Exposure
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. Choose
the method used and area metered when the camera sets
exposure.
• In modes other than P, S, A, and M, the camera selects the
metering method according to the scene.
Option Description
Produces natural results in most situations. The
camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets
[Matrix
L exposure according to tone (brightness)
metering]
distribution, color, distance, and composition for
results close to those seen by the human eye.
The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the
greatest weight to an area in the center (the size of
the area can be selected using Custom Setting b4
[Center- [Center-weighted area]; if a non-CPU lens or an
M weighted AF-S Fisheye NIKKOR 8–15mm f/3.5–4.5E ED lens is
metering] attached, the area is equivalent to a circle 12 mm in
diameter). This is the classic meter for portraits and
is recommended when using filters with an
exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.

Option Description
The camera meters a circle 4 mm (0.16 in.) in
diameter (approximately 1.5% of the frame). The
circle is centered on the current focus point,
making it possible to meter off-center subjects (the
[Spot camera will meter the center focus point if a
N
metering] non-CPU lens or an AF-S Fisheye NIKKOR 8–15mm
f/3.5–4.5E ED lens is attached or if [Auto-area AF] is
in effect; 0 145). Spot metering ensures that the
subject will be correctly exposed, even when the
background is much brighter or darker.
The camera assigns the greatest weight to
[Highlight-
highlights. Use to reduce loss of detail in highlights,
t weighted
for example when photographing spotlit
metering]
performers on stage.

❚❚ Choosing a Metering Option
Hold the W (Y) button and rotate the main command dial.
• The selected metering option is displayed in the control panel
and viewfinder.

A [Matrix Metering] and Lens Type
The metering method used when [Matrix metering] is selected varies
with the lens.
• CPU lenses:
- 3D color matrix metering III: Available with type D, E, and G CPU
lenses. The camera includes distance information when calculating
exposure.
- Color matrix metering III: Available with CPU lenses of types other
than D, E, and G. Distance information is not included.
• Non-CPU lenses:
- Color matrix metering is available if lens data are provided using the
[Non-CPU lens data] option in the setup menu. [Center-weighted
metering] will be used if lens data are not provided.
A [Highlight-Weighted Metering] and Lens Type

[Center-weighted metering] will be used if [Highlight-weighted
metering] is selected when non-CPU lenses and certain CPU lenses (AI-P
NIKKOR lenses and AF lenses of types other than D, E, or G) are attached.

Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only)
The camera offers two options for long time-exposures: Bulb
and Time. Long time-exposures can be used for pictures of
fireworks, night scenery, the stars, or moving lights.
Shutter speed: Bulb (35-second exposure)

Aperture: f/25
Shutter
Description
speed
The shutter remains open while the shutter-release button
Bulb
is held down.
The exposure starts when the shutter-release button is
Time pressed and ends when the button is pressed a second
time.
• To prevent blur, use a tripod or an optional wireless remote
controller or remote cord.

1 Ready the camera.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level
surface.
2 Rotate the mode dial

to M.
Keeping the mode dial
lock release pressed,
rotate the mode dial to M.
3 Choose a shutter speed.

• While the exposure meters are on, rotate the main
command dial to choose a shutter speed of Bulb (A) or
Time (%).
• The exposure indicators do not appear when Bulb (A)

or Time (%) is selected.

4 Open the shutter.
• Bulb: After focusing, press the shutter-release button on
the camera or optional remote cord or wireless remote
controller all the way down. Keep the shutter-release
button pressed until the exposure is complete.
• Time: After focusing, press the shutter-release button all
the way down.
5 Close the shutter.

• Bulb: Take your finger off the shutter-release button.
• Time: Press the shutter-release button all the way down.
A Long Time-Exposures
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in the
photograph or interfering with exposure, we recommend that you
remove the rubber eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied
eyepiece cap (0 10). Nikon recommends using a fully charged battery or
an optional AC adapter and power connector to prevent loss of power
while the shutter is open. Note that noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced
bright pixels or fog) may be present in long exposures. Bright spots and
fog can be reduced by choosing [On] for [Long exposure NR] in the
photo shooting menu.

Autoexposure Lock
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after setting
exposure for a specific area of the subject. Exposure lock comes
in handy when the area used to set exposure is much brighter
or darker than its surroundings.
1 Select [Center-weighted metering] or [Spot

metering] (0 166).
2 Lock exposure.
• Position the subject in the selected
focus point and press the shutter-
release button halfway. With the
shutter-release button pressed
halfway and the subject positioned
in the focus point, press the A
button to lock exposure (if you are
using autofocus, confirm that the I in-focus indicator
appears in the viewfinder).
• While exposure lock is in effect, an
AE-L indicator will appear in the
viewfinder.

3 Recompose the photograph.
Keeping the A button pressed,
recompose the photograph and
shoot.
A Metered Area
In [Spot metering] (0 166), exposure will be locked at the value metered
in a circle centered on the selected focus point. In [Center-weighted
metering], exposure will be locked at the value metered in a 12-mm circle
in the center of the viewfinder.
A Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture

While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be adjusted
without altering the metered value for exposure:
Mode Setting
P Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; 0 109)
S Shutter speed
A Aperture
• The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and control panel.
• Note that metering cannot be changed while exposure lock is in effect.

Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value
suggested by the camera, making pictures brighter or darker. It
is most effective when [Spot metering] or [Center-weighted
metering] is selected for metering (0 166).
−1 EV No exposure +1 EV
compensation
❚❚ Adjusting Exposure Compensation

Hold the E button and rotate the main command dial.
• The selected value is displayed in the control panel and
viewfinder.
• Choose from values between –5 EV (underexposure) and +5

EV (overexposure).
• By default, changes are made in increments of 1/3 EV. The size
of the increments can be changed using Custom Setting b1
[EV steps for exposure cntrl].

• In general, positive values make the subject brighter while
negative values make it darker.
• The current value is displayed in the control panel and
viewfinder when the E button is pressed.
No exposure
compensation
Display − 0.3 EV +2.0 EV
(E button
pressed)
Control
panel
Viewfinder
• E icons and exposure indicators will appear in the control

panel and viewfinder. In modes other than M, the zero (“0”) at
the center of the exposure indicator will flash in the control
panel.
• Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure

compensation to ±0.0. Exposure compensation is not reset
when the camera is turned off.

A Mode M
In mode M, exposure compensation affects only the exposure indicator;
shutter speed and aperture do not change.
A Using a Flash
When a flash is used, exposure compensation affects both flash level and
exposure, altering the brightness of both the main subject and the
background. Custom Setting e3 [Exposure comp. for flash] can be used
to restrict the effects of exposure compensation to the background only.

Choosing the Operation Performed
When the Shutter Is Released (Release
Mode)
Choosing a Release Mode Such as Single-
Frame, Continuous, or Quiet Shutter-Release
To choose a release mode, press the
release mode dial lock release and turn
the release mode dial so that the pointer
aligns with the desired setting.

Mode Description
The camera takes one photograph each time the
S Single frame
At default settings, the camera takes photos at up
to 3 fps while the shutter-release button is
pressed.
• The frame advance rate can be selected using
Continuous
CL Custom Setting d1 [CL mode shooting speed].
low speed
Choose from values of from 1 to 6 fps. Note,
however, that regardless of the option selected,
the maximum frame advance rate during live
view is 3 fps.
While shutter-release button is held down,
camera records up to 7 frames per second. Use
for active subjects.
• When [On] is selected for [Silent live view
photography] in the photo shooting menu
Continuous during live view, the frame advance rate varies
CH
high speed with the option selected for [NEF (RAW)
recording] > [NEF (RAW) bit depth] in the
photo shooting menu, increasing to a
maximum of approximately 8 fps when [14-bit]
is selected or approximately 12 fps when [12-
bit] is selected.

Mode Description
As for single frame, except that the mirror does
not click back into place while the shutter-release
button is fully pressed, allowing the user to
Quiet
control the timing of the click made by the mirror,
Q shutter-
which is also quieter than in single frame mode.
release
In addition, a beep does not sound regardless of
the setting selected for [Beep options] > [Beep
on/off] in the setup menu.
Qc (quiet
The camera takes pictures at up to 3 fps while the
continuous)
QC shutter-release button is pressed; camera noise is
shutter-
reduced.
release
E Self-timer Take pictures with the self-timer (0 183).
Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in
telephoto or close-up photography or in other
MUP Mirror up situations in which the slightest camera
movement can result in blurred photographs
(0 185).

D Burst Photography
• Depending on shooting conditions and memory card performance, the
memory card access lamp may light for anywhere from a few seconds to
a few minutes. Do not remove the memory card while the memory card
access lamp is lit. Not only could any unrecorded images be lost, but the
camera or memory card could be damaged.
• If the camera is switched off while the memory card access lamp is lit,
the power will not turn off until all images in the buffer have been
recorded.
• If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer, the shutter
release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card.
A The Memory Buffer

• While the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the camera will
show the number of pictures that can be stored in the memory buffer.
• When the buffer is full, the display will show t00 and the frame rate will
drop.
• The number shown is approximate. The actual number of photos that
can be stored in the memory buffer varies with camera settings and
shooting conditions.
• Memory buffer capacity may drop briefly immediately after the camera
is turned on.
• Memory buffer capacity can be viewed in the monitor during live view.

A Frame Advance Rate
The figures for frame advance rate apply in mode S or M at shutter speeds
of 1/250 s or faster with AF-C selected for autofocus mode and other
settings at default values. Frame advance rates may slow:
• at slow shutter speeds,
• when [On] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO
sensitivity control] in the photo shooting menu and ISO sensitivity is
altered automatically by the camera,
• when ISO sensitivity is set to a value of from Hi 0.3 to Hi 2,
• if flicker is detected with [Enable] selected for [Flicker reduction] >
[Flicker reduction setting] in the photo shooting menu,
• at extremely small apertures (high f-numbers),
• when vibration reduction (available with VR lenses) is on,
• when the battery is low,
• with certain lenses, or
• if a non-CPU lens is attached with [Aperture ring] selected for Custom
Setting f5 [Customize command dials] > [Aperture setting].

Self-Timer Mode (E)
The self-timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for self-
portraits.
1 Select self-timer mode.

Press the release mode dial lock
release and turn the release mode
dial to E.
2 Frame the photograph and

focus.
The timer will not start if the camera
is unable to focus with AF-S selected
for AF mode or in other situations in which the shutter
cannot be released.

3 Start the timer.
• Press the shutter-release button all the way down to start
the timer; the shutter will be released after about 10
seconds, during which the self-timer lamp will at first flash
for approximately 8 seconds and then light for roughly
2 seconds.
• To turn the self-timer off before a photograph is taken, turn

the release mode dial to another setting.
• The timer duration, the number shots taken, and the
interval between shots can be selected using Custom
Setting c3 [Self-timer].

Mirror up Mode (MUP)
Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by camera
movement when the mirror is raised. To use mirror-up mode,
press the release mode dial lock release and rotate the release
mode dial to MUP (mirror up). After pressing the shutter-release
button halfway to set focus and exposure, press the shutter-
release button the rest of the way down to raise the mirror. Z
will be displayed in the control panel; press the shutter-release
button all the way down again to take the picture.
D Mirror Up
While the mirror is raised, photos cannot be framed in the viewfinder and
autofocus and metering will not be performed.

A Mirror-Up Mode
• Use of a tripod is recommended.
• To prevent blurring caused by camera movement, press the shutter-
release button smoothly.
• The mirror lowers when shooting ends.
• A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for
about 30 s after the mirror is raised.
• In live view, the picture is taken the first time the shutter-release button
is pressed all the way down.

Adjusting the Camera’s Sensitivity to
Light (ISO Sensitivity)
ISO Sensitivity
The camera’s sensitivity to light can be adjusted according to
the amount of light available. Choose from settings that range
from ISO 100 and ISO 51200. Settings of from about 0.3 to 1 EV
below ISO 100 and 0.3 to 2 EV above ISO 51200 are also
available for special situations. The higher the ISO sensitivity,
the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing higher
shutter speeds or smaller apertures.

❚❚ Adjusting ISO Sensitivity
Hold the S (Q) button and rotate the main command dial.
• The selected option is displayed in the control panel and
viewfinder.
• b and all EFCT modes other than j also offer an ISO

sensitivity of X ([Auto]). When X is selected, the
camera adjusts ISO sensitivity automatically.
• By default, changes are made in increments of 1/3 EV. The size
of the increments can be changed using Custom Setting b1
[EV steps for exposure cntrl].

A The Photo Shooting Menu [ISO Sensitivity Settings] Option
ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the
[ISO sensitivity settings] item in the photo
shooting menu.
A High ISO Sensitivities

The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light
needed to make an exposure, allowing pictures
to be taken when lighting is poor and helping
prevent blur when the subject is in motion. Note, however, that the
higher the sensitivity, the more likely the image is to be affected by
“noise” in the form of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines.
• “Noise” can be reduced by enabling high ISO noise reduction. High ISO
noise reduction can be enabled using the [High ISO NR] items in the
photo and movie shooting menus.
A Hi 0.3–Hi 2
A setting of [Hi 0.3] corresponds to an ISO sensitivity approximately
0.3 EV higher than ISO 51200 (ISO 64000) and [Hi 2.0] to an ISO sensitivity
approximately 2 EV higher (ISO 204800). Note that pictures taken at these
settings are particularly prone to “noise” in the form of randomly-spaced
bright pixels, fog, or lines.
A Lo 0.3–Lo 1
The settings [Lo 0.3] through [Lo 1.0] correspond to ISO sensitivities 0.3–
1 EV below ISO 100 (ISO 80–50 equivalent). Use for larger apertures or
slower shutter speeds when lighting is bright. Highlights may be
overexposed. In most cases, ISO sensitivities of ISO [100] or above are
recommended.

Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
Auto ISO sensitivity control automatically adjusts ISO sensitivity
if optimal exposure cannot be achieved at the value selected by
the user in P, S, A, and M modes.
❚❚ Enabling Auto ISO Sensitivity Control

1 Select [ISO sensitivity settings]
in the photo shooting menu,
highlight [Auto ISO sensitivity
control] and press 2.
2 Select [On].
• Highlight [On] and press J to
enable auto ISO sensitivity control.
If a flash is used, ISO sensitivity will
be adjusted appropriately.
• If [Off] is selected, sensitivity will
remain fixed at the value selected by the user.

3 Adjust settings.
• Adjust auto ISO sensitivity control
settings.
Option Description
To prevent ISO sensitivity being raised too high, you
can select an upper limit for ISO sensitivity control;
[Maximum
choose from values of from ISO 200 to Hi 2. The
sensitivity]
minimum value that will be selected using auto ISO
sensitivity control is ISO 100.
Choose the maximum ISO sensitivity for flash
photography; options range from ISO 200 to Hi 2.
[Maximum
Selecting [Same as without flash] sets the
sensitivity
maximum ISO sensitivity for flash photography to
with c]
the value currently selected for [Maximum
sensitivity].

Option Description
In modes P and A, auto ISO sensitivity control only
takes effect if shutter speed needed for optimal
exposure would fall below this value; choose from
settings of 1/4000 s to 30 s. If [Auto] is selected, the
camera will choose the minimum shutter speed
based on lens focal length (CPU lenses only). For
example, the camera will automatically choose faster
minimum shutter speeds to prevent blur caused by
[Minimum camera shake when a long lens is attached.
shutter • To view auto shutter-speed selection options,
speed] highlight [Auto] and press 2. Auto shutter-speed
selection can be fine-tuned by choosing faster or
slower minimums. Faster settings can be used to
reduce blur when photographing fast-moving
subjects.
• Shutter speeds may drop below the selected
minimum if optimal exposure cannot be achieved
at the ISO sensitivity chosen for [Maximum
sensitivity].
• Press J to save changes.

When [On] is selected for [Auto ISO sensitivity control], ISO
AUTO indicators will appear in the control panel and
viewfinder. When these indicators are lit (not flashing), pictures
will be taken at the sensitivity selected for [ISO sensitivity].
When sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the user,
the ISO AUTO indicators will flash and the altered value will be
shown in the displays.

D Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
• If value currently selected for [ISO sensitivity] is higher than that
chosen for [Maximum sensitivity], the value chosen for [ISO
sensitivity] will serve as the upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity control.
• During flash photography, shutter speed is limited to the range defined
by the values selected for Custom Settings e1 [Flash sync speed] and
e2 [Flash shutter speed]. If the value selected for [Minimum shutter
speed] is not in this range, the value selected for Custom Setting e2
[Flash shutter speed] becomes the effective minimum shutter speed.
• If a non-CPU lens is used without lens data, the minimum shutter speed
will be fixed at 1/30 s.
• If an optional flash unit is attached, ISO sensitivity may be raised
automatically when auto ISO sensitivity control is used in combination
with slow sync flash modes, possibly preventing the camera from
selecting slow shutter speeds (0 460, 465).
A Turning Auto ISO Sensitivity Control On or Off

You can turn [Auto ISO sensitivity control] on or off by pressing the S
(Q) button and rotating the sub-command dial (0 93).

Achieving Natural Colors with Different
Light Sources (White Balance)
White Balance
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of
the light source. Auto white balance (4) is recommended with
most light sources. If the desired results cannot be achieved
with auto white balance, choose an option from the list below
or use preset white balance.
• In modes other than P, S, A, and M, the camera adjusts white
balance automatically according to the scene.
Option (K *) Description
White balance is adjusted automatically
for optimal results with most light
sources. When an optional flash unit is
4 [Auto]
used, white balance will be adjusted
according to the lighting produced by
the flash.
i [Keep white (reduce
Eliminate warm color cast produced by
warm colors)] (3500–
incandescent lighting.
8000 K)
j [Keep overall
Partially preserve warm color cast
atmosphere] (3500–
produced by incandescent lighting.
8000 K)
k [Keep warm lighting Preserve warm color cast produced by
colors] (3500–8000 K) incandescent lighting.

When used under natural light, this
D [Natural light auto]
option produces colors closer to those
(4500–8000 K)
seen by the naked eye.
H [Direct sunlight] (5200 K) Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.
G [Cloudy] (6000 K) Use in daylight under overcast skies.
M [Shade] (8000 K) Use in daylight with subjects in shade.
J [Incandescent] (3000 K) Use under incandescent lighting.
I [Fluorescent]
[Sodium-vapor lamps]
(2700 K)
[Warm-white
fluorescent] (3000 K)
[White fluorescent]
(3700 K)
Use under fluorescent lighting; choose
[Cool-white fluorescent] bulb type according to light source.
(4200 K)
[Day white fluorescent]
(5000 K)
[Daylight fluorescent]
(6500 K)
[High temp. mercury-
vapor] (7200 K)

Use with studio strobe lighting and other
5 [Flash] (5400 K)
large flash units.
K [Choose color Choose color temperature from list of
temperature] (2500– values or by holding Q/g (U) button
10000 K) and rotating sub-command dial.
Measure white balance for subject or
light source (press and hold Q/g (U)
button to enter direct measurement
L [Preset manual] mode, 0 209), copy white balance from
existing photograph, or choose existing
value by holding Q/g (U) button and
rotating sub-command dial.
* Color temperature. All values are approximate and do not reflect fine-
tuning (if applicable).
A 4 ([Auto])
The photo info for pictures shot using auto
white balance lists the color temperature
selected by the camera at the time the picture
was taken. You can use this as reference when
choosing a value for [Choose color
temperature].
• To view shooting data during playback, go to
[Playback display options] in the playback menu and select [Shooting
data].

❚❚ Choosing a White Balance Option
Hold the Q/g (U) button and rotate the main command dial.
Options for the selected setting, if any, can be selected by

holding the Q/g (U) button and rotating the sub-command
dial.
D Studio Flash Lighting

4 ([Auto]) may not produce the desired results with large studio flash
units. Use preset white balance or set white balance to 5 ([Flash]) and
use fine-tuning to adjust white balance.

A The [White Balance] Option
White balance can also be adjusted via the [White Balance] item in the
photo and movie shooting menus.
A D ([Natural Light Auto])

D ([Natural light auto]) may not produce the desired results under
artificial light. Choose 4 ([Auto]) or an option that matches the light
source.

Fine-Tuning White Balance
❚❚ Using Buttons
If coordinates are displayed as shown, you can hold the Q/g
(U) button and use the multi selector to fine-tune white
balance.
• Press 4 or 2 to fine-tune white balance on the amber-blue

axis and 1 or 3 to fine-tune white balance on the green-
magenta axis.
• The selected setting takes effect when the Q/g (U) button
is released.

❚❚ Using the Menus
1 Select [White balance] in the
photo shooting menu,
highlight the desired option,
and press 2 as often as
necessary to display fine-
tuning options.
For information on fine-tuning preset manual white balance,
see “Fine-Tuning Preset Manual White Balance” (0 223).
2 Fine-tune white balance.

• Use the multi selector to position
the cursor on the grid. The cursor
can be moved up to six steps from
the center along either of the A
(amber)–B (blue) and G (green)–M
(magenta) axes. The selected value
is displayed to the right of the grid.
• The A (amber)–B (blue) axis corresponds to color
temperature and is ruled in increments of 0.5. A change of
1 is equivalent to approximately 5 mired.
• The G (green)–M (magenta) axis has effects similar to color
compensation filters and is ruled in increments of 0.25. A
change of 1 is equivalent to approximately 0.05 diffuse
density units.

3 Press J.
Press J to save settings and return to the photo shooting
menu.
A Adjusting White Balance in the i Menu

To view white balance options, highlight
[White balance] in the i menu and press J. If
an option other than [Choose color
temperature] is selected, white balance can be
fine-tuned by selecting an option and pressing
3 until fine-tuning options are displayed. The
results of fine-tuning can be previewed in the
display.
A White Balance Fine-Tuning

The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For example,
moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as
J ([Incandescent]) is selected for white balance will make photographs
slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue.

A “Mired”
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in
color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color
temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much greater
change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired, calculated by multiplying
the inverse of the color temperature by 106, is a measure of color
temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is the unit
used in color-temperature compensation filters. E.g.:
• 4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired
• 7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired

Choosing a Color Temperature
❚❚ Using Buttons (Amber–Blue Only)
To adjust color temperature when
[Choose color temperature] is selected
for white balance, hold the Q/g (U)
button and use the multi selector or
rotate the sub-command dial.
• Hold the Q/g (U) button and rotate
the sub-command dial to choose a color temperature in
mireds.

• To highlight a digit, hold the Q/g (U) button and press 4
or 2. Press 1 or 3 to edit the highlighted digit.
• Changes apply only to the A (amber)–B (blue) axis.

• The selected setting takes effect when the Q/g (U) button
is released.

D Choose Color Temperature
Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or fluorescent
lighting. Choose c ([Flash]) or I ([Fluorescent]) for these sources. With
other light sources, take a test shot to determine if the selected value is
appropriate.
A Color Temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other
conditions. Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a
light source, defined with reference to the temperature to which an
object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same wavelengths.
While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of
5000–5500 K appear white, light sources with a lower color temperature,
such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly yellow or red (q). Light
sources with a higher color temperature appear tinged with blue (w).
3000 4000 5000 6000 8000 10000 [ K ]
In general, choose lower values if your pictures have a red cast or to

intentionally make colors colder, higher values if your pictures are tinged
blue or to intentionally make colors warmer.

Color temperature can be selected using the [White balance]
options in the photo shooting menu. Enter values for the
amber–blue and green–magenta axes as described below.
1 Select [Choose color temperature].

Select [White balance] in the photo shooting menu, then
highlight [Choose color temperature] and press 2.
2 Select values for amber–blue and green–magenta.

• Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits on
the amber (A)–blue (B) axis and
press 1 or 3 to change.
• Press 4 or 2 to highlight the

value for the green (G)–magenta
(M) axis and press 1 or 3 to
change.

3 Press J.
• Press J to save changes and return
to the photo shooting menu.
• If a value other than 0 is selected for
the green (G)–magenta (M) axis, an
asterisk (“U”) will appear next to the
K icon.
A Choosing Color Temperature in the i Menu
To view white balance options, highlight
[White balance] in the i menu and press J.
When [Choose color temperature] is selected,
color temperature options can be viewed by
pressing 3.

Preset Manual
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance
settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for
light sources with a strong color cast. The camera can store up
to six values for preset white balance in presets d-1 through d-6.
Two methods are available for setting preset white balance:
Method Description
Neutral gray or white object is placed under
lighting that will be used in final photograph
and white balance is measured by camera
Direct measurement
(0 210). During live view, white balance can be
measured in a selected area of the frame (spot
white balance, 0 216).
Copy from existing White balance is copied from photo on memory
photograph card (0 221).

Before Measuring White Balance:
• Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will
be used in the final photograph. In studio settings, a standard
18% gray panel can be used as a reference object.
• Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when
white balance is measured using a neutral gray or white
reference object. In mode M, adjust exposure so that the
exposure indicator shows ±0 (0 114).
1 Keeping the Q/g (U) button pressed, rotate the

main command dial to select L.

2 Select a preset.
Press the Q/g (U) button and rotate the sub-command
dial until the desired white balance preset (d-1 to d-6) is
displayed.

3 Select direct measurement mode.
• Release the Q/g (U) button briefly and then press the
button until the D indicators in the control panel and
viewfinder start to flash.
• In direct measurement mode, the

focus point changes to a white
balance target as shown and stays
in the center of the frame.
4 Before the D indicators stop flashing,

photograph the reference object.
• Position the reference object in the white
balance target and press the shutter-release
button all the way down to measure a value for
white balance and store it in the preset selected
in Step 2.
• No photograph will be recorded; white balance can be
measured accurately even when the camera is not in focus.

5 Check the results.
• If the camera was able to measure a value for white
balance, C will flash in the control panel, while the
viewfinder will show a flashing a. Press the shutter-
release button halfway to exit to shooting mode.
• If lighting is too dark or too bright, the camera may be

unable to measure white balance. A flashing b a will
appear in the control panel and viewfinder. Press the
shutter-release button halfway to return to Step 4 and
measure white balance again.

D Time Restrictions on Measuring Preset Manual White Balance
(Viewfinder Photography)
If no operations are performed during viewfinder photography while the
displays are flashing, direct measurement mode will end in the time
selected for Custom Setting c2 [Standby timer].
A Measuring Preset Manual White Balance (Viewfinder

Photography)
Preset manual white balance cannot be measured during time-lapse
movie recording or while you are shooting a multiple exposure.
A Protected Presets
If the current preset is protected, the camera will be unable to measure a
value for preset manual white balance; any attempt to measure white
balance for a protected preset will be accompanied by a flashing 3 in
the control panel and viewfinder.

A Selecting a Preset
• Selecting [Preset manual] for [White
balance] in the photo shooting menu
displays white balance presets; highlight a
preset and press J.
• If no value currently exists for the selected
preset, white balance will be set to 5200 K,
the same as [Direct sunlight].
A Measuring Preset White Balance from the i Menu

With preset manual selected for white balance,
display the i menu, highlight [White balance],
and then press and hold J to place the camera
in direct measurement mode.

❚❚ Live View (Spot White Balance)
During live view, white balance can be measured from white or
gray objects in a smaller area of the frame than would be
possible in viewfinder photography, eliminating the need to
prepare a reference object or change lenses during telephoto
photography.
• When measuring preset manual white balance for flash
photography, use the viewfinder as described in “Viewfinder
Photography” (0 210).
1 Keeping the Q/g (U) button pressed, rotate the

main command dial to select L.

2 Select a preset.
Press the Q/g (U) button and rotate the sub-command
dial until the desired white balance preset (d-1 to d-6) is
displayed.
3 Select direct measurement

mode.
Release the Q/g (U) button briefly
and then press the button until the
L icon in the monitor starts to flash.

4 While the L icon is flashing,
position the spot white
balance target (r) over a white
or gray area of the subject.
• To zoom in on the area around the
target (r) for more precise
positioning, press the X (T) button.
• You can also position the target (r) by tapping your
subject in the monitor. Tapping the monitor positions the
target (r) and measures white balance at the selected
location. After measuring white balance, proceed to Step 6.

5 Measure a value for preset
white balance either by
pressing J or by pressing the
shutter-release button all the
way down.
• If the camera is able to measure
white balance, the new value will be
reflected in the display.
• If the camera is unable to measure
white balance, a message will be
displayed and the camera will
return to Step 4. Measure white balance again after
repositioning the white balance target (r) or the like.
6 Press the Q/g (U) button to exit direct

measurement mode.
White balance presets can be viewed
by selecting [Preset manual] for
[White balance] in the photo or
movie shooting menu. The position
of the targets used to measure preset
white balance is displayed on presets
recorded during live view.

D Time Restrictions on Measuring Preset Manual White Balance
(Live View)
The time available to measure white balance is that selected for Custom
Setting c4 [Monitor off delay] > [Live view].
D Measuring Preset Manual White Balance (Live View)

Preset manual white balance cannot be measured while a multiple
exposure is in progress.

❚❚ Copying White Balance from a Photograph
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from
an existing photograph to a selected preset.
1 Select [Preset manual].

Select [White balance] in the photo
shooting menu, then highlight
[Preset manual] and press 2.
2 Select a destination.
Highlight the destination preset (d-1
to d-6) and press X (T).
3 Choose Select image.

Highlight [Select image] and press
2.

4 Highlight a source image.
Highlight the source image. To view
the highlighted image full frame,
press and hold the X (T) button.
5 Copy white balance.

• Press J to copy the white balance value for the
highlighted photograph to the selected preset.
• If the highlighted photograph has a comment, the
comment will be copied to the comment for the selected
preset.

A Fine-Tuning Preset White Balance
The selected preset can be fine-tuned by
selecting [Fine-tune] and adjusting white
balance as described in “Fine-Tuning White
Balance” (0 200).
A Edit Comment
To enter a descriptive comment of up to 36
characters for the current white-balance
preset, select [Edit comment] in the preset
manual white balance menu and enter a
comment (0 61).
A Protect
To protect the current white-balance preset,
select [Protect] in the preset manual white
balance menu, then highlight [On] and press
J. Protected presets cannot be modified.

Varying Exposure or White Balance
over a Series of Photographs
(Bracketing)
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, flash level, Active
D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance slightly with each shot,
“bracketing” the current value. Choose in situations in which
getting the right settings is difficult and there is not time to
check results and adjust settings with each shot, or to
experiment with different settings for the same subject.
• Bracketing is available in modes P, S, A, and M only.

Bracketing
Bracketing is adjusted using the [Auto
bracketing] > [Auto bracketing set]
item in the photo shooting menu, which
contains the following options:
Option Description
The camera varies exposure and flash level
[AE & flash bracketing]
over a series of photographs.
The camera varies exposure over a series of
[AE bracketing]
photographs.
The camera varies flash level over a series of
[Flash bracketing]
photographs.
The camera creates multiple copies of each
[WB bracketing] photograph, each with a different white
balance (0 195).
The camera varies Active D-Lighting over a
[ADL bracketing]
series of photographs (0 254).

Exposure and Flash Bracketing
Vary exposure and/or flash level over a series of photographs.
To perform exposure and/or flash bracketing:
Exposure modified by: Exposure modified by: Exposure modified by:

0 EV –1 EV +1 EV
1 Choose the number of shots and exposure

increment.
• Pressing the BKT button, rotate the main command dial to
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.

• At settings other than zero, a M icon and exposure and
flash bracketing indicator will appear in the control panel
and BKT will be displayed in the viewfinder.
• Pressing the BKT button, rotate the sub-command dial to

choose the exposure increment.
• When [1/3 step] is selected for Custom Setting b1 [EV

steps for exposure cntrl], the size of the increment can be
chosen from 0.3 (1/3), 0.7 (2/3), 1.0, 2.0, and 3.0 EV.
Bracketing programs with an increment of 2.0 or 3.0 EV
offer a maximum of 5 shots. If a value of 7 or 9 was selected
in Step 1, the number of shots will automatically be set to
5.

• The bracketing programs with an increment of 0.3 (1/3) EV
are listed below.
Control Exposure and flash
No. of Bracketing order
panel bracketing
shots (EVs)
display indicator
0 0
3 0/+0.3/+0.7
3 0/–0.7/–0.3
2 0/+0.3
2 0/–0.3
3 0/–0.3/+0.3
0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/
5
+0.7
0/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/
7
+0.3/+0.7/+1.0
0/–1.3/–1.0/
–0.7/–0.3/
9
+0.3/+0.7/
+1.0/+1.3

2 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
• The camera will vary exposure and/or flash level
shot-by-shot according to the bracketing
program selected. Modifications to exposure
are added to those made with exposure compensation
(0 175).
• The modified values for shutter speed and aperture are
shown in the display.
• While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress
indicator will be displayed in the control panel. A segment
will disappear from the indicator after each shot.
No. shots: 3; Display after first shot

increment: 0.7

D Exposure and Flash Bracketing
• [Number of shots] and [Increment] can also be selected via the [Auto
bracketing] item in the photo shooting menu.
• In continuous release modes, shooting will pause after the number of
shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting
will resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed.
• If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to
make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all
shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the
next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
A Bracketing Options
When [AE & flash bracketing] is selected, the camera varies both
exposure and flash level. Select [AE bracketing] to vary only exposure,
[Flash bracketing] to vary only flash level. Note that flash bracketing is
available in i-TTL and, where supported, auto aperture (qA) flash control
modes only (0 462, 798).
A Exposure Bracketing
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture
(mode P), aperture (mode S), or shutter speed (modes A and M). If [On] is
selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO sensitivity control] in
modes P, S, and A, the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for
optimum exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are
exceeded; in mode M, the camera will first use auto ISO sensitivity control
to bring exposure as close as possible to the optimum and then bracket
this exposure by varying shutter speed.

❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the BKT button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence is zero (r) and M is no longer displayed. The
program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing
is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a
two-button reset (0 282), although in this case the bracketing
program will not be restored the next time bracketing is
activated.

White Balance Bracketing
The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph, each
with a different white balance. To use white balance bracketing:
• In continuous release modes, the camera will record only the
number of photographs selected in the white balance
bracketing program.
1 Choose the number of shots and exposure

increment.
• At settings other than zero, a M icon and WB bracketing

indicator will appear in the control panel and BKT will be
displayed in the viewfinder.

• Pressing the BKT button, rotate the sub-command dial to
choose the white balance adjustment.
• The size of the increment can be chosen from 1 (1 step), 2

(2 steps), or 3 (3 steps).
• Each step is equivalent to 5 mired. Higher A values
correspond to increased amounts of amber. Higher B
values correspond to increased amounts of blue (0 200).

• The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed
below.
Control No. White
WB bracketing Bracketing
panel of balance
indicator order
display shots increment
0 1 0
3 1B 0/B1/B2
3 1A 0/A2/A1
2 1B 0/B1
2 1A 0/A1
3 1A, 1B 0/A1/B1
0/A2/A1/B1/
5 1A, 1B
B2
0/A3/A2/A1/
7 1A, 1B
B1/B2/B3
0/A4/A3/A2/
9 1A, 1B A1/B1/B2/
B3/B4

• Each shot will be processed to create the
number of copies specified in the bracketing
program, and each copy will have a different
white balance. Modifications to white balance are added to
the white balance adjustment made with white balance
fine-tuning.
• If the number of shots in the bracketing program is greater
than the number of exposures remaining, n and the
icon for the affected card will flash in the control panel, a
flashing j icon will appear in the viewfinder, and the
shutter release will be disabled. Shooting can begin when
a new memory card is inserted.

D White Balance Bracketing Restrictions
White balance bracketing is not available at image quality settings of NEF
(RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG.
D White Balance Bracketing

• [Number of shots] and [Increment] can also be selected via the [Auto
• White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amber-
blue axis in the white balance fine-tuning display, 0 200). No
adjustments are made on the green-magenta axis.
• If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the
camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have
been recorded.

activated.

ADL Bracketing
The camera varies Active D-Lighting over a series of exposures.
To use ADL bracketing:
1 Choose the number of shots.

• At settings other than zero, a M icon and an ADL

bracketing indicator appear in the control panel and BKT
will be displayed in the viewfinder.
• Choose two shots to take one photograph with Active

D-Lighting off and another at a selected value. Choose
three to five shots to take a series of photographs with
Active D-Lighting set to [Off], [Low], and [Normal] (three
shots), [Off], [Low], [Normal], and [High] (four shots), or
[Off], [Low], [Normal], [High], and [Extra high] (five shots).
If you choose more than two shots, proceed to Step 3.

2 If the number of shots in the bracketing sequence
is 2, choose the Active D-Lighting amount.
• Hold the BKT button and rotate the sub-command dial to
choose the Active D-Lighting setting for the second shot.

• Active D-Lighting is shown in the control panel.
ADL Control panel display
Y [Auto]
Z [Extra high]
P [High]
Q [Normal]
R [Low]

The camera will vary Active D-Lighting shot-by-
shot according to the bracketing program
selected. While bracketing is in effect, a
bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in the control
panel. A segment will disappear from the indicator after
each shot.
No. shots: 3 Display after first shot
A ADL Bracketing
• [Number of shots] and [Amount] can also be selected via the [Auto
• In continuous release modes, shooting will pause after the number of
shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting
will resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed.
• If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to
make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all
shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the
next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.

activated.

Image Processing (Picture Controls)
Selecting a Picture Control
Adjust image processing (Picture
Control) settings according to your
subject or creative intent. Picture Control
options can be accessed via the [Set
Picture Control] items in the photo and
movie shooting menus (0 553, 577).
• In modes other than P, S, A, and M, the camera chooses a
Picture Control automatically according to the scene.
Option Description
The camera automatically adjusts hues and
tones based on the [Standard] Picture Control.
The complexions of portrait subjects will appear
n [Auto]
softer, and such elements as the foliage and sky
in outdoor shots more vivid, than in pictures
taken with the [Standard] Picture Control.
Standard processing for balanced results.
Q [Standard]
Recommended for most situations.
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose
R [Neutral] for photographs that will later be processed or
retouched.
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint
S [Vivid] effect. Choose for photographs that emphasize
primary colors.

Option Description
T [Monochrome] Take monochrome photographs.
Smooth complexions for natural-looking
o [Portrait]
portraits.
p [Landscape] Shoot vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.
Details are preserved over a wide tone range,
from highlights to shadows. Choose for
q [Flat]
photographs that will later be extensively
processed or retouched.
Creative Picture Controls offer unique
k01 [Creative combinations of hue, tone, saturation, and
– Picture other settings tuned for particular effects.
k20 Control] Choose from a total of 20 options, including
[Dream] and [Morning].
A Set Picture Control

The [Set Picture Control] item in the movie shooting menu also offers a
[Same as photo settings] option that sets the Picture Control for movies
to the same as that used for photographs.

Modifying Picture Controls
Picture Controls can be modified to suit the scene or the
photographer’s creative intent.
1 Select a Picture Control.

Highlight the desired Picture Control
in the Picture Control list and press
2.
2 Adjust settings.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired
setting (0 247) and press 4 or 2 to
choose a value in increments of 1, or
rotate the sub-command dial to
choose a value in increments of 0.25
(the options available vary with the Picture Control
selected). To quickly adjust levels for balanced
[Sharpening], [Mid-range sharpening], and [Clarity],
highlight [Quick sharp] and press 4 or 2. Repeat this step
until all settings have been adjusted. Default settings can be
restored by pressing the O (Q) button.

3 Save changes and exit.
Press J to save changes and return
to the Picture Control list. Picture
Controls that have been modified
from default settings are indicated by
an asterisk (“U”).

❚❚ Picture Control Settings
Option Description
Mute or heighten the effect of Creative Picture
[Effect level]
Controls.
Quickly adjust levels for balanced [Sharpening],
[Quick sharp] [Mid-range sharpening], and [Clarity]. These
parameters can also be adjusted individually.
[Sharpening]: Control the sharpness of details
[Sharpening]
and outlines.
[Mid-range sharpening]: Adjust the sharpness of
[Mid-range
patterns and lines in the range between
sharpening]
[Sharpening] and [Clarity].
[Clarity]: Adjust overall sharpness and the
[Clarity] sharpness of thicker outlines without affecting
brightness or dynamic range.
[Contrast] Adjust contrast.
Raise or lower brightness without loss of detail in
[Brightness]
highlights or shadows.
[Saturation] Control the vividness of colors.
[Hue] Adjust hue.
Simulate the effect of color filters on
[Filter effects]
monochrome pictures.
Choose the tint used in monochrome pictures.
Pressing 2 when an option other than [B&W]
[Toning]
(black-and-white) is selected displays saturation
options.
[Toning] (Creative Choose the shade of color used for Creative
Picture Control) Picture Controls.

D [Filter Effects]
Choose from the following [Filter effects]:
Option Description
[Y] (yellow) * These options enhance contrast and can be used to tone
[O] (orange) * down the brightness of the sky in landscape
photographs. Orange ([O]) produces more contrast than
[R] (red) * yellow ([Y]), red ([R]) more contrast than orange.
[G] (green) * Green softens skin tones. Use for portraits and the like.
* The term in parentheses is the name of the corresponding third-party
color filter for black-and-white photography.
D The i Menu
Highlighting [Set Picture Control] in the i
menu and pressing J displays a Picture
Control list. Highlight a Picture Control and
press 3 to adjust settings.
• Press 1 or 3 to highlight settings. Press 4 or
2 to choose a value in increments of 1, or
rotate the sub-command dial to choose a
value in increments of 0.25.
• The options available vary with the Picture Control selected.
• Default settings can be restored by pressing the O (Q) button.
• Press J to save changes and return to the i menu.
• Picture Controls that have been modified
from default settings are indicated by an
asterisk (“U”).

D The j Indicator
The j indicator under the value display in the
Picture Control setting menu indicates the
previous value for the setting.
D [A] (Auto)
• Selecting the [A] (auto) option available for
some settings lets the camera adjust the
setting automatically.
• Results vary with exposure and the position
of the subject in the frame.
A The [Auto] Picture Control

Settings can be adjusted in the range [A−2] to
[A+2].

Creating Custom Picture Controls
Save modified Picture Controls as custom Picture Controls.
Option Description
Create a new custom Picture Control based on an
[Save/edit] existing preset or custom Picture Control, or edit existing
custom Picture Controls.
[Rename] Rename custom Picture Controls.
[Delete] Delete custom Picture Controls.
Copy custom Picture Controls to and from the memory
[Load/save]
card.
❚❚ Creating Custom Picture Controls

The Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified
and saved as custom Picture Controls.
1 Highlight [Manage Picture

Control] in the photo or movie
shooting menu and press 2.
2 Select [Save/edit].
Highlight [Save/edit] and press 2 to
view [Choose Picture Control]
options.

3 Select a Picture Control.
Highlight an existing Picture Control
and press 2, or press J to proceed
to Step 5 to save a copy of the
highlighted Picture Control without
further modification.
4 Edit the selected Picture Control.

To abandon any changes and start
over from default settings, press the
O (Q) button. Press J when settings
are complete.
5 Select a destination.
Choose a destination for the custom
Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) and
press 2.

6 Name the Picture Control.
• A text-entry dialog will be
displayed.
• By default, new Picture Controls are
named by adding a two-digit
number (assigned automatically) to
the name of the existing Picture
Control. Skip to Step 7 to proceed without renaming the
Picture Control, or rename the Picture Control as described
in “Text Entry” (0 61). Custom Picture Control names can
be up to nineteen characters long. Any characters after the
nineteenth will be deleted.
7 Press the X (T) button.

• Text entry will end.
• The new Picture Control will be

added to the Picture Control list.

A The Original Picture Control Icon
The original preset Picture Control on which
the custom Picture Control is based is indicated
by an icon in the top right corner of the edit
display.
A Custom Picture Control Options

The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those
on which the custom Picture Control was based.
A Sharing Custom Picture Controls

The [Load/save] item in the [Manage Picture
Control] menu offers the options listed below.
Use these options to copy custom Picture
Controls to and from memory cards (these
options are available only with the memory
card in Slot 1 and cannot be used with the card
in Slot 2). Once copied to memory cards,
Picture Controls can be used with other cameras or compatible software.
• [Copy to camera]: Copy custom Picture Controls from the memory card
to custom Picture Controls C-1 through C-9 on the camera and name
them as desired.
• [Delete from card]: Delete selected custom Picture Controls from the
memory card.
• [Copy to card]: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) from
the camera to a selected destination (1 through 99) on the memory
card.

Preserving Detail in Highlights and
Shadows (Active D-Lighting and HDR)
Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting, accessed via the [Active D-Lighting] item in
the photo or movie shooting menu, is used to preserve details
in highlights and shadows, creating pictures with natural
contrast. Use for high-contrast scenes, for example when
photographing brightly-lit outdoor scenery through a door or
window or taking pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day.
Active D-Lighting is most effective when [Matrix metering] is
selected for metering.
[Off] [Auto]

❚❚ Active D-Lighting Options
Option Description
The camera automatically adjusts Active
Y [Auto]
D-Lighting in response to shooting conditions.
Z [Extra high]
P [High] Choose the amount of Active D-Lighting
performed from [Extra high], [High], [Normal],
Q [Normal] and [Low].
R [Low]
[Off] Active D-Lighting off.
D Active D-Lighting and Movies

If [Same as photo settings] is selected for [Active D-Lighting] in the
movie shooting menu and [Auto] is selected in the photo shooting menu,
movies will be shot at a setting equivalent to [Normal].
D Active D-Lighting
• “Noise” in the form of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines may
appear in photos taken with Active D-Lighting.
• In mode M, [Auto] is equivalent to [Normal].
• Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects.
• Active D-Lighting does not apply at high ISO sensitivities (Hi 0.3–Hi 2),
including high sensitivities selected via auto ISO sensitivity control.

High Dynamic Range (HDR)
The [HDR (high dynamic range)] item in the photo shooting
menu can be used with high-contrast subjects to preserve
details in highlights and shadows by combining two shots
taken at different exposures. Use with high-contrast scenes and
other subjects to preserve a wide range of details, from
highlights to shadows.
❚❚ HDR Options
The following options are available:
• [HDR mode]: Choose from [On (series)] (take a series of HDR
photographs, ending when [Off] is selected), [On (single
photo)] (take one HDR photograph), and [Off] (exit without
taking additional HDR photographs).
• [HDR strength]: Choose the HDR strength. If [Auto] is
selected, the camera will automatically adjust HDR strength to
suit the scene.
• [Save individual images (NEF)]: Choose [On] to save each of
the individual shots used to create the HDR image; the shots
are saved in NEF (RAW) format.

❚❚ Taking HDR Photographs
We recommend that you use the [Matrix metering] metering
option when shooting with HDR.
1 Select [HDR (high dynamic

range)].
Highlight [HDR (high dynamic
range)] in the photo shooting menu
and press 2.
2 Select a mode.
• Highlight [HDR mode] and press 2.
• Choose an HDR mode using 1 or

3 and press J.

3 Choose the [HDR strength].
• To choose the difference in
exposure between the two shots
(HDR strength), highlight [HDR
strength] and press 2.
• Highlight the desired option and

press J. If [Auto] is selected, the
camera will automatically adjust
HDR strength to suit the scene.
4 Choose whether to keep

individual exposures.
To choose whether to save the
individual NEF (RAW) images that
make up the HDR photograph,
highlight [Save individual images
(NEF)] and press 2, then press 1 or 3 to choose the
desired option and press J to select.

• The camera takes two exposures when the shutter-release
button is pressed all the way down. Flashing “1” and
“2” indicators will appear respectively in the control
panel and viewfinder while the images are combined. No
pictures can be taken until recording is complete.
• If [On (series)] is selected, HDR will only turn off when [Off]
is selected for HDR mode; if [On (single photo)] is selected,
HDR turns off automatically after the photograph is taken.
D NEF (RAW)
HDR photographs taken when an NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG option
is selected for image quality will be recorded in JPEG format.

D HDR Photography
• The edges of the image will be cropped out.
• The desired results may not be achieved if the camera or subject moves
during shooting. Use of a tripod is recommended.
• Depending on the scene, you may notice shadows around bright
objects or halos around dark objects. In some cases, HDR may have little
effect.
• Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects.
• With non-CPU lenses and when [Spot metering] or [Center-weighted
metering] is selected, an [HDR strength] setting of [Auto] is equivalent
to [Normal].
• Optional flash units will not fire.
• Regardless of the option currently selected for release mode, only one
photograph will be taken each time the shutter-release button is
pressed.
• Shutter speeds of Bulb (Bulb) and Time (Time) are not available.
D HDR Restrictions
HDR cannot be combined with some camera features, including:
• Modes other than P, S, A, and M
• Flicker reduction
• Bracketing
• Multiple exposure
• Interval-timer photography
• Time-lapse movies
• Focus shift
• The negative digitizer

A Choosing HDR Mode and Strength via the BKT Button and
Command Dials
When [HDR (high dynamic range)] is selected for Custom Setting f3
[Custom controls] > [BKT button], [HDR mode] (Step 2) and [HDR
strength] (Step 3) can be selected using the BKT button and command
dials.
• Hold the BKT button and rotate the main
command dial to choose from the following
HDR modes: a ([Off]), 1 ([On (single
photo)]), and b ([On (series)]).
• When 1 ([On (single photo)]) or b ([On

(series)]) is selected, you can adjust HDR
strength by holding the BKT button and
rotating the sub-command dial.

Options for Movie Recording
and Editing
Image Area: Choosing a Movie Crop
You can choose an image area using the [Image area] >
[Choose image area] item in the movie shooting menu. Select
[FX] to shoot movies in what is referred to as “FX-based movie
format”, [DX] to shoot in “DX-based movie format”. The
differences between the two are illustrated below.
262 Options for Movie Recording and Editing

• The sizes of the areas recorded are approximately 35.9 ×
20.2 mm (FX-based movie format) and 23.5 × 13.2 mm (DX-
based movie format). Movies shot with a DX-format lens and
[On] selected for [Image area] > [Auto DX crop] in the movie
shooting menu are recorded in DX-based movie format.
• Enabling electronic vibration reduction by selecting [On] for
[Electronic VR] in the movie shooting menu reduces the size
of the crop, slightly increasing the apparent focal length.

Frame Size/Frame Rate and Movie
Quality
The [Frame size/frame rate] item in the movie shooting menu
is used to choose the movie frame size (in pixels) and frame rate.
You can also choose from two [Movie quality] options: [High
quality] and [Normal]. Together, these options determine the
maximum bit rate and recording time, as shown in the following
table.
Max. bit rate (Mbps) Max.
Frame size/frame rate1 High recording
Normal time
quality
r [3840 × 2160; 30p] 2
s [3840 × 2160; 25p] 2
t [3840 × 2160; 24p] 2 144 —3
w [1920 × 1080; 120p] 4, 5
x [1920 × 1080; 100p] 4, 5 29 min.
y/y [1920 × 1080; 60p] 59 s 6
56 28
z/z [1920 × 1080; 50p]
1/1 [1920 × 1080; 30p]
2/2 [1920 × 1080; 25p] 28 14
3/3 [1920 × 1080; 24p]

Max. bit rate (Mbps) Max.
Frame size/frame rate1 High recording
Normal time
quality
[1920 × 1080; 30p ×4
A
(slow-motion)] 4, 5, 7
36
[1920 × 1080; 25p ×4
B —3 3 min.
[1920 × 1080; 24p ×5
C 29
1 Actual frame rates for values listed as 120p, 60p, 30p, and 24p are
respectively 119.88 fps, 59.94 fps, 29.97 fps, and 23.976 fps.
2 Record movies in 4K UHD.
3 [Movie quality] fixed at [High quality].
4 Image area fixed at [FX]; face detection not enabled in [Auto-area AF]
AF-area mode.
5 Movies shot in l or e mode with 1920 × 1080 120p, 1920 × 1080
100p, or 1920 × 1080 slow-motion selected will be recorded at the
following frame sizes and rates:
• [1920 × 1080; 120p] or [1920 × 1080; 30p ×4 (slow-motion)]
selected: recorded at [1920 × 1080; 30p]
• [1920 × 1080; 100p] or [1920 × 1080; 25p ×4 (slow-motion)]
selected: recorded at [1920 × 1080; 25p]
• [1920 × 1080; 24p ×5 (slow-motion)] selected: recorded at [1920 ×
1080; 24p]
6 Each movie may be recorded across up to 8 files of up to 4 GB each.
The number of files and the length of each file vary with the option
selected for [Movie quality] in the movie shooting menu. Movies
recorded to memory cards formatted in the camera will however be
recorded as a single file regardless of size if the card has a capacity
over 32 GB.
7 See “Slow Motion Movies” (0 266).

Slow-Motion Movies
To record silent slow-motion movies, select [1920×1080; 30p
×4 (slow-motion)], [1920×1080; 25p ×4 (slow-motion)], or
[1920×1080; 24p ×5 (slow-motion)] for [Frame size/frame
rate] in the movie shooting menu. Movies recorded at 4 or 5
times the rated speed are played back at the rated speed for a
slow-motion effect. Movies shot at [1920 × 1080; 30p ×4 (slow-
motion)], for example, are recorded at a frame rate of roughly
120 fps and play back at around 30 fps, meaning that 10
seconds recording produces about 40 seconds of footage.
• Recording and playback speeds are shown below.

Frame rate *
Frame size/frame rate
Recorded at Plays back at
[1920 × 1080; 30p ×4 (slow-motion)] 120p 30p
[1920 × 1080; 25p ×4 (slow-motion)] 100p 25p
[1920 × 1080; 24p ×5 (slow-motion)] 120p 24p
* Actual frame rate is 119.88 fps for values listed as 120p, 29.97 fps for
values listed as 30p, and 23.976 fps for values listed as 24p.

D Slow-Motion Movies
• When a slow-motion option is selected, quality is fixed at “high quality”
and the image area is fixed at [FX] regardless of the lens used or the
option selected for [Image area] > [Choose image area] in the movie
shooting menu (0 129).
• Features such as flicker reduction, electronic vibration reduction, and
time code output cannot be used when a “slow-motion” option is
selected.

Points to Note When Recording Movies
Note the following points when recording movies:
• Depending on memory card write speed, shooting may end
before the maximum length (0 264) is reached.
• Note that the number of subjects that can be detected in face-
detection AF drops during movie recording.
• A 0 icon indicates that movies cannot be recorded.
• [Spot metering] is not available during movie recording.
• Flash lighting cannot be used.

A Movie Recording: Shooting Mode
• If the subject is over- or under-exposed in mode P or S, end live view
and start live view again or select mode A and adjust aperture.
• The following exposure settings can be adjusted during filming:
Shutter ISO
Mode Aperture
speed sensitivity 2
P, S 1 — — —3
A 4 — —3
M 4 4 44
Other shooting
— — —
modes
1 Exposure for mode S is equivalent to mode P.
2 Regardless of the option chosen for [ISO sensitivity settings] >
[Maximum sensitivity] or for [ISO sensitivity (mode M)], the upper
limit when [On] is selected for [Electronic VR] in the movie shooting
menu is ISO 51200.
3 The upper limit for ISO sensitivity can be selected using the [ISO
sensitivity settings] > [Maximum sensitivity] item in the movie
shooting menu.
4 If [On] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO control
(mode M)] in the movie shooting menu, the upper limit for ISO
sensitivity can be selected using [Maximum sensitivity].

A Adjusting White Balance During Movie Recording
White balance can be adjusted during movie recording by pressing the
Q/g (U) button and rotating the main command dial. Options for the
selected setting, if any, can be selected by holding the Q/g (U) button
and rotating the sub-command dial (0 195).
A Recording Movies in Mode M

In mode M shutter speed can be set to values between 1/25 s and 1/8000 s
(the slowest available shutter speed varies with the frame rate; 0 264).
A Wireless Remote Controllers and Remote Cords

If [Record movies] is selected for Custom Setting g2 [Custom controls] >
[Shutter-release button], the shutter-release buttons on optional
wireless remote controllers and remote cords can be pressed halfway to
start live view or pressed all the way down to start and end movie
recording.
A Using an External Microphone

The optional ME-1 stereo microphone or ME-W1 wireless microphone can
be used to record sound for movies.

Editing Movies
Movies can be edited using the following options:
Option Description
[Choose start/ Create a copy from which unwanted footage
9
end point] has been removed.
[Save current
4 Save a selected frame as a JPEG still.
frame]
Add indices to movies during playback. Indices
r [Add index] can be used to quickly locate frames during
playback and editing (0 277).
o [Delete index] Delete indices from movies (0 277).

Trimming Movies
To create trimmed copies of movies:
1 Display a movie full frame (0 353).
2 Pause the movie on the new

opening frame.
Play the movie back as described in
“Viewing Movies” (0 53), pressing J
to start and resume playback and 3
to pause and pressing 4 or 2 or
rotating the main command dial to locate the desired frame.
Your approximate position in the movie can be ascertained
from the movie progress bar. Pause playback when you
reach the new opening frame.

3 Select [Choose start/end
point].
Press the i button, then highlight
[Choose start/end point] and press
2.
4 Choose the start point.

To create a copy that begins from the
current frame, highlight [Start point]
and press J. The frames before the
current frame will be removed when
you save the copy in Step 10.

5 Confirm the new start point.
If the desired frame is not currently
displayed, press 4 or 2 to advance
or rewind (to skip to 10 s ahead or
back, rotate the main command dial;
to skip to the first or last frame, rotate
the sub-command dial).
6 Choose the end point.

Press Q/g (U) to switch from the
start point (w) to the end point (x)
selection tool and then select the
closing frame as described in Step 5.
The frames after the selected frame
will be removed when you save the copy in Step 10.
7 Create the copy.

Once the desired closing frame is displayed, press 1.

8 Preview the movie.
To preview the copy, highlight
[Preview] and press J (to interrupt
the preview and return to the save
options menu, press 1). To abandon
the current copy and select a new
start point or end point as described above, highlight
[Cancel] and press J; to save the copy, proceed to Step 9.
9 Choose a save option.

• [Save as new file]: Save the edited
copy to a new file.
• [Overwrite existing file]: Replace
the original movie with the edited
copy.
10 Save the copy.

Press J to save the copy.

D Trimming Movies
• Movies must be at least two seconds long. The copy will not be saved if
there is insufficient space available on the memory card.
• Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.
A Removing Opening or Closing Footage

To remove only the opening footage from the movie, proceed to Step 7
without pressing the Q/g (U) button in Step 6. To remove only the
closing footage, select [End point] in Step 4, select the closing frame, and
proceed to Step 7 without pressing the Q/g (U) button in Step 6.
A The Retouch Menu [Trim Movie] Option

Movies can also be edited using the [Trim movie] item in the retouch
menu.

Saving Selected Frames
To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still:
1 Pause the movie on the desired

frame.
Play the movie back as described in
“Viewing Movies” (0 53), pressing J
to start and resume playback and 3
to pause. Pause the movie at the
frame you intend to copy.
2 Choose [Save current frame].

Press the i button, then highlight
[Save current frame] and press J to
create a JPEG copy of the current
frame. The image will be recorded at
the dimensions selected for [Frame
size/frame rate] in the movie shooting menu.
A Save Current Frame

JPEG movie stills created using [Save current frame] cannot be
retouched. JPEG movie stills lack some categories of photo information
(0 366).

Adding Indices to Movies
1 Pause playback on the desired
frame.
• Press 3 to pause playback.
• Press 4 or 2 to locate the desired
frame.
2 Select [Add index].

• Press the i button, highlight [Add
index], and press J to add an
index.
• Up to 20 indices can be added to
each movie.
A Deleting Indices
After rotating the sub-command dial to skip to
the desired index, either while playback is in
progress or while playback is paused, press the
i button to display a menu. The selected index
can then be deleted by highlighting [Delete
index] and pressing J.

Other Shooting Options
Using Two Memory Cards
To choose the role played by the memory card in Slot 2 when
two memory cards are inserted, press the G button and select
[Role played by card in Slot 2] in the photo shooting menu.
Option Description
The card in Slot 2 is used only when the card
P [Overflow]
in Slot 1 is full.
Each picture is recorded twice, once to the
Q [Backup]
card in Slot 1 and again to the card in Slot 2.
• The NEF (RAW) copies of photos taken at
settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG are recorded
only to the card in Slot 1, the JPEG copies
[RAW Slot 1 - JPEG only to the card in Slot 2.
R
Slot 2] • Pictures taken at other image quality
settings are recorded twice at the same
setting, once to the card in Slot 1 and
again to the card in Slot 2.

D [RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2]
• If [On] is selected for [Multiple exposure] > [Save individual images
(NEF)] in the photo shooting menu, or if [On] is selected for [HDR (high
dynamic range)] > [Save individual images (NEF)] in the photo
shooting menu, unprocessed copies of the individual NEF (RAW) photos
that make up each multiple exposure or HDR image will be recorded to
both memory cards together with the JPEG composite, regardless of the
option selected for image quality.
• If [On] is selected for Custom Setting d8 [Save original (EFFECTS)],
unprocessed NEF (RAW) copies of pictures taken in f, d, e, k, l, and
m modes will be saved to both memory cards together with the final
JPEG picture, regardless of the option selected for image quality.
A [Backup] and [RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2]

• The control panel and viewfinder show the number of exposures
remaining on the card with the least amount of space available.
• Shutter release will be disabled when either card is full.
A Recording Movies
When two memory cards are inserted in the camera, the slot used to
record movies can be selected using the [Destination] item in the movie
shooting menu.
280 Other Shooting Options

Deleting Copies
When deleting pictures recorded using [Backup] or [RAW Slot
1 - JPEG Slot 2], you have the choice of erasing either both
copies or only the copy on the card in the current slot.
• Pressing O (Q) when picture created
using either of these options is
highlighted during playback displays a
confirmation message.
• To delete only the copy on the card in
the current slot, highlight [Selected
image] and press O (Q) again. The copy on the remaining
card is not deleted.
• To delete both copies, highlight [Same images on w and x]
and press O (Q).

Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default
Settings
The camera settings listed below can be restored to default
values by holding the W (Y) and E buttons down together for
more than two seconds (these buttons are marked by a green
dot). The control panel turns off briefly while settings are reset.
Settings Accessible from the Photo Shooting

Menu
Option Default
Image quality JPEG normal
Image size Large
P, S, A, M 100
ISO sensitivity
Other modes Auto
Auto ISO sensitivity control On

Option Default
Auto > Keep overall
White balance
atmosphere
Fine tuning A-B: 0, G-M: 0
Set Picture Control Auto
Active D-Lighting Off
Flicker reduction
Flicker reduction setting Disable
Flicker reduction indicator On
Auto bracketing Off 1
Multiple exposure Off 2
HDR (high dynamic range) Off 3
Silent live view photography Off
1 Number of shots is reset to zero. Bracketing increment is reset to 1 EV

(exposure/flash bracketing) or 1 (white balance bracketing). [Auto] is
selected for the second shot of two-shot ADL bracketing programs.
2 If multiple exposure is currently in progress, shooting will end and
multiple exposure will be created from exposures recorded to that
point. If [On (series)] or [On (single photo)] is selected, the multiple
exposure mode will be reset to [Off]. [Overlay mode], [Number of
shots], and [Save individual images (NEF)] are not reset.
3 [On (series)] or [On (single photo)] will be reset to [Off]. [HDR
strength] and [Save individual images (NEF)] are not reset.

Settings Accessible from the Movie Shooting
Menu
Option Default
Maximum sensitivity 51200
Auto ISO control (mode M) On
ISO sensitivity (mode M) 100
White balance Same as photo settings
Set Picture Control Same as photo settings
Active D-Lighting Off
Electronic VR Off
Headphone volume 15

Other Settings
Option Default
Focus point * Center
Flexible program Off
Exposure compensation Off
AE lock hold Off
j, l,
Single-point AF
8 , 9, !
Viewfinder photography b, f, d,
e, k, m, Auto-area AF
AF-area P, S, A, M
mode e, l Single-point AF
b, j, f,
Live view photography d, k, m,
Auto-area AF
8 , 9, !,
P, S, A, M

Option Default
b, f, d,
e, k,
Viewfinder l, m, AF-A
photography 8, 9, !,
P, S, A, M
Still j AF-S
photography
b, j, f,
d, k, m,
Autofocus Live view AF-A
8, 9, !,
mode photography P, S, A, M
e, l AF-S
j, f, d,
k, m, 8, AF-S
9, !
Movie recording
e, l AF-C
b, P, S,
AF-F
A, M
Metering Matrix metering
Flash mode Fill flash
Flash compensation Off
FV lock Off
Multi-selector power aperture Disable
Multi selector exposure comp. Disable
Exposure delay mode Off
Exposure preview (Lv) Off
Highlight display Off
* Focus point not displayed if [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area

mode.

Combining Multiple Exposures in a
Single Photo (Multiple Exposure)
Use the [Multiple exposure] item in the photo shooting menu
to record two to ten NEF (RAW) exposures as a single
photograph.
Multiple Exposure Options

Option Description
• [On (series)]: Take a series of multiple exposures.
[Multiple Select [Off] to resume normal shooting.
exposure • [On (single photo)]: Take one multiple exposure.
mode] • [Off]: Exit without creating additional multiple
exposures.
[Number of Choose the number of exposures that will be combined
shots] to form a single photograph.

Option Description
• [Add]: The exposures are overlaid without
modification; gain is not adjusted.
• [Average]: Before the exposures are overlaid, the gain
for each is divided by the total number of exposures
taken (gain for each exposure is set to 1/2 for 2
exposures, 1/3 for 3 exposures, etc).
• [Lighten]: The camera compares the pixels in each
exposure and uses only the brightest.
[Overlay
mode]
• [Darken]: The camera compares the pixels in each

exposure and uses only the darkest.
• [On]: Save both the multiple exposure and the shots

[Save
that make it up; the pictures are saved in NEF (RAW)
individual
format.
images
• [Off]: Discard the individual shots and save only the
(NEF)]
multiple exposure.

Option Description
• [On]: Earlier exposures are superimposed on the view
through the lens during live view photography. The
[Overlay
earlier exposures aid composition of the next shot.
shooting]
• [Off]: Earlier exposures are not displayed while
shooting is in progress.
[Select first
Choose the first exposure from the NEF (RAW) images on
exposure
the memory card.
(NEF)]

Creating a Multiple Exposure
1 Select [Multiple exposure].
Highlight [Multiple exposure] in the
photo shooting menu and press 2.
2 Select a mode.
• Highlight [Multiple exposure
mode] and press 2, then press 1
or 3 to choose the desired mode
and press J to select.
• If [On (series)] or [On (single

photo)] is selected, a n icon will be
displayed in the control panel.
3 Choose the number of shots.

• Highlight [Number of shots] and
press 2.
• Press 1 or 3 to choose the number
of exposures that will be combined
to form a single photograph and
press J.

4 Choose the overlay mode.
Highlight [Overlay mode] and press
2, then press 1 or 3 to choose the
desired mode and press J to select.
5 Choose whether to keep

individual exposures.
• Highlight [Save individual images
(NEF)] and press 2.
• Highlight an option using 1 or 3
and press J.
• To save both the multiple exposure and the shots that
make it up, select [On]; the individual shots are saved in
NEF (RAW) format. To save only the multiple exposure,
select [Off].
6 Choose whether to view

progress in the display.
To choose whether earlier exposures
are superimposed over the view
through the lens as shooting
progresses (live view only), highlight
[Overlay shooting] and press 2, then press 1 or 3 to
choose the desired option and press J to select.

7 Choose the first exposure.
• To choose the first exposure from
existing NEF (RAW) photos,
highlight [Select first exposure
(NEF)] and press 2.
• Use the multi selector to highlight
the desired picture.
• To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold
the X (T) button.
• After choosing the desired picture, press J.
• If the NEF (RAW) image selected for the first exposure was
recorded at an ISO sensitivity of Hi 0.3 to Hi 2, the
electronic front-curtain shutter will not be used during the
multiple exposure even if [Enable] is selected for Custom
Setting d5 [Electronic front-curtain shutter].

8 Frame a photograph, focus,
and shoot.
• The n icon starts to flash when the

first shot is taken.
• Take the selected number of shots.
If you chose an existing NEF (RAW)
image as the first exposure using [Select first exposure
(NEF)] in Step 7, shooting will start from the second
exposure.
• The number of exposures
remaining in the current multiple
exposure can be displayed by
pressing the shutter-release button
halfway between shots.
• In [On (single photo)] mode, the n
icon clears from the display and
multiple exposure shooting ends
automatically when the multiple
exposure is complete.
• In [On (series)] mode, multiple exposure shooting
continues until you select [Off] for [Multiple exposure
mode].

D NEF (RAW)
Multiple exposures shot with an NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG option
selected for image quality will be recorded in JPEG format.
D Multiple Exposure
• If the monitor turns off during playback or menu operations and no
operations are performed for about 30 s, shooting will end and a
multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been
recorded to that point. The time available to record the next exposure
can be extended by choosing longer times for Custom Setting c2
[Standby timer].
• Multiple exposures may be affected by noise (randomly-spaced bright
pixels, fog, or lines).
• In continuous shooting modes, the camera records all exposures in a
single burst. If [On (single photo)] is selected, multiple exposure
shooting will end after the first multiple exposure is recorded. If [On
(series)] is selected, an additional multiple exposure will be recorded
each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
• In self-timer mode (0 183), the camera will automatically record the
number of exposures selected in Step 3, regardless of the option
selected for Custom Setting c3 [Self-timer] > [Number of shots]; the
interval between shots is however controlled by Custom Setting c3
[Self-timer] > [Interval between shots].
• The shooting settings and photo info for multiple exposure
photographs are those for the first exposure.
• Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple
exposure.
• While a multiple exposure is being shot, memory cards cannot be
formatted and some menu items are grayed out and cannot be
changed.

A The BKT Button
If [Multiple exposure] is selected for Custom Setting f3 [Custom
controls] > [BKT button], you can select an option for [Multiple
exposure mode] by pressing the BKT button and rotating the main
command dial and a value for [Number of shots] by pressing the BKT
button and rotating the sub-command dial.
• Press the BKT button and rotate the main
command dial to choose from a ([Off]), 1
([On (single photo)]), and b ([On (series)]).
• Press the BKT button and rotate the sub-

command dial to choose the number of
shots.
A Multiple Exposure: Restrictions

Multiple exposure cannot be combined with some camera features,
including:
• Modes other than P, S, A, and M
• Movie recording
• Bracketing
• HDR (high dynamic range)
• Focus shift

Using the i Button
Pictures can be viewed by pressing the K button while a
multiple exposure is in progress. The most recent shot in the
current multiple exposure is indicated by a o icon; pressing the
i button when this icon is present displays the multiple
exposure i menu.
• Use the touch screen or navigate the menu using the multi
selector, pressing 1 or 3 to highlight items and pressing J to
select.
Option Description
View a preview created from the exposures
[View progress]
recorded to the current point.
[Retake last
Retake the most recent exposure.
exposure]
Create a multiple exposure from the exposures
[Save and exit]
taken to current point.
Exit without recording a multiple exposure. If [On]
[Discard and exit] is selected for [Save individual images (NEF)], the
individual exposures will be kept.

Ending Multiple Exposures
To end a multiple exposure before the
specified number of exposures have
been taken, select [Off] for multiple
exposure mode or press the K button
followed by the i button and select
either [Save and exit] or [Discard and
exit]. If shooting ends or you select [Save and exit] before the
specified number of exposures have been taken, a multiple
exposure will be created from the exposures that have been
recorded to that point. If [Average] is selected for [Overlay
mode], gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures
actually recorded. Note that shooting will end automatically if:
• A two-button reset is performed
• The camera is turned off
• The battery is exhausted

Taking Photos at a Set Interval (Interval
Timer Shooting)
Use the [Interval timer shooting] item in the photo shooting
menu to take photographs at a selected interval until a
specified number of shots has been recorded. Select a release
mode other than E and MUP when using the interval timer.
Interval Timer Shooting Options

Option Description
Start interval-timer photography, either after 3 s ([Now]
selected for [Choose start day/time]) or at a selected
[Start] date and time [Choose day/time]. Shooting will
continue at the selected interval until all shots have
been taken.
Choose a start option. To start shooting immediately,
[Choose start
select [Now]. To start shooting at a chosen date and
day/time]
time, select [Choose day/time].
Choose the interval (hours, minutes, and seconds)
[Interval]
between shots.
[Intervals×
Choose the number of intervals and the number of
shots/
shots per interval.
interval]

Option Description
Selecting [On] allows the camera to adjust exposure to
match the previous shot.
• Large changes in subject brightness during shooting
may result in apparent variations in exposure. This can
[Exposure
be addressed by shortening the interval between
smoothing]
shots.
• Exposure smoothing will not take effect in mode M if
[Off] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto
ISO sensitivity control] in the photo shooting menu.
Select [On] to silence the shutter and eliminate the
vibrations it produces during shooting.
• Selecting [On] does not completely silence the
[Silent
camera. Camera sounds may still be audible, for
photography]
example during autofocus or aperture adjustment, in
the latter case most noticeably at apertures smaller
(i.e., at f-numbers higher) than f/5.6.

Option Description
•[On]: Select [On] to ensure that frames shot in modes
P and A are taken at the chosen interval.
- Flash photography is disabled.
- The number of shots is set to 1, even if the number of
shots chosen for [Intervals×shots/interval] is 2 or
more.
- If AF-S is selected for autofocus mode, or if AF-A is
selected and photographs are being taken using
AF-S, select [Release] for Custom Setting a2 [AF-S
[Interval priority selection]. If AF-C is selected, or if AF-A is
priority] selected and photographs are being taken using
AF-C, select [Release] for Custom Setting a1 [AF-C
priority selection].
- If [On] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] >
[Auto ISO sensitivity control] and the time chosen
for [Minimum shutter speed] is longer than the
interval, the time selected for the interval will take
priority over the selected shutter speed.
• [Off]: Select [Off] to ensure that photos are correctly
exposed.
[Focus before If [On] is selected, the camera will focus before each
each shot] shot after the first.

Option Description
Combine interval-timer photography with other
options.
• [AE bracketing]: Perform exposure bracketing during
interval-timer photography.
• [Time-lapse movie]: Use the photos taken during
interval-timer photography to create a time-lapse
movie with an aspect ratio of 16:9. The camera saves
both the photos and the time-lapse movie.
[Options] - Selecting [1:1 (24×24)] for [Image area] > [Choose
image area] in the photo shooting menu disables
the shutter release.
- Movies created using [Time-lapse movie] are
recorded in the [sRGB] color space, regardless of the
option selected for [Color space] in the photo
shooting menu.
• [Off]: Do not perform additional operations during
interval-timer photography.
Highlight either of the following options and press 2 to
select or deselect:
[Starting
• [New folder]: A new folder is created for each new
storage
sequence.
folder]
• [Reset file numbering]: File numbering is reset to
0001 whenever a new folder is created.

D Before Shooting
• Before beginning interval-timer photography, take a test shot at current
settings.
• Select [Time zone and date] in the setup menu and make sure that the
camera clock is set to the correct time and date.
• We recommend using a tripod and disabling lens vibration reduction
(VR). Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins.
• To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the camera battery is
fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery before use or use an AC
adapter and power connector (available separately).
• When taking photos with your eye from the viewfinder and [Off]
selected for [Silent photography], remove the rubber eyecup and
cover the viewfinder with the supplied eyepiece cap to prevent light
entering via the viewfinder interfering with photographs and exposure
(0 10).

Interval-Timer Photography
1 Highlight [Interval timer
shooting] in the photo
2 Adjust interval timer settings.

Adjust interval timer settings as described below.
• To choose a start day and time:
Highlight [Choose start day/ Highlight an option and

time] and press 2. press J.
- To start shooting immediately, select [Now]. To start
shooting at a chosen date and time, select [Choose day/
time], then choose the date and time and press J.

• To choose the interval between shots:
Highlight [Interval] and Choose an interval (hours,

press 2. minutes, and seconds) and
press J.
• To choose the number of shots per interval:
Highlight [Intervals×shots/ Choose the number of

interval] and press 2. intervals and the number of
shots per interval and press
J.
- In S (single frame) mode, the photographs for each
interval will be taken at the rate for CH release mode.
- When [Off] is selected for [Silent photography], the
maximum number of intervals will vary with the number
of shots per interval.

• To enable or disable exposure smoothing:
Highlight [Exposure Highlight an option and

smoothing] and press 2. press J.
• To enable or disable silent photography:
Highlight [Silent Highlight an option and

photography] and press 2. press J.
- If [On] is selected, the only time the sound of the shutter
or mirror will be heard is when the mirror is raised or
lowered at the start and end of shooting.

• To choose an interval priority option:
Highlight [Interval priority] Highlight an option and

and press 2. press J.
• Choose whether the camera focuses before each shot
after the first:
Highlight [Focus before Highlight an option and

each shot] and press 2. press J.

• To choose additional options:
Highlight [Options] and Highlight [AE bracketing] or

press 2. [Time-lapse movie] and
press 2.
- Choose the [Number of shots] and [Increment] ([AE
bracketing]) or the [Frame size/frame rate] and
[Destination] ([Time-lapse movie]).
• Choosing start folder options:
Highlight [Starting storage Highlight options and press

folder] and press 2. 2 to select or deselect. Press
J to proceed.

3 Start shooting.
Highlight [Start] and press J. The
first series of shots will be taken at
the specified starting time, or after
about 3 s if [Now] was selected for
[Choose start day/time] in Step 2.
Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots
have been taken.

D Interval-Timer Photography
• Choose an interval longer than the time needed to take the selected
number of shots at the predicted shutter speed. Note that during actual
interval-timer photography, the camera must not only take shots at the
selected interval but must also have sufficient time to complete the
exposures and perform such tasks as processing the photographs. If the
interval is too short to take the selected number of photos, the camera
may skip to the next interval without shooting.
• If the interval is too short, the total number of shots taken may be less
than that selected for [Intervals×shots/interval].
• If you are using a flash, choose an interval longer than the time need for
the flash to charge. If the interval is too short, the flash may fire at less
than the power needed for full exposure.
• If shooting cannot proceed at current settings—for example, if shutter
speed is set to A (Bulb) or % (Time), the interval is [00:00'00"], or
the start time is in less than a minute—a warning will be displayed in
the monitor.
• If [On] is selected for [Silent photography] or [Time-lapse movie] is
selected for [Options], the standby timer will not expire during interval-
timer photography, regardless of the option selected for Custom
Setting c2 [Standby timer].
• If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no
pictures will be taken. Insert another memory card and resume shooting
(0 312).

• Interval-timer photography will pause if:
- The camera is turned off and then on again (when the camera is off,
batteries and memory cards can be replaced without ending interval-
timer photography)
- E or MUP is selected for release mode
• Changing camera settings while the interval timer is active may cause
shooting to end.
D Release Mode
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take the
specified number of shots at each interval.
D Adjusting Settings Between Shots

Pictures can be viewed and shooting and menu settings adjusted
between shots. Note, however, that the monitor will turn off
approximately 2 s before the next shot is taken.
D Interval-Timer Photography: Restrictions

Interval-timer photography cannot be combined with some camera
features, including:
• Live view
• Movie recording
• Long time-exposures (bulb or time photography)
• The self-timer
• Bracketing
• Focus shift

D When [On] Is Selected for [Silent Photography]
Selecting [On] for [Silent photography] disables some camera features,
including:
• ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3 through Hi 2
• Flash photography
• Exposure delay mode
• Long exposure noise reduction
D Interval Timer Settings

Turning the camera off or selecting a new release mode does not affect
interval-timer photography settings.
A During Shooting
During interval-timer photography, the
memory card access lamp will flash.
Immediately before the next shooting interval
begins, the shutter speed display will show the
number of intervals remaining, and the
aperture display will show the number of shots
remaining in the current interval.
• Between shots, the number of intervals remaining and the number of
shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter-release
button halfway.
• If [Time-lapse movie] is selected for [Options], the memory card access
lamp will remain lit during interval-timer photography.

Pausing Interval-Timer Photography
Interval-timer photography can be paused between intervals by
pressing J or by selecting [Interval timer shooting] in the
photo shooting menu, highlighting [Pause], and pressing J.
Note that the menus may not be displayed when the G
button is pressed if the time selected for [Interval] is very short.
• If [Time-lapse movie] is selected for [Options], pressing J
between intervals will end interval-timer photography.

Resuming Interval-Timer Photography
Shooting can be resumed using the [Interval timer shooting]
item in the photo shooting menu. The procedure is as follows:
To resume shooting immediately:
Highlight [Restart]
and press J.
To resume shooting at a specified time:
For [Restart option], Choose a starting Highlight [Restart]

highlight [Choose date and time and and press J.
day/time] and press press J.
2.

Ending Interval-Timer Photography
To end interval-timer photography before all the photos are
taken, select [Off] for [Interval timer shooting]. Note that the
menus may not be displayed when the G button is pressed if
the time selected for [Interval] is very short. In this case you will
need to press J to pause interval-timer photography and then
select [Interval timer shooting] in the photo shooting menu,
highlight [Off], and press J.

Creating a Movie from Photos (Time-
Lapse Movie)
Use the [Time-lapse movie] item in the photo shooting menu
to create silent time-lapse movies from photos taken
automatically at a selected interval.
Time-Lapse Movie Options

Option Description
Start time-lapse recording. Shooting starts after about
[Start] 3 s and continues at the selected interval for the
selected shooting time.
Choose the interval between shots in minutes and
[Interval]
seconds.
[Shooting Choose how long the camera will continue to take
time] pictures (hours and minutes).
Selecting [On] smooths abrupt changes in exposure in
modes other than M (note that exposure smoothing
only takes effect in mode M if auto ISO sensitivity
[Exposure
control is on). Large changes in subject brightness
smoothing]
during shooting may result in apparent variations in
exposure, in which case it may be necessary to shorten
the interval between shots.

Option Description
[Silent
photography]
• [Choose image area]: Choose the image area for
time-lapse movies from [FX] and [DX].
[Image area] • [Auto DX crop]: If [On] is selected, the camera will
automatically choose the [DX] crop when a DX lens is
attached.
[Frame size/
Choose the frame size and rate for the final movie.
frame rate]

Option Description
•[On]: Select [On] to ensure that frames shot in modes
P and A are taken at the chosen interval.
- If AF-S is selected for autofocus mode, or if AF-A is
AF-S, select [Release] for Custom Setting a2 [AF-S
priority selection]. If AF-C is selected, or if AF-A is
[Interval AF-C, select [Release] for Custom Setting a1 [AF-C
priority] priority selection].
- If [On] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] >
[Auto ISO sensitivity control] and the time chosen
for [Minimum shutter speed] is longer than the
interval, the time selected for the interval will take
priority over the selected shutter speed.
• [Off]: Select [Off] to ensure that photos are correctly
exposed.
[Focus before If [On] is selected, the camera will focus before each
each shot] shot after the first.
Choose the slot used to record time-lapse movies when
[Destination]
two memory cards are inserted.

Recording Time-Lapse Movies
D Before Shooting
• Choose a mode other than EFCT.
• Before shooting a time-lapse movie, take a test shot at current settings
and view the results.
• Time-lapse movies are shot using the movie crop.
• Select [Time zone and date] in the setup menu and make sure that the
camera clock is set to the correct time and date.
(VR). Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins.
• To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, use an optional AC adapter
and power connector or a fully-charged battery.
(0 10).
1 Highlight [Time-lapse movie]

in the photo shooting menu
and press 2.

2 Adjust time-lapse movie settings.
Adjust time-lapse movie settings as described below.
• To choose the interval between frames:
Highlight [Interval] and Choose an interval longer

press 2. than the slowest anticipated
shutter speed (minutes and
seconds) and press J.
• To choose the total shooting time:
Highlight [Shooting time] Choose shooting time (up to

and press 2. 7 hours 59 minutes) and
press J.

• To enable or disable exposure smoothing:
Highlight [Exposure Highlight an option and

smoothing] and press 2. press J.
- Select [On] to smooth changes in exposure for natural-
looking footage.


• To choose the image area:
Highlight [Image area] and Highlight [Choose image

press 2. area] or [Auto DX crop] and
press 2.
- If you selected [Choose image area], choose [FX] or [DX];
if you selected [Auto DX crop], highlight [On] or [Off] and
press J.
• To choose the frame size and rate:
Highlight [Frame size/frame Highlight an option and

rate] and press 2. press J.

• To choose an interval priority option:
Highlight [Interval priority] Highlight an option and

and press 2. press J.
• Choose whether the camera focuses before each shot
after the first:
Highlight [Focus before Highlight an option and

each shot] and press 2. press J.
- If [On] is selected for [Focus before each shot], the
camera will focus before each shot according to the
option currently selected for autofocus mode.

• Choose a destination:
Highlight [Destination] and Highlight the slot that will be

press 2. used to record time-lapse
movies when two memory
cards are inserted and press
J.
3 Highlight [Start] and press J.

• Shooting starts after about 3 s.
• The camera takes photographs at
the [Interval] and for the [Shooting
time] selected in Step 2.

❚❚ Ending Shooting
To end shooting before all the photos are taken, press J or
select [Time-lapse movie] in the photo shooting menu,
highlight [Off], and press J. Note that the menus may not be
displayed when the G button is pressed if the time selected
for [Interval] is very short.
• A movie will be created from the frames shot to the point
where shooting ended and normal photography will resume.
D Calculating the Length of the Final Movie

The total number of frames in the final movie can be calculated by
dividing the shooting time by the interval, rounding up, and adding 1.
The length of the final movie can then be calculated by dividing the
number of shots by the frame rate selected for [Frame size/frame rate]. A
48-frame movie recorded at 1920 × 1080; 24p, for example, will be about
two seconds long. The maximum length for time-lapse movies is 20
minutes.
1 Frame size/frame rate
2 Memory card indicator
3 Length recorded/maximum
length
D Image Review
The K button cannot be used to view pictures while shooting is in
progress, but the current frame will be displayed for a few seconds after
each shot if [On] is selected for [Image review] in the playback menu (the
frame may not be displayed if the interval is very short). Other playback
operations cannot be performed while the frame is displayed.

D Time-Lapse Movies
• Sound is not recorded with time-lapse movies.
• The shutter speed and the time needed to record the image to the
memory card may vary from shot to shot. As a result, the interval
between a shot being recorded and the start of the next shot may vary.
• Shooting will not begin if a time-lapse movie cannot be recorded at
current settings, for example if:
- The value selected for [Interval] is longer than that selected for
[Shooting time]
- [00:00'00"] is selected for [Interval] or [Shooting time]
- The memory card is full
• The K button cannot be used to view pictures while time-lapse
recording is in progress.
• For consistent coloration, choose a white balance setting other than 4
([Auto]) or D ([Natural light auto]) when recording time-lapse
movies.
timer], the standby timer will not expire while recording is in progress.
• Shooting may end if camera controls are used or settings are changed
or HDMI cable is connected. A movie will be created from the frames
shot to the point where shooting ended.
• The following end shooting without a beep sounding or a movie being
recorded:
- Disconnecting the power source
- Ejecting the memory card

D During Shooting
• During shooting, the memory card access
lamp will light and a time-lapse recording
indicator will be displayed in the control
panel. The time remaining (in hours and
minutes) appears in the control panel
shutter-speed display immediately before each frame is recorded.
• At other times, the time remaining can be viewed by pressing the

Shooting and menu settings can be adjusted between shots. Note,
however, that the monitor will turn off approximately 2 s before the next
shot is taken.
D Time-Lapse Movies: Restrictions

Time-lapse movie recording cannot be combined with some camera
• EFCT mode
• Live view photography
• Movie recording
• Long time-exposures (bulb or time photography)
• The self-timer
• Bracketing
• Focus shift

D When [On] Is Selected for [Silent Photography]
including:

Varying Focus over a Series of Photos
(Focus Shift Shooting)
Use the [Focus shift shooting] item in the photo shooting
menu to vary focus automatically over a series of photographs.
This feature can be used to take photos that can later be copied
to a computer and combined using third-party focus-stacking
software.

Focus Shift Shooting Options
Option Description
Start shooting. Shooting will take the selected number
[Start] of shots, changing the focus distance by the selected
amount with each shot.
[No. of shots] Choose the number of shots (maximum 300).
[Focus step Choose the amount the focus distance changes with
width] each shot.
The time between shots, in seconds. Select [00] to take
[Interval until photos at up to about 3 fps. To ensure the correct
next shot] exposure when using a flash, choose an interval long
enough for the flash to charge.
[First-frame
If [On] is selected, the camera will lock exposure for all
exposure
images at the setting for the first frame.
lock]
[Silent
photography]

Option Description
Highlight either of the following options and press 2 to
select or deselect:
[Starting
• [New folder]: A new folder is created for each new
storage
sequence.
folder]
• [Reset file numbering]: File numbering is reset to
0001 whenever a new folder is created.
D Before Shooting
• Use an AF-S or AF-P lens.
• Choose a release mode other than E.
• For best results, we recommend that you choose mode A or M so that
aperture does not change during shooting. Focus shift is not available in
b and EFCT modes.
• We recommend that you stop aperture down two or three stops from
the maximum.
• We recommend that you take all shots at the same ISO sensitivity.
• Take a test shot at current settings and view the results.
(VR).
• To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, use an optional AC adapter
and power connector or a fully-charged battery.
(0 10).

Focus-Shift Photography
1 Rotate the focus-mode selector to AF.
Focus shift is not available with manual focus lenses.
2 Focus.
• The camera takes a series of shots starting from a selected
focus position and continuing toward infinity. The starting
focus position should be slightly in front of the closest
point on the subject.
• Do not move the camera after focusing.
3 Highlight [Focus shift

shooting] in the photo

4 Adjust focus shift settings.
Adjust focus shift settings as described below.
• To choose the number of shots:
Highlight [No. of shots] and Choose the number of shots

press 2. (max. 300) and press J.
- We recommend taking more shots than you think you’ll
need and winnowing them down during focus stacking.
More than 100 shots may be required for photographs of
insects or other small objects, while only a few are needed
to photograph a landscape from front to back with a
wide-angle lens.

• To choose the amount the focus distance changes with
each shot:
Highlight [Focus step width] Press 4 to reduce the focus

and press 2. step width, 2 to increase.
Press J to proceed.
- A value of 5 or less is recommended, as higher settings
increase the risk that some areas will be out of focus when
the shots are stacked. Try experimenting with different
settings before shooting.

• To choose the interval between shots:
Highlight [Interval until Choose the number of

next shot] and press 2. secodns between shots and
press J.
- Select 00 to take photos at up to approximately 3 fps. A
setting of 00 is recommended when shooting without a
flash; to ensure the correct exposure when using a flash,
choose an interval long enough for the flash to charge.

• To enable or disable first-frame exposure lock:
Highlight [First-frame Highlight an option and

exposure lock] and press 2. press J.
- [Off] is recommended if lighting and other conditions will
not change during shooting, [On] when photographing
landscapes and the like under variable lighting.
- Selecting [On] locks exposure at the value for the first
shot, ensuring that all photos have the same exposure.
Large changes in subject brightness during shooting may
however result in apparent variations in exposure. This
can be addressed by selecting [Off].


• Choose start folder options:
Highlight [Starting storage Highlight options and press

folder] and press 2. 2 to select or deselect. Press
J to proceed.
- Select [New folder] to create a new folder for each new
sequence, [Reset file numbering] to reset file numbering
to 0001 whenever a new folder is created.

5 Start shooting.
Highlight [Start] and press J.
Shooting starts after about 3 s. The
camera takes photographs at the
selected interval, starting at the focus
distance selected at the start of
shooting and progressing out toward infinity by the selected
focus step distance with each shot. Shooting ends when the
selected number of shots has been taken or focus reaches
infinity. To end shooting before all shots have been taken,
select [Off] for [Focus shift shooting] in the photo shooting
menu or press the shutter-release button halfway or press
the J button between shots.

D Focus-Shift Photography
• The shutter speed and the time needed to record the image may vary
from shot to shot. As a result, the interval between a shot being
recorded and the start of the next shot may vary.
timer], the standby timer will not expire while shooting is in progress.
• If you are using a flash, choose an interval longer than the time needed
for the flash to charge. If the interval is too short, the flash may fire at
less than the power needed for full exposure.
• If shooting cannot proceed at current settings, for example because
shutter speed is set to A (bulb) or % (time), a warning will be
displayed.
• Changing camera settings while focus-shift photography is in progress
may cause shooting to end.

Shooting and menu settings adjusted between shots. Note, however, that
the monitor will turn off approximately 2 s before the next shot is taken.
A Close-ups
Because depth of focus is reduced at short focus distances, we
recommend choosing smaller focus steps and increasing the number of
shots when photographing subjects close to the camera.

A During Shooting
Immediately before each shot taken during
focus-shift photography, the shutter-speed
display in the control panel will show the
number of shots remaining.
A Focus-Shift Photography: Restrictions

• Focus-shift photography will not start if:
- The camera clock is not set
- An incompatible lens is attached (use only AF-S or AF-P lenses)
- No memory card is inserted
• Focus-shift photography cannot be combined with some camera
- Live view
- Movie recording
- Long time-exposures (bulb or time photography)
- The self-timer
- Bracketing
- Multiple exposure
- HDR (high dynamic range)
- Interval-timer photography
- Time-lapse movies
- The negative digitizer
A When [On] Is Selected for [Silent Photography]

including:
• ISO sensitivities of [Hi 0.3] through [Hi 2.0]

The Electronic Shutter (Silent Live View
Photography)
To enable the electronic shutter during live view photography,
muting the shutter and eliminating the vibrations it produces,
select [On] for [Silent live view photography] in the photo
shooting menu. Use for landscapes, still lifes, and other static
subjects.
• Use of a tripod is recommended.
• Enabling silent live view photography changes the frame
advance rates for continuous release modes (0 178).

A Silent Live View Photography
• Selecting [On] for [Silent live view photography] does not completely
silence the camera. Camera sounds may still be audible, for example
during autofocus or aperture adjustment, in the latter case most
noticeably at apertures smaller (i.e., at f-numbers higher) than f/5.6.
• During silent live view, you may notice the following in the display.
These phenomena will also be visible in the final pictures.
- Flicker or banding in scenes lit by such sources as fluorescent,
mercury vapor, or sodium lamps
- Distortion associated with motion (individual subjects such as trains
or cars moving at high speed through the frame may be distorted, or
the entire frame may appear distorted when the camera is panned
horizontally)
- Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright spots in the display
- Bright regions or bands in scenes lit by flashing signs and other
intermittent light sources or when the subject is briefly illuminated by
a strobe or other bright, momentary light source
• Selecting [On] for [Silent live view photography] mutes the shutter,
but this does not absolve photographers of the need to respect their
subjects’ privacy and image rights.

A Silent Photography
Selecting [On] for [Silent live view photography] disables some camera
A Silent Burst Photography

Custom Setting d13 [Live view in continuous mode] controls whether
the monitor remains on during burst photography in silent mode.

Photographing Film Negatives
(Negative Digitizer)
Create positive copies of color or black-and-white film
negatives. [Negative Digitizer] is accessed via the i menu
during live view photography.
1 Position the negatives in front of a featureless

white or gray background.
• We recommend using an AF-S Micro NIKKOR 60mm f/2.8G
ED or other micro lens and an ES-2 film digitizing adapter.
• We recommend using either natural light or an artificial
light source with a high Ra (color rendering index), such as
a light box or a high-CRI fluorescent lamp.
2 Rotate the mode dial to A.

We recommend that you choose a
sensitivity of ISO 100 and an aperture
of f/8.

C and press a.
4 In live view, press the i button

and select [Negative digitizer].
• Highlight [Negative digitizer]
using the multi selector and press
J; the colors in the display will be
reversed.
• The flash mode is automatically set to s. To use a flash,
choose a flash mode other than s.
5 Choose the film type.

Press 4 or 2 to highlight [Color
negatives] or [Monochrome
negatives] and then press J.

6 Compose the shot to capture a frame of the film
negative.
7 Adjust exposure.
• Press J to display brightness
adjustment options. Press 4 or 2
to adjust exposure. Press J again to
save changes and exit.
• To view your subject at a higher
magnification, press X (T).
8 Take photographs.
• The photographs will be saved in JPEG format.
• Press the i button to exit negative digitizer mode.

D Negative Digitizer
• No options are available for correcting dust, scratches, or uneven colors
due to faded film.
• Photos are saved in JPEG format even when [NEF (RAW)] is selected for
image quality. Photos taken with a JPEG option selected will be saved at
the chosen setting, while photos taken with [NEF (RAW)] selected will
be saved in [JPEG finem] format.
D Negative Digitizer: Restrictions

Some camera features cannot be used with the negative digitizer,
including:
• Modes other than A
• Movie recording
• Bracketing
• Focus shift

Customizing the i Menu: Customize i
Menu
Choose the items displayed in the i
menus during shooting. Use Custom
Setting f1 [Customize i menu] to
choose the items displayed during
viewfinder photography, Custom Setting
f2 [Customize i menu (Lv)] to choose
the items displayed during live view photography, and Custom
Setting g1 [Customize i menu] to choose the items displayed
during movie recording. The procedure is described below.

1 Highlight the position you
want to change and press J.
A list of the items available for the
selected position will be displayed.
2 Highlight the desired item and

press J.
• The item will be assigned to the
selected position and the options
shown in Step 1 will be displayed.
• Repeat Steps 1 and 2 as desired.
3 Press the G button.

Changes will be saved and the Custom Settings menu will be
displayed.

Using Non-CPU Lenses (Non-CPU Lens
Data)
Non-CPU lenses (0 786) can be used in modes A and M, with
aperture set using the lens aperture ring. By specifying lens data
(lens focal length and maximum aperture), the user can gain
access to the following CPU lens functions.
• If the focal length of the lens is known:
- Power zoom can be used with optional flash units
- Lens focal length is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback
photo info display
• If the maximum aperture of the lens is known:
- The aperture value is displayed in the control panel and
viewfinder
- Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture if the flash unit
supports qA (auto aperture) mode
- Aperture is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info
display

• Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture
of the lens:
- Enables color matrix metering (note that it may be necessary
to use [Center-weighted metering] or [Spot metering] to
achieve accurate results with some lenses, including Reflex-
NIKKOR lenses)
- Improves the precision of [Center-weighted metering] and
[Spot metering] and i-TTL flash control
D Teleconverters and Zoom Lenses

• If the correct focal length is not available, for example because you are
using a teleconverter or zoom lens, choose the next largest value.
• The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the combined maximum
aperture of the teleconverter and the lens.

Entering Lens Data
1 Select Non-CPU lens data.
Highlight [Non-CPU lens data] in the
setup menu and press 2.
2 Select a lens number.

Highlight [Lens number] and press
4 or 2 to choose a lens number.
3 Enter the focal length and

aperture.
Highlight [Focal length (mm)] or
[Maximum aperture] and press 4 or
2 to edit the highlighted item.
4 Save settings and exit.

Press J. The specified focal length and aperture will be
stored under the chosen lens number.

Recalling Non-CPU Lens Data
1 Assign non-CPU lens number selection to a camera
control.
Assign [Choose non-CPU lens number] to a control using
Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls].
2 Use the selected control to

choose a lens number.
Press the selected control and rotate a command dial until

the desired lens number is displayed in the control panel.
1 Focal length
2 Maximum aperture
3 Lens number
A Zoom Lenses
Lens data are not adjusted when non-CPU lenses are zoomed in or out.
The data for different focal lengths can be entered as separate lens
numbers, or the data for the lens can be edited to reflect the new values
for lens focal length and maximum aperture each time zoom is adjusted.

Playback
Viewing Pictures
Full-Frame Playback
Press the K button to view the most recent picture full frame in
the display.
• Additional pictures can be displayed by pressing 4 or 2; to

view additional information on the current photograph, press
1 or 3 (0 366).
Playback 353
Thumbnail Playback
To view multiple images, press the W
(Y) button when a picture is displayed
full frame.
• The number of images displayed increases from 4 to 9 to 72

each time the W (Y) button is pressed, and decreases with
each press of the X (T) button. Use the multi selector to
highlight images.
354 Playback
Calendar Playback
To view images taken on a selected date, press the W (Y)
button when 72 images are displayed.
• Use the multi selector (1, 3, 4, or 2) to highlight a date in

the date list (q) and press W (Y) to place the cursor in the
thumbnail list (w). Press 1 or 3 to highlight pictures in the
thumbnail list. To return to the date list, press the W (Y)
button a second time.
• To zoom in on the picture highlighted in the thumbnail list,
press and hold the X (T) button.
• To exit to thumbnail playback, press X (T) when the cursor
is in the date list.
Playback 355
Playback Controls
2
3
4
5
1 O (Q): Delete the current 4 X (T): Zoom in (0 376)

picture (0 383) 5 W (Y): View multiple pictures
2 G: View the menus (0 57) (0 354)
3 Q/g (U): Protect the
current picture (0 378)
D Touch Controls
Touch controls can be used when pictures are displayed in the monitor
(0 14).
D Rotate Tall
To display “tall” (portrait-orientation)
photographs in tall orientation, select [On] for
[Rotate tall] in the playback menu.
356 Playback
A Image Review
When [On] is selected for [Image review] in the playback menu,
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting
(because the camera is already in the correct orientation, images are not
rotated automatically during image review). In CL, CH, and QC modes,
display begins when shooting ends, with the first photograph in the
current series displayed.
Playback 357
Using the Touch Screen
During playback, the touch sensitive monitor can be used for
the following operations.
❚❚ Viewing Other Pictures

Flick left or right to view other pictures.
❚❚ Scrolling Rapidly to Other Pictures

In full frame playback, you can touch the
bottom of the display to display a frame
advance bar, then slide your finger left or
right to scroll rapidly to other pictures.
358 Playback
❚❚ Zoom (Photos Only)
Use stretch and pinch gestures to zoom
in and out and slide to scroll (0 376).
You can also give the display two quick
taps to zoom in from full-frame playback
or cancel zoom.
❚❚ Viewing Thumbnails
To “zoom out” to a thumbnail view
(0 354), use a pinch gesture in full-frame
playback.
• Use pinch and stretch to choose the
number of images displayed from 4, 9,
and 72 frames.
• Using a pinch gesture when 72 frames are displayed takes you
to calendar playback. To return to 72-frame playback, use a
stretch gesture.
Playback 359
❚❚ View Movies
Tap the on-screen guide to start movie
playback (movies are indicated by a 1
icon). Tap the display to pause or
resume, or tap Z to exit to full-frame
playback (note that some of the icons in
the movie playback display do not
respond to touch-screen operations).
360 Playback
The i Button
Pressing the i button during playback zoom or full-frame or
thumbnail playback displays the i menu for playback mode.
Select options using the multi selector and J button and press
the i button to exit the menu and return to playback.
Playback 361
❚❚ Photos
Option Description
Save a copy of the current image cropped to the
[Quick crop] 1 area visible in the display. This option is not
available when histograms are displayed (0 369).
[Rating] Rate the current picture (0 380).
[Select to send/
deselect (smart
device)] Select the current picture for upload (0 381). The
[Select to send/ option displayed varies with the type of device
deselect (PC)] connected.
[Select to send/
deselect (WT)]
Use the options in the retouch menu (0 709) to
[Retouch]
create a retouched copy of the current photograph.
[Side-by-side Compare retouched copies to the original
comparison] 2 photographs.
Choose a folder for playback. Highlight a slot and
[Choose slot and press 2 to list the folders on the selected card,
folder] then highlight a folder and press J to view the
pictures in the highlighted folder.
Press 4 or 2 to choose the color channel for the
[Select R, G, B] 3
highlight display.
1 Displayed only during playback zoom.
2 Available only when a retouched copy (indicated by a N icon) or the
source picture for a retouched copy is selected.
3 Available only when highlights or RGB histograms are displayed.
362 Playback
A [Side-by-Side Comparison]
Choose [Side-by-side comparison] to compare retouched copies with
the unretouched originals.
1 Options used to create copy
2 Source image
3 Retouched copy
• The source image is displayed on the left, the retouched copy on the
right.
• The options used to create the copy are listed at the top of the display.
• Press 4 or 2 to switch between the source image and the retouched
copy.
• If the copy was created from multiple source images using [Image
overlay], press 1 or 3 to view the other images.
• If the source has been copied multiple times, press 1 or 3 to view the
other copies.
• To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X (T)
button.
• Press J to return to playback with the highlighted image displayed full-
frame.
• To exit to playback, press the K button.
• The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a
photograph that is now protected.
• The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a
photograph that has since been deleted.
Playback 363
❚❚ Movies
Option Description
[Rating] Rate the current movie (0 380).
[Select to send/
deselect (PC)] Select the current movie for upload (0 381). The
option displayed varies with the type of device
[Select to send/ connected.
deselect (WT)]
[Volume control] Adjust playback volume.
Trim footage from the current movie and save the
[Trim movie]
edited copy in a new file (0 272).
Choose a folder for playback. Highlight a slot and
[Choose slot and press 2 to list the folders on the selected card,
folder] then highlight a folder and press J to view the
pictures in the highlighted folder.
Press 4 or 2 to choose a color channel for the
[Select R, G, B] *
highlight display.
* Available in the highlight and RGB histogram displays only.
364 Playback
❚❚ Movies (Playback Paused)
Option Description
Trim footage from the current movie and
[Choose start/end
9 save the edited copy in a new file
point]
(0 272).
Save a selected frame as a JPEG still
4 [Save current frame]
(0 277).
Add indices to movies during playback
(0 278). Indices can be used to quickly
r [Add index]
locate frames during playback and
editing.
o [Delete index] Delete indices (0 278).
Playback 365
Photo Information
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-
frame playback. Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo
information as shown below.
1 File information 5 Shooting data 1

2 Exposure data 1 6 Location data 2
3 Highlights 1 7 Overview data 1
4 RGB histogram 1 8 None (image only) 1
1 Displayed only if the corresponding option is selected for [Playback

display options] in the playback menu.
2 Displayed only if embedded in the picture.
366 Playback
File Information
12 3 4 5 5 Frame number/total number
of frames
6 AF-area brackets *
7 Image quality (0 134)
15 6
8 Image size (0 137)
14
9 Image area (0 129)
13
12 7 10 Time of recording (0 658)
11 Date of recording (0 658)
11 10 9 8
12 Current card slot (0 279)
1 Protect status (0 378)
13 Rating (0 380)
2 Retouch indicator (0 709)
14 Folder name (0 545)
3 Upload marking (0 381)
15 File name (0 550)
4 Focus point * (0 36)
* Displayed only if [Focus point] is selected for [Playback display

options].
Playback 367
Exposure Data
1 1 Folder number–frame number
(0 545)
2 Shooting mode (0 107)
3 Shutter speed (0 110, 113)
4 Aperture (0 111, 113)
5 Exposure compensation
(0 175)
6 ISO sensitivity * (0 187)
2 3 4 5 6
* Displayed in red if photo was taken in mode P, S, A, or M with auto ISO
sensitivity control on.
Highlights
To choose a color channel for the highlight display, select
[Select R, G, B] in the i menu and press 4 or 2.
1 2 1 Highlights (areas that may be
overexposed)
2 Folder number-frame number
(0 545)
368 Playback
RGB Histogram
To choose a color channel for the highlight display, select
[Select R, G, B] in the i menu and press 4 or 2.
1 Folder number-frame number
3 (0 545)
4 2 White balance (0 195)
1 5 Color temperature (0 204)
Preset manual (0 209)
2 6 White balance fine-tuning
(0 200)
3 Histogram (RGB channel)
4 Histogram (red channel)
5 Histogram (green channel)
6 Histogram (blue channel)
D Playback Zoom
To zoom in on the photograph when the
histogram is displayed, press X (T). Use the
X (T) and W (Y) buttons to zoom in and
out and scroll the image with the multi
selector. The histogram will be updated to
show only the data for the portion of the image
visible in the display.
Playback 369
D Histograms
Histograms show tone distribution, with pixel brightness (tone) plotted
on the horizontal axis and the number of pixels on the vertical axis.
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from
those displayed in imaging applications. Some sample histograms are
shown below:
• If the image contains objects
with a wide range of
brightnesses, the distribution of
tones will be relatively even.
• If the image is dark, tone

distribution will be shifted to
the left.
• If the image is bright, tone

distribution will be shifted to
the right.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the

right, while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to
the left. Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall exposure when
bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see pictures in the display.
370 Playback
Shooting Data
View the settings in effect at the time the picture was taken.
1 3 Exposure compensation
2 (0 175)
3 Optimal exposure tuning 2
(0 604)
4
4 Focal length 3
5
6 5 Lens data
7 6 Autofocus mode (0 140)
8 AF-area mode (0 145)
9 7 Lens vibration reduction (VR)
10 11 12 13 on/off
1 Metering (0 166) 8 White balance 4 (0 195)
Shutter speed (0 110, 113) 9 White balance fine-tuning
Aperture (0 111, 113) (0 200)
2 Shooting mode (0 107) 10 Color space (0 554)
ISO sensitivity 1 (0 187)
11 Camera name
13 Folder number–frame number
Playback 371
1 1 Flash type 5
2 2 Remote flash control 5
3 3 Flash mode 5 (0 465)
4 4 Flash control mode 5 (0 463)
Flash compensation 5 (0 469)
1 Picture Control 6 (0 243)
1 1 High ISO noise reduction

2 (0 557)
3 Long exposure noise
4 reduction (0 556)
5 2 Active D-Lighting (0 254)
3 HDR strength (0 256)
6 4 Vignette control (0 558)
5 Retouch history (0 709)
6 Image comment (0 681)
372 Playback
1 Name of photographer 7
1 (0 682)
2 Copyright holder 7 (0 682)
2
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken in mode P, S, A, or M with auto ISO

2 Displayed if Custom Setting b5 [Fine-tune optimal exposure] has
been set to a value other than zero for any metering method.
3 Also includes the magnification for pictures taken with a
teleconverter.
4 Also includes color temperature of photos taken using 4 ([Auto]).
5 Displayed only if photo was taken with optional flash unit (0 459,
477).
6 The items displayed vary with the Picture Control selected when the
picture was taken.
7 Copyright information is only displayed if recorded with the
photograph using the [Copyright information] item in the setup
menu.
Location Data
The latitude, longitude, and other location data are supplied by
and vary with the smart device (0 687). In the case of movies,
the data give the location at the start of recording.
Playback 373
Overview Data
1 234 5
6
7 18 19 20 21 22 23
8 30
17
29
9 28 27 26 25 24
16
15 14 13 12 11 10
1 Frame number/total number 13 Time of recording (0 658)
of frames 14 Folder name (0 545)
2 Upload marking (0 381) 15 Date of recording (0 658)
3 Protect status (0 378) 16 Current card slot (0 279)
4 Retouch indicator (0 709) 17 Rating (0 380)
5 Camera name 18 Metering (0 166)
6 Image comment indicator 19 Shooting mode (0 107)
(0 681)
20 Shutter speed (0 110, 113)
7 Location data indicator
(0 687) 21 Aperture (0 111, 113)
8 Histogram (0 370) 22 ISO sensitivity 1 (0 187)
9 Image quality (0 134) 23 Focal length
10 Image size (0 137) 24 Active D-Lighting (0 254)
12 File name (0 550)
374 Playback
25 Picture Control (0 243)
26 Color space (0 554)
27 Flash mode 2 (0 465)
28 White balance (0 195)
Color temperature (0 204)
Preset manual (0 209)
White balance fine-tuning
(0 200)
29 Flash compensation 2 (0 469)
Commander mode 2
30 Exposure compensation
(0 175)
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken in mode P, S, A, or M with auto ISO
2 Displayed only if photo was taken with optional flash unit.
Playback 375
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom
To zoom in on an image displayed in full-
frame playback, press the X (T) or J
button or give the display two quick
taps.
Playback Zoom
To Description
Press X (T) or use
stretch gestures to zoom in
to maximum of
approximately 24× (large
images in FX/36 × 24
format), 18× (medium
images) or 12× (small
Zoom in or
images). Press W (Y) or use pinch gestures to zoom
out/view other
out. While photo is zoomed in, use multi selector or
areas of image
slide finger over screen to view areas of image not
visible in monitor. Keep multi selector pressed to scroll
rapidly to other areas of frame. Navigation window is
displayed when zoom ratio is altered; area currently
visible in monitor is indicated by yellow border. Bar
under navigation window shows zoom ratio, turning
green at 1 : 1.
376 Playback
To Description
To create crop image to area currently visible in
monitor, press i, highlight [Quick crop] and press J.
Crop image
Note that [Quick crop] is not available when RGB
histogram is displayed (0 369).
Faces detected during
zoom are indicated by
white borders in
Select faces navigation window.
Rotate sub-command dial
or tap on-screen guide to
view other faces.
Rotate main command dial or tap e or f icons at

View other bottom of display to view same location in other
images photos at current zoom ratio. Playback zoom is
cancelled when a movie is displayed.
Change Press Q/g (U) to protect or remove protection from
protect status images (0 378).
Return to Press the shutter-release button halfway or press the
shooting mode K button to exit to shooting mode.
Display menus Press G to view the menus.
Playback 377
Protecting Photographs from Deletion
In full-frame, zoom, and thumbnail playback, the Q/g (U)
button can be used to protect photographs from accidental
deletion. Protected files cannot be deleted using the O (Q)
button or the [Delete] item in the playback menu. Note that
protected images will be deleted when the memory card is
formatted (0 656).
To protect a photograph:
1 Select an image.
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom
or highlight it in the thumbnail list.
2 Press the Q/g (U) button.
The photograph will be marked with

a P icon. To remove protection from
the photograph so that it can be
deleted, display the photograph or
highlight it in the thumbnail list and
then press the Q/g (U) button.
378 Playback
A Removing Protection from All Images
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently
selected for [Playback folder] in the playback menu, press the Q/g
(U) and O (Q) buttons together for about two seconds during
playback.
Playback 379
Rating Pictures
Rate pictures or mark them as candidates for later deletion.
Ratings can also be viewed in ViewNX-i and Capture NX-D.
Rating is not available with protected images.
1 Select a picture.
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in
thumbnail playback.
2 Display playback options.

Press the i button to display
playback options.
3 Select [Rating].
Highlight [Rating] and press 2.
4 Choose a rating.
Press 4 or 2 to choose a rating of
from zero to five stars, or select d to
mark the picture as a candidate for
later deletion. Press J to complete
the operation.
380 Playback
Selecting Pictures for Upload
Follow the steps below to select the current picture for upload
to a smart device, computer, or ftp server.
• The i menu items used to select pictures for upload vary with
the type of device connected:
- [Select to send/deselect (smart device)]: Displayed when
the camera is connected to a smart device via built-in
Bluetooth using the [Connect to smart device] item in the
setup menu (0 692).
- [Select to send/deselect (PC)]: Displayed when the camera
is connected to a computer via built-in Wi-Fi using the
[Connect to PC] item in the setup menu (0 696).
- [Select to send/deselect (WT)]: Displayed when the camera
is connected to a computer or ftp server via an WT-7 wireless
transmitter (available separately) using the [Wireless
transmitter (WT-7)] item in the setup menu (0 700).
• Movies cannot be selected for upload when the camera is
connected to a smart device via the SnapBridge app.
• The maximum file size for movies uploaded by other means is
4 GB.
Playback 381
1 Select a picture.
Display a picture in full-frame playback or playback zoom or
select it in the thumbnail list.
2 Choose [Select to send/

deselect].
Press the i button to display the i

menu, then highlight [Select to
send/deselect] and press J. Pictures
selected for upload are indicated by a
W icon; to deselect, repeat Steps 1
and 2.
382 Playback
Deleting Pictures
Press the O (Q) button to delete the current picture or use the
[Delete] item in the playback menu to delete multiple selected
pictures, all pictures taken on a selected date, or all pictures in
the current playback folder (protected pictures cannot be
deleted). Exercise caution when deleting pictures, as pictures
cannot be recovered once deleted.
During Playback
Press the O (Q) button to delete the current photograph.
1 Press the O (Q) button.

A confirmation dialog will be
displayed.
2 Press the O (Q) button again.

To delete the picture, press the O
(Q) button again. To exit without
deleting the picture, press K.
Playback 383
A Calendar Playback
During calendar playback, you can delete all photographs taken on a
selected date by highlighting the date in the date list and pressing the O
(Q) button.
A Deleting Copies
If the picture selected in the playback display
when the O (Q) button is pressed was
recorded with two memory cards inserted and
[Backup] or [RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2]
selected for [Role played by card in Slot 2],
you will be prompted to choose whether to
delete both copies or only the copy on the card
in the current slot (0 281).
384 Playback
The Playback Menu
The [Delete] item in the playback menu contains the following
options. Note that depending on the number of images, some
time may be required for deletion.
Option Description
Q [Selected] Delete selected pictures.
i [Select date] Delete all pictures taken on a selected date (0 387).
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for
R [All] playback. If two cards are inserted, you can select
the card from which pictures will be deleted.
Playback 385
❚❚ Selected
1 Select pictures.
• Use the multi selector to highlight a picture and press the
W (Y) button to select or deselect. Selected pictures are
marked by a O icon (to view the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold the X/T button).
• Repeat as desired to select additional pictures.
2 Press J to complete the

operation.
displayed; highlight [Yes] and press
J.
386 Playback
❚❚ Select Date
1 Select dates.
Highlight a date and press 2 to
select all pictures taken on the
highlighted date. Selected dates are
marked with a M icon. Repeat as
desired to select additional dates; to
deselect a date, highlight it and press 2.
2 Delete the pictures taken on

the selected dates.
Press J. A confirmation dialog will be
J.
Playback 387
❚❚ All
1 Choose a slot.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the slot
containing the memory card from
which the pictures will be deleted
and press J.
2 Delete the pictures.

• Highlight [Yes] and press J to
delete all pictures in the folder
currently selected for [Playback
folder] in the playback menu.
• Note that depending on the
number of images, some time may be required for
deletion.
388 Playback
Connecting to Computers and
TVs
Connecting to Computers
To upload pictures to a computer, connect the camera via a
wireless network or using the supplied USB cable.
Connecting via USB

If the supplied USB cable is used to connect the camera to a
computer running ViewNX-i, you can copy pictures to the
computer, where they can be viewed, edited, and organized.

❚❚ Installing ViewNX-i
Download the ViewNX-i installer from the following website
and follow the on-screen instructions to complete installation
(existing users should be sure to download the latest version, as
earlier versions may not support the camera).
• An Internet connection is required.
• For system requirements and other information, see the Nikon
website for your region.
D Capture NX-D
Use Nikon’s Capture NX-D software to fine-tune photos or to change
settings for NEF (RAW) pictures and save them in other formats.
Capture NX-D is available for download from:
390 Connecting to Computers and TVs

❚❚ Copying Pictures to the Computer
For detailed instructions, see the online help for ViewNX-i.
1 Connect the USB cable.

After turning the camera off and ensuring that a memory
card is inserted, connect the supplied USB cable as shown.
2 Turn the camera on.

The Nikon Transfer 2 component of ViewNX-i will start (if a
message is displayed prompting you to choose a program,
select Nikon Transfer 2). If Nikon Transfer 2 does not start
automatically, launch ViewNX-i and click the “Import” icon.

3 Click [Start
Transfer].
Pictures on the memory
card will be copied to
the computer.
4 Turn the camera off.

Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable when
transfer is complete.
D Windows 10 and Windows 8.1

Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 may
display an AutoPlay prompt when the
camera is connected.
• Click the dialog and then click [Nikon

Transfer 2] to select Nikon Transfer 2.

D macOS
If Nikon Transfer 2 does not start automatically, confirm that the camera is
connected and then launch Image Capture (an application that comes
with macOS) and select Nikon Transfer 2 as the application that opens
when the camera is detected.
D Transferring Movies
Do not attempt to transfer movies from the memory card while it is
inserted in another camera. Doing so could result in the movies being
deleted without being transferred.
D Connecting to Computers
• Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is
in progress.
• Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle. Be sure
also to keep the connectors straight when disconnecting the cable.
• Turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting interface
cables.
• To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera
battery is fully charged.
D USB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the cable
via a USB hub or keyboard.

Wireless Networks (Wi-Fi)
The following methods can be used to connect to a computer
via Wi-Fi. For more information, see “Network Connections”
(0 402).
❚❚ Built-in Wi-Fi
Use the [Connect to PC] item in the camera setup menu to
connect to computers either directly or via a wireless router.
Connection via a wireless router Direct wireless connection

❚❚ The WT-7 Wireless Transmitter
Connecting a WT-7 wireless transmitter enables the [Wireless
transmitter (WT-7)] item in the setup menu. With Camera
Control Pro 2 (available separately), the camera can be
controlled and pictures saved to the computer as they are
taken.
• The WT-7 can be used to upload pictures to computers or ftp

servers.
• You can also connect via Ethernet.
• Use the WT-7 for connections that are more reliable than those
offered by the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi.

Connecting to HDMI Devices
The optional High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) cable
or a type C HDMI cable (available separately from third-party
suppliers) can be used to connect the camera to high-definition
video devices. Always turn the camera off before connecting or
disconnecting an HDMI cable.
1 HDMI connector for 2 HDMI connector * for

connection to camera connection to external device
* Choose a cable with a connector that matches the connector on the
HDMI device.

Connecting to HDMI TVs
• After connecting the camera to an HDMI television or other
display, tune the device to the HDMI channel, then turn the
camera on and press the K button. During playback, images
will be displayed on the television screen.
• Volume can be adjusted using television controls; the camera
controls cannot be used.
• If the camera is paired with a smart device running the
SnapBridge app, the device can be used to control playback
remotely while the camera is connected to a TV. See the
SnapBridge app online help for details.
Connecting to HDMI Recorders

The camera can record video directly to
connected HDMI recorders. Some
recorders will even start and stop
recording in response to camera
controls. Use the [HDMI] item in the
setup menu to adjust settings for HDMI
output.

❚❚ Output Resolution
Choose the format for images output to the HDMI device. If
[Auto] is selected, the camera will automatically select the
appropriate format.
❚❚ Advanced
Adjust settings for connection to the HDMI device.
Option Description
[Auto] is recommended in most situations. If the
camera is unable to determine the correct RGB video
signal output range for the HDMI device, you can
choose [Limited range] for devices with an RGB video
[Output range] signal input range of 16 to 235 or [Full range] for
devices with an RGB video signal input range of 0 to
255. Choose [Limited range] if you notice a loss of
detail in shadows, [Full range] if shadows are “washed
out” or too bright.

Option Description
Enabling external recording control allows camera
controls to be used to start and stop recording when
the camera is connected via HDMI to a third-party
recorder that supports the Atomos Open Protocol
(Atomos SHOGUN, NINJA, or SUMO-series Monitor
recorders). An icon will be displayed in the camera
monitor: A is displayed in movie live view, while
B is displayed during movie recording. During
[External recording, check the recorder and recorder display to
recording ensure that footage is being saved to the device (note
control] that the footage output to the device may be
disrupted while external recording control is in effect).
The camera display will turn off automatically when
the standby timer expires, ending HDMI output; when
recording movies to an external device, select Custom
Setting c2 [Standby timer] and choose [No limit] or a
time longer than the anticipated recording time. See
the manual provided with the recorder for more
information on device features and operation.
[Output data
Choose from [8 bit] and [10 bit].
depth]

Option Description
Preserve details in highlights and shadows and avoid
over-saturated colors when recording movies. [N-Log]
is intended for footage that will be color graded during
post-production. [HDR (HLG)] is used to record
footage in HLG format for such applications as HDR
broadcasting.
• The footage will be recorded directly to the external
[N-Log/HDR
device. It cannot be saved to the camera memory
output
card.
options]
• This option is available only when [10 bit] is selected
for [Output data depth] in modes other than EFCT.
• The [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Maximum
sensitivity] and [ISO sensitivity (Mode M)] items in
the movie shooting menu can be set respectively to
values of from ISO 1600 to 25600 and from ISO 800 to
51200.
Choose [On] for a live preview of video footage
recorded with [N-Log] or [HDR (HLG)] selected for
[View assist] [N-Log/HDR output options]. The colors in the
preview are simplified for enhanced contrast, but this
has no effect on the footage actually recorded.

D HDMI Output
HDMI output is not available when movies are recorded at frame sizes of
1920 × 1080 120p, 1920 × 1080 100p, or 1920 × 1080 slow-motion or
when the camera is connected to a device running Camera Control Pro 2.
D [10 Bit] Selected for [Output Data Depth]

[10 bit] can be used only with compatible recorders. No photos can be
taken; during movie recording, the following additional restrictions apply
when 3840 × 2160 is selected for frame size:
• Movies are not recorded to memory cards inserted in the camera.
• Icons and characters in the monitor will display at low resolution.
• The angle of view is about 90%.
D HDR (HLG) Output

Optimal color reproduction can only be achieved if your equipment,
including your storage device, computer, monitor, operating system, and
software, support HDR (HLG). If a signal is received from the connected
device indicating that it supports HDR (HLG), the camera will respond
with a “gamma: HLG” identifier.

Network Connections
Camera and Network System Chart
This section is chiefly devoted to describing how to connect to a
wireless local area network (LAN) using the camera’s built-in
Wi-Fi and how to use network features once connected. The
types of network connection available with the camera and
optional accessories are shown below.
• For information on connecting to networks using a WT-7
wireless transmitter, see the manual supplied with the WT-7.
402 Network Connections

Connecting to Smart Devices
To connect to the camera from a smartphone or tablet (below,
“smart device”), download the SnapBridge app.
The SnapBridge App

Use the SnapBridge app for wireless connections
between the camera and smart devices.
The SnapBridge app is available free of charge from
the Apple App Store® and on Google Play™. Visit the
Nikon website for the latest SnapBridge news.

What SnapBridge Can Do for You
Using the SnapBridge app, you can:
• Download pictures from the camera
Download existing pictures or download new pictures as they
are taken.
• Control the camera remotely (remote photography)
Control the camera and take pictures from the smart device.
For details, see the SnapBridge app online help:

https://nikonimglib.com/snbr/onlinehelp/en/index.html

Wireless Connections
Using the SnapBridge app, you can connect via Wi-Fi (0 406) or
Bluetooth (0 415). Connecting using the SnapBridge app
allows you to set the camera clock and update location data
using information provided by the smart device. Connecting
using Bluetooth allows pictures to be uploaded automatically as
they are taken.
Wi-Fi Bluetooth

Connecting via Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi Mode)
Follow the steps below to connect to the camera via Wi-Fi.
D Before Connecting
Before connecting, enable Wi-Fi on the smart device (for details, see the
documentation provided with the device), check that there is space
available on the camera memory card, and ensure that the batteries in the
camera and smart device are fully charged to prevent the devices turning
off unexpectedly.
1 Smart device: Launch the

SnapBridge app.
If this is the first time you have
launched the app, tap [Skip]. If you
have launched the app before, you
can instead proceed to Step 2.

2 Open the tab and tap > [Wi-Fi mode].
3 Smart device: Tap [Wi-Fi

connection] when prompted.

4 Camera/smart device: Turn the
camera on.
The smart device will instruct you to
ready the camera. Turn the camera
on. Do not tap [Next] until you have
completed the next step.

5 Camera: Enable Wi-Fi.
Select [Connect to smart device] >
[Wi-Fi connection] in the setup
menu, then highlight [Establish
Wi-Fi connection] and press J.
The camera SSID and password will

be displayed.
D Enabling Wi-Fi
You can also enable Wi-Fi by selecting
[Wi-Fi connection] > [Establish Wi-Fi
conn. with smart device] in the i menu
for shooting mode.

6 Smart device: Tap [Next].
Tap [Next] once you have enabled
Wi-Fi on the camera as described in
the preceeding step.

7 Smart device: After reading
the instructions, tap [Open the
device settings app].
• Android devices: Wi-Fi settings
will be displayed.
• iOS devices: The “Settings” app will
launch. Tap [< Settings] to open
the “Settings” app. Next, scroll up
and tap [Wi-Fi], which you’ll find
near the top of the settings list.

8 Smart device: Enter the camera SSID and
password.
• Enter the SSID and password displayed by the camera in
Step 5.
- Android device (actual displays may differ)

- iOS device (actual displays may differ)
• You will not be required to enter the password when next

you connect to the camera.

9 Smart device: Return to the
SnapBridge app.
After a Wi-Fi connection is
established, Wi-Fi mode options will
be displayed. See online help for
information on using the SnapBridge
app.
D Terminating Wi-Fi Mode

To end the Wi-Fi connection, tap .
When the icon changes to , tap and
select [Exit Wi-Fi mode.].

Connecting via Bluetooth
Before connecting via Bluetooth for the first time, you will need
to pair the camera and smart device as described below. The
pairing instructions for Android and iOS differ slightly.
D Before Pairing
Before beginning pairing, enable Bluetooth on the smart device (for
details, see the documentation provided with the device), check that
there is space available on the camera memory card, and ensure that the
batteries in the camera and smart device are fully charged to prevent the
devices turning off unexpectedly.

❚❚ Android: Connecting for the First Time (Pairing)
For information on pairing the camera with iOS devices, see
“iOS: Connecting for the First Time (Pairing)” (0 422).
1 Camera: Ready the camera.

[Pairing (Bluetooth)] in the setup
menu, then highlight [Start pairing]
and press J…
…to display the camera name.
2 Android device: Launch the

SnapBridge app.
• If this is the first time you have
launched the app, tap [Connect to
camera] and proceed to Step 3.

• If you have launched the app before,
open the tab and tap [Connect
to camera].
3 Android device: Choose the

camera.
Tap the camera name.

4 Camera/Android device: Check the authentication
code.
Confirm that the camera and Android device display the
same authentication code (circled in the illustration).

5 Camera/Android device: Initiate pairing.
• Camera: Press J.
• Android device: Tap the button

indicated in the illustration (the
label may differ depending on the
version of Android you are using).
D Pairing Error
If you wait too long between pressing the button on the camera and
tapping the button on the Android device, pairing will fail and an
error will be displayed.
Camera: Press J and return to Step 1.
Android device: Tap [OK] and return to Step 2.

6 Camera/Android device: Follow the on-screen
instructions.
• Camera: Press J. The camera will
display a message stating that the
devices are connected.
• Android device: Pairing is complete. Tap [OK] to exit to

the tab.
D Pairing for the First Time

The first time you pair the Android device with a camera after
installing the SnapBridge app, you will be prompted to select auto
link (auto upload and auto clock and location synchronization)
options. This prompt will not appear again, but auto link settings can
be accessed at any time using [Auto link] in the tab.

Pairing is now complete. The next time you use the SnapBridge
app, you can connect as described in “Connecting to a Paired
Device” (0 429).
D Disabling Bluetooth
To disable Bluetooth, select [Disable] for [Connect to smart device] >
[Pairing (Bluetooth)] > [Bluetooth connection] in the camera setup
menu.

❚❚ iOS: Connecting for the First Time (Pairing)
For information on pairing the camera with Android devices,
see “Android: Connecting for the First Time (Pairing)” (0 416).
1 Camera: Ready the camera.

[Pairing (Bluetooth)] in the setup
menu, then highlight [Start pairing]
and press J…
…to display the camera name.
2 iOS device: Launch the

SnapBridge app.
• If this is the first time you have
launched the app, tap [Connect to
camera] and proceed to Step 3.

• If you have launched the app before,
open the tab and tap [Connect
to camera].
3 iOS device: Choose the camera.

Tap the camera name.

4 iOS device: Read the
instructions.
Read the pairing instructions
carefully and tap [Understood].
5 iOS device: Select an

accessory.
When prompted to select an
accessory, tap the camera name
again.

6 Camera/iOS device: Initiate pairing.
• Camera: Press J.
• iOS device: Tap the button

indicated in the illustration (the
label may differ depending on the
version of iOS you are using).

D Pairing Error
If you wait too long between pressing the button on the camera and
tapping the button on the iOS device, pairing will fail and an error will
be displayed.
Camera: Press J and return to Step 1.
iOS device: Dismiss the SnapBridge app and check that it is not
running in the background, then open the iOS “Settings” app and
request iOS to “forget” the camera as shown in the illustration before
returning to Step 2.

7 Camera/iOS device: Follow the on-screen
instructions.
• Camera: Press J. The camera will
display a message stating that the
devices are connected.
• iOS device: Pairing is complete. Tap [OK] to exit to the

tab.

D Pairing for the First Time
The first time you pair the iOS device with a camera after installing the
SnapBridge app, you will be prompted to select auto link (auto
upload and auto clock and location synchronization) options. This
prompt will not appear again, but auto link settings can be accessed
at any time using [Auto link] in the tab.
Pairing is now complete. The next time you use the SnapBridge
app, you can connect as described in “Connecting to a Paired
Device” (0 429).
D Disabling Bluetooth
To disable Bluetooth, select [Disable] for [Connect to smart device] >
[Pairing (Bluetooth)] > [Bluetooth connection] in the camera setup
menu.

❚❚ Connecting to a Paired Device
Connecting to a smart device that has already been paired with
the camera is quick and easy.
1 Camera: Enable Bluetooth.

In the setup menu, select [Connect
to smart device] > [Pairing
(Bluetooth)] > [Bluetooth
connection], then highlight
[Enable] and press J.
2 Smart device: Launch the

SnapBridge app.
A Bluetooth connection will be
established automatically.

Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi
What Wi-Fi Can Do for You
Connect via Wi-Fi to upload
selected pictures to a
computer.
The Wireless Transmitter Utility

After configuring the camera for connection, you will need to
pair it with the computer using the Wireless Transmitter Utility
before you will be able to upload images via Wi-Fi. Once the
devices are paired, you will be able to connect to the computer
from the camera.
• The Wireless Transmitter Utility is a computer application
available for download from the Nikon Download Center:
• Be sure to download the latest version after reading the
release notes and system requirements.

Infrastructure and Access-Point Modes
The camera can connect either via a wireless router on an
existing network (infrastructure mode) or by direct wireless link
(access-point mode).
❚❚ Access-Point Mode
The camera and computer
connect via direct wireless link,
with the camera acting as a
wireless LAN access point and
without the need for complicated adjustments to settings.
Choose this option when working outdoors or in other
situations in which the computer is not already connected to a
wireless network. The computer cannot connect to the Internet
while connected to the camera.
• To create a new host profile, select
[Direct connection to PC] in the
connection wizard.

❚❚ Infrastructure Mode
The camera connects to a
computer on an existing
network (including home
networks) via a wireless router.
The computer can still connect to the Internet while connected
to the camera.
• To create a new network profile, select
[Search for Wi-Fi network] in the
connection wizard.
D Infrastructure Mode
This guide assumes you are connecting via an existing wireless network.
Connection to computers beyond the local area network is not
supported.

Connecting in Access-Point Mode
Follow the steps below to create a direct wireless link to a
computer in access-point mode.
1 Display network settings.

Select [Connect to PC] in the camera
setup menu, then highlight
[Network settings] and press 2.
2 Select [Create profile].

Highlight [Create profile] and press
J.
3 Select [Direct connection to

PC].
• Highlight [Direct connection to
PC] and press J.
• The camera SSID and encryption

key will be displayed.

4 Connect from the computer.
Windows:
Click the wireless LAN icon
in the taskbar and select the
SSID displayed by the
camera in Step 3. When
prompted to enter the
network security key, enter
the encryption key
displayed by the camera in
Step 3.
macOS:
Click the wireless LAN icon
in the menu bar and select
the SSID displayed by the
camera in Step 3. When
prompted to supply a
password, enter the
encryption key displayed by
the camera in Step 3.

5 Launch the Wireless
Transmitter Utility.
When prompted, launch the Wireless
Transmitter Utility on the computer.
6 Select the camera.

In the Wireless Transmitter
Utility, select the camera
name displayed in Step 5
and click [Next].

7 Enter the authentication code.
• The camera will display an
authentication code.
• Enter the authentication

code in the dialog
displayed by the Wireless
Transmitter Utility and
click [Next].

8 Complete the pairing process.
• When the camera displays a
message stating that pairing is
complete, press J.
• In the Wireless Transmitter

Utility, click [Next]. You
will be prompted to
choose the destination
folder; for more
information, see online
help for the Wireless
• A wireless connection will be established between the

camera and computer when pairing is complete.

9 Check the connection.
• When a connection is established,
the network SSID will be displayed
in green in the camera [Connect to
PC] menu.
• If the camera SSID is not displayed in green, connect to the

camera via the wireless network list on your computer.
Now that a wireless connection has been established, you

can upload images to the computer as described
in“Uploading Pictures” (0 447).

Connecting in Infrastructure Mode
Follow the steps below to connect to a computer on an existing
network in infrastructure mode.
1 Display network settings.

Select [Connect to PC] in the camera
setup menu, then highlight
[Network settings] and press 2.
2 Select [Create profile].

Highlight [Create profile] and press
2.

3 Search for existing networks.
Highlight [Search for Wi-Fi
network] and press J. The camera
will search for networks currently
active in the vicinity and list them by
name (SSID).
D [Easy Connect]
To connect without entering an SSID or
encryption key, press X (T) in Step 3,
then press J and choose from the
following options:
• [Push-button WPS]: For routers that
support push-button WPS. Press the WPS
button on the router and then press the
camera J button to connect.
• [PIN-entry WPS]: The camera will display a PIN; to connect, use a
computer to enter the PIN into the router (for more information, see
the documentation provided with the router).
After connecting, proceed to Step 6.

4 Choose a network.
Highlight a network SSID and press
J (if the desired network is not
displayed, press X/T to search
again). Encrypted networks are
indicated by a O icon; if the selected
network is encrypted, you will be prompted to enter the
encryption key as described in Step 5. If the network is not
encrypted, proceed to Step 6.
D Hidden SSIDs
Networks with hidden SSIDs are indicated
by blank entries in the network list. If you
highlight a blank entry and press J, you
will be prompted to provide the network
name; press J, enter a name, and then
press X (T). Press X (T) again to
proceed to Step 5.

5 Enter the encryption key.
• When prompted to enter the
encryption key for the wireless
router, press J.
• Next, enter the key as described

below. For information on the
encryption key, see the
documentation for the wireless
router. Press X (T) when entry
is complete.
• Press X (T) again to initiate the

connection. A message will be
displayed for a few seconds when
the connection is established.

6 Obtain or select an IP address.
• Highlight one of the following
options and press J.
- [Obtain automatically]: Select
this option if the network is
configured to supply the IP
address automatically.
- [Enter manually]: Press J; a dialog will be displayed
where you can manually enter an IP address. Rotate the
main command dial to highlight segments, press 4 or 2
to change, and press J to accept. Press X (T) to exit
to the “IP address configuration complete” dialog when
entry is complete. Pressing X (T) again displays the
sub-net mask, which you can edit by pressing 1 and 3,
pressing J to exit when entry is complete.
• Confirm the IP address and press J to proceed.
7 Launch the Wireless

When prompted, launch the Wireless
Transmitter Utility on the computer.

8 Select the camera.
In the Wireless Transmitter
Utility, select the camera
name displayed in Step 7
and click [Next].
9 Enter the authentication code.

• The camera will display an
authentication code.
• Enter the authentication

code in the dialog
displayed by the Wireless
Transmitter Utility and
click [Next].

10 Complete the pairing process.
• When the camera displays a
message stating that pairing is
complete, press J.
• In the Wireless Transmitter

Utility, click [Next]. You
will be prompted to
choose the destination
folder; for more
information, see online
help for the Wireless
• A wireless connection will be established between the

camera and computer when pairing is complete.

11 Check the connection.
• When a connection is established,
the network SSID will be displayed
in green in the camera [Connect to
PC] menu.
• If the camera SSID is not displayed
in green, connect to the camera via the wireless network
list on your computer.
Now that a wireless connection has been established, you

can upload images to the computer as described in
“Uploading Pictures” (0 447).

Uploading Pictures
You can select pictures for upload in the camera playback
display or upload pictures as they are taken.
D Destination Folders
By default, images are uploaded to the following folders:
• Windows: \Users\(user name)\Pictures\Wireless Transmitter Utility
• macOS: /Users/(user name)/Pictures/Wireless Transmitter Utility
The destination folder can be selected using the Wireless Transmitter
Utility. For more information, see the utility’s online help.
D Access Point Mode

Computers cannot access the Internet while connected to the camera in
access point mode. To access the Internet, terminate the connection to
the camera and then reconnect to a network with Internet access.
❚❚ Selecting Pictures for Upload

Follow the steps below to select pictures for upload.
1 Start playback.
Press the K button on the camera and select full-frame or
thumbnail playback.
2 Display or highlight the desired picture and press

the i button.

3 Choose [Select to send/
deselect (PC)].
Highlight [Select to send/deselect

(PC)] and press J. A white transfer
icon will appear on the picture. If the
camera is currently connected to a
network, upload will begin
immediately; otherwise, upload will
begin when a connection is
established. The transfer icon turns green during upload.
Repeat Steps 2–3 to upload additional images.
D Deselecting Pictures
• To remove transfer marking from selected pictures, repeat Steps 2 and
3.
• To remove transfer marking from all pictures, select [Connect to
PC] > [Options] > [Deselect all?] in the setup menu.

❚❚ Uploading Photos as They Are Taken
To upload new photos as they are taken,
select [On] for [Connect to PC] >
[Options] > [Auto send]. Upload begins
only after the photo has been recorded
to the memory card; be sure a memory
card is inserted in the camera. Movies, as
well as any photographs taken during filming, are not uploaded
automatically when recording is complete but must instead be
uploaded from the playback display.
❚❚ The Transfer Icon

Upload status is indicated by the
transfer icon.
• Y (white):Send. The picture has
been selected for upload but upload
has not yet begun.
• X (green):Sending.Upload in
progress.
• Y (blue): Sent. Upload complete.

❚❚ The Upload Status Display
The [Connect to PC] display shows the following information:
1 Status
2 Pictures/time remaining
3 Signal strength
• Status: The status of the connection to the host. The host

name is displayed in green when a connection is established.
While files are being transferred, the status display shows
“Now sending” preceded by the name of the file being sent.
Any errors that occur during transfer are also displayed here.
• Pictures/time remaining: The estimated time required to
send the remaining pictures.
• Signal strength: Wireless signal strength.
D Loss of Signal
Wireless transmission may be interrupted if the signal is lost, but can be
resumed by turning the camera off and then on again.

Disconnecting and Reconnecting
The camera’s link to an existing network can be suspended or
resumed as described below.
❚❚ Disconnecting
You can disconnect by turning the camera off, selecting
[Disable] for [Connect to PC] > [Wi-Fi connection] in the setup
menu, or selecting [Wi-Fi connection] > [Close Wi-Fi
connection] in the still-photography i menu. The connection
to the computer will also end if you use Wi-Fi or Bluetooth to
connect to a smart device.
D Access-Point Mode
An error will occur if the computer’s wireless connection is disabled
before the camera’s. Disable camera Wi-Fi first.

❚❚ Reconnecting
To reconnect to an existing network, either:
• select [Enable] for [Connect to PC] > [Wi-Fi connection] in
the setup menu, or
• choose [Wi-Fi connection] >
[Establish Wi-Fi connection with PC]
in the still-photography i menu.
D Access-Point Mode
Enable camera Wi-Fi before connecting.
D Multiple Network Profiles

If the camera has profiles for more than one network, it will reconnect to
the last network used. Other networks can be selected using the
[Connect to PC] > [Network settings] item in the setup menu.

Connecting to Networks Using the WT-7
The WT-7
When attached to the camera, the optional WT-7 wireless
transmitter can be used to connect to computers, ftp servers, or
other devices over Ethernet or wireless networks.
D Before Using the WT-7

Before using the WT-7, confirm that the firmware for the camera and WT-7
have been updated to the latest versions. For more information, visit the
Nikon website for your region.

What the WT-7 Can Do for You
Using the WT-7, you can:
❚❚ Upload existing photos and movies to an ftp

server or computer
Not only can you copy pictures
to computers (image transfer
mode), you can also upload
them to ftp servers (ftp upload
mode). Pictures can be
uploaded as they are taken.
❚❚ Control the camera and take pictures remotely

from a computer
Installing Camera Control Pro 2
(available separately) on a
network computer gives you
complete control over camera
settings and lets you take
pictures remotely and save
them directly to the computer
hard disk (camera control mode).

❚❚ Control the camera and take pictures remotely
from a web browser
Using a web browser, you can
control the camera from
network computers and smart
devices for remote control that
requires no dedicated app or
computer software (http server
mode).

Connecting Using the WT-7
Connect the WT-7 using the USB cable supplied with the
camera.
Turn the transmitter on and select

[Wireless transmitter (WT-7)] >
[Wireless transmitter] > [Use] in the
camera setup menu.
A Menu Items for the WT-7

All menu items for the WT-7 can be found in the setup menu under
[Wireless transmitter (WT-7)]. For more information, see the manual
provided with the WT-7.
See the manual provided with the WT-7 for more

information.

Troubleshooting Wireless Issues
Solutions to some common issues are listed below.
• Troubleshooting information for the SnapBridge app can be
found in the app’s online help, which can be viewed at:
https://nikonimglib.com/snbr/onlinehelp/en/index.html
• For information on the WT-7 wireless transmitter, see the
manual provided with the WT-7.
• For information on the Wireless Transmitter Utility or Camera
Control Pro 2, see the online help for the application in
question.

Problem Solution
Check settings for the host computer or
The camera displays a TCP/IP
wireless router and adjust camera
error.
settings appropriately (0 696).
The camera displays a “no Confirm that the memory card is
memory card” error. correctly inserted (0 27).
Upload is interrupted and fails Upload will resume if the camera is
to resume. turned off and then on again (0 447).
If [Auto] is selected for [Channel],
choose [Manual] and select the channel
manually (0 695).
The connection is unreliable. If the camera is connected to a computer
in infrastructure mode, check that the
router is set to a channel between 1 and
8 (0 696).
[Connect to smart device]
These options are not available when
and [Connect to PC] are
the WT-7 is connected. Turn the WT-7 off
grayed out and cannot be
(0 700).
selected.

On-Camera Flash
Photography
“On-Camera” Versus “Remote”
You can take pictures using a flash unit mounted on the camera
accessory shoe or one or more remote flash units.
Camera-Mounted Flash Units

Take pictures using a flash unit mounted on the
camera (0 460).
Remote Flash Photography

Take pictures with one or more remote flash
units using wireless flash control (Advanced
Wireless Lighting, or AWL) as described in
“Remote Flash Photography” (0 477).

Using an On-Camera Flash
Follow the steps below to mount an optional flash unit on the
camera and take photographs using the flash.
1 Mount the unit on the accessory

shoe.
See the manual provided with the unit for
details.
2 Turn on the camera and flash unit.

The flash will begin charging; the flash-ready indicator (c)
will be displayed in the viewfinder when charging is
complete.
3 Adjust flash settings.

Choose the flash control mode (0 463) and flash mode
(0 465).
460 On-Camera Flash Photography

4 Adjust shutter speed and aperture.
5 Take pictures.
D Shutter Speed
Shutter speed can be set as follows when an optional flash unit is used:
Mode Shutter speed
b, P, A, EFCT (j and
Set automatically by camera (1/200 s–1/60 s) *
m excluded)
S Value selected by user (1/200 s–30 s)
M Value selected by user (1/200 s–30 s, Bulb, Time)
* Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30 s if slow sync, slow rear-curtain
sync, or slow sync with red-eye reduction is selected for flash mode.
D Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories

Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V
applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation,
but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash.

D i-TTL Flash Control
When an optional flash unit that supports the Nikon Creative Lighting
System is attached and set to TTL, the camera uses monitor preflashes for
balanced or standard i-TTL fill-flash flash control. i-TTL flash control is not
available with flash units that do not support the Nikon Creative Lighting
System. The camera supports the following types of i-TTL flash control:
Flash
Description
control
The camera uses i-TTL balanced fill-flash flash control for
a natural balance between the main subject and ambient
background lighting. After the shutter-release button is
i-TTL
pressed and immediately before the main flash, the flash
balanced
unit emits a series of monitor preflashes which the
fill-flash
camera uses to optimize flash output for a balance
between the main subject and ambient background
lighting.
Flash output is adjusted to bring lighting in the frame to
standard level; the brightness of the background is not
Standard
taken into account. Recommended for shots in which the
i-TTL
main subject is emphasized at the expense of
fill-flash
background details, or when exposure compensation is
used.
• Standard i-TTL fill-flash is activated automatically when [Spot
metering] is selected.

Flash Control Mode
When a flash unit that supports unified
flash control (an SB-5000, SB-500,
SB-400, or SB-300) is mounted on the
camera, the flash control mode, flash
level, and other flash settings can be
adjusted using the [Flash control] >
[Flash control mode] item in the photo shooting menu (in the
case of the SB-5000, these settings can also be adjusted using
the controls on the flash unit). The options available vary with
the flash used, while the options displayed under [Flash control
mode] vary with the mode selected. Settings for other flash
units can only be adjusted using flash unit controls.
• [TTL]: i-TTL mode. In the cases of the SB-500, SB-400, and
SB-300, flash compensation can be adjusted holding the c
(Y) button and rotating the sub-command dial.
• [Auto external flash]: In this mode, output is adjusted
automatically according to the amount of light reflected by
the subject; flash compensation is also available. Auto external
flash supports “auto aperture” (qA) and “non-TTL auto” (A)
modes. See the flash unit manual for details.

• [Distance-priority manual]: Choose the distance to the
subject; flash output will be adjusted automatically. Flash
compensation is also available.
• [Manual]: Choose the flash level manually.
• [Repeating flash]: The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter
is open, producing a multiple-exposure effect. Choose the
flash level ([Output]), the maximum number of times the unit
fires ([Times]), and the number of times the flash fires per
second ([Frequency], measured in Hertz). The options
available for [Times] vary depending on the options selected
for [Output] and [Frequency]; see the documentation
provided with the flash unit for details.
D Unified Flash Control

Unified flash control allows the camera and flash unit to share settings. If a
flash unit that supports unified flash control is mounted on the camera,
changes to flash settings made with either the camera or flash unit are
reflected on both devices, as are changes made using optional Camera
Control Pro 2 software.

Flash Modes
The options available depend on the mode selected with the
mode dial.
Option Description Available in
This mode is recommended for
most situations. In modes P and
b, P, S, A,
[Fill flash] A, shutter speed will
M, EFCT (j
I (front-curtain automatically be set to values
and m
sync) between 1/200 s (or 1/8000 s with
excluded)
Auto FP High-Speed Sync) and
1/60 s.
Use for portraits. The flash fires

before the photograph is taken,
reducing “red-eye” (a flash unit
[Red-eye b, P, S, A,
with red-eye reduction is
reduction] M, EFCT (j
J required). Not recommended
(red-eye and m
with moving subjects or in other
reduction) excluded)
situations in which quick shutter
response is required. Do not
move camera during shooting.

As for [Fill flash] except that
shutter speed slows
automatically to capture
background lighting at night or
[Slow sync]
L under low light. Use when you P, A
(slow sync)
want to capture both subject and
background. Use of a tripod is
recommended to prevent
blurring caused by camera shake.
As for [Red-eye reduction]
except that shutter speed slows
automatically to capture
[Slow sync + background lighting at night or
red-eye] (red- under low light. Use when you
K P, A
eye reduction want to include background
with slow sync) lighting in portraits. Use of a
tripod is recommended to
prevent blurring caused by
camera shake.

The flash fires just before the
shutter closes, creating the effect
of a stream of light behind
[Rear-curtain moving light sources. Use of a
M sync] (rear- tripod is recommended to P, S, A, M
curtain sync) prevent blurring caused by
camera shake. Selecting P or A
after choosing this option sets
the flash mode to slow sync.
b, P, S, A,
s [Flash off] The flash does not fire.
M, EFCT
D Studio Strobe Lighting

Rear-curtain sync cannot be used with studio flash systems, as the correct
synchronization cannot be obtained.

Choosing a Flash Mode
Hold the N (Y) button and rotate the main command dial.
• The selected option is displayed in the monitor.

Flash Compensation
Flash compensation is used to deliberately alter flash output to,
for example, change the brightness of the subject relative to the
background. Flash output can be increased to make the main
subject appear brighter, reduced to prevent glare, or otherwise
fine-tuned to produce the desired result.

Adjusting Flash Compensation
Hold the N (Y) button and rotate the sub-command dial. The
selected option will be displayed in the monitor, control panel,
and viewfinder.
• Flash output can set to values of from −3 to +1 EV.

• At default settings, changes to flash output are made in
increments of 1/3 EV. The size of the increment can be selected
using Custom Setting b1 [EV steps for exposure cntrl].
• In general, choose positive values for brighter lighting,
negative values to ensure that the subject is not too brightly
lit.
• Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash
compensation to ±0.0. Flash compensation is not reset when

FV Lock
This feature is used to lock flash output for CLS-compatible flash
units, allowing photographs to be recomposed without
changing the flash level and ensuring that flash output is
appropriate to the subject even when the subject is not
positioned in the center of the frame. Flash output is adjusted
automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture. FV
lock is not available in b and EFCT modes.
To use FV lock:
1 Assign [FV lock] to a camera

control.
Assign [FV lock] to a control using
Custom Setting f3 [Custom
controls].
2 Attach a CLS-compatible flash unit.

Mount a CLS-compatible flash unit on the camera accessory
shoe.

3 Set the flash unit to the appropriate mode.
Turn the flash unit on and select [TTL] or [Auto external
flash] for [Flash control] > [Flash control mode] (SB-5000,
SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300) or set the flash control mode to
TTL, monitor pre-flash qA, or monitor pre-flash A (other
flash units; see the documentation provided with the flash
unit for details).
4 Focus.
Position the subject in the center of
the frame and press the shutter-
release button halfway to focus.

5 Lock flash level.
After confirming that the
flash-ready indicator (c)
appears in the viewfinder, press the control selected in Step
1. The flash unit will emit a monitor pre-flash to determine
the appropriate flash level. Flash output will be locked at this
level and FV lock icon (r) will appear in the viewfinder.
6 Recompose the photograph.
7 Take the photograph.

Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
shoot. If desired, additional pictures can be taken without
releasing FV lock.
8 Release FV lock.
Press the control selected in Step 1 to release FV lock.
Confirm that the FV lock icon (r) is no longer displayed in
the viewfinder.

Flash Info for On-Camera Units
When a unit that supports unified flash control (the SB-5000,
SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300) is mounted on the camera accessory
shoe, flash info can be viewed in the camera display. To view
flash info during viewfinder photography, press the R button
to activate the information display (0 776) and then press the
R button again.
Flash Control Mode Displays

❚❚ TTL
123 1 Flash-ready indicator (0 460)
2 Bounce icon (displayed if flash
head is tilted up, left, or right)
4
3 Zoom head position warning
5 (displayed if zoom head is not
in correct position)
6 4 Flash control mode (0 463)
7 FP indicator (0 618)
8 5 Flash compensation (TTL;
0 469)
6 Flash mode (0 465)
7 FV lock indicator (0 471)
8 Flash compensation (0 469)

❚❚ Auto External Flash
1 Flash control mode (0 463)
2 2 Auto external flash
compensation (0 469)
❚❚ Distance-Priority Manual
2 2 Flash compensation (distance-
3 priority manual; 0 469)
3 Distance (0 463)
❚❚ Manual
2 2 Flash level (0 469)

❚❚ Repeating Flash
1 2 Flash level (output; 0 463)
2 3 Number emitted (times;
3 0 463)
Frequency (0 463)
D Flash Info and Camera Settings

The flash information display shows selected
camera settings, including shooting mode,
shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity.
D Changing Flash Settings

Flash settings can be changed by pressing the
i button in the flash info display. The options
available vary with the flash unit and the
settings selected. You can also test-fire the
flash.

Remote Flash Photography
What Is Remote Flash Photography?
The camera can be used with one or more remote flash units
(Advanced Wireless Lighting, or AWL). For information on using
a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe, see “On-
Camera Flash Photography” (0 459).
Throughout this chapter, operations involving an accessory connected to
the camera are indicated by C, operations involving remote flash units
by f. For more information on f, see the manual provided with the flash
unit.

Using Remote Flash Units
Remote flash units can be controlled via optical signals from a
flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe (optical AWL)
or via radio signals from a WR-R10 (available separately)
connected to the camera (radio AWL). These forms of flash
control can be combined as follows:
• Radio AWL with one or more remote
flash units (0 479)
• Optical AWL with one or more remote

flash units (0 494)
• Radio AWL with additional lighting

provided by a shoe-mounted flash unit
(0 493)
• Radio AWL combined with optical AWL

provided by a shoe-mounted flash unit
(0 506)
478 Remote Flash Photography

Radio AWL
Radio AWL is available with SB-5000 flash
units. Attach a WR-R10 wireless remote
controller to the camera and establish a
wireless connection between the flash units
and the WR-R10.
Establishing a Wireless Connection

Before using radio AWL, establish a wireless connection
between the WR-R10 and the remote flash units.
1 C: Connect the WR-R10.

For more information, see the documentation provided with
the WR-R10.
2 C: Select [Radio AWL].

Select [Radio AWL] for [Flash
control] > [Wireless flash options]
in the photo shooting menu.
D The WR-R10 Wireless Remote Controller

Be sure to update the WR-R10 firmware to version 3.0 or later; for
information on firmware updates, see the Nikon website for your area.

3 C: Choose a channel.
Set the WR-R10 channel selector to
the desired channel.

4 C: Choose a link mode.
Select [Wireless remote (WR)
options] > [Link mode] in the setup
menu and choose from the following
options:
Option Description
The camera connects only to devices with which it has
previously been paired, preventing signal interference
from other devices in the vicinity. Given that each
[Pairing]
device must be paired separately, [PIN] is
recommended when connecting to a large number of
devices.
Communication is shared among all devices with the
same four-digit PIN, making this a good choice for
photography featuring a large number of remote
devices. If there are multiple cameras present that
[PIN] share the same PIN, the flash units will be under the
sole control of the camera that connects first,
preventing all other cameras from connecting (the
LEDs on the WR-R10 units connected to the affected
cameras will blink).

5 f: Establish a wireless connection.
Set the remote flash units to radio AWL remote mode and
set the devices to the channel you selected in Step 3, then
pair each of the remote units with the WR-R10 according to
the option selected in Step 4:
• [Pairing]: Initiate pairing on the remote unit and press the
WR-R10 pairing button. Pairing is complete when the LINK
lamps on the WR-R10 and flash unit flash orange and
green; once a connection is established, the LINK lamp on
the remote flash unit will light green.
• [PIN]: Use the controls on the remote flash unit to enter the
PIN you selected in Step 4. The LINK lamp on the remote
unit will light green once a connection is established.
6 f: Confirm that the flash-ready lights for all flash

units are lit.
In radio AWL, the flash-ready indicator will light in the
camera viewfinder or flash information display when all flash
units are ready.

D Listing Remote Flash Units
To view the flash units currently controlled using radio AWL, select [Flash
control] > [Radio remote flash info] in the photo shooting menu. The
identifier (remote flash unit name) for each unit can be changed using
flash unit controls.
1 Connected flash unit
2 Group
3 Flash-ready indicator
D Reconnecting
As long as the channel, link mode, and other settings remain the same,
the WR-R10 will automatically connect to previously paired flash units
when you select remote mode and Steps 3–5 can be omitted. The flash
unit LINK lamp lights green when a connection is established.

Adjusting Flash Settings
After selecting [Radio AWL] for [Flash
control] > [Wireless flash options] in
the photo shooting menu, select [Group
flash], [Quick wireless control], or
[Remote repeating] for [Remote flash
control] and adjust settings as described
below.
❚❚ Group Flash
Select this item to adjust settings separately for each group.
1 C: Select [Group flash].

Select [Group flash] for [Flash
control] > [Remote flash control] in
the photo shooting menu.
2 C: Select [Group flash

options].
Highlight [Group flash options] in
the flash control display and press 2.

3 C: Choose the flash control
mode.
Choose the flash control mode and
flash level for the master flash and
the flash units in each group:
Option Description
TTL i-TTL flash control.
Auto aperture (available only with compatible flash
qA
units).
M Choose the flash level manually.
The units do not fire and the flash level cannot be
–– (off)
adjusted.
4 f: Group the remote flash units.

• Choose a group (A–F) for each of the remote flash units.
• The master flash can control up to 18 flash units in any
combination.

5 C/f: Compose the shot.
• Compose the shot and arrange the flash units. See the
documentation provided with the flash units for more
information.
• After arranging the units, press the i button in the flash
info display (0 510) and select [c Test flash] to test-fire
the units and confirm that they are functioning normally.
6 C: Take the photograph.

❚❚ Quick Wireless Control
Select this item to control overall flash compensation for, and
the relative balance between, groups A and B, while setting
output for group C manually.
1 C: Select [Quick wireless

control].
Select [Quick wireless control] for
[Flash control] > [Remote flash
control] in the photo shooting menu.

control options].
Highlight [Quick wireless control
options] in the flash control display
and press 2.

3 C: Adjust flash settings.
• Choose the balance between
groups A and B.
• Adjust flash compensation for

groups A and B.
• Choose a flash control mode and

flash level for the units in group
C:
- [M]: Choose the flash level
manually.
- [––]: The units in group C do not
fire.

• Choose a group (A, B, or C).
combination.

information.
info display (0 510) and select [c Test flash] to test fire the
units and confirm that they are functioning normally.

❚❚ Remote Repeating
When “remote repeating” is enabled, the flash units fire
repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing a multiple-
exposure effect.
1 C: Select [Remote repeating].

Select [Remote repeating] for [Flash
2 C: Select [Remote repeating

options].
Highlight [Remote repeating
and press 2.

• Choose the flash level ([Output]),
the maximum number of times the
flash units fire ([Times]), and the
number of times the flash units fire
per second ([Frequency]).
• Enable or disable selected groups.

Select [ON] to enable the selected
group, [––] to disable the selected
group.

• Choose a group (A–F) for each of the remote flash units.
combination.

information.
info display (0 510) and select [c Test flash] to test-fire
the units and confirm that they are functioning normally.

Adding a Shoe-Mounted Flash Unit
Radio-controlled flash units (0 479) can be
combined with any of the following flash units
mounted on the camera accessory shoe:
• SB-5000: Before attaching the flash unit, set
it to radio-controlled master flash mode (a
d icon will appear at the top left corner of the display) and
choose group or remote repeating flash control. Once the unit
is attached, settings can be adjusted using the controls on the
flash unit or the options listed in the camera menus under
[Group flash options] > [Master flash] or under “M” in the
[Remote repeating options] display.
• SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600: Configure the flash
for standalone use and use the controls on the flash unit to
adjust flash settings.
• SB-500, SB-400, SB-300: Mount the unit on the camera and
adjust settings using the [Group flash options] > [Master
flash] item in the camera menus.

Optical AWL
Remote flash units can be controlled via
optical signals from an optional flash unit
mounted on the camera accessory shoe and
functioning as a master flash (optical AWL; for
information on compatible flash units, see
“The Nikon Creative Lighting System”, 0 798). If the flash unit in
question is an SB-5000 or SB-500, settings can be adjusted from
the camera (0 495); otherwise settings must be adjusted using
flash unit controls as described in the documentation provided
with the unit. For information on flash placement and other
topics, see the documentation provided with the flash units.

Using Optical AWL with the SB-5000 or SB-500
Mount the flash unit on the camera
accessory shoe and select [Optical AWL]
for [Flash control] > [Wireless flash
options] in the photo shooting menu.
Group flash settings can be adjusted
using [Flash control] > [Remote flash
control]; the [Remote flash control] item for the SB-5000 also
offers [Quick wireless control] and [Remote repeating]
settings.
D The SB-5000
When an SB-5000 is mounted on the camera accessory shoe, [Flash
control] settings can also be changed using the controls on the flash unit.

❚❚ Group Flash
Select this item to adjust settings separately for each group.
1 C: Select [Group flash].

Select [Group flash] for [Flash
2 C: Select [Group flash

options].
Highlight [Group flash options] in
the flash control display and press 2.

• Choose the flash control mode and
flash level for the master flash and
the flash units in each group:
Option Description
TTL i-TTL flash control.
Auto aperture (available only with compatible flash
qA
units).
M Choose the flash level manually.
The units do not fire and the flash level cannot be
–– (off)
adjusted.
• Choose a channel for the master
flash. If the remote flash units
include an SB-500, you must choose
channel 3, but otherwise you can
choose any channel between 1 and
4.
4 f: Set the remote flash units to the same channel

as the master flash.
Set the remote flash units to the channel selected in Step 3.

• Choose a group (A, B, or C, or if you are using an SB-500
master flash, A or B) for each remote flash unit.
• Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash
units that may be used, the practical maximum is three per
group. With more than this number, the light emitted by
the remote flash units will interfere with performance.

information.
• After arranging the units, press the test button on the
master flash to test-fire the flash and confirm that the units
are functioning normally. Flash units can also be test-fired
by pressing the i button in the flash info display (0 510)
and selecting [c Test flash].
7 C/f: Take the photograph.

Take the photograph after confirming that the flash-ready
lights for all flash units are lit.

❚❚ Quick Wireless Control (SB-5000 Only)
Select this item to control overall flash compensation for, and
the relative balance between, groups A and B, while setting
output for group C manually.

control].
Select [Quick wireless control] for
[Flash control] > [Remote flash
control] in the photo shooting menu.

control options].
Highlight [Quick wireless control
and press 2.

• Choose the balance between
groups A and B.
• Adjust flash compensation for

groups A and B.
• Choose a flash control mode and

flash level for the units in group C:
- [M]: Choose the flash level
manually.
- [––]: The units in group C do not
fire.
4.


• Choose a group (A, B, or C).

information.


❚❚ Remote Repeating (SB-5000 Only)
When “remote repeating” is enabled, the flash units fire
repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing a multiple-
exposure effect.
1 C: Select [Remote repeating].

Select [Remote repeating] for [Flash
2 C: Select [Remote repeating

options].
Highlight [Remote repeating
and press 2.

• Choose the flash level ([Output]),
the maximum number of times the
flash units fire ([Times]), and the
number of times the flash units fire
per second ([Frequency]).
• Enable or disable selected groups.

Select [ON] to enable the selected
group, [––] to disable the selected
group.

4.


• Choose a group (A, B, or C) for each remote flash unit.

information.

D Optical AWL
Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the light
from the master flash (particular care is required if the camera is not
mounted on a tripod). Be sure that direct light or strong reflections from
the remote flash units do not enter the camera lens (in TTL mode) or the
photocells on the remote flash units (qA mode), as this may interfere
with exposure. To prevent low-intensity timing flashes emitted by the
master flash from appearing in photographs taken at short range, choose
low ISO sensitivities or small apertures (high f-numbers). After positioning
the remote flash units, take a test shot and view the results in the camera
display.

Optical/Radio AWL
Optical and radio AWL can be used together.
Radio flash control is provided by a WR-R10
connected to the camera, optical control by an
SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander or an
SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, or SB-500 flash
unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe.
• Before proceeding, establish a wireless connection between
the radio-controlled flash units and the WR-R10 (0 479).
• If an SB-500 is mounted on the camera accessory shoe, select
[Optical/radio AWL] for [Flash control] > [Wireless flash
options] in the photo shooting menu; with other flash units or
the SU-800, this option is selected automatically.
• The only option available for [Remote flash control] will be
[Group flash].
• Choose a group (A–F) for each of the
remote flash units. Place optically-
controlled flash units in groups A
through C and radio-controlled units in
groups D through F (to display options
for groups D through F, press 1 or 3 in
the [Group flash options] display).

Flash Info for Remote Units
The camera can display flash info for SB-5000 and SB-500 flash
units mounted on the camera accessory shoe and configured as
a master flash for optical AWL, as well as for remote flash units
controlled via radio AWL using a WR-R10. To view flash info
during viewfinder photography, press the R button to activate
the information display (0 68) and then press the R button
again.
Flash Control Mode Displays

❚❚ Group Flash
1 2 1 Flash-ready indicator 1
5
2 Remote flash control (0 566)
3 6 FP indicator (0 618)
3 Remote flash control mode 2
4 (0 566)
4 Group flash control mode 3
Group flash mode (0 484,
496)
Flash compensation/flash
level (output; 0 484, 496)
5 Channel 2 (0 479, 496)
6 Link mode 4 (0 689)

❚❚ Quick Wireless Control
1 2 1 Flash-ready indicator 1
7
3 8 FP indicator (0 618)
4 3 Remote flash control mode 2
5 (0 566)
6 4 A : B ratio (0 487, 499)
5 Flash compensation (0 487,
499)
6 Group C flash control mode
and flash level (output; 0 487,
499)
7 Channel 2 (0 479, 499)
8 Link mode 4 (0 689)

❚❚ Remote Repeating
1 2 3 1 Flash-ready indicator 1
7
4 8 3 Flash level (output; 0 490,
5 502)
6 4 Remote flash control mode 2
(0 566)
5 Number emitted (times;
0 490, 502)
Frequency (0 490, 502)
6 Group status (enabled/
disabled; 0 490, 502)
7 Channel 2 (0 479, 502)
8 Link mode 4 (0 689)
1 Displayed in radio AWL when all flash units are ready.
2 Optical AWL is indicated by Y, radio AWL by Z, joint optical and
radio AWL by Y and Z. Optical AWL channel for joint optical and
radio AWL is displayed only when SB-500 is used as master flash.
3 Icons are displayed for each group when joint optical and radio AWL is
used.
4 Displayed only when radio AWL or joint optical and radio AWL is used.

D Flash Info and Camera Settings
The flash information display shows selected
camera settings, including shooting mode,
shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity.
D Changing Flash Settings

Flash settings can be changed by pressing the
i button in the flash info display. The options
available vary with the flash unit and the
settings selected. You can also test-fire the
flash.

Menu Guide
Defaults
The defaults for the playback, photo shooting, movie shooting,
Custom Settings, and setup menus are listed below.
Playback Menu Defaults

Playback menu option Default
[Delete] —
[Playback folder] All
[Playback display options]
[Focus point] U
[Exposure info] U
[Highlights] U
[RGB histogram] U
[Shooting data] U
[Overview] U
[None (image only)] U
[Copy image(s)] —
[Image review] Off
[After delete] Show next
[Rotate tall] On
[Slide show]
[Image type] Still images and movies
[Frame interval] 2s
[Rating] —
Menu Guide > Defaults 511

Photo Shooting Menu Defaults
Photo shooting menu option Default
[Reset photo shooting menu] —
[Storage folder]
[Rename] ND780
[Select folder by number] 100
[Select folder from list] —
[File naming] DSC
[Role played by card in Slot 2] Overflow
[Image area]
[Choose image area] FX (36×24)
[Auto DX crop] On
[Viewfinder mask display] Off
[Image quality] JPEG normal
[Image size] Large
[NEF (RAW) recording]
[NEF (RAW) compression] Lossless compressed
[NEF (RAW) bit depth] 14-bit
[ISO sensitivity settings]
[ISO sensitivity]
b, EFCT Auto
P, S, A, M 100
[Auto ISO sensitivity control] On
[Maximum sensitivity] 51200
[Maximum sensitivity with c] Same as without flash
[Minimum shutter speed] Auto
512 Menu Guide > Defaults

[White balance] Auto: Keep overall
atmosphere
[Fine-tune] A-B: 0, G-M: 0
[Choose color temperature] 5000 K
[Preset manual] d-1
[Set Picture Control] Auto
[Manage Picture Control] —
[Color space] sRGB
[Active D-Lighting] Off
[Long exposure NR] Off
[High ISO NR] Normal
[Vignette control] Normal
[Diffraction compensation] On
[Auto distortion control] Off
[Flicker reduction]
[Flicker reduction setting] Disable
[Flicker reduction indicator] On
[Flash control]
[Flash control mode] TTL
[Wireless flash options] Off
[Remote flash control] Group flash
[Auto bracketing]
[Auto bracketing set] AE & flash bracketing
[Number of shots] 0
[Increment] 1.0

[Multiple exposure] *
[Multiple exposure mode] Off
[Number of shots] 2
[Overlay mode] Average
[Save individual images (NEF)] On
[Overlay shooting] On
[Select first exposure (NEF)] —
[HDR (high dynamic range)]
[HDR mode] Off
[HDR strength] Auto
[Save individual images (NEF)] Off
[Interval timer shooting]
[Choose start day/time] Now
[Interval] 1 min
[Intervals×shots/interval] 0001×1
[Exposure smoothing] On
[Silent photography] On
[Interval priority] Off
[Focus before each shot] Off
[Options] Off
[Starting storage folder]
[New folder] U
[Reset file numbering] U

[Time-lapse movie]
[Interval] 5s
[Shooting time] 25 min.
[Exposure smoothing] On
[Image area]
[Choose image area] FX
[Auto DX crop] On
[Frame size/frame rate] 1920×1080; 60p
[Interval priority] Off
[Focus before each shot] Off
[Destination] Slot 1
[Focus shift shooting]
[No. of shots] 100
[Focus step width] 5
[Interval until next shot] 0
[First-frame exposure lock] On
[Starting storage folder]
[New folder] U
[Reset file numbering] U
[Silent live view photography] Off
* Photo shooting menu reset is not available while a multiple exposure is

in progress.

Movie Shooting Menu Defaults
Movie shooting menu option Default
[Reset movie shooting menu] —
[File naming] DSC
[Destination] Slot 1
[Image area]
[Choose image area] FX
[Auto DX crop] On
[Frame size/frame rate] 1920×1080; 60p
[Movie quality] High quality
[Movie file type] MOV
[Maximum sensitivity] 51200
[Auto ISO control (mode M)] On
[ISO sensitivity (mode M)] 100
[White balance] Same as photo settings
[Fine-tune] A-B: 0, G-M: 0
[Choose color temperature] 5000 K
[Preset manual] d-1
[Set Picture Control] Same as photo settings
[Manage Picture Control] —
[Active D-Lighting] Off
[High ISO NR] Normal

Movie shooting menu option Default
[Diffraction compensation] On
[Flicker reduction] Auto
[Electronic VR] Off
[Microphone sensitivity] Auto
[Attenuator] Disable
[Frequency response] Wide range
[Wind noise reduction] Off
[Headphone volume] 15
[Timecode]
[Record timecodes] Off
[Count-up method] Record run
[Timecode origin] —
[Drop frame] On

Custom Settings Menu Defaults
Custom Settings menu option Default
[Reset custom settings] —
a1 [AF-C priority selection] Release
a2 [AF-S priority selection] Focus
a3 [Focus tracking with lock-on] 3
a4 [3D-tracking face-detection] On
a5 [Auto-area AF face/eye detection] Face and eye detection on
a6 [Focus points used] All points
a7 [Store points by orientation] No
a8 [AF activation] Shutter/AF-ON
a9 [Focus point wrap-around] No wrap
a10 [Focus point options]
[Focus point illumination] Auto
[Manual focus mode] On
[Dynamic-area AF assist] On
a11 [Low-light AF] Off
a12 [Manual focus ring in AF mode] Enable
b1 [EV steps for exposure cntrl] 1/3 step
b2 [Easy exposure compensation] Off
b3 [Matrix metering] Face detection on
b4 [Center-weighted area] φ12 mm
b5 [Fine-tune optimal exposure]
[Matrix metering] 0
[Center-weighted metering] 0
[Spot metering] 0
[Highlight-weighted metering] 0

c1 [Shutter-release button AE-L] Off
c2 [Standby timer] 6s
c3 [Self-timer]
[Self-timer delay] 10 s
[Number of shots] 1
[Interval between shots] 0.5 s
c4 [Monitor off delay]
[Playback] 10 s
[Menus] 1 min
[Information display] 10 s
[Image review] 4s
[Live view] 10 min
d1 [CL mode shooting speed] 3 fps
d2 [Max. continuous release] 100
d3 [Sync. release mode options] Sync
d4 [Exposure delay mode] Off
d5 [Electronic front-curtain shutter] Disable
d6 [Extended shutter speeds (M)] Off
d7 [File number sequence] On
d8 [Save original (EFFECTS)] Off
d9 [Exposure preview (Lv)] Off
d10 [Framing grid display] Off

d11 [Peaking highlights]
[Peaking level] Off
[Peaking highlight color] Red
d12 [LCD illumination] Off
d13 [Live view in continuous mode] On
d14 [Optical VR] On
e1 [Flash sync speed] 1/200 s
e2 [Flash shutter speed] 1/60 s
e3 [Exposure comp. for flash] Entire frame
e4 [Auto c ISO sensitivity control] Subject and background
e5 [Modeling flash] On
e6 [Bracketing order] MTR > under > over
f1 [Customize i Menu] Set Picture Control,
Image quality,
Flash mode,
Wi-Fi connection,
Autofocus mode,
Choose image area,
White balance,
Image size,
Metering,
Active D-Lighting,
AF-area mode,
Custom controls

f2 [Customize i Menu (Lv)] Set Picture Control,
Image quality,
Flash mode,
Wi-Fi connection,
Autofocus mode,
Negative digitizer,
White balance,
Image size,
Metering,
Active D-Lighting,
AF-area mode,
Exposure preview
f3 [Custom controls]
[Preview button] Preview
[Fn button] Choose image area
[AE-L/AF-L button] AE/AF lock
[AF-ON button] AF-ON
[BKT button] Auto bracketing
[Movie record button] None
f4 [OK button]
[Viewfinder photography] Select center focus point
[Live view] Select center focus point
[Playback mode] Zoom on/off
[Zoom on/off] 1 : 1 (100%)

f5 [Customize command dials]
[Reverse rotation] Exposure compensation: U,
Shutter speed/aperture: U
[Change main/sub] Exposure setting: Off,
Autofocus setting: Off
[Aperture setting] Sub-command dial
[Menus and playback] Off
[Sub-dial frame advance] 10 frames
f6 [Release button to use dial] No
f7 [Reverse indicators]
f8 [Dswitch] LCD backlight (D)

g1 [Customize i Menu] Set Picture Control,
Frame size and rate/
Image quality,
Wind noise reduction,
Wi-Fi connection,
Autofocus mode,
Destination,
White balance,
Microphone sensitivity,
Metering,
Active D-Lighting,
AF-area mode,
Electronic VR

g2 [Custom controls]
[Preview button] None
[Fn button] None
[AE-L/AF-L button] AE/AF lock
[AF-ON button] AF-ON
[Shutter-release button] Take photos
g3 [AF speed] 0
[When to apply] Always
g4 [AF tracking sensitivity] 4
g5 [Highlight display]
[Display pattern] Off
[Highlight display threshold] 248

Setup Menu Defaults
Setup menu option Default
[Format memory card] —
[Save user settings] —
[Reset user settings] —
[Language] (Default varies with country
of purchase)
[Time zone and date]
[Time zone] (Default varies with country
of purchase)
[Date and time] —
[Date format] (Default varies with country
of purchase)
[Daylight saving time] Off
[Monitor brightness] 0
[Monitor color balance] A-B: 0, G-M: 0
[Virtual horizon] —
[Information display] Auto
[Manual] Dark on light
[AF fine-tuning options]
[AF fine-tune on/off] Off
[Fine-tune and save lens] —
[Default] —
[List saved values] —

[Non-CPU lens data]
[Lens number] 1
[Focal length (mm)] —
[Maximum aperture] —
[Clean image sensor]
[Clean at startup/shutdown] Clean at startup & shutdown
[Lock mirror up for cleaning] —
[Image Dust Off ref photo] —
[Pixel mapping] —
[Image comment]
[Attach comment] U
[Copyright information]
[Attach copyright information] U
[Beep options]
[Beep on/off] Off
[Volume] 2
[Pitch] Low
[Touch controls]
[Enable/disable touch controls] Enable
[Full-frame playback flicks] Left V Right

[HDMI]
[Output resolution] Auto
[Advanced]
[Output range] Auto
[External recording control] Off
[Output data depth] 8 bit
[N-Log/HDR output options] Off
[View assist] Off
[Location data]
[Standby timer] Enable
[Position] —
[Set clock from satellite] Yes
[Wireless remote (WR) options]
[LED lamp] On
[Link mode] Pairing
[Assign remote (WR) Fn button] None
[Airplane mode] Disable
[Connect to smart device]
[Pairing (Bluetooth)]
[Bluetooth connection] Disable
[Select to send (Bluetooth)]
[Auto select to send] Off
[Wi-Fi connection] —
[Send while off] On

[Connect to PC]
[Wi-Fi connection] Disable
[Network settings] —
[Options]
[Auto send] Off
[Delete after send] No
[Send file as] NEF (RAW) + JPEG
[Deselect all?] —
[MAC address] —

[Wireless transmitter (WT-7)]
[Wireless transmitter] Do not use
[Choose hardware] Wired LAN
[Network settings] —
[Options]
[Auto send] Off
[Delete after send] No
[Send file as] NEF (RAW) + JPEG
[Overwrite if same name] No
[Protect if marked to send] No
[Send marking] Off
[Send folder] —
[Deselect all?] —
[HTTP user settings] —
[Battery info] —
[Power saving] Prioritize network speed
[Auto power off delay] —
[MAC address] —
[Firmware version] —
[Conformity marking] —
[Battery info] —
[Slot empty release lock] Enable release
[Save/load menu settings] —
[Reset all settings] —
[Firmware version] —

D The Playback Menu: Managing
Images
To display the playback menu, select the
D (playback menu) tab in the camera
menus.
The playback menu contains the following items:

Item 0 Item 0
[Delete] 530 [After delete] 539
[Playback folder] 530 [Rotate tall] 540
[Playback display options] 531 [Slide show] 540
[Copy image(s)] 532 [Rating] 543
[Image review] 538
Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu 529

Delete
G button U D playback menu
Delete multiple images. For more information, see “The
Playback Menu” (0 385).
Option Description
Q [Selected] Delete selected pictures.
i [Select date] Delete all pictures taken on selected dates.
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for
[Playback folder] in the playback menu.
R [All]
• If two memory cards are inserted, you can select
the card from which pictures will be deleted.
Playback Folder
Choose a folder for playback.
Option Description
Pictures in all folders with the selected name will be
visible during playback. Folders can be renamed
(Folder name)
using the [Storage folder] > [Rename] option in the
photo shooting menu.
[All] Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.
Only pictures in the current folder will be visible
[Current]
during playback.
530 Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu

Playback Display Options
Choose whether the focus points used when the photograph
was taken are displayed during full-frame playback. You can
also choose the types of photo information that can be viewed
during full-frame playback.
• Highlight options and press 2 to select (M) or deselect (U).

• To complete the operation, press J.

Copy Image(s)
Copy pictures from one memory card to another when two
memory cards are inserted.
Option Description
Choose the card from which pictures will be
[Select source]
copied.
[Select image(s)] Select pictures to be copied.
[Select destination Select the destination folder on the remaining
folder] card (the card not selected for [Select source]).
[Copy image(s)?] Copy the pictures.

Copying Pictures
1 Choose [Select source].
Highlight [Select source] and press
2 to display the [Select source]
dialog.
2 Select the card containing the

pictures to be copied.
Highlight the slot for the card
containing the pictures to be copied
and press J to select the highlighted
slot and return to the [Copy
image(s)] menu.
3 Choose [Select image(s)].

Highlight [Select image(s)] and press
2 to select the highlighted option
and return to the [Select image(s)]
menu.

4 Select the source folder.
• Highlight the folder containing the
images to be copied and press 2 to
select the highlighted folder and
display the [Images selected by
default] menu.
• To copy all pictures from the card in the selected slot,
highlight [All images in slot], press J, and proceed to
Step 10.
5 Make the initial selection.

Choose the pictures that will be
selected by default.
Option Description
None of the pictures in the chosen folder will be
[Deselect all]
• Choose this option when you want to select
pictures individually.
All of the pictures in the chosen folder will be
[Select all selected by default.
images] • Choose this option if you want to copy all or most
of the pictures in the folder.
[Select
Only the protected images in the folder will be
protected
images]

6 Select additional images.
• Highlight pictures and press the W
(Y) button to select; selected
pictures are marked with a L. To
deselect the current picture, press
the W (Y) button again; the L will
no longer be displayed.
the X (T) button.
• After confirming that all the pictures you want to copy
have L marks, press J to return to the [Copy image(s)]
menu.
7 Choose [Select destination

folder].
Highlight [Select destination folder]
and press 2 to display the [Select
destination folder] menu.

8 Choose a destination folder.
Choose one of the following options
and press 2.
Option Description
Enter the number of the
destination folder
[Select (0 546). If the folder with
Folder by the selected number does
Number] not already exist, a new
folder will be created.
Choose the destination

folder from a list of
[Select existing folders.
Folder from
List]
9 Select the folder.

After entering a folder number or highlighting the folder
name, press J to select the folder and return to the [Copy
image(s)] menu.

10 Choose [Copy image(s)?].
Highlight [Copy image(s)?] and
press J to display a confirmation
dialog.
11 Choose [Yes].
• The camera will display the
message “[Copy?]” together with
the number of pictures that will be
copied.
• Highlight [Yes] and press J to copy
the selected pictures.
• Press J again to exit when copying is complete.

D Copying Pictures
• Pictures will not be copied if there is
insufficient space on the destination card.
• If the destination folder contains a file with
the same name as one of the pictures to be
copied, a confirmation dialog will be
displayed. Select [Replace existing image]
or [Replace all] to replace the existing file or
files. Protected files in the destination folder will not be replaced. To
continue without replacing existing files, select [Skip]. Select [Cancel]
to exit without copying any further pictures.
• Ratings and protected status are copied with the pictures.
• To prevent loss of power while copying is in progress, be sure the
battery is fully charged before copying movies.
Image Review
Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the
monitor immediately after shooting. If [Off] is selected, pictures
can only be displayed by pressing the K button.

After Delete
Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted.
Option Description
• The following picture is displayed.
S [Show next] • If the deleted image was the last picture, the
preceding picture will be displayed.
• The preceding picture is displayed.
[Show
T • If the deleted image was the first picture, the next
previous]
picture will be displayed.
• If you were scrolling through pictures in the order
recorded, the following picture will be displayed
[Continue as described for [Show next].
U
as before] • If you were scrolling through pictures in reverse
order, the next picture will be displayed as
described for [Show previous].

Rotate Tall
If [On] is selected, “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures will be
automatically rotated for display during playback.
D Rotate Tall
Images are not rotated automatically during image review even when
[On] is selected for [Rotate tall].
Slide Show
View a slide show; pictures are displayed in the order recorded.
The pictures in the folder currently selected for [Playback
folder] (0 530) will be displayed one-by-one in the order
recorded.
Option Description
[Start] Start the slide show.
• Choose the type of picture displayed.
• Select [By rating] to view only pictures with
[Image type]
selected ratings. Highlight ratings and press 2 to
select (M) or deselect (U).
[Frame interval] Choose how long each picture will be displayed.

Viewing Slide Shows
To start the slide show, highlight [Start]
and press J.
The following operations can be performed while the show is in

progress:
To Description
Skip back/skip Press 4 to return to the previous frame, 2 to skip to
ahead the next frame.
If more than one page of photo info is selected for
View additional [Playback display options] in the playback menu,
photo info you can press 1 or 3 during full-frame playback to
choose the information displayed.
Press J to pause the slide show. To restart, highlight
Pause
[Restart] and press J.
Press X (T) to increase volume, W (Y) to
Adjust volume
decrease.
Exit to the Press G to end the slide show and return to the
playback menu playback menu.
Exit to playback
Press K to end the slide show and exit to playback.
mode
Exit to shooting Press the shutter-release button halfway to return to
mode shooting mode.

A dialog is displayed when the show
ends. To restart, highlight [Restart] and
press J. To end the show, highlight
[Exit] and press J.

Rating
Rate pictures.
• Highlight pictures using the multi
selector.
• Hold the W (Y) button and press 1 or
3 to choose a rating of from zero to
five stars, or select d to mark the
picture as a candidate for later deletion.
• To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the
X (T) button.

C The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting
Options
To view the photo shooting menu,
select the C tab in the camera menus.
The photo shooting menu contains the following items:

Item 0 Item 0
[Reset photo shooting [Long exposure NR] 556
545
menu] [High ISO NR] 557
[Storage folder] 545 [Vignette control] 558
[File naming] 545 [Diffraction compensation] 559
[Role played by card in Slot [Auto distortion control] 560
551
2]
[Flicker reduction] 561
[Image area] 551
[Flash control] 563
[Image quality] 551
[Auto bracketing] 567
[Image size] 551
[Multiple exposure] 569
[NEF (RAW) recording] 552
[HDR (high dynamic range)] 569
[ISO sensitivity settings] 553
[Interval timer shooting] 569
[White balance] 553
[Time-lapse movie] 570
[Set Picture Control] 553
[Focus shift shooting] 570
[Manage Picture Control] 554
[Silent live view
[Color space] 554 570
photography]
[Active D-Lighting] 555
544 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu

Reset Photo Shooting Menu
G button U C photo shooting menu
Restore photo shooting menu options to their default values
(0 512).
Storage Folder
Choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be stored.
1 Folder
2 Folder number
3 Folder name
Renaming Folders
The default folder name, which appears after the folder number,
is “ND780”. To change the name assigned to new folders, select
[Rename].
• Existing folders cannot be renamed.
• If desired, the default name can be restored for subsequent
folders by pressing and holding the O (Q) button while the
keyboard is displayed.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 545

Select Folder by Number
The folder in which subsequent pictures will be stored can be
selected by number. If a folder with the specified number does
not already exist, a new folder will be created.
1 Choose [Select folder by

number].
• Highlight [Select folder by
number] and press 2 to display the
[Select folder by number] dialog.
• The card on which the new folder
will be created is underlined in the card slot display area at
the top right corner of the [Select folder by number]
dialog. The card used for new folders depends on the
option currently selected for [Role played by card in Slot
2].
2 Choose a folder number.

• Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits.
• To change the highlighted digit, press 1 or 3.

3 Save changes and exit.
• If a folder with the selected number already exists, a W, X,
or Y icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number.
Press J to complete the operation and return to the main
menu; if you chose a folder marked W or X, it will be
selected as the folder for new pictures.
• If you chose a folder number that does not already exist, a
new folder will be created with that number when you
press J.
• In either case, subsequent pictures will be stored in the
chosen folder.
• To exit without changing the storage folder, press the G
button.
D Folder Icons
Folders in the [Select folder by number] dialog are shown by W if empty,
by Y if full (containing either 5000 pictures or a picture numbered 9999),
or by X if partially full. A Y icon indicates that no further pictures can be
stored in the folder.

Select Folder from List
To choose from a list of existing folders:
1 Choose [Select folder from list].

Highlight [Select folder from list]
and press 2 to display the [Select
folder from list] dialog.
2 Highlight a folder.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a folder.
3 Select the highlighted folder.

• Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the
main menu.
• Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected
folder.

D Folder and File Numbers
• Once the folder number has reached 999, the camera will stop creating
new folders automatically and disable the shutter release if:
- The number of files in the folder reaches 5000 (or during movie
recording, if camera calculates that the addition of the number of files
needed to create a movie of maximum length would bring the total
over 5000)
- The file number reaches 9999 (or during movie recording, when
camera calculates that the number of files needed to create a movie
of maximum length would result in a file numbered higher than 9999)
• If there is space on the memory card, you will nevertheless be able to
continue shooting by:
- Creating a folder with a number less than 999 and selecting it as the
storage folder
- Changing the options selected for [Frame size/frame rate] and
[Movie quality] before recording movies
D Startup Time
Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card
contains a very large number of files or folders.

File Naming
Pictures are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_”
followed by a four-digit number and a three-letter extension.
[File naming] is used to select three letters to replace the “DSC”
portion of the file name. For information on text entry, see “Text
Entry” (0 61).
D File Names
• File names take the form “DSC_nnnn.xxx”. nnnn is a number from 0001
to 9999. xxx is one of the following extensions, assigned according to
the options selected for image quality and file type:
- NEF: NEF (RAW) photos
- JPG: JPEG (fine, normal, or basic) photos
- MOV: MOV movies
- MP4: MP4 movies
- NDF: Dust off reference data
• Images created with [Adobe RGB] selected for [Color space] have file
names of the form “_DSCnnnn.xxx”.
• In each pair of photographs recorded at image-quality settings of NEF
(RAW)+JPEG, the NEF and JPEG images have the same file names but
different extensions.

Role Played by Card in Slot 2
Choose the role played by the card in Slot 2 when two memory
cards are inserted in the camera. For more information, see
“Using Two Memory Cards” (0 279).
Image Area
Adjust image area settings. For more information, see
“Adjusting Image Area Settings” (0 129).
Image Quality
Choose a file format for photographs. For more information, see
“Adjusting Image Quality” (0 134).
Image Size
Choose the size, in pixels, of pictures recorded with the camera.
For more information, see “Choosing an Image Size” (0 137).

NEF (RAW) Recording
Choose a compression type and bit depth for NEF (RAW)
photographs.
NEF (RAW) Compression

Option Description
NEF images are compressed using a reversible
[Lossless
N algorithm. The resulting files are about 60% to
compressed]
80% the size of uncompressed pictures.
NEF images are compressed using a non-
O [Compressed] reversible algorithm. The resulting files are about
45% to 65% the size of uncompressed pictures.
NEF (RAW) Bit Depth

Option Description
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of
q [12-bit]
12 bits.
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of
14 bits. Files recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits
contain more color data than pictures recorded
r [14-bit]
using [12-bit]. Files recorded at a bit depth of 14
bits are also larger than pictures recorded using
[12-bit].

ISO Sensitivity Settings
Adjust ISO sensitivity settings for photographs. For more
information, see “Adjusting the Camera’s Sensitivity to Light
(ISO Sensitivity)” (0 187).
White Balance
Adjust white balance to match the color of the light source. For
more information, see “Achieving Natural Colors with Different
Light Sources (White Balance)” (0 195).
Set Picture Control

Choose image processing (“Picture Control”) options for new
photos according to the scene or your creative intent. For more
information, see “Image Processing (Picture Controls)” (0 243).

Manage Picture Control
Save modified Picture Controls as custom Picture Controls. For
more information, see “Creating Custom Picture Controls”
(0 250).
Color Space
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for
color reproduction. [sRGB] is recommended for general-
purpose printing and display. With a broader gamut of colors
than [sRGB], [Adobe RGB] is a better choice for professional
publication and commercial printing.
D Color Space
Capture NX-D and ViewNX-i automatically select the correct color space
when opening photographs created with this camera. Results cannot be
guaranteed with third-party software.
D Adobe RGB
For accurate color reproduction, Adobe RGB images require applications,
displays, and printers that support color management.

Active D-Lighting
Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating pictures
with natural contrast. For more information, see “Active
D-Lighting” (0 254).

Long Exposure NR
Reduce “noise” (bright spots or fog) in photographs taken at
slow shutter speeds.
Option Description
Reduce noise in photographs taken at shutter speeds slower
[On]
than 1 s.
[Off] Long-exposure noise reduction disabled.
• Long-exposure noise reduction is performed after the photo is
taken. During processing, “l m” will flash in the control
panel and viewfinder. Pictures cannot be taken until the
display stops flashing. The time required to process photos
after shooting roughly doubles.
D Long-Exposure Noise Reduction

If the camera is turned off before processing is complete, the picture will
be saved but noise reduction will not be performed.

High ISO NR
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to
reduce “noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels).
Option Description
[High] Reduce noise in photographs taken at all ISO sensitivities.
[Normal] The higher the sensitivity, the greater the effect. Choose the
amount of noise reduction performed from [High], [Normal],
[Low] and [Low].
Noise reduction is performed only as required. The amount
[Off] of noise reduction performed is always lower than when
[Low] is selected.

Vignette Control
Vignette control reduces “vignetting”—a drop in brightness at
the edges of a photograph—by an amount that varies from lens
to lens. Its effects are most noticeable at maximum aperture.
Vignette control applies only to photographs taken with type G,
E, and D lenses (PC lenses excluded).
Option Description
e [High] Choose the amount of vignette control performed
g [Normal] from (in order from high to low) [High], [Normal],
f [Low] and [Low].
[Off] Vignette control disabled.
D Vignette Control
• Vignette control does not apply to:
- Pictures taken using the [Multiple exposure] item in the photo
shooting menu
- Movies
• Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, JPEG
images may exhibit “noise” (fog) or over-processing at the edge of the
frame that introduces variations in peripheral brightness. In addition,
custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls that have been
modified from default settings may not produce the desired effect. Take
test shots and view the results in the monitor.

Diffraction Compensation
Select [On] to reduce diffraction at small apertures (high f/-
numbers).
• To apply diffraction compensation to pictures taken with non-
CPU lenses, enter the lens data using the [Non-CPU lens data]
item in the setup menu.

Auto Distortion Control
Select [On] to reduce barrel distortion when shooting with
wide-angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion when
shooting with long lenses.
• [Auto distortion control] is available only with type G, E, and
D lenses. Some lenses of these types, including PC and
fisheyes lenses, are, however, not supported. Results are not
guaranteed with lenses that are not supported.
D Auto Distortion Control

• When [On] is selected, the time needed to process photographs before
recording begins may increase.
• The greater the amount of distortion control, the greater the area
cropped from the edges of the frame.
• Before using auto distortion control with DX lenses, choose [On] for
[Image area] > [Auto DX crop] or select [DX (24×16)] for [Choose
image area]. Selecting other options may result in heavily cropped
photographs or in photographs with severe peripheral distortion.
• Auto distortion control does not apply to movies.

Flicker Reduction
Reduce the effects of flicker from such light sources as
fluorescent or mercury-vapor lamps. Flicker can cause uneven
exposure or (in photographs taken in continuous release
modes) inconsistent exposure or coloration.
Option Description
When [Enable] is selected, the camera will time
photographs to reduce the effects of flicker.
[Flicker reduction
• Note that the frame rate for burst shooting
setting]
may drop or become erratic when [Enable] is
selected.
Choose whether a FLICKER icon is displayed in
the monitor or viewfinder when [Enable] is
selected for [Flicker reduction setting]. When
[On] is selected, the FLICKER icon will be
displayed at different times during viewfinder
and live view photography. The differences are
as follows:
• During viewfinder
[Flicker reduction photography, the
indicator] FLICKER icon is
displayed if flicker
is detected when
the shutter-release
button is pressed
halfway.
• During live view photography, the FLICKER
icon will be displayed at all times whether or
not flicker has been detected.

D Flicker Reduction: Restrictions
The [Flicker reduction] item in the photo shooting menu does not take
effect under some conditions, including when:
• MUP is selected for release mode
• CH is selected for release mode during live view photography
• [On] is selected for [Silent live view photography] in the photo
shooting menu during live view photography
• [On] is selected for [Silent photography] in the respective sub-menu
during interval-timer photography, time-lapse movie recording, or
focus shift
• HDR is enabled
• Exposure delay mode is on
• Shutter speed is set to A (bulb) or % (time)
D Flicker Reduction
• Take a test shot and view the results before taking additional
photographs.
• Depending on the light source, flicker reduction may slightly delay
shutter response. During burst shooting, the frame rate may slow or
become erratic.
• Flicker reduction can detect flicker at 100 and 120 Hz (associated
respectively with AC power supplies of 50 and 60 Hz). The desired
results may not be achieved if the frequency of the power supply
changes during burst photography.
• Flicker may not be detected or the desired results may not be achieved
depending on the light source and shooting conditions, for example
with scenes that are brightly lit or feature dark backgrounds.
• The desired results may also not be achieved with decorative lighting
displays and other non-standard lighting.

Flash Control
Choose a flash control mode and flash
level and adjust other settings for
wireless remote flash units or optional
flash units mounted on the camera
accessory shoe.
• For information on adjusting settings
for optional flash units mounted on the camera accessory
shoe, see “On-Camera Flash Photography” (0 459).
• For information on adjusting settings for wireless remote flash
units, see “Remote Flash Photography” (0 477).

Flash Control Mode
Choose a flash control mode and adjust other settings for
SB-5000, SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300 flash units mounted on the
camera accessory shoe.
• The options available in the flash control display vary with the
option selected for [Flash control mode].
• Settings for flash units other than the SB-5000, SB-500, SB-400,
and SB-300 can only be adjusted using flash unit controls.
• Settings for an SB-5000 mounted on the accessory shoe can
also be adjusted using the controls on the flash unit.
Option Description
Flash output is adjusted automatically in
r [TTL]
response to shooting conditions.
Flash output is adjusted automatically
[Auto external
g according to the amount of light reflected by
flash]
the subject.
[Distance-priority Choose the distance to the subject; flash
m
manual] output will be adjusted automatically.
s [Manual] Choose the flash level manually.
The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is
u [Repeating flash]
open, producing a multiple-exposure effect.

Wireless Flash Options
Adjust settings for simultaneous wireless control of multiple
remote flash units. This item is available only when an SB-5000
or SB-500 flash unit or a WR-R10 wireless remote controller is
mounted on the camera.
Option Description
The remote flash units are controlled using
Y [Optical AWL] low-intensity flashes emitted by the master
flash (0 494).
[Optical/ Choose this option when using both optically-
Y/ Z
radio AWL] and radio-controlled flash units (0 506).
The remote flash units are controlled by radio
Z [Radio AWL] signals from a WR-R10 attached to the camera
(0 479).
[Off] Remote flash photography disabled.

Remote Flash Control
Choose the remote flash control mode. Flash options can be
adjusted in the flash control display; the options available vary
with the option selected for [Remote flash control].
Option Description
Choose a separate flash control mode for
m [Group flash] each group of remote flash units (0 484,
496).
Choose the balance between groups A and
[Quick wireless
x B and set the output for group C manually
control]
(0 487, 499).
The flash units fire repeatedly while the
u [Remote repeating] shutter is open, producing a multiple-
exposure effect (0 490, 502).
Radio Remote Flash Info

View the flash units currently controlled
via radio AWL.

Auto Bracketing
Vary exposure, flash level, Active D-Lighting (ADL), or white
balance slightly with each shot, “bracketing” the current value.
Bracketing can be used in situations in which getting the right
settings is difficult and there is not time to check results and
adjust settings with each shot, or to experiment with different
settings for the same subject. For more information, see
“Varying Exposure or White Balance over a Series of
Photographs (Bracketing)” (0 224).

Option Description
Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto
bracketing is in effect.
• [AE & flash bracketing]: Perform both exposure
and flash-level bracketing.
• [AE bracketing]: Bracket only exposure.
[Auto
• [Flash bracketing]: Perform only flash-level
bracketing set]
bracketing.
• [WB bracketing]: Perform white-balance
bracketing.
• [ADL bracketing]: Perform bracketing using Active
D-Lighting.
[Number of Choose the number of shots in the bracketing
shots] sequence.
Choose the amount the selected settings vary with
[Increment] each shot when an option other than [ADL
bracketing] is selected for [Auto bracketing set].
Choose how Active D-Lighting varies with each shot
[Amount] when [ADL bracketing] is selected for [Auto
bracketing set].

Multiple Exposure
Record two to ten NEF (RAW) exposures as a single photograph.
For more information, see “Combining Multiple Exposures in a
Single Photo (Multiple Exposure)” (0 287).
HDR (High Dynamic Range)

Used with high contrast subjects, High Dynamic Range (HDR)
preserves details in highlights and shadows by combining two
shots taken at different exposures. For more information, see
“High Dynamic Range (HDR)” (0 256).
Interval Timer Shooting

Take photographs at the selected interval until the specified
number of shots has been recorded. For more information, see
“Taking Photos at a Set Interval (Interval Timer Shooting)”
(0 298).

Time-Lapse Movie
The camera automatically takes photos at selected intervals to
create a time-lapse movie. For more information, see “Creating
a Movie from Photos (Time-Lapse Movie)” (0 315).
Focus Shift Shooting

Focus shift automatically varies focus over a series of shots. Use
it to take photos that will later be combined using focus
stacking to create a single image with increased depth of field.
For more information, see “Varying Focus over a Series of
Photos (Focus Shift Shooting)” (0 328).
Silent Live View Photography

Enable the electronic shutter during live view photography to
mute shutter sounds and eliminate the vibrations produced by
the mechanical shutter. For more information, see “The
Electronic Shutter (Silent Live View Photography)” (0 340).

1 The Movie Shooting Menu: Movie
Shooting Options
To view the movie shooting menu,
select the 1 tab in the camera menus.
The movie shooting menu contains the following items:

Item 0 Item 0
[Reset movie shooting [Active D-Lighting] 577
572
menu] [High ISO NR] 578
[File naming] 572 [Diffraction compensation] 578
[Destination] 572 [Flicker reduction] 579
[Image area] 573 [Electronic VR] 580
[Frame size/frame rate] 573 [Microphone sensitivity] 581
[Movie quality] 574 [Attenuator] 582
[Movie file type] 574 [Frequency response] 582
[ISO sensitivity settings] 575 [Wind noise reduction] 583
[White balance] 576 [Headphone volume] 583
[Set Picture Control] 577 [Timecode] 584
[Manage Picture Control] 577
Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu 571

Reset Movie Shooting Menu
G button U 1 movie shooting menu
Restore movie shooting menu options to their default values
(0 516).
File Naming
Choose the three-letter prefix used in naming the image files in
which movies are stored; the default prefix is “DSC” (0 550).
Destination
Choose the slot to which movies are recorded when two
memory cards are inserted.
• The menu shows the time available on each card.
• Recording ends automatically when no time remains on the
current card.
572 Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu

Image Area
Choose the image area for movies.
Auto DX Crop
Choose whether the camera automatically uses the [DX] image
area for movies recorded with a DX lens.
Frame Size/Frame Rate

Choose the movie frame size (in pixels) and frame rate. For more
information, see “Frame Size/Frame Rate and Movie Quality”
(0 264).

Movie Quality
Choose from [High quality] and [Normal]. For more
information, see “Frame Size/Frame Rate and Movie Quality”
(0 264).
Movie File Type

Record movies in MOV or MP4 format.

ISO Sensitivity Settings
Adjust the following ISO sensitivity
settings for use during filming.
Option Description
• Choose the upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity control
from values between ISO 200 and Hi 2.
[Maximum
• The selected value serves as the upper limit for ISO
sensitivity]
sensitivity in modes P, S, and A and when [On] is
selected for [Auto ISO control (mode M)] in mode M.
• [On]: Enable auto ISO sensitivity control in mode M.
[Auto ISO • [Off]: Use the value selected for [ISO sensitivity (mode
control M)].
(mode M)] • Regardless of the option selected, auto ISO sensitivity
control is used in modes other than M.
[ISO
Choose the ISO sensitivity for mode M from values
sensitivity
between ISO 100 and Hi 2.
(mode M)]

D Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
• At high ISO sensitivities, “noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or
lines) may increase.
• At high ISO sensitivities, the camera may have difficulty focusing.
• The foregoing can be prevented by choosing a lower value for [ISO
sensitivity settings] > [Maximum sensitivity].
White Balance
Choose the white balance for movies.
Select [Same as photo settings] to use
the option currently selected for photos
(0 553).

Set Picture Control
Choose a Picture Control for movies.
Select [Same as photo settings] to use
the option currently selected for photos
(0 553).
Manage Picture Control

Save modified Picture Controls as custom Picture Controls
(0 554).
Active D-Lighting
Preserve details in highlights and
shadows, creating movies with natural
contrast. Select [Same as photo
settings] to use the option currently
selected for photos (0 254).

High ISO NR
Reduce “noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels) in movies
recorded at high ISO sensitivities (0 557).
Diffraction Compensation
Reduce diffraction in movies (0 559).

Flicker Reduction
Reduce flicker and banding when shooting under fluorescent or
mercury-vapor lighting during live view or movie recording.
Choose [Auto] to allow the camera to automatically choose the
correct frequency. If [Auto] fails to produce the desired results,
select [50 Hz] or [60 Hz] according to the frequency of the local
power supply. Choose [50 Hz] for areas with a 50 Hz power
supply, [60 Hz] for areas with a 60 Hz power supply.
D Flicker Reduction
• If [Auto] fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the
frequency of the local power supply, test both the 50 and 60 Hz options
and choose the one that produces the best results.
• Flicker reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is
very bright. If this is the case, try choosing a smaller aperture (higher f-
number).
• Flicker reduction may fail to produce the desired results in modes other
than M. If this is the case, select mode M and choose a shutter speed
adapted to the frequency of the local power supply:
- 50 Hz: 1/100 s, 1/50 s, 1/25 s
- 60 Hz: 1/125 s, 1/60 s, 1/30 s

Electronic VR
Choose whether to enable electronic vibration reduction during
movie recording.
Option Description
• Enable electronic vibration reduction during movie
recording.
• Electronic vibration reduction is not available in EFCT
modes or at frame sizes of 1920 × 1080; 120p, 1920 × 1080;
100p, or 1920 × 1080 (slow-motion).
[On]
• Note that when electronic vibration reduction is [On], the
angle of view will be reduced, slightly increasing the
apparent focal length.
• The maximum sensitivity for movie recording is fixed at
ISO 51200.
[Off] Electronic vibration reduction is disabled.

Microphone Sensitivity
Turn built-in or external microphones on or off or adjust
microphone sensitivity.
Option Description
[Auto] Adjust microphone sensitivity automatically.
Select microphone sensitivity
manually. Choose from values
of from 1 to 20. The higher the
[Manual] value, the higher the
sensitivity; the lower the
value, the lower the
sensitivity.
[Microphone
Turn sound recording off.
off]
D Movies Without Sound

Movies that were recorded with [Microphone
off] selected for [Microphone sensitivity] are
indicated by a 2 icon.

Attenuator
Select [Enable] to reduce microphone gain and prevent audio
distortion when recording movies in loud environments.
Frequency Response
Choose the range of frequencies to which built-in and external
microphones respond.
Option Description
Record a wide range of frequencies. Choose for
[Wide
S everything from music to the bustling hum of a city
range]
street.
[Vocal
T Choose for human voices.
range]

Wind Noise Reduction
Select [On] to enable the low-cut filter, reducing noise
produced by wind blowing over the built-in microphone. Note
that other sounds may also be affected.
Selecting [On] for [Wind noise reduction] has no effect on
optional stereo microphones. Wind-noise reduction for optional
stereo microphones that support this feature can be enabled or
disabled using microphone controls.
Headphone Volume
Press 1 or 3 to adjust headphone volume.

Timecode
Choose whether to record time codes giving the hour, minute,
second, and frame number for each frame when shooting
movies. Time codes are available only with movies recorded in
MOV format.
Option Description
• [On]: Record time codes. The time code appears in the
monitor.
• [On (with HDMI output)]: Time codes will be included
[Record with footage saved to external recorders connected to
timecodes] the camera via an HDMI cable. The camera supports
Atomos SHOGUN, NINJA, and SUMO-series Monitor
recorders.
• [Off]: Time codes are not recorded.
• [Record run]: Time codes are incremented only while
recording is in progress.
[Count-up
• [Free run]: Time codes are incremented continuously.
method]
Time codes continue to be incremented while the
camera is off.

Option Description
•
[Reset]: Reset the time code to 00:00:00.00.
• [Enter manually]: Enter the hour, minute, second, and
frame number manually.
[Timecode • [Current time]: Set the time code to the current time
origin] as reported by the camera clock. Before using this
option, select [Time zone and date] in the setup menu
and confirm that the camera clock is set to the correct
date and time.
Select [On] to compensate for discrepancies between
[Drop frame] the frame count and the actual recording time at frame
rates of 30 and 60 fps.
D HDMI Devices
Selecting [On (with HDMI output)] for [Record timecodes] may disrupt
footage output to HDMI devices.

A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning
Camera Settings
To view Custom Settings, select the A
tab in the camera menus.
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit

individual preferences. The Custom Settings menu is divided
into levels.
586 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings

The following Custom Settings are available: 1
Item 0 Item 0
[Reset custom settings] 590 b [Metering/exposure]
a [Autofocus] [EV steps for
b1 601
[AF-C priority exposure cntrl]
a1 590
selection] [Easy exposure
b2 602
[AF-S priority compensation]
a2 591
selection] b3 [Matrix metering] 603
[Focus tracking with [Center-weighted
a3 592 b4 603
lock-on] area]
[3D-tracking face- [Fine-tune optimal
a4 592 b5 604
detection] exposure]
[Auto-area AF face/ c [Timers/AE lock]
a5 593
eye detection] [Shutter-release
c1 605
a6 [Focus points used] 594 button AE-L]
[Store points by c2 [Standby timer] 605
a7 595
orientation] c3 [Self-timer] 606
a8 [AF activation] 597 c4 [Monitor off delay] 606
[Focus point wrap-
a9 597
around]
[Focus point
a10 598
options]
a11 [Low-light AF] 599
[Manual focus ring in
a12 600
AF mode] 2
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 587

Item 0 Item 0
d [Shooting/display] e [Bracketing/flash]
[CL mode shooting e1 [Flash sync speed] 618
d1 607
speed] e2 [Flash shutter speed] 620
[Max. continuous [Exposure comp. for
d2 607 e3 620
release] flash]
[Sync. release mode [Auto c ISO
d3 608 e4 621
options] sensitivity control]
[Exposure delay e5 [Modeling flash] 621
d4 608
mode]
e6 [Bracketing order] 622
[Electronic front-
d5 609 f [Controls]
curtain shutter]
f1 [Customize i menu] 623
[Extended shutter
d6 610 [Customize i menu
speeds (M)] f2 626
(Lv)]
[File number
d7 611 f3 [Custom controls] 628
sequence]
[Save original f4 [OK button] 635
d8 613 [Customize
(EFFECTS)] f5 637
[Exposure preview command dials]
d9 614 [Release button to
(Lv)] f6 641
[Framing grid use dial]
d10 615 f7 [Reverse indicators] 642
display]
d11 [Peaking highlights] 615 f8 [D switch] 642
d12 [LCD illumination] 616
[Live view in
d13 616
continuous mode]
d14 [Optical VR] 3 617

Item 0
g [Movie]
g1 [Customize i menu] 643
g2 [Custom controls] 645
g3 [AF speed] 650
[AF tracking
g4 652
sensitivity]
g5 [Highlight display] 653
1 Items modified from default values are indicated by asterisks (“U“).

2 This item is available with compatible lenses only.
3 This item is available only with compatible AF-P lenses not equipped
with a vibration reduction switch.

Reset Custom Settings
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Restore Custom Settings to their default values (0 518).
a: Autofocus
a1: AF-C Priority Selection
Choose whether photos can be taken before the camera
focuses when AF-C is selected.
Option Description
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release
G [Release]
button is pressed (release priority).
Photos can be taken only when the camera is in focus
F [Focus]
(focus priority).

a2: AF-S Priority Selection
Choose whether photos can be taken before the camera
focuses when AF-S is selected.
Option Description
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release
G [Release]
button is pressed (release priority).
Photos can be taken only when the camera is in focus
F [Focus]
(focus priority).

a3: Focus Tracking with Lock-On
Choose how quickly focus responds if
something passes between the subject
and the camera during viewfinder
photography in autofocus mode AF-C or
when AF-A is selected and the camera is
shooting using AF-C.
• Choose [5 (Delayed)] to help maintain focus on your original
subject.
• Choose [1 (Quick)] to make it easier to shift focus to objects
crossing your field of view.
• Note that [2] and [1 (Quick)] are equivalent to [3] when
[3D-tracking] or [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode.
a4: 3D-Tracking Face-Detection

Choose whether the camera detects and focuses on faces when
[3D-tracking] is selected for AF-area mode during viewfinder
photography.

a5: Auto-Area AF Face/Eye Detection
Choose whether the camera detects and focuses on faces or on
faces and eyes when [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area
mode.
Option Description
If the camera detects a portrait subject during live view
photography, it will automatically focus on one or the
[Face and eye other of the subject’s eyes. During viewfinder
detection on] photography or movie recording or if the eyes are not
detected, the camera will instead focus on the
subject’s face.
[Face When the camera detects a portrait subject, it
detection on] automatically focuses on the subject’s face.
[Off] Face and eye detection disabled.

a6: Focus Points Used
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus-
point selection when an option other than [Auto-area AF] is
selected for AF-area mode.
Option Description
Every focus point available in the current AF-area mode
[All
R can be selected. The number of points available varies
points]
with the AF-area mode.
The number of available focus points is reduced to one
quarter of the number available when [All points] is
[Every
selected. Use for quick focus-point selection.
I other
• This has no effect on the number of focus points
point]
available for live view photography in [Pinpoint AF]
and [Wide-area AF (L)] modes.

a7: Store Points by Orientation
Choose whether separate focus points can be selected for
“wide” (landscape) orientation, for “tall” (portrait) orientation
with the camera rotated 90° clockwise, and for “tall” orientation
with the camera rotated 90° counterclockwise. Separate options
are available for the viewfinder (shown in the illustrations) and
for live view.
• Select [No] to use the same focus point regardless of camera
orientation.
Camera rotated Landscape (wide) Camera rotated

90°counter-clockwise orientation 90°clockwise

• Select [Yes] to enable separate focus-point selection.
Camera rotated Landscape (wide) Camera rotated

90°counter-clockwise orientation 90°clockwise

a8: AF Activation
Choose whether the shutter-release button can be used to
focus. If [AF-ON only] is selected, the camera will not focus
when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Focus can
only be adjusted using the AF-ON button or other controls to
which AF-ON has been assigned using Custom Setting f3
[Custom controls].
a9: Focus Point Wrap-Around

Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one
edge of the display to another.
If [Wrap] is selected, focus-point selection will “wrap around”
from top to bottom, bottom to top, right to left, and left to right,
so that, for example, pressing 2 when a focus point at the right
edge of the viewfinder display is highlighted selects the
corresponding focus point at the left edge of the display.

a10: Focus Point Options
Choose from the following focus point display options:
Focus Point Illumination

Choose whether the active focus point is highlighted in the
viewfinder.
Option Description
The selected focus point is automatically highlighted in red
[Auto]
as needed to establish contrast with the background.
The selected focus point is always highlighted in red,
regardless of the brightness of the background. Depending
[On]
on the brightness of the background, the selected focus
point may be difficult to see.
[Off] The selected focus point is not highlighted.
Manual Focus Mode

Option Description
The focus point is displayed at all times in manual focus
[On]
mode.
The focus point is displayed only during focus point
[Off]
selection.

Dynamic-Area AF Assist
Choose whether both the selected focus point and the
surrounding focus points are displayed in dynamic-area AF
mode.
Option Description
Display both the selected focus point and surrounding focus
[On]
points.
[Off] Display only the selected focus point.
a11: Low-Light AF
Choose [On] for more accurate focus under low-light conditions
during live view when AF-S is selected for autofocus mode or
when AF-A is selected and the camera is shooting using AF-S.
• Low-light AF applies only during still photography.
• Low-light AF is not available in b and EFCT modes.
• Low-light AF is not available during interval-timer
photography or time-lapse movie recording.
• The camera may require more time to focus when [On] is
selected.
• While low-light AF is in effect, “Low-light” will appear in the
monitor. In addition, the display refresh rate may drop.

a12: Manual Focus Ring in AF Mode
This item is available with compatible lenses only. Choose
whether the lens focus ring can be used for manual focus in
autofocus mode.
Option Description
Autofocus can be over-ridden by rotating the lens focus ring
(autofocus with manual override). The focus ring can be used
[Enable] for manual focus while the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway. To refocus using autofocus, lift your finger from the
shutter-release button and then press it halfway again.
The lens focus ring cannot be used for manual focus while
[Disable]
autofocus mode is selected.

b: Metering/Exposure
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl
Select the increments used for adjustments to shutter speed,
aperture, ISO sensitivity, bracketing, and exposure and flash
compensation.

b2: Easy Exposure Compensation
Choose whether the E button is needed for exposure
compensation.
Option Description
Exposure compensation can be adjusted rotating the
command dial not currently used for shutter speed or
[On
aperture. The setting selected with the command dial is
(Auto reset)]
reset when the camera turns off or the standby timer
expires.
Exposure compensation can be adjusted rotating the
command dial not currently used for shutter speed or
[On]
aperture. Exposure compensation is not reset when the
camera turns off or the standby timer expires.
Exposure compensation is set by pressing the E button
[Off]
and rotating the main command dial.
• This setting takes effect in modes P, S, and A. Easy exposure
compensation is not available in other modes.
• The command dial used varies with the shooting mode.

b3: Matrix Metering
Choose whether [Matrix metering] assigns priority to faces
detected by the camera. This setting applies only during
viewfinder photography.
Option Description
[Face Matrix metering assigns priority to faces
U
detection on] detected by the camera.
[Face Matrix metering does not assign priority to faces
V
detection off] detected by the camera.
b4: Center-Weighted Area

When [Center-weighted metering] is selected, the camera
assigns the greatest weight to an area in the center of the
viewfinder when setting exposure. Custom Setting b4 [Center-
weighted area] is used to choose the size of the area given the
greatest weight when [Center-weighted metering] is selected.
• If a non-CPU or AF-S Fisheye NIKKOR 8–15mm f/3.5–4.5E ED
lens is attached, the size of the area is fixed at φ12 mm.

b5: Fine-Tune Optimal Exposure
Use this item to fine-tune the exposure value selected by the
camera; exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each
metering method. Exposure can be adjusted up for brighter
exposures or down for darker exposures in the range +1 to
−1 EV in steps of 1/6 EV. The default is 0.
D Fine-Tuning Exposure
• Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting b5 [Fine-tune
optimal exposure], the exposure compensation icon (E) will not be
displayed. The only way to determine how much exposure has been
altered is to view the amount in the fine-tuning menu for Custom
Setting b5.
• The values selected are not affected by two-button resets.

c: Timers/AE Lock
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L
Choose whether exposure locks when the shutter-release
button is pressed.
Option Description
Pressing the shutter-release button halfway
O [On (half press)]
locks exposure.
[On (burst Exposure only locks while the shutter-release
P
mode)] button is pressed all the way down.
Pressing the shutter-release button does not
[Off]
lock exposure.
c2: Standby Timer

The camera continues to meter exposure for a set time after the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Choose how long the
camera continues to meter exposure when no operations are
performed.
• The shutter-speed and aperture displays in the control panel
and viewfinder turn off automatically when the standby timer
expires.

c3: Self-Timer
Choose the length of the shutter release delay, the number of
shots taken, and the interval between shots in self-timer mode.
Option Description
[Self-timer
Choose the length of the shutter-release delay.
delay]
Press 1 and 3 to choose the number of shots taken
[Number of
each time the shutter-release button is pressed; choose
shots]
from values of from 1 to 9.
[Interval
Choose the interval between shots when [Number of
between
shots] is more than 1.
shots]
c4: Monitor Off Delay

Choose how long the monitor remains on when no operations
are performed.
• Separate monitor off delays can be selected for [Playback],
[Image review], [Menus], [Information display], and [Live
view].
• The default delays are: for [Playback] and [Information
display], 10 s; for [Menus], 1 minute; for [Image review], 4 s;
and for [Live view], 10 minutes.
• Choose shorter monitor-off delays for greater battery
endurance.

d: Shooting/Display
d1: CL Mode Shooting Speed
Choose the frame advance rate for low-speed continuous
release mode; options range from [6 fps] to [1 fps].
d2: Max. Continuous Release

The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single
burst in continuous release modes can be set to any value
between 1 and 100.
• Note that regardless of the option selected, there is no limit to
the number of photos that can be taken in a single burst when
a shutter speed of 4 s or slower is selected in mode S or M.
D The Memory Buffer

Custom Setting d2 [Max. continuous release] is used to select the
number of shots that can be taken in a single burst. The number of shots
that can be taken before the memory buffer fills and shooting slows varies
with image quality and other settings. When the buffer is full, the camera
will display r00 and the frame advance rate will drop.

d3: Sync. Release Mode Options
Choose whether the shutters on the remote cameras are
synchronized with the shutter on the master camera when
using an optional wireless remote controller.
d4: Exposure Delay Mode

In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur
pictures, shutter release can be delayed by from about 0.2 to 3
seconds after the mirror is raised.

d5: Electronic Front-Curtain Shutter
Enable or disable the electronic front-curtain shutter. Enabling
the electronic front-curtain helps reduce blur caused by camera
shake. The electronic front-curtain shutter is available in Q, QC,
and MUP modes.
Option Description
[Enable] Enable the electronic front-curtain shutter.
[Disable] Use a mechanical shutter.
D The Electronic Front-Curtain Shutter

• Pictures taken with lenses of types other than G, E, or D may contain
“noise” such as lines or fog. Select [Disable] should you notice this to be
the case.
• Regardless of the option selected, the camera uses the mechanical
shutter in modes other than Q, QC, and MUP.
• The fastest shutter speed and maximum ISO sensitivity available with
the electronic front-curtain shutter are 1/2000 s and ISO 51200,
respectively.

d6: Extended Shutter Speeds (M)
Extend the range of shutter speeds available in mode M; the
slowest shutter speed available when [On] is selected is 900 s
(15 minutes). Extended shutter speeds can be used for pictures
of the night sky and in other situations that require that the
shutter remain open for long periods.
• To use extended shutter speeds, choose [On] and select a
shutter speed of 60 s or slower.

d7: File Number Sequence
Choose a file numbering option.
Option Description
When a new folder is created or a new memory card is
inserted in the camera, file numbering will continue from the
[On] last number used. This simplifies file management by
minimizing the occurrence of duplicate file names when
multiple cards are used.
When a new folder is created or a new memory card is
inserted, file numbering restarts from 0001. If the current
folder already contains images, file numbering will instead
[Off] continue from the highest file number in the current folder. If
you select [Off] after selecting [On], the camera will store the
current file number. File numbering will resume from the
previously-stored value the next time [On] is selected.
Reset the file numbering for [On]. If the current folder is
empty, file numbering will restart from 0001 with the next
[Reset] picture taken. If the current folder contains images, the next
picture taken will be assigned a file number by adding one to
the highest file number in the current folder.

D File Number Sequence
• If a picture is taken when the current folder contains a picture
numbered 9999, a new folder will be created and file numbering will
restart from 0001.
• When the current folder number reaches 999, the camera will no longer
be able to create new folders and the shutter release will be disabled if:
- The current folder contains 5000 pictures (in addition, movie
recording will be disabled if the camera calculates that the number of
files needed to record a movie of the maximum length would result in
the folder containing over 5000 files)
- The current folder contains a picture numbered 9999 (in addition,
movie recording will be disabled if the camera calculates that the
number of files needed to record a movie of the maximum length
would result in a file numbered over 9999)
To resume shooting, choose [Reset] for Custom Setting d7 [File
number sequence] and then either format the current memory card or
insert a new memory card.
D Folder Numbering
• If a picture is taken when the current folder contains 5000 pictures or a
picture numbered 9999, a new folder will be created and selected as the
current folder.
• The new folder is assigned a number one higher than current folder
number. If a folder with that number already exists, the new folder will
be assigned the lowest available folder number.

d8: Save Original (EFFECTS)
In f, d, e, k, l, and m modes, you can choose whether in
addition to saving pictures in JPEG format, the camera saves
NEF (RAW) copies without the effects applied.
Option Description
The camera saves an NEF (RAW) copy in addition to a JPEG
[On]
copy to which the effect has been applied.
The camera saves only a JPEG copy to which the effect has
[Off]
been applied.

d9: Exposure Preview (Lv)
Select [On] to preview how the options currently selected for
shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity affect exposure
while taking photographs in modes P, S, A, and M.
A Exposure Preview
• Exposure preview is not available when A (Bulb) or % (Time) is
selected for shutter speed. Note that the preview may not accurately
reflect the final results when:
- [On] is selected for Custom Setting d6 [Extended shutter speeds
(M)] and shutter speed is 60 s or slower
- Flash lighting is used
- [Active D-Lighting] or [HDR (high dynamic range)] is in effect
- s is selected for shutter speed
- Bracketing is in effect
• If the subject is very bright or very dark, the exposure indicators will
flash to warn that the preview may not accurately reflect exposure.
• Exposure can be adjusted by ±5 EV, although only values between −3
and +3 EV are reflected in the preview display.

d10: Framing Grid Display
Choose whether to display a grid for reference when framing
shots.
d11: Peaking Highlights

When focus peaking is enabled during live view photography in
manual focus mode, objects that are in focus are indicated by
colored outlines in the display. You can choose the color.
Option Description
Choose from [3 (high sensitivity)], [2 (standard)],
[1 (low sensitivity)], and [Off]. The higher the value,
[Peaking level] the greater the depth that will be shown as being in
focus. Focus peaking is not performed in special effects
modes.
[Peaking
Choose a peaking highlight color from [Red], [Yellow],
highlight
[Blue], and [White].
color]

d12: LCD Illumination
Choose when the control panel backlight lights.
• If [Off] is selected, the backlight will light when the power
switch is rotated to D. The backlight turns off when the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway or all the way down.
• If [On] is selected, the backlight will light while the standby
timer is active. Note that this increases the drain on the
battery. The backlight will turn off while the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway or all the way down, but will turn on
again when the button is released.
d13: Live View in Continuous Mode

Choose whether the monitor remains on in live view while burst
photography is in progress. If [Off] is selected, not only the
monitor but also the monitor backlight will turn off during
exposures.

d14: Optical VR
This item is available only with compatible AF-P lenses not
equipped with a vibration reduction switch. Selecting [On]
enables vibration reduction, which takes effect whenever the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Select [Off] to disable
vibration reduction.

e: Bracketing/Flash
e1: Flash Sync Speed
Choose the flash sync speed.
Option Description
Auto FP high-speed sync is enabled with compatible flash
units and the maximum sync speed for other flash units is
set to 1/200 s.
• When the camera shows a shutter speed of 1/200 s in
mode P or A, auto FP high-speed sync will be activated if
[1/200 s
the actual shutter speed is faster than 1/200 s. If the flash
(Auto FP)]
supports auto FP high-speed sync, the camera can select
shutter speeds as fast as 1/8000 s.
• In modes S and M, the user can select shutter speeds as
fast as 1/8000 s when using flash units that support auto
FP high-speed sync.
[1/200 s]
[1/160 s]
[1/125 s] Flash sync speed set to selected value, which can be from
[1/100 s] 1/200 to 1/60 s.
[1/80 s]
[1/60 s]

D Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit
In modes S and M, shutter speed can be fixed at the value selected for
Custom Setting e1 [Flash sync speed] by selecting the next shutter speed
after the slowest possible shutter speed (30 s or %). An X (flash sync
indicator) will be displayed in the viewfinder and control panel together
with the flash sync speed.
D Auto FP High-Speed Sync

• Auto FP high-speed sync allows the flash to be used at the highest
shutter speed supported by the camera. When [1/200 s (Auto FP)] is
selected, the camera automatically enables auto FP high-speed sync at
shutter speeds faster than the flash sync speed. This makes it possible to
choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field even when
the subject is backlit in bright sunlight.
• The flash information display shows “FP” when auto [1/200 s (Auto FP)]
is selected.

e2: Flash Shutter Speed
Choose the slowest shutter speed available with a flash in mode
P or A.
Regardless of the setting chosen for e2 [Flash shutter speed],
shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in modes S and M or at
flash settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye
reduction with slow sync.
e3: Exposure Comp. for Flash

Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when exposure
compensation is used.
Option Description
The camera adjusts both the flash level and
[Entire
YE exposure. This changes the exposure for the
frame]
entire frame.
[Background Exposure compensation is adjusted for the
E
only] background only.

e4: Auto c ISO Sensitivity Control
Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when auto ISO
sensitivity control is enabled.
Option Description
The camera takes both the main subject and
[Subject and
e background lighting into account when adjusting
background]
ISO sensitivity.
ISO sensitivity is adjusted only to ensure that the
f [Subject only]
main subject is correctly exposed.
e5: Modeling Flash

Select [On] to enable the modeling flash emitted if the Pv
button is pressed when the camera is used with an optional
flash unit that supports the Nikon Creative Lighting system.

e6: Bracketing Order
Choose the order in which the shots in the bracketing program
are taken.
Option Description
The unmodified shot is taken first,
followed by the shot with the lowest
H [MTR > under > over]
value, followed by the shot with the
highest value.
Shooting proceeds in order from the
I [Under > MTR > over]
lowest to the highest value.
• Custom Setting e6 [Bracketing order], has no effect on the
order of the shots taken when [ADL bracketing] is selected for
[Auto bracketing] > [Auto bracketing set] in the photo
shooting menu.

f: Controls
f1: Customize i Menu
Choose the items listed in the i menu displayed when the i
button is pressed during viewfinder photography. For
information on customizing the i menu, see “Customizing the
i Menu: Customize i Menu” (0 347).
Item 0 Item 0
[Choose image y [Active D-Lighting] 254
J 129
area] q [Long exposure NR] 556
8 [Image quality] 134 r [High ISO NR] 557
o [Image size] 137 w [Metering] 166
[View memory card c [Flash mode] 465
N 624
info]
[Flash
[Exposure Y 469
E 175 compensation]
compensation]
g [Autofocus mode] 140
[ISO sensitivity
9 187 t [AF-area mode] 145
settings]
t [Auto bracketing] 224
m [White balance] 195
$ [Multiple exposure] 287
[Set Picture
h 243 [HDR (high
Control] 2 256
dynamic range)]
p [Color space] 554

Item 0 Item 0
[Interval timer w [Custom controls] 628
7 298
shooting] [Exposure delay
z 608
8 [Time-lapse movie] 315 mode]
[Focus shift [Bluetooth
9 328 Z 625
shooting] connection]
[View release U [Wi-Fi connection] 625
v 624
mode]
View Memory Card Info

View the slot currently selected as the destination for new
pictures and the role played by the card in Slot 2 when two
memory cards are inserted. This item can be used to view but
not to change the option selected.
• The role played by the card in Slot 2 can be selected using
[Role played by card in Slot 2] in the photo shooting menu
(0 279).
View Release Mode

View the current release mode. This item can be used to view
but not change the option selected.

Bluetooth Connection
Turn the Bluetooth connection on or off.
Wi-Fi Connection
Enable or disable Wi-Fi.
• Enable Wi-Fi to establish wireless connections to computers or
between the camera and smartphones or tablets (smart
devices) running the SnapBridge app.
• To turn Wi-Fi off, highlight [Wi-Fi connection] in the i menu
and press J; if Wi-Fi is currently enabled, a [Close Wi-Fi
connection] prompt will be displayed. Press J to end the
connection.

f2: Customize i Menu (Lv)
button is pressed during live view. For information on
customizing the i menu, see “Customizing the i Menu:
Customize i Menu” (0 347).
Item 0 Item 0
[Choose image y [Active D-Lighting] 254
J 129
area] q [Long exposure NR] 556
8 [Image quality] 134 r [High ISO NR] 557
o [Image size] 137 w [Metering] 166
[View memory card c [Flash mode] 465
N 624
info]
[Flash
[Exposure Y 469
E 175 compensation]
compensation]
g [Autofocus mode] 140
[ISO sensitivity
9 187 t [AF-area mode] 145
settings]
t [Auto bracketing] 224
m [White balance] 195
$ [Multiple exposure] 287
[Set Picture
h 243 [HDR (high
Control] 2 256
dynamic range)]
p [Color space] 554

Item 0 Item 0
[Interval timer [Exposure delay
7 298 z 608
shooting] mode]
8 [Time-lapse movie] 315 $ [Exposure preview] 614
[Focus shift [Peaking
9 328 W 615
shooting] highlights]
[Silent live view [Monitor
L 570 3 658
photography] brightness]
[View release [Bluetooth
v 624 Z 625
mode] connection]
w [Custom controls] 628 U [Wi-Fi connection] 625
% [Negative digitizer] 343

f3: Custom Controls
Choose the functions performed either by pressing camera
controls or by pressing controls and rotating command dials
during still photography.
• Choose the roles played by the controls
below. Highlight the desired control
and press J.
Option
0 [Preview button]
3 [Fn button]
! [AE-L/AF-L button]
V [AF-ON button]
n [BKT button]
z [Movie record button]
• The roles that can be assigned to these controls are as follows:
Option 0 3 ! V n z
A [AF-ON] 4 4 4 4 — —
F [AF lock only] 4 4 4 4 — —
E [AE lock (Hold)] 4 4 4 4 — —
D [AE lock (Reset on release)] 4 4 4 4 — —
C [AE lock only] 4 4 4 4 — —
B [AE/AF lock] 4 4 4 4 — —
r [FV lock] 4 4 4 — — —

Option 0 3 ! V n z
h [cDisable/enable] 4 4 — — — —
q [Preview] 4 4 — — — —
% [Preview (Lv max. aperture)] 4 4 — — — —
L [Matrix metering] 4 4 — — — —
M [Center-weighted metering] 4 4 — — — —
N [Spot metering] 4 4 — — — —
t [Highlight-weighted metering] 4 4 — — — —
1 [Bracketing burst] 4 4 — — — —
4 [+ NEF (RAW)] 4 4 — — — —
b [Framing grid display] 4 4 — — — —
! [Viewfinder virtual horizon] 4 4 — — — —
O [MY MENU] 4 4 — — — —
3 [Access top item in MY MENU] 4 4 — — — —
K [Playback] 4 4 — — — —
J [Choose image area] 4 4 — — — 4
y [Active D-Lighting] 4 4 — — — —
w [Metering] — — — — — 4
t [Auto bracketing] — — — — 4 —
$ [Multiple exposure] — — — — 4 —
2 [HDR (high dynamic range)] — — — — 4 —
z [Exposure delay mode] 4 4 — — — —
v [1 step spd/aperture] 4 4 — — — —
w [Choose non-CPU lens number] 4 4 — — — —
[None] 4 4 4 4 4 4

• The following options are available:
Option Description
Pressing the control initiates autofocus,
A [AF-ON]
duplicating the function of the AF-ON button.
F [AF lock only] Focus locks while the control is pressed.
Exposure locks when the control is pressed.
Exposure lock does not end when the shutter
[AE lock
E is released. Exposure remains locked until the
(Hold)]
control is pressed a second time or the standby
timer expires.
[AE lock
Exposure remains locked until the control is
D (Reset on
pressed a second time, the shutter is released,
release)]
or the standby timer expires.
C [AE lock only] Exposure locks while the control is pressed.
Focus and exposure lock while the control is
B [AE/AF lock]
pressed.
Press the control to lock flash value for
r [FV lock] optional flash units; press again to cancel FV
lock.

Option Description
If the flash is currently enabled, it will be
[c Disable/ disabled while the control is pressed. If the
h
enable] flash is currently off, front-curtain sync will be
selected while the control is pressed.
Hold the control to stop aperture down and
preview depth of field during viewfinder
q [Preview] photography. During live view, pressing the
control stops aperture down to the selected
value.
[Preview (Lv Press the control to temporarily select
% max. maximum aperture for an improved focus
aperture)] preview during live view.
[Matrix [Matrix metering] is activated while the
L
metering] control is pressed.
[Center-
[Center-weighted metering] is activated
M weighted
while the control is pressed.
metering]
[Spot [Spot metering] is activated while the control
N
metering] is pressed.
[Highlight-
[Highlight-weighted metering] is activated
t weighted
while the control is pressed.
metering]

Option Description
•
If the control is pressed when an option
other than [WB bracketing] is selected for
[Auto bracketing] > [Auto bracketing set]
in the photo shooting menu in release mode
CH, CL, or QC, the camera will take all the
shots in the current bracketing program and
repeat the bracketing burst while the
[Bracketing
1 shutter-release button is pressed. In release
burst]
modes S and Q, shooting will end after the
first bracketing burst.
• If [WB bracketing] is selected for [Auto
bracketing] > [Auto bracketing set], the
camera will take pictures while the shutter -
release button is pressed and apply white
balance bracketing to each shot.
• If a JPEG option is currently selected for
image quality, an NEF (RAW) copy will be
recorded with the next picture taken after
the control is pressed (until the picture is
taken, “RAW” will appear in the monitor
image quality display). The original image
4 [+ NEF (RAW)] quality setting will be restored when you
remove your finger from the shutter-release
button or press the control again, canceling
[+ NEF (RAW)].
• NEF (RAW) copies are recorded at the
settings currently selected for [NEF (RAW)
recording] in the photo shooting menu.

Option Description
Press the control to display a framing grid in
[Framing grid
b the viewfinder or monitor. Press the control
display]
again to turn the display off.
[Viewfinder Press the control to view a virtual horizon
! virtual display in the viewfinder. Press the control
horizon] again to turn the display off.
O [MY MENU] Press the control to display “MY MENU”.
[Access top Press the control to jump to the top item in
3 item in MY “MY MENU.” Select this option for quick access
MENU] to a frequently-used menu item.
K [Playback] Press the control to start playback.
[Choose Press the control and rotate a command dial to
J
image area] choose the image area.
[Active Press the control and rotate a command dial to
y
D-Lighting] adjust Active D-Lighting.
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
w [Metering]
choose a metering option.
Press the control and rotate the main
command dial to choose the number of shots
[Auto
t and the sub-command dial to select the
bracketing]
bracketing increment or Active D-Lighting
amount.

Option Description
Press the control and rotate the main
[Multiple command dial to choose the mode and the
$
exposure] sub-command dial to choose the number of
shots.
[HDR (high Press the control and rotate the main
2 dynamic command dial to choose the mode and the
range)] sub-command dial to choose HDR strength.
[Exposure Press the control and rotate a command dial to
z
delay mode] choose the shutter-release delay.
Make adjustments to shutter speed and
aperture in increments of 1 EV, regardless of
the option selected for Custom Setting b1 [EV
steps for exposure cntrl].
[1 step spd/ • In modes S and M, shutter speed can be
v
aperture] adjusted in increments of 1 EV by holding the
control and rotating the main command dial.
• In modes A and M, aperture can be adjusted
in increments of 1 EV by holding the control
and rotating the sub-command dial.
[Choose Press the control and rotate a command dial to
w non-CPU lens choose a lens number saved using the [Non-
number] CPU lens data] item in the setup menu.
[None] The control has no effect.

f4: OK Button
Choose the role assigned to the J button during still
photography and playback.
Option Description
[Select center focus
K Pressing J selects the center focus point.
point]
[Highlight active
K Pressing J highlights the active focus point.
focus point]
[None] Pressing J during shooting has no effect.
Live View
Option Description
[Select center focus
K Pressing J selects the center focus point.
point]
Press J to zoom the display in on the area
around the current focus point. Press J
p [Zoom on/off] again to return to the previous display.
To choose the zoom ratio, highlight [Zoom
on/off] and press 2.
[None] Pressing J during shooting has no effect.

Playback Mode
Regardless of the option selected, pressing J when a movie is
displayed full frame starts movie playback.
Option Description
Press J to toggle between full-frame and
n [Thumbnail on/off]
4-, 9-, or 72-frame thumbnail playback.
A histogram is displayed while the J button
o [View histograms] is pressed. The histogram display is available
in both full-frame and thumbnail playback.
Press J to zoom the display in on the area
around the active focus point. Press J again
to return to the previous display.
p [Zoom on/off] • To choose the zoom ratio, highlight
[Zoom on/off] and press 2.
• Zoom is available in both full-frame and
thumbnail playback.
Press J to display the [Choose slot and
[Choose slot and
u folder] dialog, where you can then choose a
folder]
slot and folder for playback.

f5: Customize Command Dials
Customize the operation of the main and sub-command dials.
Reverse Rotation
Reverse the direction of rotation of the command dials for
selected operations.
• Highlight [Exposure compensation] or [Shutter speed/
aperture] and press 2 to select (M) or deselect (U).
• Press J to save changes and exit.
Change Main/Sub
Reverse the roles of the main- and sub-command dials.
Option Description
If [On] is selected, the main command dial will control
[Exposure aperture and the sub-command dial shutter speed. If
setting] [On (Mode A)] is selected, the main command dial will
be used to set aperture in mode A only.
If [On] is selected, AF-area mode can be selected by
keeping the AF-mode button pressed and rotating the
[Autofocus
main command dial, autofocus mode by keeping the
setting]
AF-mode button pressed and rotating the sub-
command dial.

Aperture Setting
Choose whether aperture can be adjusted using the aperture
ring on CPU lenses in modes A and M.
Option Description
Aperture can only be adjusted with the sub-command
[Sub-command
dial (or with the main command dial if [On] is selected
dial]
for [Change main/sub] > [Exposure setting]).
Aperture can be adjusted with the lens aperture ring.
The camera aperture display shows aperture in
[Aperture ring]
increments of 1 EV, although fractions of 1 EV can still
be selected using the aperture ring.
• Regardless of the option selected for [Aperture setting],
aperture for lenses not equipped with an aperture ring (type G
and E lenses) must be adjusted using the sub-command dial.
• When using non-CPU lenses, supply lens data using the [Non-
CPU lens data] item in the setup menu (0 349) and adjust
aperture using the lens aperture ring.

Menus and Playback
Choose the roles played by the multi selector and command
dials during playback and menu navigation.
Option Description
Playback:
• The main command dial can be used to choose
the picture displayed during full-frame playback.
The sub-command dial can be used to skip
forward or back according to the option selected
for [Sub-dial frame advance].
• During thumbnail playback, the main command
[On] dial can be used to highlight thumbnails and the
sub-command dial to page up or down.
Menus *:
Use the main command dial to highlight menu
items. Rotating the sub-command dial clockwise
displays the sub-menu for the highlighted option.
Rotating it counter-clockwise displays the previous
menu.
[On (image
As for [On] except that the command dials cannot
2 review
be used for playback during image review.
excluded)]
Use the multi selector to choose the picture
[Off] displayed during full-frame playback or to
highlight pictures or menu items.
* The sub-command dial cannot be used to select highlighted items. To
select highlighted items, press J or 2.

Sub-Dial Frame Advance
Choose the number of frames that can be skipped by rotating
the sub-command dial during full-frame playback. This option
only takes effect when [On] or [On (image review excluded)] is
selected for [Menus and playback].
Option Description
[10 frames] Skip forward or back 10 frames at a time.
[50 frames] Skip forward or back 50 frames at a time.
Skip to the next or previous pictures with the
c [Rating] selected rating. To choose the rating, highlight
[Rating] and press 2.
P [Protect] Skip to the next or previous protected picture.
[Still images
C Skip to the next or previous photo.
only]
[Movies
1 Skip to the next or previous movie.
only]
u [Folder] Rotate the sub-command dial to select a folder.

f6: Release Button to Use Dial
Selecting [Yes] allows adjustments that are normally made by
holding a button and rotating a command dial to be made by
rotating the command dial after the button is released. This
ends when the button is pressed again, the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway, or the standby timer expires.
• [Release button to use dial] applies to the E, S (Q), BKT,
c (Y), Q/g (U), X (T), W (Y), and AF mode buttons.
• [Release button to use dial] also applies to controls to which
the following roles have been assigned using Custom Settings
f3 or g2 [Custom controls]: [Choose image area], [Active
D-Lighting], [Metering], [Auto bracketing], [Multiple
exposure], [HDR (high dynamic range)], [Exposure delay
mode], [1 step spd/aperture], and [Choose non-CPU lens
number].

f7: Reverse Indicators
Choose whether the exposure indicators in the viewfinder,
control panel, and information display are displayed with
negative values on the left and positive values on the right, or
with positive values on the left and negative values on the right.
Option Description
The indicator is displayed with positive
V values on the left and negative values on
the right.
The indicator is displayed with negative
W values on the left and positive values on
the right.
f8: D Switch
Choose whether rotating the power switch to D activates only
the control panel backlight or also turns on the information
display.

g: Movie
g1: Customize i Menu
button is pressed during movie recording. For information on
customizing the i menu, see “Customizing the i Menu:
Customize i Menu” (0 347).
Item 0 Item 0
[Choose image g [Autofocus mode] 140
J 129
area] t [AF-area mode] 145
[Frame size and 4 [Electronic VR] 580
G 264
rate/Image quality]
[Microphone
N [Destination] 572 H 581
sensitivity]
[Exposure 5 [Attenuator] 582
E 175
compensation]
[Frequency
[ISO sensitivity 6 582
9 187 response]
settings]
[Wind noise
m [White balance] 195 7 583
reduction]
[Set Picture [Headphone
h 243 8 583
Control] volume]
y [Active D-Lighting] 254 w [Custom controls] 628
w [Metering] 166

Item 0 Item 0
[Peaking U [Wi-Fi connection] 625
W 615
highlights] [Multi-selector
$ 644
9 [Highlight display] 653 power aperture]
[Monitor [Multi selector
3 658 % 644
brightness] exposure comp.]
[Bluetooth
Z 625
connection]
Multi-Selector Power Aperture

Choose whether the multi selector can be used for power
aperture. Select [Enable] to enable power aperture. Press 1 to
widen the aperture, 3 to narrow the aperture.
Multi Selector Exposure Comp.

Choose whether the multi selector can be used to adjust
exposure compensation. Selecting [Enable] allows exposure
compensation to be set by pressing 1 or 3.

g2: Custom Controls
Choose the functions performed either by pressing camera
controls or by pressing controls and rotating command dials
during filming.
• Choose the roles played by the controls
below. Highlight the desired control
and press J.
Option
0 [Preview button]
2 [Fn button]
! [AE-L/AF-L button]
V [AF-ON button]
G [Shutter-release button]
• The roles that can be assigned to these controls are as follows:
Option 0 2 ! V G
t [Power aperture (open)] 4 — — — —
q [Power aperture (close)] — 4 — — —
i [Exposure compensation +] 4 — — — —
h [Exposure compensation -] — 4 — — —
b [Framing grid display] 4 4 — — —

Option 0 2 ! V G
J [Choose image area] 4 4 — — —
y [Active D-Lighting] 4 4 — — —
A [AF-ON] — — 4 4 —
F [AF lock only] — — 4 4 —
E [AE lock (Hold)] — — 4 4 —
C [AE lock only] — — 4 4 —
B [AE/AF lock] — — 4 4 —
C [Take photos] — — — — 4
1 [Record movies] — — — — 4
[None] 4 4 4 4 —
• The following options are available:

Option Description
Aperture widens while the Pv button is pressed.
[Power Use in combination with Custom Setting g2
t aperture [Custom controls] > [Fn button] > [Power
(open)] aperture (close)] for button-controlled
aperture adjustment.
Aperture narrows while the Fn button is
[Power pressed. Use in combination with Custom
q aperture Setting g2 [Custom controls] > [Preview
(close)] button] > [Power aperture (open)] for button-
controlled aperture adjustment.

Option Description
Exposure compensation increases while the Pv
[Exposure button is pressed. Use in combination with
i compensation Custom Setting g2 [Custom controls] > [Fn
+] button] > [Exposure compensation −] for
button-controlled exposure compensation.
Exposure compensation decreases while the Fn
button is pressed. Use in combination with
[Exposure
Custom Setting g2 [Custom controls] >
h compensation
[Preview button] > [Exposure compensation
−]
+] for button-controlled exposure
compensation.
Press the control to display a framing grid in the
[Framing grid
b monitor. Press the control again to turn the
display]
display off.
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
[Choose image choose the image area for movies. Note that the
J
area] image area cannot be changed while recording
is in progress.
[Active Press the control and rotate a command dial to
y
D-Lighting] adjust Active D-Lighting for movies.
Pressing the control initiates autofocus,
A [AF-ON]
duplicating the function of the AF-ON button.

Option Description
F [AF lock only] Focus locks while the control is pressed.
Exposure lock does not end when the shutter is
E [AE lock (Hold)] released. Exposure remains locked until the
control is pressed a second time or the standby
timer expires.
C [AE lock only] Exposure locks while the control is pressed.
Focus and exposure lock while the control is
B [AE/AF lock]
pressed.
Press the shutter-release button all the way
C [Take photos] down to take a photograph with an aspect ratio
of 16:9.

Option Description
Press the shutter-release button halfway to start
live view. If the focus mode selector is in the AF
position, you can then press the shutter-release
button halfway again to focus. To start movie
recording, press the shutter-release button the
rest of the way down. Press the shutter-release
button again to end recording.
[Record • When [Record movies] is selected, the
1
movies]
shutter-release button cannot be used for any
purpose other than recording movies.
• To end live view, press the a button.
• The shutter-release buttons on optional
wireless remote controllers or remote cords
function in the same way as the camera
shutter-release button.
[None] The control has no effect.
D Power Aperture
• Power aperture is available only in modes A and M.
• A 6 icon displayed in the monitor indicates that power aperture cannot
be used.
• The display may flicker while aperture is adjusted.

g3: AF Speed
Choose the focus speed for movie
recording when using lenses compatible
with this option.
Use [When to apply] to choose when the selected option

applies.
Option Description
The selected option applies whenever the live
D [Always]
view selector is rotated to 1.
The selected option applies only when recording
[Only while
E is in progress. At other times, the focus speed is
recording]
“+5”, or in other words as fast possible.

D Compatible Lenses
The value selected for [AF speed] applies only to AF-P lenses and the
lenses listed below. All other lenses focus at maximum speed.
• AF-S Fisheye NIKKOR 8–15mm f/3.5–4.5E ED
• AF-S DX NIKKOR 16–80mm f/2.8–4E ED VR
• AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II
• AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
• AF-S NIKKOR 20mm f/1.8G ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8E ED VR
• AF-S NIKKOR 28mm f/1.4E ED
• AF-S DX NIKKOR 55–200mm f/4–5.6G ED VR II
• AF-S NIKKOR 58mm f/1.4G
• AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8E FL ED VR
• AF-S NIKKOR 105mm f/1.4E ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 120–300mm f/2.8E FL ED SR VR
• AF-S NIKKOR 180–400mm f/4E TC1.4 FL ED VR
• AF-S NIKKOR 200–500mm f/5.6E ED VR
• AF-S NIKKOR 300mm f/4E PF ED VR
• AF-S NIKKOR 400mm f/2.8E FL ED VR
• AF-S NIKKOR 500mm f/4E FL ED VR
• AF-S NIKKOR 500mm f/5.6E PF ED VR
• AF-S NIKKOR 600mm f/4E FL ED VR

g4: AF Tracking Sensitivity
Choose how quickly focus responds
when your subject leaves the focus point
or something passes between the
subject and the camera during filming;
the options available range from 1 to 7.
• Choose [7 (Low)] to help maintain
focus on your original subject.
• If the subject leaves the selected focus area when [1 (High)] is
selected, the camera will respond by quickly shifting focus to a
new subject in the same area.

g5: Highlight Display
Choose whether shading is used to indicate highlights (bright
areas of the frame) during movie recording.
Display Pattern
To enable the highlight display for movie recording, select
[Pattern 1] or [Pattern 2].
Pattern 1 Pattern 2
Highlight Display Threshold

Choose the brightness needed to trigger the movie highlight
display. The lower the value, the greater the range of
brightnesses that will be shown as highlights. If [255] is
selected, the highlight display will show only areas that are
potentially overexposed.
D Highlight Display
If both the highlight display and peaking highlights are enabled, only
peaking highlights will be displayed in manual focus mode. To view the
highlight display in manual focus mode, select [Off] for Custom Setting
d11 [Peaking highlights] > [Peaking level].

B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
To view the setup menu, select the B tab
in the camera menus.
The setup menu contains the following items:

Item 0 Item 0
[Format memory card] 656 [Clean image sensor] 673
[Save user settings] 657 [Lock mirror up for
674
[Reset user settings] 657 cleaning] *
[Language] 657 [Image Dust Off ref photo] 675
[Time zone and date] 658 [Pixel mapping] 679
[Monitor brightness] 658 [Image comment] 681
[Monitor color balance] 659 [Copyright information] 682
[Virtual horizon] 661 [Beep options] 684
[Information display] 662 [Touch controls] 686
[AF fine-tuning options] 663 [HDMI] 686
[Non-CPU lens data] 672 [Location data] 687
654 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu

Item 0 Item 0
[Wireless remote (WR) [Conformity marking] 700
688
options] [Battery info] 701
[Assign remote (WR) Fn [Slot empty release lock] 702
691
button]
[Save/load menu settings] 703
[Airplane mode] 691
[Reset all settings] 708
[Connect to smart device] 692
[Firmware version] 708
[Connect to PC] 696
[Wireless transmitter
700
(WT-7)]
* Not available at battery levels of J or below.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 655

Format Memory Card
G button U B setup menu
Format memory cards. To begin
formatting, choose a memory card slot
and select [Yes]. Note that formatting
permanently deletes all pictures and other
data on the card. Before formatting, be
sure to make backup copies as required.
D During Formatting
Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards until the message
[Formatting memory card.] clears from the display.
A Two-Button Format
• Press and hold the O (Q) and S (Q) buttons simultaneously for over
two seconds until C starts to flash in the control panel and
viewfinder and a flashing memory card indicator appears in the control
panel; you can then press the two buttons (O/Q and S/Q) again to
format the current memory card.
• If two memory cards are inserted, the flashing indicator will show the
card selected for formatting. To select a different card, rotate the main
command dial while the C indicator is flashing.
• Do not turn the camera off or remove the battery or memory card
during formatting.

Save User Settings
Frequently-used combinations of settings can be assigned to
the U1 and U2 positions on the mode dial (0 115).
Reset User Settings

Reset settings for U1 and U2 to default values (0 118).
Language
Choose a language for camera menus and messages. The
languages available vary with the country or region in which the
camera was originally purchased.

Time Zone and Date
Change time zones and set the camera clock. We recommend
that the camera clock be adjusted regularly.
Option Description
Choose a time zone. [Date and time] is automatically
[Time zone]
set to the time in the new time zone.
[Date and Set the camera clock to the time in the selected [Time
time] zone].
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are
[Date format]
displayed.
Select [On] to turn daylight saving time on, [Off] to turn
[Daylight
it off. Selecting [On] automatically advances the clock
saving time]
one hour. The default setting is [Off].
If the clock is reset, a B icon will flash in the control panel
and a flashing t indicator will appear in the information
display.
Monitor Brightness
Press 1 or 3 to adjust monitor brightness. Choose higher
values for increased brightness, lower values for reduced
brightness.

Monitor Color Balance
Adjust monitor color balance to your taste.
• Color balance is adjusted using the
multi selector. Press 1, 3, 4, or 2 to
adjust color balance as shown below.
Press J to save changes.
1 Increase green
2 Increase amber
3 Increase magenta
4 Increase blue
• Monitor color balance applies only to menus, playback, and

the view through the lens displayed during live view; pictures
taken with the camera are not affected.
• The reference image is either the last picture taken or, in
playback mode, the picture last displayed. If the memory card
contains no pictures, an empty frame will be displayed
instead.

• To choose a different image, press the
W (Y) button. Highlight the desired
picture and press J to select it as the
reference image.
• To view the highlighted image full
frame, press and hold X (T).

Virtual Horizon
Display roll and pitch information based on information from
the camera tilt sensor.
• If the camera is tilted neither left nor right, the roll reference
line will turn green. If the camera is tilted neither forward nor
back, the dot (I) in the center of the display will turn green.
• Each division is equivalent to 5°.
Camera level Camera tilted left or Camera tilted forward

right or back
D Tilting the Camera

The virtual horizon display is not accurate when the camera is tilted at a
sharp angle forward or back. If the camera is unable to measure tilt, the
amount of tilt will not be displayed.

Information Display
Adjust the appearance of the information display according to
lighting conditions.
Dark on light Light on dark
Option Description
The camera adjusts the color of the lettering in the
[Auto] information display to make it easier to read. Black is used
in bright locations, a dim white in dark locations.
Manually choose the color of the lettering.
w [Dark on light]: To make the display easier to read in
bright locations, the monitor lights and the lettering is
[Manual] displayed in black.
x [Light on dark]: To make the display easier to read in
dark locations, the monitor dims and the lettering is
displayed in white.

AF Fine-Tuning Options
Fine-tune focus for the current lens.
• Use only as required.
• We recommend that you perform fine-
tuning at a focus distance you use
frequently. If you perform fine-tuning
at a short focus distance, for example,
you may find it less effective at longer distances.
Option Description
[AF fine- • [On]: Turn AF fine-tuning on.
tune on/off] • [Off]: Turn AF fine-tuning off.
Fine-tune focus for the current CPU lens; separate focus
positions can be selected for viewfinder and live view
photography (0 665).
• The camera can store values for up to 20 lens types.
[Fine-tune
• The camera will not save fine-tuning values for non-CPU
and save
lenses.
lens]
• New values overwrite existing values. Separate values
can be saved for lenses with teleconverters attached,
even if values already exist for the same lenses without
teleconverters.
Choose the AF tuning values used for viewfinder and live
[Default] view photography with lenses for which no values have
been saved using [Fine-tune and save lens] (0 667).

Option Description
List values saved using [Fine-
tune and save lens].
Highlighting a lens in the list
and pressing 2 displays a
[Choose lens number] dialog.
• The [Choose lens number]
[List saved dialog is used to choose the
values] lens identifier. Press 1 or 3 to choose an identifier and
press J to save changes and exit. While [Fine-tune and
save lens] stores only one set of values for each lens
type, choosing different identifiers lets you save
separate fine-tuning values for two or more lenses of
the same type, for example by choosing an identifier
that is the same as the lens serial number.
D Deleting Saved Values

To delete values saved using [Fine-tune and save lens], highlight the
desired lens in the [List saved values] list and press O (Q).

Creating and Saving Fine-Tuning Values
1 Attach the lens to the camera.
2 Select [AF fine-tuning options] in the setup menu,
then highlight [Fine-tune and save lens] and press
2.
3 Highlight [For viewfinder photography] or [For
live view photography] and press 2.
An AF fine-tuning dialog will be displayed. The options
displayed vary with whether the attached lens is a zoom lens
or has a fixed focal-length.
Zoom lens Fixed focal-length lens

4 Press 4 or 2 to fine-tune autofocus.
• Choose from values between +20 and −20.
• The current value is shown by g, the previously-selected
value by j.
• If a zoom lens is attached, you can choose separate fine-
tuning values for maximum angle (WIDE) and maximum
zoom (TELE). Use 1 and 3 to choose between the two.
• The larger the fine-tuning value, the farther the focal point
from the lens; the smaller the value, the closer the focal
point.
5 Press J to save the new value.

A Auto AF Fine-Tuning
Use auto AF fine-tuning to fine-tune autofocus automatically while
viewing the results in the live view display. Pressing the W (Y) button in
the [For viewfinder photography] display in Step 3 takes you Step 2 of
“Auto AF Fine-Tuning” (0 668).

Choosing a Default Fine-Tuning Value
1 Select [AF fine-tuning options] in the setup menu,
then highlight [Default] and press 2.
2 Highlight [For viewfinder photography] or [For

live view photography] and press 2.
An AF fine-tuning dialog will be displayed.
3 Press 4 or 2 to fine-tune autofocus.

• Choose from values between +20 and −20.
• The current value is shown by g, the previously-selected
value by j.
• The larger the fine-tuning value, the farther the focal point
from the lens; the smaller the value, the closer the focal
point.
4 Press J to save the new value.

Auto AF Fine-Tuning
Auto AF fine-tuning is performed as described below.

C and press the a button.
2 Press the AF-mode and movie-record buttons

simultaneously and keep them pressed for over
two seconds.

Zoom Lenses
• The camera will display options for
fine-tuning autofocus separately at
maximum angle and maximum
zoom.
• Highlight [WIDE] (maximum angle)

or [TELE] (maximum zoom) and
press J; the camera will select the
center focus point and the auto AF
fine-tuning dialog will be displayed.
Fixed Focal-Length Lenses

The camera will select the center
focus point and the auto AF fine-
tuning dialog will be displayed.

• If you are using a zoom lens, rotate
the zoom ring all the way to select
either the maximum angle or
maximum zoom before focusing.
• Before focusing, mount the camera on a tripod and aim the
camera at a flat, high-contrast subject parallel to the
camera focal plane.
• Note that auto AF fine-tuning works best at maximum

aperture.
• Zoom in on the view through the lens to confirm that the
subject is in focus. Focus can be adjusted manually if
necessary.
• Note that live view autofocus and auto AF fine-tuning may
not function in dark surroundings.

4 Press J.
• The AF fine-tuning value for the current lens will be added
to the [List saved values] list (CPU lenses only).
• If auto fine-tuning is successful, AF fine-tuning will be
enabled and the [AF fine-tune on/off] item will change to
[On].
• If you are using a zoom lens, after completing AF fine-
tuning for either the maximum angle or maximum zoom,
you will need to repeat the process for the remaining item.
Press the X (T) button and repeat Steps 2 to 4.
• New values overwrite existing values.
5 Press J to save changes and exit.

D If Auto Fine-Tuning Fails
If auto fine-tuning fails, a message will be displayed. Press X (T) to
attempt auto fine-tuning again, or press J to exit without performing AF
fine-tuning. Pressing X (T) returns you to Step 2.

Non-CPU Lens Data
Record data for non-CPU lenses. Recording the focal length and
maximum aperture of non-CPU lenses allows them to be used
with some functions normally reserved for CPU lenses.
Option Description
[Lens number] Choose a number to identify the lens.
[Focal length
Enter the focal length.
(mm)]
[Maximum
Enter the maximum aperture.
aperture]

Clean Image Sensor
Dirt or dust entering the camera when lenses are exchanged or
the body cap is removed may adhere to the low-pass filter and
affect your photographs. The “clean image sensor” option
vibrates the sensor to remove dust.
Option Description
[Clean now] Perform image sensor cleaning immediately.
• [Clean at startup]: The image sensor is automatically
cleaned each time the camera is turned on.
• [Clean at shutdown]: The image sensor is
[Clean at
automatically cleaned during shutdown each time
startup/
shutdown]
• [Clean at startup & shutdown]: The image sensor is
cleaned automatically at startup and at shutdown.
• [Cleaning off]: Automatic image sensor cleaning off.

Lock Mirror Up for Cleaning
Use [Lock mirror up for cleaning] to lock the mirror up so that
dust that cannot be removed using the “clean image sensor”
option can be removed manually. Note, however, that because
the low-pass filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged, we
recommend that manual cleaning be performed only by a
Nikon-authorized service representative. For information on
cleaning the low-pass filter, see “Manual Cleaning” (0 827).

Image Dust Off Ref Photo
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in
Capture NX-D. Image Dust Off processes NEF (RAW) images to
mitigate effects caused by dust adhering to the low-pass filter in
front of the camera image sensor. For more information, refer to
Capture NX-D online help.
Acquiring Image Dust Off Reference Data

1 Choose a start option.
• Highlight [Start] and press J to
immediately display the [Image
Dust Off ref photo] dialog.
• Highlight [Clean sensor and then

start] and press J to clean the
image sensor before starting. The
[Image Dust Off ref photo] dialog
will be displayed when image
sensor cleaning is complete.

• “F” will appear in the viewfinder and control panel
displays.
• To exit without acquiring Image Dust Off reference data,

press G.
2 With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches)

from a well-lit, featureless white object, frame the
object so that it fills the display and then press the
• In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to
infinity.
• In manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.

3 Press the shutter-release button the rest of the
way down to acquire Image Dust Off reference
data.
• The monitor turns off when the shutter-release button is
pressed.
• If the reference object is too bright
or too dark, the camera may be
unable to acquire Image Dust Off
reference data and a message will
be displayed and the camera will
return to the display shown in Step
1. Choose another reference object and press the shutter-
release button again.
D Image Sensor Cleaning

Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is
performed cannot be used with photographs taken after image sensor
cleaning is performed. Select [Clean sensor and then start] only if the
Image Dust Off reference data will not be used with existing photographs.

D Acquiring Image Dust Off Reference Data
• [Image Dust Off ref photo] is not available when a non-CPU lens is
mounted on the camera.
• An FX-format CPU lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is
recommended.
• When using a zoom lens, zoom all the way in.
• The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with
different lenses or at different apertures.
• Reference images cannot be viewed using computer imaging software.
• A grid pattern is displayed when reference
images are viewed on the camera.

Pixel Mapping
Pixel mapping checks and optimizes camera image sensor. If
you notice unexpected bright spots appearing in pictures taken
with the camera, perform pixel mapping as described below.
• Use a fully-charged battery to prevent unexpected loss of
power.
• Pixel mapping is performed with the lens cap (front cap)
attached and the camera viewfinder eyepiece covered by the
supplied eyepiece cap.

1 Select [Pixel mapping] in the setup menu.
Turn the camera on, press the G button, and select [Pixel
mapping] in the setup menu.
2 Select [Start].
Pixel mapping will start. 1 appears in the control panel
while the operation is in progress.
3 Turn the camera off when pixel mapping is

complete.
D Pixel Mapping
• Do not attempt to operate the camera while pixel mapping is in
progress. Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power
source.
• Pixel mapping may not be available if the camera’s internal temperature
is elevated.

Image Comment
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken.
Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX-i or
Capture NX-D.
Input Comment
Input a comment of up to 36 characters. Highlight [Input
comment] and press 2 to display a text-entry dialog. For
information on text entry, see “Text Entry” (0 61).
Attach Comment
To attach the comment to subsequent
photographs, highlight [Attach
comment], press 2, and confirm that a
check (M) appears in the adjacent check
box. Press J to save changes and exit;
the comment will be attached to all
subsequent photographs.
D Photo Info
Comments can be viewed on the shooting data page in the photo
information display.

Copyright Information
Add copyright information to new photographs as they are
taken. Copyright information can be viewed as metadata in
ViewNX-i or Capture NX-D.
Entering the Names of the Photographer and

Copyright Holder
Enter the names of the photographer (maximum 36 characters)
and copyright holder (maximum 54 characters). Highlight
[Artist] or [Copyright] and press 2 to display a text-entry
dialog. For information on text entry, see “Text Entry” (0 61).

Attach Copyright Information
To attach copyright information to
subsequent photographs, highlight
[Attach copyright information], press
2, and confirm that a check (M) appears
in the adjacent check box. Press J to
save changes and exit; copyright
information will be attached to all subsequent photographs.
D Copyright Information
• To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names,
make sure that [Attach copyright information] is not selected before
lending or transferring the camera to another person. You will also need
to make sure that the artist and copyright fields are blank.
• Nikon does not accept liability for any damages or disputes arising from
the use of the [Copyright information] option.
D Photo Info
Copyright information is included in the shooting data shown in the
photo information display.

Beep Options
Beep On/Off
Turn the beep speaker on or off.
• If [On] is selected for [Beep on/off], beeps sound when:
- The self-timer is in operation
- The shutter-release button is pressed for a second time
during mirror-up photography
- Interval-timer photography, time-lapse movie recording, or
focus shift ends
- The camera focuses—note that a beep will not sound when
the camera focuses if [Release] is selected for Custom Setting
a2 [AF-S priority selection], if AF-C is selected for autofocus
mode, or if AF-A is selected and the camera focuses using
AF-C
- The touch screen is used
- The shutter-release button is pressed with a write-protected
memory card inserted in the camera

• Select [Off (touch controls only)] to disable the beep during
keyboard entry while enabling it for other purposes.
• Note that regardless of the option selected, a beep will not
sound when the camera focuses during movie recording or in
quiet-shutter release modes (modes Q and QC) or when [On] is
selected for [Silent live view photography].
Volume
Adjust beep volume.
Pitch
Choose the pitch of the beep from [High] and [Low].

Touch Controls
Adjust settings for monitor touch controls.
Enable/Disable Touch Controls

Enable or disable touch-screen controls. Select [Playback only]
to enable touch-screen controls in playback mode only.
Full-Frame Playback Flicks

Choose whether the next image in full-frame playback is
displayed by flicking left or by flicking right.
Option Description
S [LeftURight] Flick left to display the next picture.
T [LeftVRight] Flick right to display the next picture.
HDMI
Adjust settings for connection to HDMI devices (0 396).

Location Data
Adjust settings for use when the camera is connected to a
device that provides location data, namely a GPS receiver or a
smart device running the SnapBridge app. For more
information on SnapBridge, see the app’s online help.
Option Description
If [Enable] is selected when a GPS receiver is connected,
the exposure meters will turn off automatically if no
[Standby
operations are performed for the period specified using
timer]
Custom Setting c2 [Standby timer]. The drain on the
battery is reduced.
View the location data supplied by the GPS receiver or
[Position]
smart device. The items displayed vary with the source.
[Set clock
Select [Yes] to synchronize the camera clock with the time
from
reported by the GPS device.
satellite]

Wireless Remote (WR) Options
Adjust status LED and link mode settings for optional WR-R10
wireless remote controllers. You can also choose a link mode for
connection to optional radio-controlled flash units that support
Advanced Wireless Lighting.
D The WR-R10 Wireless Remote Controller

Be sure the firmware for the WR-R10 has been updated to the latest
version (version 3.0 or later). For information on firmware updates, see the
Nikon website for your area.
LED Lamp
Enable or disable the status LEDs on a WR-R10 wireless remote
controller mounted on the camera. For more information, see
the documentation supplied with the wireless remote
controller.

Link Mode
Choose a link mode for WR-R10 wireless remote controllers
mounted on other cameras or radio-controlled flash units that
support Advanced Wireless Lighting. Be sure that the same
mode is selected for the other devices.
Option Description
The camera connects only to devices with which it has
previously been paired. Press the pairing button on the
WR-R10 wireless remote controller connected to the
camera to pair it with other devices.
• As camera will not communicate with devices with
[Pairing] which it has not been paired, this option can be used to
prevent signal interference from other devices in the
vicinity.
• Given that each device must be paired separately,
however, PIN is recommended when connecting to a
large number of devices.

Option Description
Communication is shared
among all devices with the
same four-digit PIN. You can
enter any four-digit PIN of your
choice.
• Press 4 or 2 to highlight
digits and press 1 or 3 to
[PIN] change. Press J to enter and display the selected PIN.
• This option is a good choice for photography featuring
a large number of remote devices.
• If there are multiple cameras present that share the
same PIN, the flash units will be under the sole control
of the camera that connects first (the LEDs on the
WR-R10 units connected to the affected cameras will
blink).
• Regardless of the option selected for [Link mode], signals

from paired wireless remote controllers will always be
received by the WR-R10. Users of the WR-1 wireless remote
controller will need to select pairing as the WR-1 link mode.

Assign Remote (WR) Fn Button
Choose the role played by the Fn button on optional wireless
remote controllers equipped with an Fn button. See Custom
Setting f3 [Custom controls] for more information.
Option Option
A [AF-ON] h [c Disable/enable]
F [AF lock only] q [Preview]
[AE lock (Reset on [Preview (Lv max.
D %
release)] aperture)]
C [AE lock only] 4 [+ NEF (RAW)]
B [AE/AF lock] a [Live view] *
r [FV lock] [None]
* Performs the same function as the camera a button.
Airplane Mode
Select [Enable] to disable the camera’s built-in Bluetooth and
Wi-Fi functions.
• The wireless functions of optional peripheral devices
connected to the camera can only be disabled by
disconnecting the devices.

Connect to Smart Device
Adjust settings for connection to a smart device.
Pairing (Bluetooth)
Pair with or connect to smart devices using Bluetooth.
Option Description
[Start pairing] Pair the camera with a smart device (0 415).
[Paired List paired smart devices or switch from one device to
devices] another.
[Bluetooth
Select [Enable] to enable Bluetooth.
connection]

Select to Send (Bluetooth)
Select pictures for upload to a smart device or choose whether
to mark pictures for upload as they are taken. Upload begins
immediately when a connection is established.
Option Description
If [On] is selected, photos will be marked for upload to
a smart device as they are taken. Regardless of the
option selected with the camera, photos are uploaded
[Auto select to
in JPEG format at size of 2 megapixels. Photos taken
send]
during filming will not be uploaded automatically.
Photos taken during filming must be selected for
upload manually.
[Manual select
Mark selected pictures for upload to a smart device.
to send]
[Deselect all] Remove transfer marking from all images.

Wi-Fi Connection
Connect to smart devices via Wi-Fi.
❚❚ Establish Wi-Fi Connection
Initiate a Wi-Fi connection.
• The camera SSID and password will be displayed. To connect,
select the camera SSID and enter the password on the smart
device (0 406).
• Once a connection is established, this option will change to
[Close Wi-Fi connection].
• Select [Close Wi-Fi connection] to end the connection when
desired.

❚❚ Wi-Fi Connection Settings
Access the following Wi-Fi settings:
Option Description
[SSID] Set the camera SSID.
[Authentication/
Choose [OPEN] or [WPA2-PSK-AES].
encryption]
[Password] Change the camera password.
Choose a channel.
• Select [Auto] to have the camera choose the
[Channel]
channel automatically.
• Select [Manual] to choose the channel manually.
[Current
View current Wi-Fi settings.
settings]
[Reset
connection Select [Yes] to reset Wi-Fi settings to default values.
settings]
❚❚ Send While Off

If [On] is selected, upload of images to smart devices connected
via Bluetooth will continue even when the camera is off.

Connect to PC
Adjust settings for connection to computers using the camera’s
built-in Wi-Fi.
Wi-Fi Connection
Select [Enable] to connect using the settings currently selected
for [Network settings].
Network Settings
Select [Create profile] to create a new network profile (0 433,
439).
• If more than one profile already exists, you can press J to
select a profile from a list.
• To edit an existing profile, highlight it and press 2. The
following options will be displayed:
Option Description
• [Profile name]: Rename the profile. By default, the
profile name is the same as the network SSID.
• [Password protection]: Select [On] to require that a
[General]
password be entered before the profile can be
changed. To change the password, highlight [On] and
press 2.

Option Description
Infrastructure connections: Adjust settings to match
those used on the network.
• [SSID]: Enter the network SSID.
• [Channel]: The channel is selected automatically.
• [Authentication/encryption]: Choose from [OPEN]
and [WPA2-PSK-AES].
• [Password]: Enter the network password.
Ad-hoc connections: Choose the settings used for
[Wireless] connection to the camera.
• [SSID]: Enter the camera SSID.
• [Channel]: Select [Auto] for automatic channel
selection or [Manual] to choose the channel manually.
• [Authentication/encryption]: Choose from [OPEN]
and [WPA2-PSK-AES].
• [Password]: Choose the password used for connection
to the camera when [WPA2-PSK-AES] is selected for
[Authentication/encryption].
Enter TCP/IP information for infrastructure connections.
An IP address is required.
• If [Enable] is selected for [Obtain automatically], the
[TCP/IP] IP address and sub-net mask will be acquired via a
DHCP server or automatic IP addressing.
• Select [Disable] manually to enter the IP address
([Address]) and sub-net mask ([Mask]).

Options
Adjust upload settings.
❚❚ Auto Send
Select [On] to upload new photos as they are taken.
• Upload begins only after the photo has been recorded to the
memory card; be sure a memory card is inserted in the camera.
• Movies, together with any photos taken during filming, are
not uploaded automatically when recording is complete but
must instead be uploaded from the playback display (0 447).
❚❚ Delete After Send
Select [Yes] to delete photographs from the camera memory
card automatically once upload is complete.
• Files marked for transfer before [Yes] is selected are not
deleted.
• Deletion may be suspended during some camera operations.

❚❚ Send File As
When uploading NEF+JPEG images, choose whether to upload
both the NEF (RAW) and JPEG files or only the JPEG copy.
❚❚ Deselect All?
Select [Yes] to remove transfer marking from all images. Upload
of images with a “sending” icon will immediately be terminated.
MAC Address
Display the MAC address.

Wireless Transmitter (WT-7)
Adjust settings for connection to computers or ftp servers via
wireless or Ethernet networks using an optional WT-7 wireless
transmitter. This item is available only when an optional WT-7
wireless transmitter is connected.
• These settings take effect when the WT-7 is connected and
turned on, in which case the options selected for [Connect to
smart device] and [Connect to PC] are automatically
disabled.
• Information on [Wireless transmitter] can be found below;
for information on [Choose hardware], [Network settings],
and [Options], see the manual provided with the WT-7.
Wireless Transmitter
Select [Use] to enable WT-7 when it is connected to the camera.
Conformity Marking
View some of the standards with which the camera complies.

Battery Info
View information on the battery
currently inserted in the camera.
Option Description
[Charge] The current battery level expressed as a percentage.
[No. of The number of times the battery has been used to release
shots] the shutter since it was last charged.
A five-level display showing battery age.
• A value of “0” (k) indicates that battery performance is
[Battery
unimpaired.
age]
• A value of “4” (l) indicates that the battery has reached
the end of its charging life. Replace the battery.

D Number of Shots
[No. of shots] shows the number of times the shutter has been released.
Note that the camera may sometimes release the shutter without
recording a photograph, for example when measuring preset white
balance.
D Charging Batteries at Low Temperatures

Batteries in general exhibit a drop in capacity at low ambient
temperatures. Even fresh batteries charged at temperatures under about
5 °C (41 °F) may show a temporary increase from “0” to “1” in the value
shown for [Battery age], but the display will return to normal once the
battery has been recharged at a temperature of about 20 °C (68 °F) or
higher.
Slot Empty Release Lock

Choose whether the shutter can be released when no memory
card is inserted in the camera.
Option Description
[Release The shutter cannot be released when no memory
a
locked] card is inserted.
The shutter can be released with no memory card
[Enable
b inserted. No pictures will be recorded; during
release]
playback, the camera displays “Demo”.

Save/Load Menu Settings
Save current camera menu settings to a memory card. You can
also load saved settings, allowing menu settings to be shared
among cameras of the same model.
• If two memory cards are inserted, the settings will be saved to
the card in Slot 1.
• The following settings are saved:
Settings that can be saved and loaded

[Playback display options]
[Image review]
PLAYBACK MENU
[After delete]
[Rotate tall]

[File naming]
[Role played by card in Slot 2]
[Image area]
[Image quality]
[Image size]
[NEF (RAW) recording]
[White balance]
[Set Picture Control] (Custom Picture Controls are
saved as [Auto])
PHOTO [Color space]
SHOOTING MENU
[Active D-Lighting]
[Long exposure NR]
[High ISO NR]
[Vignette control]
[Diffraction compensation]
[Auto distortion control]
[Flicker reduction]
[Flash control]
[Auto bracketing]
[Silent live view photography]

[File naming]
[Destination]
[Image area]
[Frame size/frame rate]
[Movie quality]
[Movie file type]
[White balance]
[Set Picture Control] (Custom Picture Controls are
saved as [Auto])
MOVIE SHOOTING [Active D-Lighting]
MENU
[High ISO NR]
[Diffraction compensation]
[Flicker reduction]
[Electronic VR]
[Microphone sensitivity]
[Attenuator]
[Frequency response]
[Wind noise reduction]
[Headphone volume]
[Timecode] (excepting [Timecode origin])
CUSTOM SETTING
All Custom Settings
MENU

[Save user settings]
[Language]
[Time zone and date] (excepting [Date and time])
[Information display]
[Non-CPU lens data]
[Clean image sensor]
[Image comment]
SETUP MENU [Copyright information]
[Beep options]
[Touch controls]
[HDMI]
[Location data] (excepting [Position])
[Wireless remote (WR) options]
[Assign remote (WR) Fn button]
[Slot empty release lock]

Save Menu Settings
Save settings to the memory card. If the card is full, an error will
be displayed and settings will not be saved. Saved settings can
only be used with other cameras of the same model.
Load Menu Settings

Load saved settings from the memory card. Note that [Load
Menu Settings] is available only when a memory card
containing saved settings is inserted.
D Saved Settings
Settings are saved to files named “NCSET***”. “***” is an identifier that
varies from camera to camera. The camera will not be able to load settings
if the file name is changed.

Reset All Settings
Reset all settings except [Language] and [Time zone and date]
to their default values. Copyright information and other user-
generated entries are also reset. Once reset, settings cannot be
restored.
We recommend that you save settings using the [Save/load
menu settings] item in the setup menu before performing a
reset.
Firmware Version
View the current camera firmware version.

N The Retouch Menu: Creating
Retouched Copies
To view the retouch menu, select the N
tab in the camera menus.
The items in the retouch menu are used to trim or retouch

existing pictures.
• The retouch menu is only displayed when a memory card
containing photographs is inserted in the camera.
• Retouched copies are saved to new files, separate from the
original pictures.
• The retouch menu contains the following items:
Item 0 Item 0
[NEF (RAW) Z [Straighten] 729
7 713
processing] a [Distortion control] 730
k [Trim] 719 e [Perspective control] 732
8 [Resize] 720 l [Monochrome] 733
i [D-Lighting] 726 o [Image overlay] * 734
% [Quick retouch] 727 9 [Trim movie] 743
j [Red-eye correction] 728
* Not displayed when [Retouch] is selected in the playback i menu.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 709

Creating Retouched Copies
1 Select an item in the retouch
menu.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an item, 2
to select.
2 Select a picture.
• Highlight a picture using the multi
selector.
• To view the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold the X (T)
button.
• Press J to select the highlighted picture.
3 Select retouch options.

• For more information, see the section for the selected item.
• To exit without creating a retouched copy, press G. The
retouch menu will be displayed.
710 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu

4 Create a retouched copy.
• Press J to create a retouched copy.
• Retouched copies are indicated by a
p icon.
D Retouching the Current Image

To create a retouched copy of the current image, press i and select
[Retouch].
D Retouch
• The camera may not be able to display or retouch images that were
taken or retouched using other cameras or that have been retouched
on a computer.
• If no actions are performed for a brief period, the display will turn off
and any unsaved changes will be lost. To increase the time the display
remains on, choose a longer menu display time using Custom Setting c4
[Monitor off delay] > [Menus].
D Retouching Copies
• Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch
options, although multiple edits may result in reduced image quality or
faded colors.
• With the exception of [Trim movie], each option can be applied only
once.
• Some options may be unavailable depending on the options used to
create the copy.
• Options that cannot be applied to the current image are grayed out and
unavailable.

D Image Quality
• Copies created from NEF (RAW) images are saved at an [Image quality]
of [JPEG finem].
• Copies created from JPEG images are the same quality as the original.
• In the case of images recorded to the same memory card at image
quality settings of NEF + JPEG, only the NEF (RAW) image will be
retouched.
D Image Size
Except in the case of copies created with [NEF (RAW) processing], [Trim],
and [Resize], copies are the same size as the original.

NEF (RAW) Processing: Creating JPEG
Copies of NEF (RAW) Images Without a
Computer
G button U N retouch menu
“NEF (RAW) processing” is used to save NEF (RAW) photos in
other formats, such as JPEG. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photos
can be created on the camera as described below.
1 Select [NEF (RAW) processing]

in the retouch menu.
Highlight [NEF (RAW) processing]
and press 2.

2 Choose a destination.
• If two memory cards are inserted,
you can choose a destination for
the retouched copies by
highlighting [Choose destination]
and pressing 2.
• [Choose destination] is not
available when only one memory card is inserted. Proceed
to Step 3.
• Press 1 or 3 to highlight a card slot
and press J.

3 Choose how images are
selected.
Option Description
Create JPEG copies of
[Select selected NEF (RAW) images.
image(s)] Multiple NEF (RAW) images
can be selected.
Create JPEG copies of all
[Select
the NEF (RAW) images
date]
taken on selected dates.
Create JPEG copies of all
[Select
the NEF (RAW) images in a
folder]
selected folder.
If you chose [Select image(s)], proceed to Step 5.
4 Select the source slot.

• Highlight the slot with the card
containing the NEF (RAW) images
and press 2.
• You will not be prompted to select
the slot if only one memory card is
inserted.

5 Select photographs.
If you chose [Select image(s)]:
• Highlight images using the multi
selector.
button.
• To select the highlighted image, press the W (Y) button.
Selected images are indicated by a L icon. To deselect the
current picture, press the W (Y) button again; the L will
no longer be displayed. All images will be processed using
the same settings.
If you chose [Select date]:

• Highlight dates using the multi
selector and press 2 to select (M)
or deselect (U).
• All images taken on dates marked
with a check (M) will be processed
using the same settings.
If you chose [Select folder]:

Highlight a folder and press J to select; all images in the
selected folder will be processed using the same settings.

6 Choose settings for the JPEG copies.
• The settings in effect when the photograph was taken
appear below a preview.
• To use the setting in effect when the photograph was
taken, if applicable, select [Original].
6
1 7
2 8
3 9
4 10
5
1 Image quality (0 134) 6 High ISO NR (0 557)

2 Image size (0 137) 7 Color space (0 554)
3 White balance (0 195) 8 Vignette control (0 558)
4 Exposure compensation 9 Active D-Lighting (0 254)
(0 175) 10 Diffraction compensation
5 Set Picture Control (0 243) (0 559)

7 Copy the photographs.
• Highlight [EXE] and press J to
create a JPEG copy of the selected
photograph.
• If multiple photos are selected, a
confirmation dialog will be
displayed after you highlight [EXE] and press J; highlight
[Yes] and press J to create JPEG copies of the selected
photos.
• To exit without copying the photographs, press the G
button.
D NEF (RAW) Processing

• NEF (RAW) processing is available only with NEF (RAW) images created
with this camera. Images in other formats and NEF (RAW) images taken
with other cameras or Camera Control Pro 2 cannot be selected.
• [Exposure compensation] can only be set to values between −2 and
+2 EV.

Trim
Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The
photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown in
yellow; create a cropped copy as described below.
To Description
Size the crop Press X (T) or W (Y) to choose the crop size.
To change the
Rotate the main command dial.
crop aspect ratio
To position the
Use the multi selector.
crop
To create a
Press J to save the current crop as a separate file.
cropped copy
D Cropped Images
• Depending on the size of the cropped copy, playback zoom may not be
available when cropped copies are displayed.
• The crop size appears at upper left in the crop
display. The size of the copy varies with crop
size and aspect ratio.

Resize
Create small copies of selected photographs. If two memory
cards are inserted, you can choose the card used to store the
resized copies.
Resizing Multiple Images

If you accessed the retouch menu via the G button, you can
resize multiple selected images.
1 Select [Resize] in the retouch

menu.
Highlight [Resize] and press 2.

2 Choose a destination.
• If two memory cards are inserted,
you can choose a destination for
the retouched copies by
highlighting [Choose destination]
and pressing 2.
• [Choose destination] is not
available when only one memory card is inserted. Proceed
to Step 3.
• Press 1 or 3 to highlight a card slot
and press J.

3 Choose a size.
• Highlight [Choose size] and press
2.
• Highlight the desired size (length

in pixels) using 1 and 3 and press
J.

4 Choose how images are
selected.
Option Description
Resize selected images.
[Select
Multiple images can be
image(s)]
selected.
[Select Resize all the images taken
date] on selected dates.
[Select Resize all the images in a
folder] selected folder.
If you chose [Select image(s)], proceed to Step 6.

• Highlight the slot with the card
containing the images and press 2.
• You will not be prompted to select
the slot if only one memory card is
inserted.

6 Choose pictures.
If you chose [Select image(s)]:
• Highlight pictures using the multi
selector.
button.
• To select the highlighted image,
press the W (Y) button. Selected pictures are marked by a
8 icon. To deselect the highlighted picture, press the W
(Y) button again; the 8 icon will no longer be displayed.
The selected pictures will all be copied at the size selected
in Step 3.
• Press J to proceed once selection is complete.

If you chose [Select date]:
• Highlight dates using the multi
selector and press 2 to select (M)
or deselect (U).
• All images taken on dates marked
with a check (M) will be copied at
the size selected in Step 3.
• Press J to proceed after selecting the desired dates.
• Highlight a folder and press J to select; all images in the
selected folder will be copied at the size selected in Step 3.
7 Save the resized copies.

J to save the resized copies.
D Resize
Depending on the size of the resized copy, playback zoom may not be
available when resized copies are displayed.

D-Lighting
D-Lighting brightens shadows. It is ideal for dark or backlit
photographs.
Before After
The edit display shows before and after images.

• Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of
correction performed. The effect can
be previewed in the edit display.
• Press J to save the retouched copy.

Quick Retouch
Create a copy with enhanced colors and
contrast.
The camera uses D-Lighting to brighten
shadows and enhance contrast and color
saturation (vividness).
• Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of
correction performed. The effect can be previewed in the edit
display.

Red-Eye Correction
Correct “red-eye” caused by light from the flash reflecting from
the retinas of portrait subjects.
• Red-eye correction is available only with photographs taken
using a flash.
• Red-eye that cannot be detected by the camera will not be
corrected.
D Red-Eye Correction
• Note the following:
- Red-eye correction may not always produce the expected results.
- In very rare circumstances, red-eye correction may be applied to
portions of the image that are not affected by red-eye.
• Check the preview thoroughly before proceeding.

Straighten
Rotate pictures by up to ±5° in
increments of approximately 0.25°.
• The effect can be previewed in the edit
display.
• The greater the rotation, the more will
be trimmed from the edges.
• Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of straightening
performed.

Distortion Control
Create copies with reduced peripheral
distortion; this can reduce barrel
distortion in pictures taken with wide-
angle lenses or pin-cushion distortion in
pictures taken with telephoto lenses.
Select [Auto] to let the camera correct
distortion automatically and then make fine adjustments using
the multi selector. Select [Manual] to reduce distortion
manually.
• The effect can be previewed in the edit display.
• [Auto] is for use only with pictures taken with type G, E, and D
lenses. Note, however, that some lenses of these types,
including PC and fisheyes lenses, cannot be used. Results are
not guaranteed with other lenses.

• Note that [Manual] must be used with copies created using
the [Auto] option and with photos taken using the [Auto
distortion control] option in the photo shooting menu.
Manual distortion control cannot be further applied to copies
created using [Manual].
• Press 4 to reduce pincushion distortion, 2 to reduce barrel
distortion.
D Distortion Control
• Note that greater amounts of distortion control result in more of the
edges being cropped out.
• Distortion control may heavily crop or distort the edges of copies
created from photographs taken with DX lenses at image areas other
than [DX (24×16)].

Perspective Control
Create copies that reduce the effects of
perspective in photos taken looking up
from the base of a tall object.
display.
• Note that greater amounts of
perspective control result in more of the edges being cropped
out.
• Use the multi selector (1, 3, 4, or 2) to adjust perspective.
Before After

Monochrome
Copy photographs in monochrome. [Monochrome] gives you a
choice of the following monochrome tints:
Option Description
[Black-and-
Copy photographs in black-and-white.
white]
[Sepia] Copy photographs in sepia.
[Cyanotype] Copy photographs in blue-and-white monochrome.
display.
• In the case of [Sepia] or [Cyanotype],
color saturation can be adjusted using
the multi selector. Press 1 to increase,
3 to decrease. The changes are
reflected in the preview.

Image Overlay
Image overlay combines existing photographs to create a single
picture that is saved separately from the originals. One NEF
(RAW) image can be overlaid on another using additive
blending ([Add]), or multiple images can be combined using
[Lighten] or [Darken] blending.
Add
Overlay two NEF (RAW) images to create a single new JPEG
copy.
1 Select [Image overlay] in the

retouch menu.
Highlight [Image overlay] and press
2.
2 Select [Add].
Highlight [Add] and press 2 to display image overlay
options with [Image 1] highlighted.

3 Highlight the first image.
• Press J to display a picture
selection dialog listing only NEF
(RAW) images, where you can use
the multi selector to highlight the
first photograph in the overlay.
the X (T) button.
4 Select the first image.

Press J to select the highlighted
photograph and return to the
preview display; the selected image
will appear as [Image 1].
5 Select the second image.

Press 2 and select [Image 2], then
select the second photo as described
in Steps 3 and 4.

6 Adjust gain.
• The overlay of [Image 1] and
[Image 2] can be previewed in the
“Preview” column. Highlight
[Image 1] or [Image 2] and
optimize exposure for the overlay
by pressing 1 or 3 to adjust gain.
• Choose from values between 0.1 and 2.0 in increments of
0.1.
• The effects are relative to the default value of 1.0 (no gain).
For example, selecting 0.5 halves gain.
7 Select the “Preview” column.

• Press 4 or 2 to place the cursor in
the “Preview” column.
• To proceed without previewing the
overlay, highlight [Save] and press
J.
8 Preview the overlay.

• To preview the overlay, highlight
[Overlay] and press J.
• To select new photos or adjust gain,
press W (Y). You will be returned
to Step 6.

9 Save the overlay.
Press J while the preview is
displayed to save the overlay and
display the resulting image.
D [Add]
• Colors and brightness in the preview may differ from the final image.
• Image overlay is available only with NEF (RAW) images created with this
camera. Images created with other cameras or in other formats cannot
be selected.
• The overlay is saved at an [Image quality] of [JPEG finem].
• NEF (RAW) images can be combined only if they were created with the
same options selected for:
- [Image area] > [Choose image area]
- [NEF (RAW) recording] > [NEF (RAW) bit depth]
• The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording,
metering, shutter speed, aperture, shooting mode, exposure
compensation, focal length, and image orientation) and values for white
balance and Picture Control as the photograph selected for [Image 1].
Copyright information, however, is not copied to the new image. The
comment is similarly not copied; instead, the comment currently active
on the camera, if any, is appended.

Lighten and Darken
The camera compares multiple selected pictures and selects
only the brightest or darkest pixels at each point in the image to
create a single new JPEG copy.
1 Select [Lighten] or [Darken].

After selecting [Image overlay] in the retouch menu,
highlight either [Lighten] or [Darken] and press 2.
• Lighten: The camera compares the pixels in each picture
and uses only the brightest.
• Darken: The camera compares the pixels in each picture

and uses only the darkest.

2 Choose how images are selected.
Option Description
[Select individual
Select pictures for the overlay one-by-one.
images]
[Select
Select two pictures; the overlay will include the
consecutive
two pictures and all images between them.
images]
The overlay will include all pictures in the
[Select folder]
selected folder.

• Highlight the slot with the card containing the pictures and
press 2.
• You will not be prompted to select the slot if only one
memory card is inserted.

4 Select pictures.
If you chose [Select individual images]:
• Highlight pictures using the multi selector.
the X (T) button.
• To select the highlighted image, press the W (Y) button.
Selected pictures are marked by a $ icon. To deselect the
highlighted picture, press the W (Y) button again; the $
icon will no longer be displayed. The selected pictures will
be combined using the option selected in Step 1.

If you chose [Select consecutive images]:
• All pictures in a range chosen using the multi selector will
be combined using the option selected in Step 1.
- Use the W (Y) button to select the first and last pictures
in the desired range.
- The first and last pictures are indicated by % icons and
the pictures between them by $ icons.
- You can alter your selection by using the multi selector to
highlight different pictures to serve as the first or last
frame. Press the Q/g（U) button to choose the current
picture as the new start or end point.
the X (T) button.
Highlight the desired folder and press J to overlay all
pictures in the folder using the option selected in Step 1.

5 Save the overlay.
• A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight [Yes] and
press J to save the overlay and display the resulting
picture.
• To interrupt the process before the overlay is complete,
press G.
D [Lighten]/[Darken]
• The overlay will include only pictures created with this camera. Pictures
created with other cameras cannot be selected.
• The overlay will include only pictures created with the same options
selected for:
- [Image area] > [Choose image area]
- [Image size]
• Overlays that include pictures taken at different image quality settings
will be saved at the same setting as the image with the highest image
quality.
• Overlays that include NEF (RAW) pictures will be saved at an image
quality of [JPEG finem].
• Overlays that include both NEF (RAW) and JPEG pictures will be the
same size as the JPEG pictures.

Trim Movie
Create a copy from which unwanted footage has been removed
(0 271).

OMY MENU/mRECENT SETTINGS
To view [MY MENU], select the O tab in
the camera menus.
744 Menu Guide > O MY MENU/m RECENT SETTINGS

O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu
My Menu can be used to create and edit a customized list of up
to 20 items from the playback, photo shooting, movie shooting,
Custom Settings, setup, and retouch menus. Items can be
added, deleted, and reordered as described below.
❚❚ Adding Items to My Menu
1 Select [Add items] in [O MY
MENU].
Highlight [Add items] and press 2.
2 Select a menu.
Highlight the name of the menu
containing the item you wish to add
and press 2.
3 Select an item.
Highlight the desired menu item and
press J.
Menu Guide > O MY MENU/m RECENT SETTINGS 745

4 Position the new item.
Press 1 or 3 to position the new
item and press J to add it to My
Menu.
5 Add more items.

• The items currently displayed in My
Menu are indicated by a check mark
(L).
• Items indicated by a V icon cannot
be selected.
• Repeat Steps 1–4 to select additional items.

❚❚ Removing Items from My Menu
1 Select [Remove items] in [O MY MENU].
Highlight [Remove items] and press 2.
2 Select items.
• Highlight items and press 2 to
select (M) or deselect.
• Continue until all the items you
wish to remove are selected (L).
3 Remove the selected items.

Press J; a confirmation dialog will be
displayed. Press J again to remove
the selected items.
D Removing Items While in My Menu

Items can also be removed by highlighting them in [O MY MENU] and
pressing the O (Q) button; a confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press
O (Q) again to remove the selected item.

❚❚ Reordering Items in My Menu
1 Select [Rank items] in [O MY MENU].
Highlight [Rank items] and press 2.
2 Select an item.
Highlight the item you wish to move
and press J.
3 Position the item.

• Press 1 or 3 to move the item up
or down in My Menu and press J.
• Repeat Steps 2–3 to reposition
additional items.
4 Exit to [O MY MENU].
Press the G button to return to
[O MY MENU].

❚❚ Displaying Recent Settings
1 Select [Choose tab] in [O MY
MENU].
Highlight [Choose tab] and press 2.
2 Select [m RECENT SETTINGS].

• Highlight [m RECENT SETTINGS] in
the [Choose tab] menu and press
J.
• The name of the menu will change
from [MY MENU] to [RECENT
SETTINGS].

m Recent Settings: Accessing Recently-Used
Settings
❚❚ How Items Are Added to Recent Settings
Menu items are added to the top of the
recent settings menu as they are used.
The twenty most recently settings are
listed.
D Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu

To remove an item from the [RECENT SETTINGS] menu, highlight it and
press the O (Q) button; a confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press O
(Q) again to remove the selected item.
D Displaying My Menu
Selecting [Choose tab] in the recent settings menu displays the items
shown in Step 2 of “Displaying Recent Settings” (0 749). Highlight [O MY
MENU] and press J to view My Menu.

Troubleshooting
Before Contacting Customer Support
You may be able to resolve any issues with the camera by
following the steps below. Check this list before consulting your
retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative.
Check the common problems listed in the following
sections:
STEP 1 • “Problems and Solutions” (0 753)
• “Alerts and Error Messages” (0 765)
Turn the camera off and remove the battery, then wait
about a minute, re-insert the battery and turn the camera
on.
STEP 2 D The camera may continue to write data to the memory
card after shooting. Wait at least a minute before
removing the battery.
Search Nikon websites.

• For support information and answers to frequently asked
questions, visit the website for your country or region
STEP 3 (0 xlvi).
• To download the latest firmware for your camera, visit:
STEP 4 Consult a Nikon-authorized service representative.
Troubleshooting 751
D Restoring Default Settings
• Depending on current settings, some menu items and other features
may be unavailable. To access menu items that are grayed out or
features that are otherwise unavailable, try restoring default settings
using the [Reset all settings] item in the setup menu.
• Note, however, that wireless network profiles, copyright information,
and other user-generated entries will also be reset. Once reset, settings
cannot be restored.
752 Troubleshooting
Problems and Solutions
Solutions to some common issues are listed below.
Battery/Display
● The camera is on but does not respond:
• Wait for recording and other operations to end.
• If the problem persists, turn the camera off.
• If the camera does not turn off, remove and reinsert the battery.
• If you are using an AC adapter, disconnect and reconnect the AC
adapter.
- Any data currently being recorded will be lost.
- Data that have already been recorded are not affected by
removing or disconnecting the power source.
● The viewfinder is out of focus:
• Rotate the diopter adjustment control to adjust viewfinder focus.
• If adjusting viewfinder focus does not correct the problem, set the
autofocus mode to AF-S and the AF-area mode to [Single-point
AF]. Next, select the center focus point, choose a high-contrast
subject, and focus using autofocus. With the camera in focus, use
the diopter adjustment control to bring the subject into clear focus
in the viewfinder.
• If necessary, viewfinder focus can be further adjusted using optional
corrective lenses.
● The viewfinder is dark:
Is the battery charged? The viewfinder may dim if the battery is
exhausted or not inserted.
Troubleshooting 753
● The display in the viewfinder, control panel, or monitor turns off
without warning:
Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 [Standby timer] or c4
[Monitor off delay].
● The display in control panel or viewfinder is dim and
unresponsive:
The response times and brightness of these displays vary with
temperature.
● Patterns appear in the viewfinder:
The viewfinder display may turn red when a focus point is
highlighted, but this is normal for this type of viewfinder and does not
indicate a malfunction.
Shooting
● The camera takes time to turn on:
More time will be needed to find files if the memory card contains
large numbers of files or folders.
754 Troubleshooting
● The shutter cannot be released:
• Is a memory card inserted, and if so, does it have space available?
• Is the memory card write-protected?
• Is the in-focus indicator (I) displayed?
• When a CPU lens of a type other than G or E is attached, the shutter
cannot be released unless the aperture ring is locked at minimum
aperture (the highest f-number). If B is displayed in the control
panel, select [Aperture ring] for Custom Setting f5 [Customize
command dials] > [Aperture setting] and adjust aperture using
the lens aperture ring.
• If you selected mode S after selecting a shutter speed of A
(Bulb) or % (Time) in mode M, choose a different shutter speed.
• Is [Release locked] selected for [Slot empty release lock] in the
setup menu?
● The camera is slow to respond to the shutter-release button:
Select [Off] for Custom Setting d4 [Exposure delay mode].
● Burst shooting is unavailable:
Burst shooting cannot be used in conjunction with HDR.
Troubleshooting 755
● Photos are out of focus:
• Is the camera in manual focus mode? To enable autofocus, rotate
the focus-mode selector to AF.
• Autofocus does not perform well under the following conditions. In
these cases, use manual focus or focus lock. Autofocus does not
perform well if: there is little or no contrast between the subject and
the background, the focus point contains objects at different
distances from the camera, the subject is dominated by regular
geometric patterns, the focus point contains areas of sharply
contrasting brightness, background objects appear larger than the
subject, or the subject contains many fine details.
● The beep does not sound:
• A beep does not sound when AF-C is selected for autofocus mode
or AF-A is selected and the camera is shooting using AF-C.
• Select an option other than [Off] for [Beep options] > [Beep on/off]
in the setup menu.
● The full range of shutter speeds is not available:
Using a flash restricts the range of shutter speeds available. Flash sync
speed can be set to values of 1/200–1/60 s using Custom Setting e1
[Flash sync speed]. When using flash units that support auto FP high-
speed sync, choose [1/200 s (Auto FP)] for a full range of shutter
speeds.
● Focus does not lock when the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway:
If AF-C is selected for autofocus mode or AF-A is selected and the
camera is shooting using AF-C, focus can be locked using the A
button.
756 Troubleshooting
● Focus-point selection is not available:
• Is the focus selector lock in the L (lock) position?
• Focus-point selection is not available when [Auto-area AF] is
selected for AF-area mode.
• Focus point selection is not available in playback mode or when
menus are in use.
• Has the standby timer expired? To enable focus-point selection,
press the shutter-release button halfway.
● Image size cannot be changed:
[Image quality] set to [NEF (RAW)].
● The camera is slow to record photos:
Is [On] selected for [Long exposure NR] in the photo shooting menu?
Troubleshooting 757
● “Noise” (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or
lines) appears in photos:
• To reduce noise, adjust settings such as ISO sensitivity, shutter
speed, or Active D-Lighting.
• At high ISO sensitivities, noise may become more noticeable in long
exposures or in pictures recorded when the camera temperature is
elevated.
758 Troubleshooting
● Photographs and movies do not appear to have the same
exposure as the preview shown in the monitor during live view:
Changes to monitor brightness during live view have no effect on
images recorded with the camera.
● Flicker or banding appears in the display during movie recording:
Select [Flicker reduction] in the movie shooting menu and choose an
option that matches the frequency of the local AC power supply.
● Bright regions or bands appear in live view:
Bright regions or bands may occur if a flashing sign, flash, or other
light source with brief duration is used during live view.
● Smudges appear in photographs:
• Are there smudges on the front or rear (mount-side) lens elements?
• Is there foreign matter on the low-pass filter? Perform image sensor
cleaning.
● Live view ends unexpectedly or does not start:
• Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera’s
internal circuits, for example if:
- The ambient temperature is high
- The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to
record movies
- The camera has been used in continuous release modes for
extended periods
• If the camera is running hot and live view does not start, wait for the
internal circuits to cool and then try again. Note that the camera
may feel warm to the touch, but this does not indicate a
malfunction.
Troubleshooting 759
● “Noise” (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or
lines) appears during live view:
• Randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or bright spots may arise as a
result of increases in the temperature of the camera’s internal
circuits during live view. Exit live view when the camera is not in use.
• Randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, lines or unexpected colors may
appear if you press the X (T) button to zoom in on the view
through the lens during live view.
• In movies, the amount and distribution of randomly-spaced bright
pixels, fog, and bright spots are affected by the option selected for
[Frame size/frame rate] in the movie shooting menu.
• Note that the distribution of noise in the monitor may differ from
that in the final picture.
● The camera cannot measure a value for preset manual white
balance:
The subject is too dark or too bright.
● Certain pictures cannot be selected as sources for preset white
balance:
Pictures created with cameras of other types cannot serve as sources
for preset manual white balance.
760 Troubleshooting
● White balance (WB) bracketing is unavailable:
• White balance bracketing is not available when an NEF (RAW) or
NEF + JPEG option is selected for image quality.
• White balance bracketing cannot be used in multiple exposure and
HDR modes.
● The effects of [Set Picture Control] differ from image to image:
[Auto] is selected for [Set Picture Control] or as the basis for a
custom Picture Control created using [Manage Picture Control], or
[A] (auto) is selected for [Quick sharp], [Contrast], or [Saturation].
For consistent results over a series of photographs, choose a setting
other than [A] (auto).
● The option selected for metering cannot be changed:
The option selected for metering cannot be changed during exposure
lock.
● Exposure compensation is not available:
Changes to exposure compensation in mode M apply only to the
exposure indicator and have no effect on shutter speed or aperture.
● Uneven shading may appear in long exposures:
Uneven shading may appear in long exposures shot at shutter speeds
of A (Bulb) or % (Time). The effect can be mitigated by selecting
[On] for [Long exposure NR] in the photo shooting menu.
● Sound is not recorded with movies:
Is [Microphone off] selected for [Microphone sensitivity] in the
movie shooting menu?
Troubleshooting 761
Playback
● NEF (RAW) pictures are not visible during playback:
The camera displays only the JPEG copies of pictures taken with
[NEF(RAW) + JPEG finem], [NEF(RAW) + JPEG fine], [NEF(RAW) +
JPEG normalm], [NEF(RAW) + JPEG normal], [NEF(RAW) + JPEG
basicm], or [NEF(RAW) + JPEG basic] selected for [Image quality].
● Pictures taken with other cameras are not displayed:
Pictures recorded with other types of camera may not display
correctly.
● Not all photos are visible during playback:
Select [All] for [Playback folder] in the playback menu.
● “Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide”
(landscape) orientation:
• Is [Off] selected for [Rotate tall] in the playback menu?
• Auto image rotation is not available during image review.
• Camera orientation may not be correctly recorded in photos taken
with the camera pointing up or down.
● Pictures cannot be deleted:
Are the pictures protected?
● Pictures cannot be retouched:
• The pictures cannot be further edited with this camera.
• There is insufficient space on the memory card to record the
retouched copy.
762 Troubleshooting
● The camera displays the message, [Folder contains no images]:
Select [All] for [Playback folder] in the playback menu.
● Pictures are not displayed on HDMI devices:
Confirm that an HDMI cable is correctly connected.
● The Image Dust Off option in Capture NX-D does not have desired
effect:
Image sensor cleaning changes the position of dust on the low-pass
filter and will not have the desired effect if:
• Dust off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is
performed are used with photographs taken before image sensor
cleaning is performed
• Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is
performed are used with photographs taken after image sensor
cleaning is performed
● The effects of [Set Picture Control], [Active D-Lighting], or
[Vignette control] are not visible:
In the case of NEF (RAW) images, the effect can only be viewed using
Nikon software. View NEF (RAW) images using Capture NX-D or
ViewNX-i.
● Pictures cannot be copied to a computer:
Depending on the operating system, you may be unable to upload
pictures when the camera is connected to a computer. Copy pictures
from the memory card to a computer using a card reader or other
device.
Troubleshooting 763
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks)
● Smart devices do not display the camera SSID (network name):
• Navigate to the setup menu and confirm both that [Disable] is
selected for [Airplane mode] and that [Enable] is selected for
[Connect to smart device] > [Pairing (Bluetooth)] > [Bluetooth
connection].
• Try disabling and re-enabling wireless network features on the
smart device.
● The camera cannot connect to printers and other wireless
devices:
The camera cannot establish wireless connections to devices other
than smartphones, tablets, and computers.
Miscellaneous
● The date of recording is not correct:
Is the camera clock set correctly? The clock is less accurate than most
watches and household clocks; check it regularly against more
accurate timepieces and reset as necessary.
● Menu items cannot be selected:
• Some items are not available at certain combinations of settings.
• The [Battery info] item in the setup menu is not available when
camera is powered by an optional power connector and AC adapter.
764 Troubleshooting
Alerts and Error Messages
This section lists the alerts and error messages that appear in
the viewfinder, control panel, and monitor.
Alerts
The following alerts appear in the control panel and viewfinder:
Alert
Control Problem/solution
Viewfinder
panel
Lens aperture ring is not set to minimum
B B aperture.
(flashes) (flashes) Set lens aperture ring to minimum aperture
(highest f-number).
Low battery.
H d
Ready spare battery.
Battery exhausted.
• Replace with spare battery.
• Charge battery.
Battery info not available.
• Battery cannot be used. Contact Nikon-
H d authorized service representative.
(flashes) (flashes) • Battery level is extremely low; charge battery.
Battery cannot supply data to camera.
Replace third-party batteries with genuine Nikon
batteries.
High battery temperature.
Remove battery and wait for it to cool.
Troubleshooting 765
Alert
Viewfinder
panel
Aperture shown in stops from maximum
aperture. No lens attached, or non-CPU lens
attached without specifying maximum
F F
aperture.
Aperture value will be displayed if maximum
aperture is specified.
FH Camera unable to focus using autofocus.
—
(flashes) Change composition or focus manually.
A (Bulb) selected in mode S.
A A
• Change shutter speed.
(flashes) (flashes)
• Select mode M.
% (Time) selected in mode S.
% %
• Change shutter speed.
(flashes) (flashes)
• Select mode M.
1 k Processing in progress.
(flashes) (flashes) Wait for processing to complete.
Flash has fired at full power.
c Photo may be underexposed. Check distance to
—
(flashes) subject and settings such as aperture, flash
range, and ISO sensitivity.
766 Troubleshooting
Alert
Viewfinder
panel
Subject too bright; limits of camera exposure
metering system exceeded.
• Lower ISO sensitivity.
• Mode P: Use third-party ND (neutral density)
filter (filter can also be used if alert is still
displayed after following settings are adjusted
in mode S or A).
• Mode S: Choose faster shutter speed.
(Exposure indicators • Mode A: Choose smaller aperture (higher f-
and shutter speed or number).
aperture display flash) Subject too dark; limits of camera exposure
metering system exceeded.
• Increase ISO sensitivity.
• Mode P: Use optional flash unit (flash can also
be used if alert is still displayed after following
settings are adjusted in mode S or A).
• Mode S: Choose slower shutter speed.
• Mode A: Choose wider aperture (lower f-
number).
Troubleshooting 767
Alert
Viewfinder
panel
Flash unit that does not support red-eye
reduction attached and flash mode set to red-
Y eye reduction or red-eye reduction with slow
—
(flashes) sync.
• Use flash unit that supports red-eye reduction.
• Change flash mode.
Memory insufficient to record further photos.
• Delete pictures from memory card until there
is room for additional pictures to be recorded.
Copy pictures you wish to keep to computer or
other device before proceeding.
n j • Insert new memory card.
(flashes) (flashes) Camera has run out of file numbers.
• Delete pictures from memory card until there
is room for additional pictures to be recorded.
Copy pictures you wish to keep to computer or
other device before proceeding.
• Insert new memory card.
Camera malfunction.
O O Press shutter-release button again. If error
(flashes) (flashes) persists or appears frequently, consult Nikon-
authorized service representative.
768 Troubleshooting
Error Messages
The following alerts may appear in the monitor and control
panel:
Alert
Monitor
panel
Memory card not inserted or inserted
No memory
S incorrectly.
card.
Check that card is inserted correctly.
Error accessing memory card.
• Check that camera supports memory card.
• If error persists after card has been
repeatedly ejected and reinserted, card
Cannot access may be damaged. Contact retailer or
this memory W, Nikon-authorized service representative.
card. R Unable to create new folder.
Insert another (flashes) • Delete pictures from memory card until
card. there is room for additional pictures to be
recorded. Copy pictures you wish to keep
to computer or other device before
proceeding.
• Insert new memory card.
Troubleshooting 769
Alert
Monitor
panel
Memory card is
W, Memory card is locked (write protected).
locked. Slide
X Slide card write-protect switch to “write”
lock to "write"
(flashes) position.
position.
This card is not Memory card is not correctly formatted.
formatted. T • Format memory card.
Format the (flashes) • Replace with correctly-formatted memory
card. card.
Unable to start
live view. Please
wait.
Camera’s internal temperature is
The camera is — elevated.
too hot. It Suspend shooting until camera has cooled.
cannot be used
until it cools.
Please wait.
770 Troubleshooting
Alert
Monitor
panel
Folder contains no pictures.
Insert memory card that contains pictures.
Folder contains No pictures in folder selected for
—
no images. playback.
Use [Playback folder] item in playback
menu to select folder that contains pictures.
File has been modified using computer
application or does not conform to DCF
file standard.
Cannot display Do not overwrite images using computer
— applications.
this file.
File is corrupt.
Do not overwrite images using computer
applications.
Selected picture cannot be retouched.
Cannot select Retouch options are available only with
—
this file. pictures taken with or previously retouched
on camera.
Troubleshooting 771
Alert
Monitor
panel
Selected movie cannot be edited.
This movie • Movies created with other devices cannot
cannot be — be edited.
edited. • Movies under two seconds long cannot be
edited.
This file cannot
be saved to the Files 4 GB or larger can only be saved to
destination memory cards formatted for FAT32 or
memory card. exFAT.
—
See the Use a memory card with a capacity over 32
camera's user's GB formatted in the camera or keep file size
manual for to under 4 GB.
details.
772 Troubleshooting
Technical Notes
Camera Displays
For illustrative purposes, the displays are shown with all
indicators lit.
The Viewfinder
1 2 3
10
9
8
4
7 5
6
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Technical Notes 773

1 Framing grid 1 (0 615) 18 Exposure/flash bracketing
2 Focus points (0 36, 145) indicator (0 226)
Image area (0 129) WB bracketing indicator
3
(0 232)
4 Pitch indicator 2, 3 (0 628)
ADL bracketing indicator
5 Roll indicator 2, 4 (0 628) (0 238)
6 Flicker detection (0 561) 19 Low battery warning (0 33)
7 “No memory card” indicator 20 ISO sensitivity indicator
(0 28) (0 187)
8 AF area brackets (0 36) 21 “k” (appears when memory
9 Monochrome indicator 5 remains for over 1000
(0 119, 243) exposures; 0 34)
10 Special effects mode indicator 22 Flash-ready indicator 6 (0 460)
(0 119) 23 FV lock indicator (0 471)
11 Focus indicator (0 36) Flash sync indicator (0 619)
24
12 Metering (0 166) Aperture stop indicator
25
13 Autoexposure (AE) lock (0 112, 795)
(0 173) 26 Exposure indicator
14 Flexible program indicator Exposure (0 114)
(0 109) Exposure compensation
15 Shutter speed (0 110, 113) (0 175)
Autofocus mode (0 140) Exposure/flash bracketing
16 Aperture (f-number; 0 111, (0 226)
113) WB bracketing (0 232)
Aperture (number of stops; ADL bracketing (0 238)
0 112, 795) 27 Flash compensation indicator
17 HDR indicator (0 256) (0 469)
774 Technical Notes

28 Exposure compensation 31 Number of exposures
indicator (0 175) remaining (0 34, 861)
29 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator Number of shots remaining
(0 190) before memory buffer fills
30 ISO sensitivity (0 187) (0 181, 861)
Preset white balance Exposure compensation value
recording indicator (0 210) (0 175)
Active D-Lighting amount Flash compensation value
(0 254) (0 469)
PC mode indicator (0 819)
1 Displayed when [On] is selected for Custom Setting d10 [Framing

grid display].
2 Can be displayed by pressing a button to which [Viewfinder virtual
horizon] has been assigned using Custom Setting f3 [Custom
controls].
3 Functions as a roll indicator when camera is rotated to take pictures in
“tall” (portrait) orientation.
4 Functions as a pitch indicator when camera is rotated to take pictures
in “tall” (portrait) orientation.
5 Displayed in j mode or when the [Monochrome] Picture Control or a
Picture Control based on [Monochrome] is selected.
6 Displayed when an optional flash unit is attached. The flash-ready
indicator lights when the flash is charged.
Technical Notes 775

The Information Display
12 3 4 5 6 7
17
16 8
15 9
14 10
13 11
12
1 Shooting mode (0 107) 8 Exposure/flash bracketing

2 Flexible program indicator indicator (0 226)
(0 109) WB bracketing indicator
3 User setting mode (0 115) (0 232)
ADL bracketing indicator
4 Flash sync indicator (0 619)
(0 238)
5 Shutter speed (0 110, 113) HDR indicator (0 256)
6 Aperture stop indicator Multiple exposure indicator
(0 112, 795) (0 287)
7 Aperture (f-number; 0 111, 9 “k” (appears when memory
113) remains for over 1000
Aperture (number of stops; exposures; 0 34)
0 112, 795)
10 Number of exposures
remaining (0 34, 861)
PC mode indicator (0 819)
776 Technical Notes

11 Exposure indicator 14 FV lock indicator (0 471)
Exposure (0 114) 15 Autoexposure (AE) lock
Exposure compensation (0 173)
(0 175) 16 Flash compensation indicator
Exposure/flash bracketing (0 469)
(0 226) 17 Exposure compensation
WB bracketing (0 232) indicator (0 175)
ADL bracketing (0 238) Exposure compensation value
12 ISO sensitivity (0 187) (0 175)
13 ISO sensitivity indicator
(0 187)
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator
(0 190)
Technical Notes 777

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
12
1 Bluetooth connection 6 Exposure delay mode (0 608)
indicator (0 692) 7 Interval timer indicator
Airplane mode (0 691) (0 298)
2 Wi-Fi connection indicator t (“clock not set”) indicator
(0 696) (0 779)
3 Long exposure noise 8 Flash control mode (0 463)
reduction indicator (0 556)
9 “Beep” indicator (0 684)
4 Vignette control indicator
(0 558) 10 Battery indicator (0 33)
5 Electronic front-curtain 11 i menu display area (0 63)
shutter (0 609) 12 Guide
778 Technical Notes

D The t Icon
A flashing t icon indicates that the camera clock has been reset. The date
and time recorded with new photographs will not be correct; use the
[Time zone and date] > [Date and time] option in the setup menu to set
the clock to the correct time and date.
A Using the i Menu

To access the i menu, press the i button or tap
the guide in the information display. Press the
i button again or press the R button to return
to the information display when settings are
complete.
Technical Notes 779

Live View (Still Photography/Movies)
❚❚ Still Photography
2 4 6 12 14
1 3 5 7 8 9 10 11 13 15
46 16
45 17
44 18
43 19
20
42
41 21
40
39
38 22
37 35 33 31 29 27 25 23
36 34 32 30 28 26 24
1 Shooting mode (0 107) 7 Subject tracking AF (0 158)
2 Flexible program indicator 8 Autofocus mode (0 142)
(0 109) 9 AF-area mode (0 150)
3 User setting mode (0 115) 10 Active D-Lighting (0 254)
4 AF-area brackets (0 40) 11 Picture Control (0 243)
5 Flash mode (0 101, 465) 12 Location data indicator
6 Interval timer indicator (0 687)
(0 298) 13 White balance (0 195)
t(“clock not set”) indicator
14 Image quality (0 134)
(0 779)
“No memory card” indicator
(0 28)
780 Technical Notes

15 Image area (0 129) 21 Exposure indicator
16 Image size (0 137) Exposure (0 114)
Exposure compensation
17 Negative film digitizer
exposure adjustment (0 343) (0 175)
Auto bracketing (0 224)
18 i icon (0 63)
22 Bluetooth connection
19 Exposure and flash bracketing indicator (0 692)
indicator (0 226)
Airplane mode (0 691)
WB bracketing indicator
23 Flash-ready indicator * (0 460)
(0 232)
ADL bracketing indicator 24 “k” (appears when memory
(0 238) remains for over 1000
HDR indicator (0 256) exposures; 0 34)
Multiple exposure indicator 25 Number of exposures
(0 287) remaining (0 34, 861)
26 Wi-Fi connection indicator
20 Position of current frame in
exposure/flash bracketing (0 696)
27 ISO sensitivity (0 187)
sequence (0 226)
Position of current frame in 28 ISO sensitivity indicator
white balance bracketing (0 187)
sequence (0 232) Auto ISO sensitivity indicator
Position of current frame in (0 190)
ADL bracketing sequence 29 Exposure compensation
(0 238) indicator (0 175)
Number of exposures 30 Flash compensation indicator
(multiple exposure; 0 287) (0 469)
Technical Notes 781

31 Aperture (f-number; 0 111, 40 Maximum aperture indicator
113) (0 628)
Aperture (number of stops; 41 Flicker detection (0 561)
0 112, 795) 42 Silent photography (0 340)
32 Aperture stop indicator Electronic front-curtain
(0 112, 795) shutter (0 609)
33 Shutter speed (0 110, 113) 43 Exposure delay mode (0 608)
34 Flash sync indicator (0 619) 44 Touch shooting (0 14)
35 Focus indicator (0 164) 45 Highlight display indicator
36 FV lock indicator (0 471) (0 653)
37 Metering (0 166) 46 Temperature warning (0 44)
Autoexposure (AE) lock Live view time remaining
38
(0 173) (0 44)
39 Battery indicator (0 33)
* Displayed when an optional flash unit is attached. The flash-ready

indicator lights when the flash is charged.
D Temperature Warnings
• If the camera temperature becomes elevated, a temperature warning
and count-down timer will be displayed. When the timer reaches zero,
the monitor will turn off.
• The timer turns red when the thirty second mark is reached. In some
cases, the timer may be displayed immediately after the camera is
turned on.
782 Technical Notes

❚❚ Filming
1 2 3
4
5
6
13
12 7
11 8
10
9
1 Recording indicator (0 45) 7 Wind noise reduction (0 583)
“No movie” indicator (0 268) 8 Headphone volume (0 583)
2 External recording control 9 Release mode (still
(0 397) photography; 0 50)
N-Log indicator (0 397)
10 Sound level (0 45)
3 Frame size and rate/image
quality (0 264) 11 Microphone sensitivity
(0 581)
4 Time remaining (0 45)
12 Frequency response (0 582)
5 Time code (0 584)
13 Electronic VR indicator
6 File name (0 550) (0 580)
Technical Notes 783

The Control Panel
1 2 3
11 4
5
10
9
8 7 6
1 Shutter speed (0 110, 113) 7 Number of exposures
2 Aperture stop indicator remaining (0 34, 861)
(0 112, 795) PC mode indicator (0 819)
3 Aperture (0 111, 113) 8 ISO sensitivity (0 187)
Autofocus mode (0 140)
4 Memory card icon (Slot 1;
0 34) 9 Battery indicator (0 33)
5 Memory card icon (Slot 2; 10 Metering (0 166)
0 34) 11 ISO sensitivity indicator
6 “k” (appears when memory (0 187)
remains for over 1000 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator
exposures; 0 34) (0 190)
784 Technical Notes

1 2 3 4
10 5
9 6
7
8
1 Bluetooth connection 7 B (“clock not set”)

indicator (0 692) indicator (0 32)
2 Wi-Fi connection indicator 8 Bracketing indicator (0 224)
(0 696) 9 Exposure indicator
3 Color temperature (0 204) Exposure (0 114)
4 Multiple exposure indicator Exposure compensation
(0 287) (0 175)
5 Flash compensation indicator Exposure/flash bracketing
(0 469) (0 226)
6 Exposure compensation WB bracketing (0 232)
indicator (0 175) ADL bracketing (0 238)
10 Flash sync indicator (0 619)
Technical Notes 785

Compatible F Mount Lenses
CPU lenses are recommended (but note that IX-NIKKOR lenses
cannot be used). Types G, E, and D, which grant access to a full
range of camera features, are particularly recommended.
CPU Lenses
Shooting
Metering
mode
Lens 1/accessory Autofocus 2 L
P A M
3D- t
S M RGB N
RGB
Type G, E, or D 3; AF-S,
4 4 4 4 — 44 4
AF-P, AF-I
PC NIKKOR 19mm f/4E 4 4,
— 45 45 45 — 45
ED 6 5
4 4,
PC-E NIKKOR series 6 — 45 45 45 — 5
45
4 4,
PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D 6, 7 — — 48 45 — 5
45
AF-S/AF-I Teleconverter 9 4 4 4 4 — 44 4
Other AF NIKKOR (except
4 10 4 4 — 4 4 4 —
lenses for F3AF)
AI-P NIKKOR — 4 4 — 4 4 4 —
786 Technical Notes

1 IX-NIKKOR lenses cannot be used.
2 M (manual focus) is available with all lenses.
3 Vibration reduction (VR) is supported with VR lenses.
4 [Spot metering] meters the selected focus point.
5 Cannot be used with shifting or tilting.
6 Fog, lines, and other image artifacts (“noise”) may appear in photos
taken with the electronic front-curtain shutter. This can be
prevented by selecting [Disable] for Custom Setting d5 [Electronic
front-curtain shutter].
7 The camera’s exposure metering and flash control systems will not
function as expected when the lens is shifted and/or tilted, or when
an aperture other than the maximum aperture is used.
8 Mode M (manual) only.
9 For information on the focus points available for autofocus and
electronic rangefinding, see “AF-S/AF-I Teleconverters” (0 790).
10 When an AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm
f/3.5–4.5 <New>, or AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 lens is focused at the
minimum distance at maximum zoom, the in-focus indicator may be
displayed when the image on the matte screen in the viewfinder is
not in focus. Adjust focus manually until the image in the viewfinder
is in focus.
• “Noise” in the form of lines may appear during autofocus at high ISO
sensitivities. Use manual focus or focus lock. Lines may also appear at
high ISO sensitivities when aperture is adjusted during movie recording
or live view photography.
Technical Notes 787

D Lens f-Number
The f-number is a measure of lens “speed”, its maximum (widest)
aperture. It appears at the end of the lens name, for example as “f/2.8” or
“f/3.5–5.6”.
D VR Lenses
The lenses listed below are not recommended for long exposures or
photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities, as due to the design of the
vibration reduction (VR) control system the resulting photos may be
marred by fog.
• AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED
• AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 70–200mm f/2.8G IF-ED
• AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 70–300mm f/4.5–5.6G IF-ED
• AF-S VR Nikkor 200mm f/2G IF-ED
• AF-S VR Nikkor 300mm f/2.8G IF-ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm f/4G ED VR
• AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR
• AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
• AF-S NIKKOR 400mm f/2.8G ED VR
• AF-S NIKKOR 500mm f/4G ED VR
• AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED
• AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II
• AF-S DX Micro NIKKOR 85mm f/3.5G ED VR
We recommend turning vibration reduction off when using other VR
lenses.
788 Technical Notes

D Calculating Angle of View
The camera can be used with Nikon lenses for 35 mm format cameras. If a
35 mm format lens or a lens that supports the FX format is attached, the
angle of view will be the same as a frame of 35 mm film.
• You can also take pictures at angles of view that differ from that of the
current lens by selecting different options for [Image area] > [Choose
image area] in the photo shooting menu. For example, if a 35 mm
format lens or a lens that supports the FX format is attached, you can
reduce the angle of view by selecting [DX (24×16)].
2 1 Lens
3 2 [FX (36×24)] picture size (35.9
× 23.9 mm, equivalent to
35 mm format camera)
1 3 [DX (24×16)] picture size (23.5
4 × 15.7 mm)
4 Picture diagonal
5 [FX (36×24)] angle of view
5
6 (35 mm format)
6 [DX (24×16)] angle of view
• The picture diagonal for 35 mm format is about 1.5 times that of the [DX
(24×16)] crop. Selecting [DX (24×16)] therefore multiplies the apparent
focal length of 35 mm format lenses attached to the camera by about
1.5×. For example, selecting [DX (24×16)] when a lens with a focal
length of 50 mm is attached increases the apparent focal length to
about 75 mm.
Technical Notes 789

D AF-S/AF-I Teleconverters
• The table below shows the focus points available for autofocus and
electronic rangefinding in viewfinder photography when an AF-S/AF-I
teleconverter is attached. Note that the camera may be unable to focus
on dark or low-contrast subjects if the combined aperture is slower than
f/5.6.
Teleconverter Max. lens aperture Focus points
f/4 or faster
TC-14E, TC-14E II,
TC-14E III 1
f/5.6
f/2.8 or faster
TC-17E II 1
f/4
f/5.6 —2
f/2.8 or faster
TC-20E, TC-20E II, 3

TC-20E III
f/4
f/5.6 —2
1
TC-800-1.25E ED f/5.6
790 Technical Notes

1 Single-point AF is used when 3D-tracking or auto-area AF is selected
forAF-area mode.
2 Autofocus not available.
3 Focus data for focus points other than the center focus point are
obtained from line sensors.
• Autofocus is not available when teleconverters are used with the AF-S
VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED.
A Recognizing CPU and Type G, E, and D Lenses

CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts (q). Type G
lenses are marked with a “G”, type E lenses with an “E”, and type D lenses
with a “D”. Type G and E lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring
(w).
CPU lens Type G or E lens Type D lens
Technical Notes 791

Non-CPU Lenses and Other Accessories
Shooting
Metering
mode
Lens 1/accessory L
P A M
3D- t
S M RGB N
RGB
AI-, AI-modified NIKKOR or Nikon Series E
— 43 — 44 45 —
lenses 2
Medical-NIKKOR 120mm f/4 — 46 — — — —
Reflex-NIKKOR — 43 — — 45 —
PC-NIKKOR — 47 — — 4 —
AI-type Teleconverter 8 — 43 — 44 45 —
PB-6 Bellows Focusing Attachment 9 — 4 10 — — 4 —
Auto extension rings (PK-series 11A, 12,
— 43 — — 4 —
or 13; PN-11)
1 Some lenses cannot be used (0 794).
2 The range of rotation for the AI 80–200mm f/2.8 ED tripod mount is
limited by the camera body. Filters cannot be exchanged while an AI
200–400mm f/4 ED is mounted on camera.
3 If the maximum aperture is specified using the [Non-CPU lens data]
item in the setup menu, the aperture value will be displayed in the
viewfinder and control panel.
792 Technical Notes

4 Can be used only if the lens focal length and maximum aperture are
specified using the [Non-CPU lens data] item in the setup menu.
Some lenses may, however, fail to produce the desired results even if
the focal length and maximum aperture are supplied. Use [Spot
metering] or [Center-weighted metering] if the desired results are
not achieved.
5 For improved precision, specify the lens focal length and maximum
aperture using the [Non-CPU lens data] item in the setup menu.
6 Can be used in mode M at shutter speeds one step or more slower
than the flash sync speed.
7 Use stop-down metering. In mode A, stop aperture down using the
controls on the lens and lock exposure before shifting the lens. In
mode M, stop aperture down using the controls on the lens and
meter exposure before shifting the lens.
8 Exposure compensation required with AI 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5,
AI 35–105mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–135mm f/3.5–4.5, or AF-S 80–200mm
f/2.8D lenses.
9 Requires a PK-12 or PK-13 auto extension ring. A PB-6D may be
required depending on camera orientation.
10 Can be used with stop-down metering; in mode A, stop aperture
down using the controls on the bellows attachment and meter
exposure before taking photographs.
• Lines may appear at high ISO sensitivities when aperture is adjusted
during movie recording or live view photography.
Technical Notes 793

D Incompatible Lenses and Accessories
The following non-CPU lenses and accessories cannot be used.
Attempting to mount them on the camera could damage the camera or
lens.
• TC-16A AF teleconverters
• Non-AI lenses (lenses with pre-AI exposure couplings)
• Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6,
800mm f/8, 1200mm f/11)
• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)
• 2.1cm f/4
• K2 extension rings
• 180–600mm f/8 ED lenses (serial numbers 174041–174180)
• 360–1200mm f/11 ED lenses (serial numbers 174031–174127)
• 200–600mm f/9.5 lenses (serial numbers 280001–300490)
• AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED, TC-16 AF
teleconverters)
• PC 28mm f/4 lenses (serial numbers 180900 or earlier)
• PC 35mm f/2.8 lenses (serial numbers 851001–906200)
• PC 35mm f/3.5 lenses (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 lenses (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/11 lenses (serial numbers 142361–143000)
• Reflex 2000mm f/11 lenses (serial numbers 200111–200310)
794 Technical Notes

A Compatible Non-CPU Lenses
• Specifying the lens focal length and maximum aperture using the [Non-
CPU lens data] item in the setup menu allows many of the features
available with CPU lenses, including aperture value display and color
matrix metering, to be used with non-CPU lenses. If the focal length and
maximum aperture are not provided and [Matrix metering] is selected
for metering, [Center-weighted metering] will be used instead.
• Aperture must be set using the lens aperture ring. If the maximum
aperture is not provided using [Non-CPU lens data], the aperture
displays in the camera control panel and viewfinder will show the
number of stops from maximum aperture and the actual aperture value
must be read off the lens aperture ring.
Technical Notes 795

The Electronic Rangefinder
The conditions under which the electronic rangefinder can be
used vary with the lens.
❚❚ CPU lenses
Viewfinder
Lens/accessory Live view
photography
Type G, E, or D; AF-S, AF-P, AF-I 4 4
PC NIKKOR 19mm f/4E ED 41 —
PC-E NIKKOR series 41 —
PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D 41 —
AF-S/AF-I Teleconverter 4 4
Other AF NIKKOR (except lenses for
42 4
F3AF)
AI-P NIKKOR 43 4
2 When an AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–
4.5 <New>, or AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 lens is focused at the minimum
distance at maximum zoom, the in-focus indicator may be displayed
when the image on the matte screen in the viewfinder is not in focus.
Adjust focus manually until the image in the viewfinder is in focus.
3 With a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
796 Technical Notes

❚❚ Non-CPU Lenses and Other Accessories
Viewfinder
Lens/accessory Live view
photography
AI-, AI-modified NIKKOR or Nikon
41 —
Series E lenses
Medical-NIKKOR 120mm f/4 4 —
Reflex-NIKKOR — —
PC-NIKKOR 42 —
AI-type Teleconverter 43 —
PB-6 Bellows Focusing Attachment 43 —
Auto extension rings (PK-series 11A,
43 —
12, or 13; PN-11)
1 With a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
3 With a maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
Technical Notes 797

Compatible Flash Units
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) supports a
variety of features thanks to improved communication between
the camera and compatible flash units.
❚❚ Features Available with CLS-Compatible Flash
Units
Flash unit
SB-R200
SB-5000
SB-900/
SB-910/
SU-800
SB-800
SB-700
SB-600
SB-500
SB-400
SB-300
Supported features
i-TTL balanced
fill-flash for 4 4 4 4 4 — — 4 4
digital SLR 1
i-TTL
Standard i-TTL
fill-flash for 42 42 4 42 4 — — 4 4
digital SLR
Single flash
qA Auto aperture 4 43 — — — — — — —
A Non-TTL auto — 43 — — — — — — —
Distance-
GN priority 4 4 4 — — — — — —
manual
M Manual 4 4 4 4 44 — — 44 44
Repeating
RPT 4 4 — — — — — — —
flash
798 Technical Notes

Flash unit
SB-R200
SB-5000
SB-900/
SB-910/
SU-800
SB-800
SB-700
SB-600
SB-500
SB-400
SB-300
Supported features
Remote flash control 4 4 4 — 44 4 — — —

i-TTL i-TTL 4 4 4 — 44 — — — —
Quick wireless
[A : B] 4 — 4 — — 45 — — —
flash control
Master
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
qA Auto aperture 4 4 — — — — — — —
A Non-TTL auto — — — — — — — — —
M Manual 4 4 4 — 44 — — — —
Repeating
RPT 4 4 — — — — — — —
flash
i-TTL i-TTL 4 4 4 4 4 — 4 — —
Quick wireless
[A : B] 4 4 4 4 4 — 4 — —
flash control
Auto
Remote
qA/A aperture/non- 46 46 — — — — — — —
TTL auto
M Manual 4 4 4 4 4 — 4 — —
Repeating
RPT 4 4 4 4 4 — — — —
flash
Technical Notes 799

Flash unit
SB-R200
SB-5000
SB-900/
SB-910/
SU-800
SB-800
SB-700
SB-600
SB-500
SB-400
SB-300
Supported features
Radio-controlled Advanced
47 — — — — — — — —
Wireless Lighting
Color Information
4 4 4 4 4 — — 4 4
Communication (flash)
Color Information
— — — — 4 — — — —
Communication (LED light)
Auto FP high-speed sync 8 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 — —
FV lock 9 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Red-eye reduction 4 4 4 4 4 — — 4 —
Camera modeling
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 — —
illumination
Unified flash control 4 — — — 4 — — 4 4
Camera flash unit firmware
4 4 10 4 — 4 — — — 4
update
800 Technical Notes

1 Not available with spot metering.
2 Can also be selected via the flash unit.
3 qA/A mode selection is performed on the flash unit using custom
settings.
4 Can be selected using the [Flash control] item in the camera menus.
5 Available during close-up photography only.
6 Choice of qA and A depends on the option selected with the master
flash.
7 Supports the same features as remote flash units with optical AWL.
8 Available only in i-TTL, qA, A, GN, and M flash-control modes.
9 Available only in i-TTL flash control mode or when the flash is
configured to emit monitor preflashes in qA or A flash control
mode.
10 Firmware updates for the SB-910 and SB-900 can be performed from
the camera.
Technical Notes 801

❚❚ The SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander
When mounted on a CLS-compatible camera, the SU-800 can be
used as a commander for SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800,
SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, or SB-R200 flash units. Group flash
control is supported for up to three groups. The SU-800 itself is
not equipped with a flash.
D Other Flash Units

The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto (A) and manual
modes. The options available do not vary with the lens used.
Flash unit
SB-30
SB-27 1
SB-28 SB-23
Supported features SB-22S
SB-80DX SB-26 SB-29
SB-50DX SB-22
SB-28DX SB-25 SB-21B
SB-20
SB-24 SB-29S
SB-16B
SB-15
A Non-TTL auto 4 — 4 4 —
M Manual 4 4 4 4 4
G Repeating flash 4 — 4 — —
REAR 2 Rear-curtain sync 4 4 4 4 4
1 Mounting an SB-27 on the camera automatically sets the flash mode
to TTL, but setting the flash mode to TTL disables the shutter release.
Set the SB-27 to A.
2 Available when the camera is used to select the flash mode.
802 Technical Notes

D Metering Areas for FV Lock
The areas metered when FV lock is used with optional flash units are as
follows:
Picture taken with Flash control mode Metered area
6-mm circle in center
i-TTL
of frame
Stand-alone flash unit
Area metered by flash
Auto aperture (qA)
exposure meter
Remote flash units i-TTL Entire frame
controlled via Auto aperture (qA)
Advanced Wireless Area metered by flash
Lighting Non-TTL auto (A) exposure meter
D Notes on Optional Flash Units

• Refer to the flash unit manual for detailed instructions.
• If the unit supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital
SLR cameras. This camera is not included in the “digital SLR” category in
the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.
• If the flash-ready indicator (c) flashes for about three seconds after a
photograph is taken in i-TTL or non-TTL auto mode, the flash has fired at
full power and the photograph may be underexposed (CLS-compatible
flash units only).
• i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and
12800.
• At ISO sensitivities over 12800, the desired results may not be achieved
at some ranges or aperture settings.
Technical Notes 803

• In mode P, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is limited
according to ISO sensitivity, as shown below:
Maximum aperture (f-number) at ISO equivalent of:
100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 12800
4 5 5.6 7.1 8 10 11 13
* If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the
maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.
• The SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, and
SB-400 provide red-eye reduction in red-eye reduction and slow-sync
with red-eye reduction flash modes.
• “Noise” in the form of lines may appear in flash photographs taken with
an SD-9 or SD-8A high-performance battery pack attached directly to
the camera. Reduce ISO sensitivity or increase the distance between the
camera and the battery pack.
• During viewfinder photography, the SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800,
SB-700, SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination as required.
• The SB-5000 supports AF-assist illumination with 24–135 mm AF lenses.
During viewfinder photography, AF-assist is available with the focus
points highlighted in the illustration.
Focus points for which AF-assist illumination is available
Focal length Focal length Focal length
24–30 mm 31–48 mm 49–135 mm
804 Technical Notes

• The SB-910 and SB-900 support AF-assist illumination with 17–135 mm
AF lenses. During viewfinder photography, AF-assist illumination is
available with the focus points highlighted in the illustration.
Focus points for which AF-assist
illumination is available
• The SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800 support AF-assist illumination with

24–105 mm AF lenses. During viewfinder photography, AF-assist
illumination is available with the focus points highlighted in the
illustration.
Focal length Focal length
24–31 mm 32–105 mm
Technical Notes 805

• The SB-700 supports AF-assist illumination with 24–135 mm AF lenses.
During viewfinder photography, AF-assist illumination is available with
the focus points highlighted in the illustration.
• Depending on the lens used and scene recorded, the in-focus indicator
(I) may be displayed when the subject is not in focus, or the camera
may be unable to focus and the shutter release will be disabled.
• When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash
photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We
recommend that you select standard i-TTL fill-flash. Take a test shot and
view the results in the monitor.
• In i-TTL, do not use any form of flash panel (diffusion panel) other than
the flash unit’s built-in flash panel or bounce adapters provided with the
flash unit. Using other panels may produce incorrect exposure.
D Flash Compensation for Optional Flash Units

In i-TTL and auto aperture (qA) flash control modes, the flash
compensation selected with the optional flash unit or the [Flash control]
item in the photo shooting menu is added to the flash compensation
selected with the c (Y) button.
806 Technical Notes

A Modeling Illumination
• Optional CLS-compatible flash units emit a modeling flash when the
camera Pv button is pressed.
• This feature can be used with Advanced Wireless Lighting to preview
the total lighting effect achieved with multiple flash units.
• Modeling illumination can be turned off by selecting [Off] for Custom
Setting e5 [Modeling flash].
Technical Notes 807

Other Compatible Accessories
A variety of accessories are available for your Nikon camera.
● Power Sources
• EN-EL15b Rechargeable Li-ion Battery: EN-EL15b batteries can be
used with Nikon D780 digital cameras.
- EN-EL15a/EN-EL15 batteries can also be used. Note, however, that
fewer pictures may sometimes be taken on a single charge with an
EN-EL15 than with an EN-EL15b/EN-EL15a (0 867).
• MH-25a Battery Charger: The MH-25a can be used to recharge
EN-EL15b batteries.
- MH-25 battery chargers can also be used.
• EH-7P Charging AC Adapter: The EH-7P can be used to charge
EN-EL15b batteries inserted in the camera.
- The battery only charges when the camera is off.
- The EH-7P cannot be used to charge EN-EL15a/EN-EL15 batteries.
• EP-5B Power Connector, EH-5d, EH-5c, and EH-5b AC Adapters: Use
AC adapters to power the camera for extended periods.
- The EP-5B is required to connect the camera to the AC adapter. See
“Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter” (0 816) for details.
808 Technical Notes

● Accessory Shoe Covers
BS-3/BS-1 Accessory Shoe Covers: Accessory shoe covers protect the
accessory shoe when no flash unit is attached.
● Body Caps
BF-1B Body Cap/BF-1A Body Cap: Body caps prevent dust entering the
camera when no lens is in place.
● Viewfinder Eyepiece Accessories
• DK-20C Eyepiece Correction Lenses: Lenses are available with
diopters of –5, –4, –3, –2, 0, +0.5, +1, +2, and +3 m–1 when the camera
diopter adjustment control is in the neutral position (–1 m–1). Test
eyepiece correction lenses before purchase to ensure that the desired
focus can be achieved. Use eyepiece correction lenses only if the desired
focus cannot be achieved with the built in diopter adjustment control
(–3 to +1 m–1). The rubber eyecup cannot be used with eyepiece
correction lenses.
• DK-21M Magnifying Eyepiece: The DK-21M magnifies the view
through the viewfinder by approximately 1.17 × (50 mm f/1.4 lens at
infinity; –1.0 m–1) for greater precision when framing.
• DG-2 Magnifier: The DG-2 magnifies the scene displayed in the center
of the viewfinder for greater precision during focusing.
• DK-22 Eyepiece Adapter: The DK-22 is used when attaching the DG-2
magnifier.
• DR-6 Right-Angle Viewing Attachment: The DR-6 attaches at a right
angle to the viewfinder eyepiece, allowing the image in the viewfinder
to be viewed at right angles to the lens (for example, from directly
above when the camera is horizontal).
Technical Notes 809

● Filters
• Neutral Color (NC) filters can be used to protect the lens.
• The camera cannot be used with linear polarizing filters. Use the C-PL or
C-PLII circular polarizing filter instead.
• Filters may cause ghosting when the subject is framed against a bright
light, or when a bright light source is in the frame. Filters can be
removed if ghosting occurs.
• RGB and 3D-RGB matrix metering may not produce the desired results
with filters with exposure factors (filter factors) over 1× (Y44, Y48, Y52,
O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S, ND8, ND8S, ND400, A2, A12,
B2, B8, B12); we suggest that [Center-weighted metering] be selected
instead. See the filter manual for details.
• Filters intended for special-effects photography may interfere with
autofocus or the electronic rangefinder.
● Wireless Transmitters
WT-7 Wireless Transmitter *: Use the WT-7 to upload pictures over a
wireless network or control the camera from a computer running Camera
Control Pro 2 (available separately). You can also take and browse pictures
remotely from a computer or smart device.
* Requires a wireless network and some basic network knowledge. Be
sure to update the wireless transmitter software to the latest version.
810 Technical Notes

● Wireless Remote Controllers
• WR-R10 Wireless Remote Controller/WR-T10 Wireless Remote
Controller: When a WR-R10 wireless remote controller is attached to
accessory terminal, the camera can be controlled remotely using a
WR-T10 wireless remote controller.
- The WR-R10 can also be used to control radio-controlled flash units.
- For synchronized release involving more than one camera, ready
multiple cameras with paired WR-R10 units attached.
* When connecting the WR-R10, be sure the covers for the accessory
terminal and the USB and HDMI connectors are fully open.
• WR-1 Wireless Remote Controller: WR-1 units are used with WR-R10 or
WR-T10 wireless remote controllers or with other WR-1 remote
controllers, with the WR-1 units functioning as either transmitters or
receivers. When a WR-R10 or a WR-1 configured as a receiver is
connected to the camera accessory terminal, a WR-T10 or a second
WR-1 configured as a transmitter can be used to take pictures remotely.
Camera settings can also be adjusted using a WR-1 configured as a
transmitter.
* Be sure the firmware for the WR-R10 and WR-1 has been updated to the
latest versions (WR-R10 firmware version 3.0 or later and WR-1 firmware
version 1.0.1 or later). For information on firmware updates, see the
Nikon website for your area. Consult a Nikon-authorized service
representative when updating the firmware for the WR-R10 from
versions prior to version 2.0 to version 3.0 or later.
Technical Notes 811

● Remote Cords
MC-DC2 Remote Cord (length 1 m/3 ft 4 in.): When connected to the
camera accessory terminal, the MC-DC2 can be used to release the shutter
remotely.
● USB Cables
• UC-E24 USB Cable: A USB cable with a type C connector for connection
to the camera and a type A connector for connection to the USB device.
• UC-E25 USB Cable: A USB cable with two type C connectors.
● HDMI Cables
HC-E1 HDMI Cable: An HDMI cable with a type C connector for
connection to the camera and a type A connector for connection to HDMI
devices.
● Microphones
• ME-1 Stereo Microphone: Connect the ME-1 to the camera
microphone jack to record stereo sound. Using an external microphone
also reduces the chance of picking up equipment noise, such as the
sounds produced by the lens during autofocus.
• ME-W1 Wireless Microphone: A wireless Bluetooth microphone. Use
the ME-W1 for off-camera recording.
● Film Digitizing Adapters
ES-2 Film Digitizing Adapter: The ES-2 film digitizing adapter is used to
fix 35 mm film in place so it can be photographed. It can be used with
Nikon lenses mounted on Nikon SLR cameras. For information on
compatible lenses, see the manual for the ES-2.
812 Technical Notes

● Accessory Terminal Accessories
The following accessories can be connected to the accessory terminal.
• WR-R10 Wireless Remote Controller
• WR-1 Wireless Remote Controller
• MC-DC2 Remote Cord
Close the camera connector cover when the terminal is not in use. Foreign
matter in the connector could cause malfunction.
D Compatible Accessories
• Availability may vary with country or region.
• See our website or brochures for the latest information.
D Attaching and Removing the Accessory Shoe Cover

The accessory shoe cover (available separately) slides into the accessory
shoe as shown. To remove the cover, hold the camera firmly, press the
cover down with a thumb and slide it in the direction shown.
Technical Notes 813

Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter
Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power
connector and AC adapter.
1 Open the battery-

chamber (q) and
power connector (w)
covers.
2 Insert the EP-5B power

connector.
• Be sure to insert the connector in
the correct orientation.
• Using the connector to keep the
orange battery latch pressed to one
side, slide the connector into the
battery chamber until the latch
locks the connector in place.
814 Technical Notes

3 Close the battery-
chamber cover.
Position the power
connector cable so that it
passes through the power
connector slot and close
the battery-chamber cover.
4 Connect the EH-5d/EH-5c/EH-5b AC adapter.

• Connect the AC adapter power cable to the AC socket on
the AC adapter (e).
• Connect the power cable to the DC socket (r).
• A P icon is displayed in the monitor when the camera is
powered by the AC adapter and power connector.
Technical Notes 815

Charging AC Adapters
• When inserted in the camera, EN-EL15b rechargeable Li-ion
batteries will charge while the camera is connected to an
optional EH-7P charging AC adapter.
• Charging AC adapters cannot be used to charge EN-EL15a/
EN-EL15 batteries. Use the MH-25a battery charger instead.
• An exhausted battery will fully charge in about two hours and
35 minutes.
• Note that in countries or regions where required, charging AC
adapters are supplied with a plug adapter attached; the shape
of the plug adapter varies with the country of sale.
1 Insert the EN-EL15b into the

camera (0 24).
816 Technical Notes

2 After confirming that the camera is off, connect
the charging AC adapter and plug the adapter in.
1 EH-7P Charging AC Adapter 2 Charge lamp

• Insert the plug straight into the socket rather than at an
angle.
• The charge lamp lights amber while charging is in
progress. The charge lamp turns off when charing is
complete.
• The battery will not charge while the camera is on.
• Note that although the camera can be used while
connected, the camera will not draw power from the
charging AC adapter while the camera is on.
Technical Notes 817

3 Unplug the charging AC adapter when charging is
complete.
Disconnect the charging AC adapter from the camera.
D The Charging AC Adapter

If the battery cannot be charged using the charging AC adapter, for
example because the battery is not compatible or the temperature of the
camera is elevated, the charge lamp will flash rapidly for about 30
seconds and then turn off. If the charge lamp is off and you did not
observe the battery charging, turn the camera on and check the battery
level.
818 Technical Notes

Software
The following Nikon software can be used with the camera:
● Computer Software
• Camera Control Pro 2 (available for purchase): Control the camera
remotely from a computer and save photographs directly to the
computer hard disk. If [PC] is selected as the destination in Camera
Control Pro 2, a PC connection indicator (c) will be displayed in the
camera control panel if Camera Control Pro 2 is launched while the
camera is connected to the computer.
• ViewNX-i *: More than a tool for viewing and editing photos and movies
shot with Nikon digital cameras, ViewNX-i can be used in combination
with other Nikon imaging applications to help you get the most from
your pictures. It also offers smooth access to online services.
* Existing users should be sure to download the latest version, as earlier
versions may not support the camera.
• Capture NX-D: Fine-tune photos shot in Nikon’s unique NEF/NRW
(RAW) formats or convert them to JPEG or TIFF (NEF/RAW processing).
Capture NX-D can be used not only with NEF/NRW (RAW) pictures but
also with JPEG and TIFF photos shot with Nikon digital cameras for such
tasks as editing tone curves and enhancing brightness and contrast.
Technical Notes 819

• Wireless Transmitter Utility: The Wireless Transmitter Utility is
required if the camera is to be connected to a network. Pair the camera
with the computer and download pictures via Wi-Fi.
Nikon computer software is available from the Nikon Download Center.
Check the version and system requirements and be sure to download the
latest version.
● Smartphone (Tablet) Apps
SnapBridge: Upload photos and movies from the camera to a smart
device via a wireless connection.
• The SnapBridge app is available for download from the Apple App
Store® or on Google PlayTM.
• Visit the Nikon website for the latest information on the SnapBridge
app.
820 Technical Notes

Caring for the Camera
Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period,
remove the battery. Before removing the battery, confirm that
the camera is off.
Do not store the camera in locations that:
• are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%
• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic
fields, such as televisions or radios
• are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below
−10 °C (14 °F)
Technical Notes 821

Cleaning
The procedure varies with the part that requires cleaning. The
procedures are detailed below.
• Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.
❚❚ Camera body
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a
soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside,
wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled
water and dry the camera thoroughly.
Important: Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may
cause product malfunction. Damage due to the presence of foreign
matter inside the camera is not covered under warranty.
❚❚ Lens, mirror, and viewfinder
These glass elements are easily damaged: remove dust and lint
with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical
to prevent the discharge of liquid that could damage glass
elements. To remove fingerprints and other stains, apply a small
amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care.
❚❚ Monitor
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing
fingerprints and other stains, wipe the surface lightly with a soft
cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure, as this could
result in damage or malfunction.
822 Technical Notes

The Low-Pass Filter
Dirt or dust entering the camera when lenses are exchanged or
the body cap is removed may adhere to the low-pass filter and
affect your photographs. The “clean image sensor” option
vibrates the filter to remove dust.
The filter can be cleaned at any time from the menus, or
cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is
turned on or off.
Technical Notes 823

• For maximum effect, hold the camera
in normal orientation (base down).
• Select [Clean image sensor] in the

setup menu, then highlight [Clean
now] and press J to begin cleaning.
• Camera controls cannot be used while
cleaning is in progress. Do not remove
or disconnect the power source.
• The setup menu will be displayed when cleaning is complete.
824 Technical Notes

❚❚ Cleaning the Image Sensor at Startup and/or
Shutdown
Option Description
The image sensor is automatically cleaned
5 [Clean at startup]
each time the camera is turned on.
The image sensor is automatically cleaned
[Clean at
6 during shutdown each time the camera is
shutdown]
turned off.
[Clean at startup & The image sensor is cleaned automatically at
7
shutdown] startup and at shutdown.
[Cleaning off] Automatic image sensor cleaning off.
1 Select [Clean at startup/

shutdown] for [Clean image
sensor].
Pressing 2 when [Clean at startup/
shutdown] is highlighted displays
[Clean at startup/shutdown]
options.
2 Highlight an option.
Press J to select the highlighted
option.
Technical Notes 825

D Image Sensor Cleaning
• Using camera controls interrupts any image sensor cleaning begun in
response to the operation of the power switch.
• Image sensor cleaning may not fully remove all foreign matter from the
filter. Clean the filter manually (0 827) or consult a Nikon-authorized
service representative.
• If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession, image
sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera’s
internal circuitry. Cleaning can be performed again after a short wait.
826 Technical Notes

❚❚ Manual Cleaning
If foreign matter cannot be removed from the low-pass filter
using the “clean image sensor” option (0 823), the filter can be
cleaned manually as described below. Note, however, that
because the filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged, we
recommend that manual cleaning be performed only by a
Nikon-authorized service representative.
• To prevent loss of power during the operation, use a fully-
charged battery or connect an optional AC adapter and power
connector.
• Manual cleaning requires use of the [Lock mirror up for
cleaning] item in the setup menu. The [Lock mirror up for
cleaning] item is not available at battery levels of J or below
or if the camera is connected to a smart device via Bluetooth
or other devices via USB.
Technical Notes 827

1 Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
After removing the lens, turn the camera on.
2 Highlight [Lock mirror up for

cleaning] in the setup menu
and press 2.
The camera will prepare to lock the
mirror up.
3 Press J.
• The mirror will be raised and the shutter curtain will open.
• The display in the control panel
will flash. The display in the
viewfinder will turn off.
• To restore normal operation
without inspecting the low-pass
filter, turn the camera off.
828 Technical Notes

4 Holding the camera so that
light can enter the camera,
examine the filter for dust or
lint.
If no foreign objects are present,
proceed to Step 6.
5 Remove any dust and lint from

the low-pass filter with a
blower.
• Do not use a blower-brush. The
bristles could damage the filter.
• Dirt that cannot be removed with a
blower can only be removed by Nikon-authorized service
personnel. Under no circumstances should you touch or
wipe the filter.
6 Turn the camera off and replace the lens.

The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter
curtain will close.
Technical Notes 829

D Use a Reliable Power Source
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers
off while the mirror is raised, the curtain will close automatically. To
prevent damage to the curtain caused by the shutter closing
inadvertently during the operation, observe the following precautions:
• Do not turn the camera off while the mirror is raised.
• Do not remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is
raised.
• If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and
the self-timer lamp will flash. The shutter curtain will close and the
mirror will be lowered after about two minutes; end cleaning or
inspection immediately.
D Foreign Matter on the Low-Pass Filter

Foreign matter entering the camera when lenses or body caps are
removed or exchanged (or in rare circumstances lubricant or fine particles
from the camera itself) may adhere to the low-pass filter, where it may
appear in photographs taken under certain conditions. To prevent entry
of foreign matter when attaching the body cap or exchanging lenses,
avoid dusty environments and be sure to remove all dust and other
foreign matter that may be adhering to the camera mount, lens mount, or
body cap. To protect the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to
replace the supplied body cap. Should you encounter foreign matter that
cannot be removed using the image sensor cleaning option (0 823),
clean the low-pass filter as described in “Manual Cleaning” (0 827), or
have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel.
Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on the sensor can
be retouched using the clean image options available in some imaging
applications.
830 Technical Notes

D Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing; Nikon
recommends that the camera be inspected once every one to two years,
and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply
to these services).
• Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the
camera is used professionally.
• Any accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or
optional flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected
or serviced.
Technical Notes 831

Caring for the Camera and Battery:
Cautions
Camera Care
● Do Not Drop
Do not drop the camera or lens or subject them to blows. The product
may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration.
● Keep Dry
Keep the camera dry. Rusting of the internal mechanism caused by water
inside the camera can not only be expensive to repair but can in fact
cause irreparable damage.
● Avoid Sudden Changes in Temperature
Sudden changes in temperature, such as those that occur when entering
or leaving a heated building on a cold day, can cause condensation inside
the device. To prevent condensation, place the device in a carrying case
or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden changes in temperature.
● Keep Away from Strong Magnetic Fields
Static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as
radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor, corrupt data stored
on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal circuitry.
● Do Not Leave the Lens Pointed at the Sun
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light source for
extended periods. Intense light may damage the image sensor or cause
fading or “burn in”. Photographs taken with the camera may exhibit a
white blur effect.
832 Technical Notes

● Lasers and other bright light sources
Do not direct lasers or other extremely bright light sources toward the
lens, as this could damage the camera’s image sensor.
● Cleaning
When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove dust and
lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the
beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened
in fresh water and then dry the camera thoroughly. In rare instances,
static electricity may cause the LCD display to light up or go dark; this
does not indicate a malfunction. The display will soon return to normal.
● Cleaning the Lens and Mirror
These elements are easily damaged: remove dust and lint with a blower. If
using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent the discharge of
liquid that could damage glass elements. To remove fingerprints and
other stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft
cloth and wipe the lens carefully.
● Cleaning the Low-Pass Filter
For information on cleaning the low-pass filter, see “The Low-Pass Filter”
(0 823) and “Manual Cleaning” (0 827).
● The Lens Contacts
Keep the lens contacts clean.
Technical Notes 833

● Do Not Touch the Shutter Curtain
• The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged: under no
circumstances should you exert pressure on the curtain, poke it with
cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air currents from a blower. These
actions could scratch, deform, or tear the curtain.
• The shutter curtain may appear to be unevenly colored; this does not
indicate a malfunction. It also has no effect on pictures.
● Store in a Well-Ventilated Area
To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated
area. Do not store the camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls, next
to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic, or where it will be
exposed to extremely high temperatures, for example near a heater or in
an enclosed vehicle on a hot day. Failure to observe these precautions
could result in product malfunction.
● Long-Term Storage
To prevent damage caused by, for example, leaking battery fluid, remove
the battery if the product will not be used for an extended period. Store
the camera in a plastic bag containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store
the camera case in a plastic bag, as this may cause the material to
deteriorate. Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Note that desiccant
gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be replaced at
regular intervals. To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of
storage at least once a month, insert the battery, and release the shutter a
few times.
834 Technical Notes

● Turn the Product Off Before Removing or Disconnecting the Power
Source
Removing or disconnecting the power source while the camera is on
could damage the product. Particular care should be taken not to remove
or disconnect the power source while images are being recorded or
deleted.
● Notes on the Monitor
• The monitor is constructed with extremely high precision; at least
99.99% of pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01% being missing
or defective. Hence while these displays may contain pixels that are
always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black), this is not a
malfunction. Images recorded with the device are unaffected. Your
understanding is requested.
• Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.
• Do not apply pressure to the monitor. The monitor could malfunction or
suffer damage. Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a
blower. Stains can be removed by wiping the monitor lightly with a soft
cloth or chamois leather. Should the monitor break, care should be
taken to avoid injury from broken glass. Be careful that liquid crystal
from the monitor does not touch the skin or enter the eyes or mouth.
● Bright Lights and Back-Lit Subjects
Noise in the form of lines may in rare cases appear in pictures that include
bright lights or back-lit subjects.
Technical Notes 835

Battery Care
● Precautions for Use
• If improperly handled, batteries may rupture or leak, causing the
product to corrode. Observe the following precautions when handling
batteries:
- Turn the product off before replacing the battery.
- Batteries may be hot after extended use.
- Keep the battery terminals clean.
- Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.
- Do not short or disassemble batteries or expose them to flame or
excessive heat.
- Replace the terminal cover when the battery is not inserted in the
camera or charger.
• If the battery is hot, for example immediately after use, wait for it to cool
before charging. Attempting to charge the battery while its internal
temperature is elevated will impair battery performance, and the
battery may not charge or charge only partially.
• If the battery will not be used for some time, insert it in the camera and
run it flat before removing it from the camera for storage. The battery
should be stored in a cool location with an ambient temperature of
15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F). Avoid hot or extremely cold locations.
• Batteries should be charged within six months of use. During long
periods of disuse, charge the battery and use the camera to run it flat
once every six months before returning it to a cool location for storage.
836 Technical Notes

• Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use. The
camera and charger draw minute amounts of charge even when off and
could draw the battery down to the point that it will no longer function.
• Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0 °C (32 °F) or
above 40 °C (104 °F). Failure to observe this precaution could damage
the battery or impair its performance. Charge the battery indoors at
ambient temperatures of 5 °C–35 °C (41 °F–95 °F). The battery will not
charge if its temperature is below 0 °C (32 °F) or above 60 °C (140 °F).
• Capacity may be reduced and charging times increase at battery
temperatures from 0 °C (32 °F) to 15 °C (59 °F) and from 45 °C (113 °F) to
60 °C (140 °F).
• Batteries in general exhibit a drop in capacity at low ambient
temperatures. Even fresh batteries charged at temperatures under
about 5 °C (41 °F) may show a temporary increase from “0” to “1” in the
setup menu [Battery info] age display, but the display will return to
normal once the battery has been recharged at a temperature of about
20 °C (68 °F) or higher.
• Battery capacity drops at low temperatures. The change in capacity with
temperature is reflected in the camera battery-level display. As a result,
the battery display may show a drop in capacity as the temperature
drops, even if the battery is fully charged.
• Batteries may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing
batteries from the camera.
Technical Notes 837

● Charge Batteries Before Use
Charge the battery before use. The supplied battery is not fully charged at
shipment.
● Ready Spare Batteries
Before taking photographs, ready a spare battery and keep it fully
charged. Depending on your location, it may be difficult to purchase
replacement batteries on short notice.
● Have Fully-Charged Spare Batteries Ready on Cold Days
Partially-charged batteries may not function on cold days. In cold
weather, charge one battery before use and keep another in a warm
place, ready to be exchanged as necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery
may recover some of its charge.
● Battery Level
• Turning the camera on or off repeatedly when the battery is fully
discharged will shorten battery life. Batteries that have been fully
discharged must be charged before use.
• A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge
when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement.
Purchase a new rechargeable battery.
● Do Not Attempt to Charge Fully-Charged Batteries
Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair
battery performance.
● Recycling Used Batteries
Recycle rechargeable batteries in accord with local regulations, being
sure to first insulate the terminals with tape.
838 Technical Notes

Using the Charger
• Do not move the charger or touch the battery during charging; failure
to observe this precaution could in very rare instances result in the
charger showing that charging is complete when the battery is only
partially charged. Remove and reinsert the battery to begin charging
again.
• Do not short the charger terminals. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in overheating and damage to the charger.
• Unplug the charger when it is not in use.
• Use the MH-25a with compatible batteries only.
• Do not use chargers with damage that leaves the interior exposed or
that produce unusual sounds when used.
Using the Charging AC Adapter

• Do not move the camera or touch the battery during charging. Failure
to observe this precaution could in very rare instances result in the
camera showing that charging is complete when the battery is only
partially charged. Disconnect and reconnect the adapter to begin
charging again.
• Do not short the adapter terminals. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in overheating and damage to the adapter.
• Unplug the adapter when it is not in use.
• Do not use adapters with damage that leaves the interior exposed or
that produce unusual sounds when used.
Technical Notes 839

Specifications
Nikon D780 Digital Camera
Type
Type Single-lens reflex digital camera
Lens mount Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF contacts)
Effective
Nikon FX format
angle of view
Effective pixels
Effective
24.5 million
pixels
Image sensor
Type 35.9 × 23.9 mm CMOS sensor
Total pixels 25.28 million
Dust-
Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference data
reduction
(Capture NX-D software required)
system
840 Technical Notes

Storage
• FX (36×24) image area:
- 6048 × 4024 (Large: 24.3 M)
- 4528 × 3016 (Medium: 13.7 M)
- 3024 × 2016 (Small: 6.1 M)
• DX (24×16) image area:
- 3936 × 2624 (Large: 10.3 M)
- 2944 × 1968 (Medium: 5.8 M)
- 1968 × 1312 (Small: 2.6 M)
• 1:1 (24×24) image area:
Image size - 4016 × 4016 (Large: 16.1 M)
(pixels) - 3008 × 3008 (Medium: 9.0 M)
- 2000 × 2000 (Small: 4.0 M)
• 16:9 (36×20) image area:
- 6048 × 3400 (Large: 20.6 M)
- 4528 × 2544 (Medium: 11.5 M)
- 3024 × 1696 (Small: 5.1 M)
• Photographs taken while filming movies at a
frame size of 3840 × 2160: 3840 × 2160
• Photographs taken while filming movies at other
frame sizes: 1920 × 1080
• NEF (RAW): 12 or 14 bit (lossless compressed or
compressed)
• JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1:4),
File format
normal (approx. 1:8), or basic (approx. 1:16)
(image
compression; size-priority and optimal-quality
quality)
compression available
• NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in
both NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats
Technical Notes 841

Storage
Auto, Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait,
Landscape, Flat, Creative Picture Controls (Dream,
Picture Morning, Pop, Sunday, Somber, Dramatic, Silence,
Control Bleached, Melancholic, Pure, Denim, Toy, Sepia, Blue,
System Red, Pink, Charcoal, Graphite, Binary, Carbon); selected
Picture Control can be modified; storage for custom
Picture Controls
SD (Secure Digital) and UHS-II compliant SDHC and
Media
SDXC memory cards
The card in Slot 2 can be used for overflow or backup
Double card
storage or for separate storage of NEF (RAW) and JPEG
slots
images; pictures can be copied between cards.
File system DCF 2.0, Exif 2.31
Viewfinder
Viewfinder Eye-level pentaprism single-lens reflex viewfinder
•
FX: Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical
Frame •
DX: Approx. 97% horizontal and 97% vertical
coverage • 1:1: Approx. 97% horizontal and 100% vertical
• 16:9: Approx. 100% horizontal and 97% vertical
Magnification Approx. 0.7× (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity, −1.0 m−1)
21 mm (−1.0 m−1; from center surface of viewfinder
Eyepoint
eyepiece lens)
Diopter
−3 – +1 m−1
adjustment
842 Technical Notes

Viewfinder
Focusing Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark VIII screen (with
screen AF-area brackets; framing grid can be displayed)
Reflex mirror Quick return
Pressing Pv button stops lens aperture down to value
Depth-of-field
selected by user (A and M modes) or by camera (P and S
preview
modes)
Lens aperture Instant return, electronically controlled
Lens
• Types G, E, and D (some restrictions apply to PC
lenses)
• Other AF NIKKOR lenses (excluding IX NIKKOR lenses
and lenses for the F3AF)
• AI-P NIKKOR lenses
Compatible • DX lenses (using [DX (24 × 16)] image area)
lenses • Non-CPU AI lenses (modes A and M only)
• During viewfinder photography, the electronic
rangefinder can be used with lenses that have a
maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster. With lenses that
have a maximum aperture of f/8 or faster, the
electronic rangefinder supports 11 focus points.
Technical Notes 843

Shutter
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane
Type mechanical shutter; electronic front-curtain shutter;
electronic shutter
1/8000–30 s (choose from step sizes of 1/3 and 1/2 EV,
Speed
extendable to 900 s in mode M); Bulb; Time; X200
Flash sync X=1/200 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/200 s or slower
speed • Auto FP high-speed sync supported
Release
S (single frame), CL (continuous low speed), CH
(continuous high speed), Q (quiet shutter-release), QC
Release mode
(quiet continuous shutter-release), E (self-timer), MUP
(mirror up)
• CL: 1 – 6 fps (viewfinder photography); 1–3 fps (live
view photography)
Approximate
• CH: 7 fps; when shooting NEF/RAW pictures during
frame
silent photography, either 8 fps (bit depth 14 bits) or
advance rate
12 fps (bit depth 12 bits)
• QC: 3 fps
2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1 – 9 exposures at intervals of 0.5, 1, 2,
Self-timer
or 3 s
844 Technical Notes

Exposure
• Viewfinder photography: TTL exposure metering
using RGB sensor with approximately 180K (180,000)
Metering
pixels
system
• Live view: TTL exposure metering performed by
image sensor
• Matrix: 3D color matrix metering III (type G, E, and D
lenses); color matrix metering III (other CPU lenses);
color matrix metering available with non-CPU lenses if
user provides lens data
• Center-weighted: Weight of 75% given to 12 mm
circle in center of frame; diameter of circle can be
changed to 8, 15, or 20 mm, or weighting can be
Metering based on average of entire frame (non-CPU and AF-S
mode Fisheye NIKKOR 8–15mm f/3.5–4.5E ED lenses use
12-mm circle)
• Spot: Meters circle approximately 4 mm in diameter
(about 1.5% of frame) centered on selected focus
point (on center focus point when non-CPU or AF-S
Fisheye NIKKOR 8–15mm f/3.5–4.5E ED lens is used)
• Highlight-weighted: Available with type G, E, and D
lenses
• Matrix and center-weighted metering: −3 – +20 EV
• Spot metering: 2 – 20 EV
Range *
• Highlight-weighted metering: 0 – 20 EV
* Figures are for ISO 100 and f/1.4 lens at 20 °C/68 °F
Technical Notes 845

Exposure
Exposure
meter Combined CPU and AI
coupling
b: Auto, P: programmed auto with flexible program, S:
shutter-priority auto, A: aperture-priority auto, M:
manual
• EFCT Special effects modes: j night vision; f super
Mode
vivid; d pop; e photo illustration; k toy camera
effect; l miniature effect; m selective color; 8
silhouette; 9 high key; ! low key
• U1 and U2: user settings
–5 – +5 EV; −3 – +3 EV when filming movies (choose
Exposure
from step sizes of 1/3 and 1/2 EV) available in P, S, A, M,
compensation
and EFCT modes
Exposure lock Luminosity locked at detected value
ISO 100–51200 (choose from step sizes of 1/3 and 1/2 EV);
ISO sensitivity
can also be set to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO 50
(Recommended
equivalent) below ISO 100 or to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, 1,
Exposure
or 2 EV (ISO 204800 equivalent) above ISO 51200; auto
Index)
ISO sensitivity control available
Active Can be selected from Auto, Extra high, High, Normal,
D-Lighting Low, or Off
846 Technical Notes

Autofocus
• Viewfinder photography: TTL phase detection
performed using Advanced Multi-CAM 3500 II
autofocus sensor module with support for 51 focus
points (including 15 cross-type sensors; f/8 supported
Type
by 11 sensors); autofocus fine-tuning supported
• Live view: Hybrid phase-detection/contrast-detect AF
performed by image sensor; autofocus fine-tuning
supported
• Viewfinder photography 1: −3 – +19 EV
• Live view 2: −5 – +19 EV; −7 – +19 EV with low-light AF
Detection 1 Figures are for ISO 100 at 20 °C/68 °F.
range 2 Still photography using single-servo AF (AF-S) and
apertures of f/1.4 at dark end of range and f/5.6 at
bright end of range; ISO 100; 20 °C/68 °F
• Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); continuous-
servo AF (AF-C); AF mode auto-switch (AF-A, still
photography only); full-time AF (AF-F, movie
Lens servo
recording only); predictive focus tracking activated
automatically according to subject status
• Manual focus (M): Electronic rangefinder can be used
• Viewfinder photography: 51 points with [All points]
selected for Custom Setting a6 [Focus points used],
11 points with [Every other point] selected
• Live view *: 273 points with [All points] selected for
Focus points
Custom Setting a6 [Focus points used], 77 points
with [Every other point] selected
* Still photography, [FX (36×24)] image area, single-
point AF
Technical Notes 847

Autofocus
•
Viewfinder photography: Single-point AF, 9-, 21-, or
51- point dynamic-area AF, 3D-tracking, group-area
AF, auto-area AF
AF-area mode • Live view: Pinpoint AF (still photography only, single-
servo AF/AF-S), single-point AF, dynamic-area AF (still
photography only, continuous-servo AF/AF-C), wide-
area AF (S), wide-area AF (L), auto-area AF
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button
Focus lock
halfway (single-servo AF/AF-S) or by pressing A button
Flash
•
Viewfinder photography: TTL flash control
performed by RGB sensor with approximately 180K
(180,000) pixels
• Live view photography: TTL flash control performed
Flash control by image sensor
• i-TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR available with
matrix, center-weighted, and highlight-weighted
metering; standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital SLR
available with spot metering
Front-curtain sync, red-eye reduction, slow sync, red-
Flash mode
eye reduction with slow sync, rear-curtain sync, off
Flash –3 – +1 EV (choose from step sizes of 1/3 and 1/2 EV)
compensation available in P, S, A, and M modes
848 Technical Notes

Flash
Flash-ready Lights when optional flash unit is fully charged; flashes
indicator after flash is fired at full output
Accessory ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and
shoe safety lock
i-TTL flash control, radio-controlled Advanced Wireless
Nikon Lighting, optical Advanced Wireless Lighting, modeling
Creative illumination, FV lock, Color Information
Lighting Communication, auto FP high-speed sync, AF-assist for
System (CLS) multi-area AF (viewfinder photography), unified flash
control
Sync terminal AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately)
White balance
Auto (3 types), natural light auto, direct sunlight,
cloudy, shade, incandescent, fluorescent (7 types), flash,
choose color temperature (2500 K–10,000 K), preset
White balance manual (up to 6 values can be stored, spot white
balance measurement available during live view
photography), all except choose color temperature
with fine-tuning
Bracketing
Bracketing Exposure and/or flash, white balance, and ADL
Live view
Mode C (photo live view), 1 (movie live view)
Technical Notes 849

Movie
Metering
TTL metering using camera image sensor
system
Metering
Matrix, center-weighted, or highlight-weighted
mode
• 3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 30p (progressive), 25p, 24p
• 1920 × 1080; 120p, 100p, 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, 24p
• 1920 × 1080 (slow-motion); 30p ×4, 25p ×4, 24p ×5
Frame size * Actual frame rates for 120p, 100p, 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p,
(pixels) and and 24p are 119.88, 100, 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25, and
frame rate 23.976 fps respectively
* Quality selection available at all sizes except 3840 ×
2160, 1920 × 1080 120p/100p, and 1920 × 1080 slow-
motion, when quality is fixed at m (high)
File format MOV, MP4
Video
H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding
compression
Audio
recording Linear PCM, AAC
format
Audio
Built-in stereo or external microphone with attenuator
recording
option; sensitivity adjustable
device
850 Technical Notes

Movie
Manual selection (ISO 100 to 51200; choose from step
sizes of 1/3 and 1/2 EV) with additional options available
ISO sensitivity
(Recommended equivalent to approximately 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, 1, or 2 EV (ISO
Exposure 204800 equivalent) above ISO 51200; auto ISO
Index) sensitivity control (ISO 100 to Hi 2) available with
selectable upper limit
Active Can be selected from Same as photo settings, Extra
D-Lighting high, High, Normal, Low, or Off
Time-lapse movie recording, electronic vibration
Other options reduction, time codes, logarithmic (N-Log) and HDR
(HLG) movie output
Monitor
8-cm/3.2-in., approx. 2359k-dot (XGA) tilting TFT touch-
sensitive LCD with 170° viewing angle, approximately
Monitor
100% frame coverage, 11-level manual brightness
adjustment, and color balance control
Technical Notes 851

Playback
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images or
calendar) playback with playback zoom, playback zoom
cropping, movie playback, photo and/or movie slide
Playback
shows, histogram display, highlights, photo
information, location data display, picture rating, auto
image rotation, and index marking
Interface
Type C USB connector (SuperSpeed USB); connection to
USB
built-in USB port is recommended
HDMI output Type C HDMI connector
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5mm diameter; plug-in power
Audio input
supported)
Audio output Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5mm diameter)
Accessory Built-in (can be used with accessories such as the
terminal MC-DC2 remote cord)
852 Technical Notes

Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
• Standards:
- IEEE 802.11b/g/n (Africa, Asia, and Oceania)
- IEEE 802.11b/g/n/a/ac (Europe, U.S.A., Canada, and
Mexico)
- IEEE 802.11b/g/n/a (other countries in the Americas)
• Operating frequency:
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11; Africa, Asia, and
Oceania)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–5825 MHz
(U.S.A., Canada, and Mexico)
Wi-Fi - 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–5805 MHz
(other countries in the Americas)
(Georgia)
(other European countries)
• Maximum output power (EIRP):
- 2.4 GHz band: 2.9 dBm
- 5 GHz band: 5.7 dBm (Georgia)
- 5 GHz band: 8.7 dBm (other countries)
• Authentication: Open system, WPA2-PSK
Technical Notes 853

Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
• Communication protocols: Bluetooth Specification
Version 4.2
• Operating frequency:
- Bluetooth: 2402–2480 MHz
Bluetooth
- Bluetooth Low Energy: 2402–2480 MHz
• Maximum output power (EIRP):
- Bluetooth: –2.6 dBm
- Bluetooth Low Energy: –4.1 dBm
Approximately 10 m (32 ft) *
Range (line of
* Without interference. Range may vary with signal
sight)
strength and presence or absence of obstacles.
Power source
One EN-EL15b rechargeable Li-ion battery *
* EN-EL15a/EN-EL15 batteries can also be used. Note,
however, that fewer pictures may sometimes be
Battery
taken on a single charge with the EN-EL15 than with
an EN-EL15b/EN-EL15a. EH-7P charging AC adapter
can be used to charge EN-EL15b batteries only.
EH-5d/EH-5c/EH-5b AC adapter; requires EP-5B power
AC adapter
connector (available separately)
854 Technical Notes

Tripod socket
Tripod socket 1/4 in. (ISO 1222)
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions
Approx. 143.5 × 115.5 × 76 mm (5.7 × 4.6 × 3 in.)
(W× H × D)
Approx. 840 g (1 lb. 13.7 oz.) with battery and SD
Weight memory card but without body cap; approx. 755 g/1 lb.
10.7 oz. (camera body only)
Operating environment
Temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Humidity 85% or less (no condensation)
• Unless otherwise stated, all measurements are performed in conformity
with Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standards or
guidelines.
• All figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery.
• The sample images displayed on the camera and the images and
illustrations in the manuals are for expository purposes only.
the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and
without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may
result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
Technical Notes 855

❚❚ MH-25a Battery Charger
Rated input AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.23–0.12 A
Rated output DC 8.4 V/1.2 A
Supported
EN-EL15b rechargeable Li-ion batteries
batteries
Approx. 2 hours and 35 minutes
* Time required to charge battery at an ambient
Charging time
temperature of 25 °C (77 °F) when no charge
remains
Operating
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
temperature
Dimensions Approx. 95 × 33.5 × 71 mm (3.7 × 1.3 × 2.8 in.),
(W× H × D) excluding projections
Length of
Approx. 1.5 m (4.9 ft), if supplied
power cable
Approx. 115 g (4.1 oz), excluding supplied power
Weight
connector (power cable or AC wall adapter)
The symbols on this product represent the following:
m AC, p DC, q Class II equipment (the construction of the product is
double-insulated)
856 Technical Notes

❚❚ EN-EL15b Rechargeable Li-ion Battery:
Type Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated capacity 7.0 V/1900 mAh
Operating
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
temperature
Dimensions
Approx. 40 × 56 × 20.5 mm (1.6 × 2.2 × 0.8 in.)
(W× H × D)
Weight Approx. 80 g (2.9 oz), excluding terminal cover
Technical Notes 857

D Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other
data storage devices does not completely erase the original image data.
Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices
using commercially available software, potentially resulting in the
malicious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is
the user’s responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to
another person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or
format the device and then completely refill it with images containing no
private information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Care should be
taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices.
Before discarding the camera or transferring ownership to another
person, you should also use the [Reset all settings] item in the camera
setup menu to delete network settings and other personal information.
858 Technical Notes

D Supported Standards
• DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF) is a
standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure
compatibility among different makes of camera.
• Exif version 2.31: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File
Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.31, a standard introduced
with the goal of improving the interoperability of printers and digital
cameras, making it easier to produce high-quality prints. Information
stored with photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when
the images are output on Exif-compliant printers. See the printer
manual for details.
• HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for
multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices.
This standard ensures that audiovisual data and control signals can be
transmitted to HDMI-compliant devices via a single cable connection.
Technical Notes 859

Approved Memory Cards
• The camera can be used with SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory
cards.
• UHS-I and UHS-II are supported.
• Cards rated UHS Speed Class 3 or better are
recommended for movie recording and playback. Slower
speeds may result in recording or playback being interrupted.
• When choosing cards for use in card readers, be sure they are
compatible with the device.
• Contact the manufacturer for information on features,
operation, and limitations on use.
860 Technical Notes

Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures
that can be stored on a 32 GB 1 card at different image area,
image quality, and image size settings. Actual capacity varies
with shooting conditions and the type of card.
Technical Notes 861

[FX (36 × 24)] Selected for Image Area
The following table shows the memory card and buffer capacity
when [FX (36 × 24)] is selected for [Image area] > [Choose
image area] in the photo shooting menu.
• This category also includes images taken with non-DX lenses
when [On] is selected for [Image area] > [Auto DX crop].
Number of
Buffer
Image quality Image size File size exposures
capacity 2, 3
remaining 2
NEF (RAW),
Lossless Approx.
— 1400 frames 100 frames
compressed, 21.7 MB
12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Lossless Approx.
compressed, 27.7 MB
14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Approx.
Compressed, — 1800 frames 100 frames
19.4 MB
12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Approx.
24.1 MB
14-bit
862 Technical Notes

Number of
Buffer
capacity 2, 3
remaining 2
Approx.
Large 3600 frames 100 frames
9.8 MB
Approx.
JPEG fine 4 Medium 6000 frames 100 frames
6.7 MB
Approx.
Small 11,200 frames 100 frames
4.1 MB
Approx.
6.6 MB
Approx.
JPEG normal 4 Medium 11,700 frames 100 frames
4.0 MB
Approx.
2.2 MB
Approx.
Large 13,700 frames 100 frames
2.3 MB
Approx.
JPEG basic 4 Medium 21,900 frames 100 frames
1.7 MB
Approx.
1.2 MB
Technical Notes 863

[DX (24 × 16)] Selected for Image Area
The following table shows the memory card and buffer capacity
when [DX (24 × 16)] is selected for [Image area] > [Choose
image area] in the photo shooting menu.
• This category also includes images taken with DX lenses when
[On] is selected for [Image area] > [Auto DX crop].
Number of
Buffer
capacity 2, 3
remaining 2
NEF (RAW),
Lossless Approx.
compressed, 9.9 MB
12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Lossless Approx.
compressed, 12.5 MB
14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Approx.
8.8 MB
12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Approx.
10.8 MB
14-bit
864 Technical Notes

Number of
Buffer
capacity 2, 3
remaining 2
Approx.
4.8 MB
Approx.
JPEG fine 4 Medium 11,700 frames 100 frames
3.5 MB
Approx.
2.4 MB
Approx.
3.2 MB
Approx.
JPEG normal 4 Medium 21,900 frames 100 frames
2.1 MB
Approx.
1.3 MB
Approx.
1.2 MB
Approx.
JPEG basic 4 Medium 40,100 frames 100 frames
1.0 MB
Approx.
0.7 MB
Technical Notes 865

1 Figures are for a 32 GB SanDisk SD UHS-II memory card (SDSDXPK-
032G-JNJIP – 32GB, measured in September 2019).
2 Number of pictures that can be saved to memory card or stored in
memory buffer varies with scene recorded.
3 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer
at ISO 100. May drop in some situations, including when:
• An optimal-compression (m) JPEG option is selected for [Image
quality]
• [On] is selected for [Auto distortion control]
4 Figures assume a size-priority option (an option not marked with m) is
selected for [Image quality]. Selecting an optimal-compression
option (m) increases file size; the number of images and buffer
capacity drop accordingly.
D Maximum Number of Photos per Burst

The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst
can be set to any amount between 1 and 100 using Custom Setting d2
[Max. continuous release].
866 Technical Notes

Battery Endurance
The movie footage or number of shots that can be recorded
with a fully-charged EN-EL15b (1900 mAh) rechargeable Li-ion
battery is given below. 1 Actual endurance varies with such
factors as the condition of the battery, the interval between
shots, and the options selected in the camera menus.
• Photographs, single-frame release mode: Approximately 2260
(CIPA standard 2)
• Photographs, continuous release modes: Approximately 4570
(Nikon standard 3)
• Movies: Approximately 95 minutes 4
Actions such as the following can reduce battery endurance:

• Using the monitor, for example for live view photography
• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway
• Repeated autofocus operations
• Taking NEF (RAW) photographs
• Slow shutter speeds
• Using camera Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) and Bluetooth features
• Using the camera with optional accessories connected
• Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses
• Repeatedly zooming in and out with an AF-P lens
• Taking pictures at low ambient temperatures
Technical Notes 867

To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon
EN-EL15b batteries:
• Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce
battery performance.
• Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose
their charge if left unused.
1 EN-EL15a/EN-EL15 batteries can also be used. Note, however, that
fewer pictures may sometimes be taken on a single charge with the
EN-EL15 than with an EN-EL15b/EN-EL15a.
2 Lens cycled from infinity to minimum range and one photograph
taken at default settings once every 30 s. Live view not used.
Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S NIKKOR 24–
120mm f/4G ED VR lens. Figures are for a 32 GB SanDisk SD UHS-II
memory card (SDSDXPK-032G-JNJIP – 32GB, measured in September
2019).
3 Image quality set to JPEG normal, image size set to large, shutter
speed 1/250 s, focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three times
after shutter-release button has been pressed halfway for 3 s; six shots
are then taken in succession and monitor turned on for 5 s and then
turned off; no operations performed until stand-by timer has expired.
The cycle is then repeated. Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F)
with an AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8E FL ED VR lens (VR off). Figures
are for a 32 GB SanDisk SD UHS-II memory card (SDSDXPK-032G-JNJIP
– 32GB, measured in September 2019).
868 Technical Notes

4 Actual battery endurance as measured under conditions specified by
the Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA). Measured at
23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR
lens. Figures are for a 32 GB SanDisk SD UHS-II memory card
(SDSDXPK-032G-JNJIP – 32GB, measured in September 2019).
Measurement performed at default settings.
• Each shot can be up to 29 minutes 59 seconds in length.
• Each shot can be up to 4 GB in size.
• If camera temperature rises, recording may end before maximum
length or size is reached.
Technical Notes 869

Trademarks and Licenses
• The SD, SDHC, and SDXC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
• Windows is either a registered trademark or a trademark of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
• Apple®, App Store®, the Apple logos, iPhone®, iPad®, iPod
touch®, Mac, macOS, and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc.
registered in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• Android, Google Play and the Google Play logo are trademarks
of Google LLC. The Android robot is reproduced or modified
from work created and shared by Google and used according
to terms described in the Creative Commons 3.0 Attribution
License.
• IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco Systems,
Inc., in the United States and/or other countries and is used
under license.
• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing, LLC.
870 Technical Notes

• The Bluetooth® word mark and logo are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by
Nikon is under license.
• Wi-Fi and the Wi-Fi logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
• All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other
documentation provided with your Nikon product are
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
holders.
Use of the Made for Apple badge means that an accessory has been
designed to connect specifically to the Apple products identified in the
badge, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this
device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please
note that the use of this accessory with an Apple product may affect
wireless performance.
D FreeType License (FreeType2)

Portions of this software are copyright © 2012 The FreeType Project
(https://www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
D MIT License (HarfBuzz)

Portions of this software are copyright © 2018 The HarfBuzz Project
(https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz). All rights
reserved.
Technical Notes 871

D Unicode® Character Database License (Unicode® Character
Database)
The software for this product uses the Unicode® Character Database
License open-source software. The terms of the software license are as
follows:
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright © 1991-2019 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved.
Distributed under the Terms of Use in
https://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
copy of the Unicode data files and any associated documentation (the
"Data Files") or Unicode software and any associated documentation (the
"Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do so,
provided that either
(i) this copyright and permission notice appear with all copies of the
Data Files or Software, or
(ii) this copyright and permission notice appear in associated
Documentation.
872 Technical Notes

THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN
THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER
RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE
OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall
not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written
authorization of the copyright holder.
D AVC Patent Portfolio License

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD ("AVC VIDEO") AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO
THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL
ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC
VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
https://www.mpegla.com
Technical Notes 873

Kit Lens Manual
Kit Lenses
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR Lens
Manual
This section is included as a lens manual for purchasers of the
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR lens kit.
• Note that lens kits may not be available in some countries or
regions.
874 AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR Lens Manual

❚❚ Parts of the Lens
The parts of the AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR are listed
below.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14
15
16
1 Lens hood (0 882) 9 Focus distance mark

2 Lens hood alignment mark 10 Focus ring (0 162)
(0 882) 11 Lens mounting mark (0 25)
3 Lens hood lock mark (0 882) 12 Rubber lens-mount gasket
4 Lens hood mounting mark 13 CPU contacts (0 791)
(0 882)
14 Focus-mode switch (0 162)
5 Zoom ring
15 Vibration reduction switch
6 Focal length scale
(0 880)
7 Focal length mark 16 Vibration reduction mode
8 Focus distance indicator switch
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR Lens Manual 875

❚❚ Focus
Supported focus modes are shown in the following table.
Camera focus Lens focus mode
mode M/A M
Autofocus with manual
Manual focus with
AF (A/S/C) override (manual
electronic rangefinder
priority)
MF Manual focus with electronic rangefinder
For information on camera focus modes, see the camera
manual.
M/A (Autofocus with Manual Override)
1 Slide the lens focus-mode switch to M/A.

2 If desired, autofocus can be over-ridden by
rotating the lens focus ring while the shutter-
release button is pressed halfway or the AF-ON
button is pressed.
3 To refocus using autofocus, press the shutter-

release button halfway or press the AF-ON button
again.

❚❚ Zoom and Depth of Field
Before focusing, rotate the zoom ring to adjust the focal length
and frame the photograph. If the camera offers depth-of-field
preview (stop down), depth of field can be previewed in the
viewfinder.
• The lens uses Nikon’s Internal Focusing (IF) system. Focal
length decreases as the focus distance shortens.
• The focus distance indicator is intended only as a guide and
may not accurately show the distance to the subject. In
addition, the focus distance indicator may, due to depth of
field or other factors, not show ∞ when the camera is focused
on a distant object.
❚❚ Aperture
Aperture is adjusted using camera controls.

❚❚ Using the Lens on Cameras with a Built-in Flash
When using the camera’s built-in flash:
• Be sure the subject is at a range of at least 0.6 m (2 ft).
• Remove lens hoods to prevent them casting shadows in
pictures taken with the flash.
* If the flash is partially obscured by the lens hood or the tip of the lens,
shadows will appear on subjects close to the camera.
1 Shadow
2 Shadow

• When the lens is mounted on the following cameras, the built-
in flash may be unable to light the entire subject at ranges less
than those given below:
Zoom position/minimum
Digital SLR camera
distance without shadows
D750 (FX format)/ • 24 mm/2.0 m (6 ft 7 in.)
D610 (FX format)/ • 28 mm/1.0 m (3 ft 4 in.)
D600 (FX format) • 50 mm and up/no shadows
D810 series (FX format)/ • 28 mm/1.0 m (3 ft 4 in.)
D800 series (FX format) • 35 mm and up/no shadows
• 24 mm/3.0 m (9 ft 11 in.)
D700 (FX format)
• 35 mm and up/no shadows
• 24 mm/1.0 m (3 ft 4 in.)
D300 series/D200/D100
• 24 mm/1.5 m (5 ft)
D90/D80/D70 series/D50
D5600/D5500/D5300/D5200/ • 24 mm/1.5 m (5 ft)
D5100/D3300/D3200 • 28 mm and up/no shadows
D5000/D3100/D3000/D60/ • 24 mm/2.5 m (8 ft 3 in.)
D40 series • 35 mm and up/no shadows
• 24 mm/1.5 m (5 ft)
D3400 • 28 mm/1.0 m (3 ft 4 in.)

❚❚ Vibration Reduction (VR)
Using the Vibration Reduction Switch
ON: Enable vibration reduction. Vibration reduction is activated
when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, reducing
the effects of camera shake for improved framing and focus.
OFF: Vibration reduction off.
Using the Vibration Reduction Mode Switch

The option selected with the vibration reduction mode switch
takes effect when the vibration reduction switch is in the ON
position.
NORMAL: Compensate chiefly for normal forms of vibration.
Vibration reduction also applies when the camera is panned.
ACTIVE: Reduce the effects of vibration when shooting from a
moving vehicle, and in other situations with active camera
motion. The camera does not detect panning motion.

D Using Vibration Reduction: Notes
• When using vibration reduction, press the shutter-release button
halfway and wait for the image in the viewfinder to stabilize before
pressing the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.
• When vibration reduction is active, the image in the viewfinder may
jiggle after the shutter is released, but this does not indicate a
malfunction.
• Slide the vibration reduction mode switch to NORMAL for panning
shots. In NORMAL mode, vibration reduction applies only to motion
that is not part of a pan. If the camera is panned horizontally, for
example, vibration reduction will be applied only to vertical shake.
• Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration reduction
is in effect. If power to the lens is cut while vibration reduction is on, the
lens may rattle when shaken, but this does not indicate a malfunction.
The rattling will end when the lens is reattached and the camera turned
on.
• If the camera is equipped with a built-in flash, vibration reduction will
be disabled while the flash charges.
• In the case of cameras equipped with an AF-ON button, vibration
reduction will not be performed when the button is pressed.
• Select OFF when the camera is mounted on a tripod. Note, however,
that ON is recommended if the tripod head is unsecured or the camera
is mounted on a monopod.

❚❚ The Lens Hood
The lens hood protects the lens and blocks stray light that
would otherwise cause flare or ghosting.
Attaching the Hood
• Confirm that the lens hood mounting mark (I) is aligned with
the lens hood lock mark (—K) as shown in the illustration (e).
• When attaching or removing the hood, avoid gripping it too
tightly. When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the
hood alignment mark ( ).
• Vignetting may occur if the hood is not correctly attached.
• The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not
in use.

❚❚ Supplied Accessories
• LC-77 Lens Cap (front cap)
• LF-4 Lens Cap (rear cap) *
• HB-53 Lens Hood
• CL-1218 Flexible Lens Pouch
* A different cap may be supplied with lens kits.
❚❚ Compatible Accessories
• 77 mm screw-on filters

❚❚ Specifications
Type Type G AF-S lens with built-in CPU and F mount
Focal length 24–120 mm
Maximum
f/4
aperture
17 elements in 13 groups (including 2 ED lens
Lens construction elements, 3 aspherical lens elements, and lens
elements with Nano Crystal Coat)
84° – 20° 20´ (Nikon FX-format D-SLR cameras)
Angle of view
61° – 13° 20´ (Nikon DX-format D-SLR cameras)
Focal length scale Graduated in millimeters (24, 28, 35, 50, 70, 85, 120)
Distance
Output to camera
information
Zoom Manual zoom using independent zoom ring
Nikon Internal Focusing (IF) System with autofocus
Focusing controlled by Silent Wave Motor and separate
focus ring for manual focus
Vibration
Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)
reduction
Focus distance
0.45 m to infinity ( ∞ )
indicator
Minimum focus 0.45 m (1.48 ft) from focal plane at all zoom
distance positions

Diaphragm blades 9 (rounded diaphragm opening)
Diaphragm Fully automatic
Aperture range f/4–22
Metering system Full aperture
Filter-attachment
77 mm (P = 0.75 mm)
size
Approx. 84 mm maximum diameter × 103.5 mm
Dimensions
(distance from camera lens mount flange)
Weight Approx. 710 g (1 lb 9.1 oz)
the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and
without prior notice.
• Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any
mistakes that this manual may contain.

D Lens Care
• Keep the CPU contacts clean.
• Should the rubber lens-mount gasket be damaged, cease use
immediately and take the lens to a Nikon-authorized service center for
repair.
• Use a blower to remove dust and lint from the lens surfaces. To remove
smudges and fingerprints, apply a small amount of ethanol or lens
cleaner to a soft, clean cotton cloth or lens-cleaning tissue and clean
from the center outwards using a circular motion, taking care not to
leave smears or touch the glass with your fingers.
• Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzine to clean the
lens.
• Neutral Color (NC) filters can be used to protect the front lens element.
The lens hood can also be used.
• Attach the lens caps before placing the lens in its case.
• When a lens hood is attached, do not pick up or hold the lens or camera
using only the hood.
• If the lens will not be used for an extended period, store it in a cool, dry
location to prevent mold and rust. Do not store in direct sunlight or with
naphtha or camphor moth balls.
• Keep the lens dry; rusting of the internal mechanism could damage the
lens.
• Do not leave the lens near heaters or in other hot locations. Extreme
heat could damage or warp parts made from reinforced plastic.

Index
Symbols h (Auto-area AF) 79, 81, 147, 151,
155
b (Auto mode) ...........................................36 L (Matrix metering) . 100, 166, 603
P (Programmed auto) ....................... 109 M (Center-weighted metering)100,
S (Shutter-priority auto) ................. 110 166
A (Aperture-priority auto) ............. 111 N (Spot metering) ...................100, 167
M (Manual) ................................................... 113 t (Highlight-weighted metering)
EFCT (Special effects) ........................... 119 100, 167
U1/U2................................................................... 115 d (Help) ............................................................ 62
j (Night vision)...................................... 119 R button .................................... 68, 69, 474
f (Super vivid) ........................................ 119 A AE-L/AF-L button .............................. 82
d (Pop) .......................................................... 119 Q/g (U) button .................................. 86
e (Photo illustration) ........... 119, 122 E button .......................................................... 94
k (Toy camera effect)........... 120, 123 X (T) button .......................... 95, 376
l (Miniature effect) ............. 120, 124 W (Y) button....................99, 282, 376
m (Selective color)................... 120, 126 N (Y) button ...............................101, 103
8 (Silhouette) .......................................... 120 i button................................................ 63, 361
9 (High key) .............................................. 120 i menu .................................................. 63, 347
! (Low key) ................................................ 120 t (Memory buffer) ............................... 181
S (Single frame) ............................. 73, 179 D switch ........................................................ 642
CL (Continuous low speed) 73, 179
CH (Continuous high speed) ....... 74,
Numerics
179
1 : 1 (24 × 24) ............................................. 130
Q (Quiet shutter-release) ..... 74, 180
16 : 9 (36 × 20).......................................... 130
QC (Quiet continuous shutter-
3D-tracking ........................................ 79, 146
release) .............................................. 74, 180
3D-tracking face-detection ........ 592
E (Self-timer) .......................74, 180, 183
MUP ...............................................74, 180, 185 A
3 (Pinpoint AF) ............................ 80, 150
d (Single-point AF)........ 78, 80, 145 AC adapter ......................................808, 814
f (Wide-area AF (S)) ............. 80, 150 Access-point mode ................. 431, 433
g (Wide-area AF (L)).............. 80, 150 Active D-Lighting ................................. 254
e (Dynamic-area AF) ... 78, 80, 145 ADL bracketing ....................................... 238
T (3D-tracking) ........................... 79, 146
N (Group-area AF) ................... 79, 146
Index 887
ADL bracketing (Auto bracketing Auto-area AF face/eye detection ....
set) .................................................................. 238 593
AE & flash bracketing ........................ 226 Autofocus mode ........................... 77, 140
AE bracketing ........................................... 226
AE lock .................................................... 83, 173 B
AE-L indicator..................................... 84, 173
AF activation.............................................. 597 Backup (Role played by card in Slot
AF fine-tuning options .................... 663 2) ....................................................................... 279
AF mode auto-switch . 77, 140, 142 Battery........................................................ 22, 24
AF speed ........................................................ 650 Battery charger........................................... 22
AF tracking sensitivity ...................... 652 Battery info.................................................. 701
AF-A.............................................. 77, 140, 142 Beep options ............................................. 684
AF-area mode ..................................78, 145 BKT button .. 104, 226, 232, 238, 295
AF-C .............................................. 77, 140, 142 Black-and-white (Monochrome)......
AF-C priority selection ..................... 590 733
AF-F ........................................................... 77, 143 Bluetooth ...................................................... 415
AF-mode button .............. 76, 144, 154 Bracketing ........................... 226, 232, 238
AF-ON button .................................................. 82 Bracketing order .................................... 622
AF-S .............................................. 77, 140, 142 Brightness .................................................... 247
AF-S priority selection ...................... 591 Bulb..................................................................... 170
After delete ................................................. 539 Bulb photography................................ 170
Airplane mode ......................................... 691
All (Delete) ................................................... 388
C
Angle of view ............................................ 789 Calendar playback ............................... 355
Aperture................................ 111, 113, 638 Center-weighted ................................... 166
Aperture-priority auto ..................... 111 Center-weighted area ...................... 603
Assign remote (WR) Fn button 691 Center-weighted metering ........100,
Attaching a lens ........................................ 25 166
Attenuator ................................................... 582 Charging AC adapter ........................ 816
Auto (Set Picture Control) ............ 243 Choose color temp. (White
Auto (White balance) ............... 88, 195 balance) ............................................89, 197
Auto bracketing ............ 104, 224, 567 Choose image area ............................. 551
Auto bracketing set ............................ 224 Choose start/end point ................... 271
Auto c ISO Sensitivity Control . 621 CL mode shooting speed .............. 607
Auto distortion control ................... 560 Clarity................................................................ 247
Auto DX crop............................................. 133 Clean image sensor ............... 673, 823
Auto ISO sensitivity control93, 190 Cloudy (White balance) .........88, 196
Auto send ..................................................... 449 Color space ................................................. 554
Auto-area AF .............. 79, 81, 147, 151
888 Index
Color temperature................... 204, 206 E
Compatible lenses ............................... 786
Conformity marking .......................... 700 Easy connect ............................................. 440
Connect to PC .......................................... 696 Easy exposure compensation .. 602
Connect to smart device ..409, 416, Edit movie ........................................271, 277
422, 429, 692 Effect level ................................................... 247
Continuous AF....................77, 140, 142 Electronic front-curtain shutter609
Continuous high speed......... 74, 179 Electronic rangefinder ..................... 164
Continuous low speed ........... 73, 179 Electronic VR ............................................. 580
Continuous release mode ........... 178 Encryption key............................. 433, 442
Contrast ......................................................... 247 EV steps for exposure cntrl ......... 601
Copy image(s) .......................................... 532 Exposure comp. for flash .............. 620
Copyright ..................................................... 682 Exposure compensation ...... 94, 175
CPU lens ............................................. 786, 791 Exposure delay mode....................... 608
Creative Picture Control ................ 244 Exposure indicator .............................. 114
Custom controls ........................ 628, 645 Exposure preview (Lv) ..................... 614
Custom Settings .................................... 586 Extended shutter speeds (M).... 610
Customize command dials ......... 637 External microphone ............... 49, 812
Customize i menu . 347, 623, 626, Eye-detection AF................................... 155
643
Cyanotype (Monochrome).......... 733 F
D Face detection ......................................... 155
File information ...................................... 367
Delete..........................................56, 383, 530 File naming .....................................550, 572
Depth of field ............................... 111, 112 File number sequence ..................... 611
Destination ................................................. 572 Fill flash...............................................102, 465
Detaching lenses ......................................26 Filter effects................................................ 247
Diffraction compensation559, 578 Fine-tune optimal exposure ...... 604
Diopter adjustment control ...........11 Firmware version .................................. 708
Direct connection to PC................. 433 Flash................................................................... 460
Direct sunlight (White balance) 88, Flash (White balance) .............. 89, 197
196 Flash bracketing .................................... 226
Distortion control ................................. 730 Flash compensation .......................... 469
D-Lighting ................................................... 726 Flash control ..................................463, 563
DX (24 × 16) ................................... 130, 133 Flash info...........................................474, 507
DX format ..................................................... 130 Flash mode .....................................101, 465
DX-based movie format ................ 263 Flash off ..............................................102, 467
Dynamic-area AF.... 78, 80, 145, 151 Flash shutter speed ............................ 620
Index 889
Flash sync speed.................................... 618 HDMI.................................................................. 396
Flash-ready indicator ........................ 849 HDR (high dynamic range) .......... 256
Flat (Set Picture Control) ............... 244 Headphone volume ........................... 583
Flexible program ................................... 109 Hi (Sensitivity)........................................... 189
Flicker reduction....................... 561, 579 High Dynamic Range (HDR) ....... 256
Fluorescent (White balance) ........ 89, High ISO NR ................................... 557, 578
196 High key (Special effect) ................ 120
Fn button ....................................................... 106 Highlight display ...................... 368, 653
Focal plane mark ................................... 165 Highlight-weighted metering.100,
Focus lock........................................................ 83 167
Focus mode ................................... 139, 162 Histogram............................................... 69, 70
Focus point .................................... 145, 159 Hue ...................................................................... 247
Focus point options ........................... 598
Focus point wrap-around............. 597 I
Focus points used ................................ 594
Focus ring ........................................ 162, 875 Image area ...................................... 129, 262
Focus shift shooting........................... 328 Image comment .................................... 681
Focus tracking with lock-on ....... 592 Image Dust Off ref photo .............. 675
Focus-mode selector............ 139, 162 Image overlay ........................................... 734
Format memory card ........................ 656 Image quality ................................... 95, 134
Frame rate .................................................... 264 Image review................................ 357, 538
Frame size/frame rate ...................... 264 Image size ...........................................97, 137
Framing grid display.......................... 615 Incandescent (White balance) ... 88,
Frequency response .......................... 582 196
FTP server ..................................................... 454 Information display ............................ 662
Full-frame playback ............................ 353 Infrastructure mode .............. 432, 439
Full-time AF ....................................... 77, 143 Interval timer shooting ................... 569
FV lock.............................................................. 471 IP address...................................................... 443
FX (36 × 24) ................................................. 130 S (Q) button.................. 91, 93, 656
FX format ...................................................... 130 ISO sensitivity ..................... 91, 187, 190
FX-based movie format .................. 263 ISO sensitivity settings ........ 553, 575
G L
Group-area AF................................. 79, 146 L (large) ..................................................97, 137
L (Preset manual) .................................. 209
H Landscape (Set Picture Control).......
244
H.264 ................................................................. 850 Language ...................................................... 657
890 Index
LCD illumination ................................... 616 Monitor brightness ............................. 658
Live view in continuous mode 616 Monitor color balance ..................... 659
Live view selector ........................... 40, 45 Monitor off delay .................................. 606
Lo (Sensitivity) ......................................... 189 Monochrome ............................................ 733
Location data................................ 373, 687 Monochrome (Set Picture Control)
Lock mirror up for cleaning ........ 827 244
Long exposure NR ............................... 556 Movie file type ......................................... 574
Long time-exposures ....................... 170 Movie quality ................................264, 574
Low key (Special effect).................. 120 Movie shooting menu ..................... 571
Low-light AF .............................................. 599 Movies ........................................... 45, 53, 271
Low-pass filter ......................................... 823 Multiple exposure ................................ 569
My Menu ....................................................... 744
M
N
M (Manual focus) .................................. 162
M (medium) ...................................... 97, 137 Natural light auto (White balance)
MAC address ............................................. 699 88, 196
Manage Picture Control ................. 250 NEF (RAW) processing ..................... 713
Manual (Shooting mode) ............. 113 NEF (RAW) recording ........................ 552
Manual focus ............................................ 162 Negative digitizer ................................. 343
Manual focus ring in AF mode 600 Network settings.......... 433, 439, 696
Matrix metering ............ 100, 166, 603 Neutral (Set Picture Control) ..... 243
Max. continuous release................ 607 Night vision (Special effect) ....... 119
Maximum aperture................. 349, 788 Non-CPU lens .................. 349, 792, 795
Maximum sensitivity ......................... 191 Non-CPU lens data ..... 349, 351, 672
Memory card capacity ..................... 861
G button.....................................................57 O
Metering ............................................... 99, 166
Microphone sensitivity ................... 581 OK button..................................................... 635
Mid-range sharpening .................... 247 Optical VR..................................................... 617
Miniature effect (Special effect) ....... Overflow (Role played by card in
120, 124 Slot 2) ........................................................... 279
Minimum aperture .............................. 108 Overview data.......................................... 374
Minimum shutter speed ................ 192
Mired................................................................. 203
P
Mirror up mode .................74, 180, 185 Pairing.............................................................. 692
Mode dial................................................ 36, 71 Peaking highlights .............................. 615
Mode dial lock release .........................72 Perspective control............................. 732
Modeling flash ........................................ 621
Index 891
Photo illustration (Special effect) ... R
119, 122
Photo information .................. 366, 371 Rating .................................................. 380, 543
Photo shooting menu ...................... 544 RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2 (Role
Picture Controls...................................... 243 played by card in Slot 2) ............ 279
Picture size .................................................. 789 Rear-curtain sync...................... 102, 467
PIN-entry WPS .......................................... 440 Recent settings........................... 744, 750
Pinpoint AF ........................................ 80, 150 Red-eye correction .............................. 728
Pitching .......................................................... 661 Red-eye reduction .................. 102, 465
Pixel mapping .......................................... 679 Release button to use dial............ 641
Playback .......................................51, 53, 353 Release mode ..................................73, 178
Playback display options............... 531 Release mode dial ................................... 73
Playback folder........................................ 530 Release mode dial lock release .. 73
Playback menu ........................................ 529 Remote flash photography ......... 477
Playback zoom ........................................ 376 Remote photography ....................... 404
Pop (Special effect) ............................. 119 Reset .................................................................. 282
Portrait (Set Picture Control) ..... 244 Reset all settings .................................... 708
Power connector ...................... 808, 814 Reset custom settings ...................... 590
Predictive focus tracking............... 141 Reset movie shooting menu ..... 572
Preset manual (White balance) . 89, Reset photo shooting menu ...... 545
197, 209 Reset user settings ............................... 118
Press the shutter-release button all Resize ................................................................ 720
the way down ......................................... 38 Retouch menu ......................................... 709
Programmed auto ............................... 109 Reverse indicators ................................ 642
Protect ............................................................. 378 RGB histogram ......................................... 369
Push-button WPS.................................. 440 Role played by card in Slot 2 ..... 279
Pv button .......................................... 105, 112 Rotate tall ..................................................... 540
Q S
Quick crop....................................... 362, 377 S (small) .................................................97, 137
Quick retouch ........................................... 727 Saturation ..................................................... 247
Quick sharp ................................................. 247 Save original (EFFECTS) .................. 613
Quiet continuous shutter-release .. Save user settings................................. 115
74, 180 Save/load menu settings .............. 703
Quiet shutter-release ............... 74, 180 SD memory card ........................... 27, 860
Search for Wi-Fi network ............... 440
Select date (Delete) ............................ 387
Select to send (Bluetooth) ........... 693
892 Index
Select to send/deselect .................. 381 T
Select to send/deselect (PC) ...... 448
Selected (Delete)................................... 386 Thumbnail playback .......................... 354
Selective color (Special effect) 120, Time photography .............................. 170
126 Time zone and date ........................... 658
Self-timer .......................................... 183, 606 Timecode ...................................................... 584
Send while off .......................................... 695 Time-lapse movie ................................. 315
Sepia (Monochrome) ........................ 733 Timer ................................................................. 183
Setup menu ............................................... 654 Toning ............................................................. 247
Shade (White balance) ........... 88, 196 Touch controls ............................ 358, 686
Sharpening ................................................. 247 Touch screen................................................ 14
Shutter speed ............................... 110, 113 Toy camera effect (Special effect) ..
Shutter-priority auto ......................... 110 120, 123
Shutter-release button AE-L ...... 605 Trim .................................................................... 719
Silent live view photography ... 340 Trimming movies ................................. 743
Silhouette (Special effect) ............ 120 Two-button reset.................................. 282
Single AF ..................................77, 140, 142 Type D lens ................................................. 791
Single frame............................................... 178 Type E lens .................................................. 791
Single-point AF ........ 78, 80, 145, 150 Type G lens ................................................. 791
Slide show ................................................... 540
Slot empty release lock .................. 702 U
Slow sync .......................................... 102, 466
Slow-motion movie............................ 266 USB cable ............................................................. ii
SnapBridge ................................................. 403 User settings.............................................. 115
Specifying the focal length......... 349
Spot metering.............................. 100, 167 V
Spot white balance ............................. 216
Viewfinder eyepiece cap .................. 10
SSID ........................................................ 433, 441
Viewfinder mask display................ 133
Standard (Set Picture Control) 243
Vignette Control .................................... 558
Standby timer ................................. 39, 605
Virtual horizon ....................... 69, 70, 661
Storage folder .......................................... 545
Vivid (Set Picture Control)............ 243
Store points by orientation ........ 595
Straighten .................................................... 729 W
Subject tracking AF ............................ 158
Super vivid (Special effect).......... 119 WB bracketing ......................................... 232
Sync. release mode options ....... 608 White balance ................................. 86, 195
Wide-area AF (L)............................ 80, 150
Wide-area AF (S) ........................... 80, 150
Index 893
Wi-Fi connection .......... 625, 694, 696
Wi-Fi mode .................................................. 406
Wind noise reduction ....................... 583
Wireless remote (WR) options.. 688
Wireless transmitter ........................... 430
Wireless transmitter (WT-7) ........ 700
Wireless Transmitter Utility......... 430
WR-R10............................................... 479, 688
WT-7...................................................... 453, 810
894 Index
895
896
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part (except
for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be made without
written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
SB0A01(11)
6MB45911-01

D780RM (En)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

D780RM (En)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

D780RM (En)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DIGITAL CAMERA

• Read this manual thoroughly before using the camera.

• Memory cards are sold separately.

D780 Model Name: N1722

0 This icon marks references to other sections in this manual.

A For Your Safety

A DANGER: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon

Getting to Know the Camera 1

2 Getting to Know the Camera

Getting to Know the Camera 3

4 Getting to Know the Camera

Getting to Know the Camera 5

D Tilting the Monitor

6 Getting to Know the Camera

D The LCD Illuminator

Getting to Know the Camera 7

D Camera Off Display

8 Getting to Know the Camera

Getting to Know the Camera 9

D Cover the Viewfinder

10 Getting to Know the Camera

Viewfinder not in focus Viewfinder in focus

Getting to Know the Camera 11

12 Getting to Know the Camera

Getting to Know the Camera 13

• Touch controls can be used to:

• Touch AF settings can be adjusted by

14 Getting to Know the Camera

• Tap Z or press J to select the chosen

Getting to Know the Camera 15

• In full-frame playback, touching the

• To zoom in on a picture displayed in

16 Getting to Know the Camera

Getting to Know the Camera 17

• Tap items to view options.

• To position the cursor, tap e or f or tap directly in the text

18 Getting to Know the Camera

• Tap a menu icon to choose a menu.

• Tap menu items to display options.

• To exit without changing settings, tap

Getting to Know the Camera 19

A Enabling or Disabling Touch Controls

20 Getting to Know the Camera

• An exhausted battery will fully charge in about two hours and

Battery charging (flashes) Charging complete (steady)

D If the CHARGE Lamp Flashes Rapidly

❚❚ Removing the Battery

• Remove the lens cap before taking pictures.

D CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings

• Holding the memory card in the orientation shown, slide it

❚❚ Removing Memory Cards

D No Memory Card Inserted

1 Turn the camera on.

Use the multi selector and J button

Press 1 and 3 to highlight a language and press J to

Select time zone Select date format

Control panel Viewfinder Description

• The control panel shows the slot or

Framing Photographs in the Viewfinder